En SM DX210W K1017314a 1005

Doosan Infracore
DX210W
Serial Number 5766 and Up
Shop
Manual
K1017314AE-1
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are
known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth
defects and other reproductive harm.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
05-2010
DX210W
Shop Manual
K1017314AE-1
DOOSAN reserves the right to improve our products in a continuing process to provide the best possible
product to the marketplace. These improvements can be implemented at any time with no obligation to
change materials on previously sold products. It is recommended that consumers periodically contact their
distributors for recent documentation on purchased equipment.
This documentation may include attachments and optional equipment that is not available in your
machine's package. Please call your distributor for additional items that you may require.
Illustrations used throughout this manual are used only as a representation of the actual piece of
equipment, and may vary from the actual item.
K1017314AE-1 Shop Manual Copyright 2010 Doosan

Pub.No. K1017314AE-1
DX210W
Product Label
Instructions
Trim Out The Label Along

The Lines And Insert Into
Pocket On The Binder Spine
Pub. No. K1017314AE-1

1Table of Contents
Safety
Wheel Excavator Safety...................................................................... SP002195
Specifications
Specification for DX210W ................................................................... SP000957
General Maintenance
General Maintenance Procedures ...................................................... SP000016
Standard Torques ................................................................................ SP000813
Upper Structure
Cabin (NON-ROPS)............................................................................. SP002194
Cabin (ROPS) ...................................................................................... SP002191
Counterweight....................................................................................... SP002207
Fuel Tank ............................................................................................. SP002208
Fuel Transfer Pump ............................................................................ SP000021
Swing Bearing...................................................................................... SP001869
Swing Reduction Gear ........................................................................ SP002204
Lower Structure and Chassis

Ram Lock Valve .................................................................................. SP000923
Selector Valve...................................................................................... SP000926
Double Pilot Check Valve................................................................... SP000927
Solenoid Valve ..................................................................................... SP000928
Front Axle............................................................................................. SP000929
Rear Axle ............................................................................................. SP000930
Engine and Drive Train

Transmission ........................................................................................ SP000962
Drive Coupling (Main Pump) .............................................................. SP000963
Table of Contents
Page I
Hydraulics
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment ........... SP002227
Accumulator.......................................................................................... SP000984
Center Joint (Swivel) ........................................................................... SP000919
Cylinders............................................................................................... SP001098
Main Control Valve.............................................................................. SP000966
Swing Motor ......................................................................................... SP000985
Travel Motor......................................................................................... SP001110
Counterbalance Valve.......................................................................... SP000991
Main Pump & PTO ............................................................................. SP000988
Gear Pump........................................................................................... SP000989
Service Brake Supply Valve ............................................................... SP000990
Dozer Control Valve ............................................................................ SP000992
Steering Valve...................................................................................... SP000993
Accelerator Pedal Valve (Hydraulic)................................................... SP000964
One Spool Valve ................................................................................. SP000996
Remote Control Valve (Work Lever / Joystick) ................................ SP000069
Breaker EPPR Valve (Opt)................................................................. SP000192
Service Brake Pedal Valve................................................................. SP001006
Solenoid Valve Assembly.................................................................... SP000997
Hydraulic Schematic ............................................................................ SP001107
Electrical System
Electrical System (NON-ROPS).......................................................... SP002209
Electrical System (ROPS) ................................................................... SP002210
Electrical Schematic DX140W/160W/170W/190W/210W................... SP002201
Attachments
Boom and Arm .................................................................................... SP001255
Bucket................................................................................................... SP001001
Table of Contents
Page II
1Safety
SP002195
WHEEL EXCAVATOR SAFETYSP002195
Wheel
Excavator
Safety
Edition 1
Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Wheel Excavator Safety
Safety Precautions............................................... 5
Applicable Models................................................ 5
To the Operator of a DOOSAN Excavator ....... 6
General Safety Essentials................................... 9
Location of Safety Labels ................................. 10
Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in
Digging Mode..................................................... 11
Unauthorized Modifications ............................... 12
General Hazard Information.............................. 12
Before Starting Engine ...................................... 21
Machine Operation ............................................ 24
Maintenance ....................................................... 33
Battery ................................................................ 42
Towing ................................................................ 44
Shipping and Transportation ............................. 45
Lifting with Sling ................................................ 45

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
Follow all safety recommendations and safe shop
practices outlined in the front of this manual or those
contained within this section.
Always use tools and equipment that are in good
working order.
Use lifting and hoisting equipment capable of safely
handling the load.
Remember, that ultimately safety is your own
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS
The contents of this section apply to the following models
and serial number ranges.
MODEL SERIAL NUMBER RANGE

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX170W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
TO THE OPERATOR OF A
DOOSAN EXCAVATOR
DANGER
Unsafe use of the excavator could lead to serious injury
or death. Operating procedures, maintenance and
equipment practices or traveling or shipping methods
that do not follow the safety guidelines on the following
pages could cause serious, potentially fatal injuries or
extensive damage to the machine or nearby property.
Please respect the importance of taking responsibility for

your own safety, and that of other people who may be
affected by your actions.
The safety information on the following pages is organized
into the following sections:
1. “General Safety Essentials” on page -9
2. “Location of Safety Labels” on page -10
3. “Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in Digging
Mode” on page -11
4. “Unauthorized Modifications” on page -12
5. “General Hazard Information” on page -12
6. “Before Starting Engine” on page -21
7. “Machine Operation” on page -24
8. “Maintenance” on page -33
9. “Battery” on page -42
10. “Towing” on page -44
11. “Shipping and Transportation” on page -45
12. “Lifting with Sling” on page -45

Page 6
WARNING
Improper operation and maintenance of this machine
can be hazardous and could result in serious injury or
death.
Operator and maintenance personnel should read this
manual thoroughly before beginning operation or
maintenance.
Keep this manual in the storage compartment to the
rear of the operator's seat, and have all personnel
involved in working on the machine read the manual
periodically.
Some actions involved in operation and maintenance of
the machine can cause a serious accident, if they are
not done in a manner described in this manual.
The procedures and precautions given in this manual
apply only to intended uses of the machine.
If you use your machine for any unintended uses that
are not specifically prohibited, you must be sure that it
is safe for any others. In no event should you or others
engage in prohibited uses or actions as described in
this manual.
DOOSAN delivers machines that comply with all
applicable regulations and standards of the country to
which it has been sent. If this machine has been
purchased in another country or purchased from
someone in another country, it may lack certain safety
devices and specifications that are necessary for use in
your country. If there is any question about whether
your product complies with the applicable standards and
regulations of your country, consult DOOSAN or your
DOOSAN distributor before operating the machine.
SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

Be Prepared - Get to Know All Operating and Safety
Instructions.
This is the Safety Alert Symbol. Wherever it appears in
this manual or on safety signs on the machine you
should be alert to the potential for personal injury or
accidents. Always observe safety precautions and follow
recommended procedures.

Page 7
Learn Signal Words Used with Safety
Alert Symbol
The words "CAUTION," "WARNING," and "DANGER" used
throughout this manual and on decals on the machine
indicate degree of risk of hazards or unsafe practices. All
three degrees of risk indicate that safety is involved.
Observe precautions indicated whenever you see the Safety
Alert "Triangle," no matter which signal word appears next to
the "Exclamation Point" symbol.
CAUTION
This word is used on safety messages and safety labels
and indicates potential threat of a hazardous situation
that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury. It may also be used to alert against a generally
unsafe practice.
WARNING
and indicates potential threat of a hazardous situation
that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or
death. It may also be used to alert against highly unsafe
practice.
DANGER
and indicates an imminent hazard of a situation that, if
not avoided, is very likely to cause death or extremely
serious injury. It may also be used to alert against
equipment that may detonate or explode if handled or
treated carelessly.
Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page -10

on.
DOOSAN cannot predict every circumstance that might
involve a potential hazard in operation and maintenance.
Therefore the safety messages in this manual and on the
machine may not include all possible safety precautions. If
any procedures or actions not specifically recommended or
allowed in this manual are used, you must be sure that you
and others can do such procedures and actions safely and
without damaging the machine. If you are unsure about the
safety of any procedures, contact a DOOSAN distributor.

Page 8
GENERAL SAFETY
ESSENTIALS
Accessory Applications
The excavator has been primarily designed for moving earth
with a bucket. For use as a grapple or for other object
handling, contact DOOSAN for proper installation and
application. Lifting-work applications (unless restricted or
prohibited by local regulations) are permitted in approved lift
configuration, to rated capacity only, with no side-loading.
DO NOT use the machine for activities for which it was not
intended. DO NOT use the bucket for lifting work, unless lift
slings are used in the approved configuration.
Use of an accessory hydraulic hammer (breaker), work in
rough terrain, demolition applications or other hazardous
operation may require installation of additional protective
structures to safeguard the operator.
Lifting Capacity Rating Configuration

Lifting capacity ratings that are printed at the end of this
safety section are based on the machine being level, on a
firm supporting surface, with hooks and slings attached in
approved configuration. Loads must be balanced and
supported evenly. Use tag lines to keep the load steady if
wind conditions and large surface area are a problem. Work
crew hand signals, individual tasks and safe procedures
should all be universally understood before the lift is made.
IMPORTANT
Before using the excavator to make lifts check
municipal and regional regulations or statutes that could
apply. Governing ordinances may require that all heavy
lifting be done with single purpose equipment
specifically designed for making lifts, or other local
restrictions may apply. Making heavy lifts with a general
purpose excavator that can be used for digging, loading,
grading or other work may be expressly forbidden by a
regional injunction or other legal prohibition. Always
follow all the other instructions, guidelines and
restrictions for Safe Lifting in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.

Page 9
LOCATION OF SAFETY
LABELS
Location of safety labels (decals) can vary from unit to unit.
Refer to appropriate Operation and Maintenance Manual,
and parts manual for your unit.
Always replace damaged or faded decals.

Page 10
SUMMARY OF SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOR LIFTING IN
DIGGING MODE
DANGER
Unsafe use of the excavator while making rated lifts
could cause serious, potentially fatal injuries or
extensive damage to the machine or nearby property.
Do not let anyone operate the machine unless they've
been properly trained and understand the information in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
To lift safely while in Digging Mode, the following items must

be evaluated by the operator and the work site crew.
• Condition of ground support.
• Excavator configuration and attachments.
• Weight, lifting height and lifting radius.
• Safe rigging of the load.
• Proper handling of the suspended load.
Tag lines on opposite sides of the load can be very helpful
in keeping a suspended load secure, if they are anchored
safely to control points on the ground.
WARNING
NEVER wrap a tag line around your hands or body.
NEVER rely on tag lines or make rated lifts when wind
gusts are more than 48.3 km/h (30 MPH). Be prepared
for any wind gust when working with loads that have a
large surface area.
Always engage the "Digging Mode" control on the Instrument

Panel before using the excavator for lifting work.
WARNING
If you need more information or have any questions or
concerns about safe operating procedures or working
the excavator correctly in a particular application or in
the specific conditions of your individual operating
environment, please consult your local DOOSAN
representative.

Page 11
UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATIONS
Any modification made without authorization or written
approval from DOOSAN can create a safety hazard, for
which the machine owner will be held responsible.
For safety's sake, replace all OEM parts with the correct
authorized or genuine DOOSAN part. For example, not
taking the time to replace fasteners, bolts or nuts with the
correct replacement parts could lead to a condition where
the safety of critical assemblies are dangerously
compromised.
GENERAL HAZARD
INFORMATION
Safety Rules
Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and
maintain the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when
operating or performing maintenance on the machine.
Do not operate the machine if you are not feeling well, if
you are taking medication that makes you feel sleepy, if you
have been drinking, or if you are suffering from emotional
problems. These problems will interfere with your sense of
judgment in emergencies and may cause accidents.
When working with another operator or with a person on
work site traffic duty, be sure that all personnel know the
nature of the work and understand all hand signals that are
to be used.
Always observe strictly any other rules related to safety.
Safety Features
Be sure that all guards and covers are installed in their
proper position. Have guards and covers repaired
immediately if damaged.
Be sure that you understand the method of use of safety
features such as safety lock lever and the seat belt, and
use them properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in
good operating condition.
Failure to use safety features according to the instructions in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual could result in
serious bodily injury.

Page 12
Inside Operator's Cabin
When entering the operator's cabin, always remove all mud
and oil from the soles of your shoes. If you operate the
travel pedal with mud or oil stuck to your shoes, your foot
may slip and this may cause a serious accident.
After using the ashtray, make sure that any matches or
cigarettes are properly extinguished, and be sure to close
the ashtray. If the ashtray is left open, there is a danger of
fire.
Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads
act as a lens and may cause fire.
Do not leave lighters laying around the operator's cabin. If
the temperature inside the operator's cabin becomes high,
there is a danger that the lighter may explode.
Do not use cellular telephones inside the operator's cabin
when driving or operating the machine. There is a danger
that this may lead to an unexpected accident.
Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or
explosive items into the operator's cabin.
To ensure safety, do not use the radio or music
headphones when operating the machine. There is danger
that this may lead to a serious accident.
When operating the machine, do not put your hands or
head out of the window.
When standing up from the operator's seat, always place
safety lock lever securely in the "LOCK" position. If you
accidentally touch the work equipment levers when they are
not locked, the machine may suddenly move and cause
serious injury or damage.
When leaving the machine, completely lower the work
equipment to the ground, set safety lock lever to the
"LOCK" position and shut down engine. Use the key to lock
all the equipment. Always remove key and take it with you.
Clothing and Personal Protective Items

Secure long hair, and avoid loose clothing and jewelry.
These items have the tendency to catch on controls or
protrude into parts and cause serious injury or death.
Do not wear oily clothes. They are highly flammable.
Full eye protection, a hard hat, safety shoes and gloves
may be required at the work site.
While working on the machine, never use inadequate tools.
They could break or slip, causing injury, or they may not HAOA020L
adequately perform intended functions. Figure 1

Page 13
Breathing Masks, Ear Protection May Be
Required
Do not forget that some risks to your health may not be
immediately apparent. Exhaust gases and noise pollution
may not be visible, but these hazards can cause disabling
or permanent injuries.
NOTE: The equivalent continuous A-weighted sound
pressure level at the workstation for this machine is
given in the operation manual.
Measurement is obtained on a dynamic machine
following the procedures and cabin conditions as
described in ISO 6396.
NOTE: The guaranteed sound power level emitted by the
machinery for this machine is given in the operation
manual.
Measurement is obtained on a dynamic machine with
the procedures as described in 2000/14/EC.
Vibration Level Information

Hands/Arms: The weighted root mean square acceleration to
which the hands/arms are subjected, is less than 2.5 m/s2.
Whole body: The weighted root mean square acceleration to
which the whole body is subjected, is less than 0.5 m/s2.
Measurements are obtained on a representative machine,
using measuring procedures as described in the following
standard: ISO 2631/1. ISO 5349, and SAE J1166.
Recommendations for Limiting Vibrations

1. Select the right machine, equipment and attachments
for a particular application.
2. Replace any damaged seat by a genuine DOOSAN
part. Keep the seat maintained and adjusted.
• Adjust the seat and suspension for the weight and
size of the operator.
• Inspect and maintain the suspension and
adjustment mechanisms of the seat regularly.
3. Check that machine is properly maintained.
• Tire pressure, brakes, steering, linkages, etc.
4. Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, move the
attachments and load the attachments smoothly.
5. Adjust the machine speed and travel path to reduce
the vibration level.
• Slow down if it is necessary when traveling
through rough terrain.

Page 14
• When driving machine, avoid obstacles and
excessive rough terrain.
6. Keep the machine on terrain where working and
traveling conditions are good.
• Remove any large rocks or obstacles.
• Fill any ditches and holes.
• Provide machines for and schedule time to
maintain good terrain conditions.
7. Travel over longer distances (e.g. on public roads) at
adjusted (medium) speed.
• Always adjust the speed to prevent bouncing.
Mounting and Dismounting

Before getting on or off the machine, if there is any oil,
grease, or mud on the handrails, or steps, wipe it off
immediately. Always keep these parts clean. Repair any
damage and tighten any loose bolts.
Never jump on or off the machine. In particular, never get
on or off a moving machine. These actions may lead to
serious injury.
When getting on or off the machine, always face the
machine, and maintain three-point contact (both feet and
one hand or one foot and both hands) with the handrails,
and steps, to ensure that you support yourself securely.
Never hold any control levers when getting on or off the
machine.
Apply the door lock securely. If you grip the handrail inside
the door when moving on top of the chassis, and the door
lock is not applied securely, the door may move and cause
you to fall.
Use the points marked by arrows in the diagram when
getting on or off the machine.
FG007146
Figure 2

Page 15
Fuel, Oil and Hydraulic Fluid Fire Hazards
Fuel, oil and antifreeze will catch fire if it is brought close to
a flame. Fuel is particularly flammable and can be
hazardous.
Always strictly observe the following.
Add fuel, oil, antifreeze and hydraulic fluid to the machine
only in a well ventilated area. The machine must be parked
with controls, lights and switches turned "OFF." The engine
must be "OFF" and any flames, glowing embers, auxiliary
heating units or spark causing equipment must be
extinguished, turned "OFF" and/or kept well clear of the
machine.
Static electricity can produce dangerous sparks at the fuel
filling nozzle. In very cold, dry weather or other conditions
ARO1050S
that could produce a static discharge, keep the tip of the Figure 3
fuel nozzle in constant contact with the neck of the fuel
filling nozzle, to provide a ground.
Keep fuel and other fluid reservoir caps tight and do not
start the engine until caps have been secured.
Precautions When Handling Fluids at

High Temperature
Immediately after operations are stopped, the coolant,
engine oil, and hydraulic oil are at highest temperatures and
the radiator and hydraulic tank are still under pressure.
Attempting to remove cap, drain the oil or coolant, or
replacing the filters may lead to serious burns. Always wait
for the temperature to go down, and follow the specified
procedures when carrying out these operations.
HAOA050L
Figure 4
To prevent hot coolant from spurting out, shut down engine,

wait for the coolant to cool, then loosen the cap slowly to
relieve the pressure.
To prevent hot oil from spurting out, shut down engine, wait
for the oil to cool, then loosen the cap slowly to relieve the
pressure.
HAOA060L
Figure 5

Page 16
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention
Asbestos dust can be HAZARDOUS to your health if it is
inhaled. Materials containing asbestos fiber can be present
on work site. Breathing air that contains asbestos fiber can
ultimately cause serious or fatal lung damage. To prevent
lung damage from asbestos fiber, observe following
precautions:
• Use a respirator that is approved for use in an
asbestos-laden atmosphere.
ARO1770L
• Never use compressed air for cleaning.
Figure 6
• Use water for cleaning to keep down the dust.
• Work on the machine or component with the wind
at your back whenever possible.
• Always observe any regulations related to the
work site and working environment.
Injury from Work Equipment

Do not enter or put your hand, arm or any other part of
your body between movable parts, such as between the
work equipment and cylinders, or between the machine and
work equipment.
If the control levers are operated, the clearance between the
machine and the work equipment will change and this may
lead to serious damage or personal injury.
If going between movable parts is necessary, always
HDO1010L
position and secure the work equipment so it cannot move.
Figure 7
Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

As a precaution if any injury or fire should occur, always do
the following.
• Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided
and read the labels to ensure that you know how
to use them. It is recommended that an
appropriately sized (2.27 kg [5 lb] or larger)
multipurpose "A/B/C" fire extinguisher be mounted
in the cabin. Check and service the fire
extinguisher at regular intervals and make sure HDO1009L
that all work site crew members are adequately Figure 8
trained in its use.
• Provide a first aid kit in the storage compartment
and keep another at the work site. Check the kit
periodically and make any additions if necessary.
• Know what to do in case of injury from fire.

Page 17
• Keep emergency numbers for doctor, ambulance
service, hospital and fire department near your
telephone.
If the machine catches fire, it may lead to serious personal
injury or death. If a fire occurs during operation, escape
from the machine as follows:
• Turn the starter switch to the "O" (OFF) position
and shut down engine.
• If there is time, use the fire extinguisher to put
out as much of the fire as possible.
• Use the handrails and steps to escape from the
machine.
The above is the basic method for escaping from the
machine, but changing the method may be necessary
according to the conditions, so carry out practice drills at the
work site.
Protection from Falling or Flying Objects

On work sites where there is a danger that falling or flying
objects may hit the operator's cabin select a guard to match
the operating conditions to protect the operator.
Working in mines, tunnels, deep pits or on loose or wet
surfaces could produce danger of falling rock or hazardous
flying objects. Additional protection for the operator's cabin
could be required in the form of a FOPS (Falling Object
Protective Structure) or window guards.
HAOA110L
Figure 9
Never attempt to alter or modify any protective structure

reinforcement system, by drilling holes, welding, remounting
or relocating fasteners. Any serious impact or damage to the
system requires a complete integrity reevaluation.
Reinstallation, recertification and/or replacement of the
system may be necessary.
Contact your DOOSAN distributor for available safety guards
and/or recommendations to prevent danger of getting hit by
objects that could strike the operator's cabin. Make sure that
all other work site crew members are kept well away from
the excavator and safe from possible hazards. HAOA100L
Figure 10
For breaker operation, install a front guard and apply a
laminated coating sheet to the front glass. Contact your
DOOSAN distributor for recommendations.
When carrying out demolition or cutting operation, install a
front guard and top guard, and apply a laminated coating
sheet to the front glass.
When working in mines or quarries where there is a danger
of falling rock, install FOPS (Falling Objects Protective

Page 18
Structure) and apply a laminated coating sheet to the front
glass.
If any glass on the machine is broken, replace it with new
glass immediately.
Attachment Precautions
Option kits are available through your dealer. Contact
DOOSAN for information on available one-way (single-acting)
and two-way (double-acting) piping / valving / auxiliary
control kits. Because DOOSAN cannot anticipate, identify or
test all the attachments that owners may wish to install on
their machines, please contact DOOSAN for authorization
and approval of attachments, and their compatibility with
optional kits.
Accumulator
The pilot and brake control system are equipped with an
accumulator. For a brief period of time after the engine has
been shut down, the accumulator will store a pressure
charge that may enable hydraulic controls to be activated.
Activation of any controls may enable the selected function
to operate under force of gravity, and emergency brake is
applied during pressing service brake pedal.
When performing maintenance on the pilot and brake control
system, the hydraulic pressure in the system must be
released as described in "Handling of Accumulator" in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas,
so it is extremely dangerous if it is handled in the wrong
way. Always observe the following precautions:
• Do not drill or make any holes in the accumulator
or expose it to any flames, fire or heat source.
• Do not weld on the accumulator, or try attaching
anything to it.
• When carrying out disassembly or maintenance of
the accumulator, or when disposing of the
accumulator, the charged gas must be properly
released. Contact your DOOSAN distributor.
• Wear safety goggles and protective gloves when
working on an accumulator. Hydraulic oil under
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause
serious injuries.

Page 19
Indoor Ventilation
Engine exhaust gases can cause fatal accidents, and
unconsciousness, loss of alertness, judgment and motor
control and serious injury.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation before starting the
engine in any enclosed area.
You should also be aware of open windows, doors or
ductwork where exhaust may be carried, or blown by the
wind, exposing others to danger.
ARO1770L
Figure 11
Emergency Exit
This machine is equipped with a glass breaking tool. It is
behind the operator seat in the upper right corner of the
cabin. This tool can be used in case of an emergency that
requires the breaking of glass to exit from the operator's
cabin. Grip the handle firmly and use the sharp point to
break the glass.
WARNING FG000178
Figure 12
Protect your eyes when breaking the glass.
Emergency Exit (ROPS)

The excavator is equipped with a glass breaking tool. It is
found on the center of the column to the left of the cabin.
This tool can be used in case of an emergency that
requires breaking glass to exit from the operator's cabin.
Grip the handle firmly and use the sharp point to break the
glass.
WARNING FG015808
Figure 13
Protect your eyes when breaking the glass.

Page 20
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
Work Site Precautions

Before starting operations, thoroughly check the area for any
unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the work
site, and determine the best and safest method of operation.
Make sure the ground surface is as hard and horizontal as
possible before carrying out operations. If there is a lot of
dust and sand on the work site, spray water before starting
operations.
If you need to operate on a street, protect pedestrians and
cars by designating a person for work site traffic duty or by
erecting fences and posting "No Entry" signs around the
work site.
Erect fences, post "No Entry" signs, and take other steps to
prevent people from coming close to or entering the work
site. If people come close to a moving machine, they may
be hit or caught by the machine, and this may lead to
serious personal injury or death.
Waterlines, gas lines, phone lines and high-voltage electrical
lines may be buried under the work site. Contact each utility DANGER
NO Entry
and identify their locations. Be careful not to damage or cut FG006112
any of these lines. Figure 14
Check the condition of the riverbed, and the depth and flow
of the water before operating in water or crossing a river.
NEVER work in water that is more than the permissible
water depth.
Any object in vicinity of boom could represent a potential
hazard, or cause the operator to react suddenly and cause
an accident. Use a spotter or signal person when working
near bridges, phone lines, work site scaffolds, or other
obstructions.
FG007148
Figure 15
Minimum levels of insurance coverage, work permits or

certification, physical barriers around the work site or
restricted hours of operation may be mandated by governing
authorities. There may also be regulations, guidelines,
standards or restrictions on equipment that may have to be
followed for local requirements. There may also be
regulations related to performing certain kinds of work. If
there is any question about whether your machine and work
site complies with the applicable standards and regulations,
contact your local authorities and agencies.
Avoid entering soft ground. It will be difficult for the machine to
escape.
FG007149
Avoid operating your machine too close to the edge of cliffs, Figure 16
overhangs, and deep ditches. The ground may be weak in
such areas. If the ground collapses, the machine could fall
or tip over resulting in serious injury or death.

Page 21
Remember that soil after heavy rain, blasting or after
earthquakes, is weakened.
Newly laid earth and the soil near ditches is typically loose.
It can collapse under the weight of vibration of your machine
and cause your machine to tip over.
Install the head guard (FOPS) if working in areas where
there is a danger of falling rocks.
Checks Before Starting Engine

Every day before starting the engine for the first time, carry
out the following checks. If these checks are not carried out
properly, there is a danger of serious injury.
Remove all wood chips, leaves, grass, paper and other
flammable materials accumulated in the engine compartment
and around the battery. They could cause a fire. Remove
any dirt from the window glass, mirrors, handrails, and
steps.
Do not leave tools or spare parts laying around in the
operator's cabin. The vibration of the machine when traveling
or during operations may cause them to fall and damage or
break the control levers or switches. They may also get
caught in the gap of the control levers and cause the work
equipment to malfunction or move dangerously. This may
lead to unexpected accidents.
Check the coolant, fuel, and hydraulic tank oil levels, and
check for clogged air cleaner and damage to the electrical
wiring.
Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to
operate the machine, and check the seat belt and mounts
for damage and wear.
Check the operation of the gauges and the angle of the
mirrors, and check that safety lever is in "LOCKED" position.
If any abnormalities are found in the above checks, carry
out repairs immediately.
Engine Starting
Walk around your machine before getting in the operator's
cabin. Look for evidence of leaking fluid, loose fasteners,
misaligned assemblies or any other indications of possible
equipment hazard.
All equipment covers and machinery safety guards must be
in place, to protect against injury while the machine is being
operated.
Look around the work site area for potential hazards, people
or property that could be at risk while operation is in
progress.
NEVER start the engine if there is any indication that
maintenance or service work is in progress, or if a warning
tag is attached to controls in the cabin.

Page 22
A machine that has not been used recently, or is being
operated in extremely cold temperatures, could require a
warm-up or maintenance service before start-up.
Check gauges and monitor displays for normal operation
before starting the engine. Listen for unusual noises and
remain alert for other potentially hazardous conditions at the
start of the work cycle.
Do not short-circuit the starting motor to start the engine.
This is not only dangerous, but may also damage the
machine.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as an alert.
Start and operate the machine only while seated.
Before Operating Machine

If checks are not carried out properly after starting the
engine, it may result in a delay in discovering abnormalities
in the machine, and this may lead to personal injury or
damage to the machine.
Carry out the checks in an open area where there are no
obstructions. Do not let anyone near the machine when
carrying out the checks.
• Check the operating condition of the equipment,
and the movement of the bucket, arm, boom,
travel, and swing systems.
• Check the machine for any abnormal noise, vibration,
heat, smell, or abnormality with the gauges.
Check also for leakage of air, oil, and fuel.
• If any abnormality is found, repair the problem
immediately. If the machine is used without
repairing the problems, it may lead to unexpected
injury or failure.
• Clear all personnel from directly around machine
and from the area.
• Clear all obstacles from the machine's path.
Beware of hazards.
• Be sure that all windows are clean. Secure the
doors and the windows in the open position or in
the shut position.
• Adjust the rearview mirrors for best visibility close
to the machine. Make sure that horn, the travel
alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices
are working properly.
• Fasten the seat belt securely.
• Warm up the engine and hydraulic oil before
operating machine.
• Before moving the machine, check undercarrige
position. The normal travel position is with front
axle (steerting) to the front under the cabin and
the transmission to the rear. When the chassis is
in the reversed position, the travel controls must
be operated in opposite directions.

Page 23
MACHINE OPERATION
When Swinging or Changing Direction

of Travel
Before operating the machine or the work equipment, always
observe the following precautions to prevent serious injury or
death.
• Start and operate the machine only while seated.
• When changing travel direction from forward to
reverse or from reverse to forward, reduce speed
early and stop the machine before changing travel HGB1014L-1
direction. Figure 17
• Sound the horn to warn people in the area.
• Check that there is no one in the area around the
machine. There are blind spots behind the
machine, so if necessary, swing the upper
structure to check that there is no one behind the
machine before traveling in reverse.
• When operating in areas that may be hazardous
or have poor visibility, designate a person to
direct work site traffic.
• Ensure that no unauthorized person can come
within the turning radius or direction of travel.
Be sure to observe the above precautions even if a travel
alarm or mirrors are installed.

Page 24
Travel Precautions Travel Posture
Never turn the starting switch to the "O" (OFF) position

when traveling. It is dangerous if the engine stops while the
machine is traveling. It will be impossible to operate the
steering.
40~50cm
Attachment control levers should not be operated while (16~20in)
traveling.
Incorrect
Do not change selected travel mode (HIGH/ECONO/LOW/
CREEP) while traveling.
Fold in work equipment so the outer end of the boom is as
close to the machine as possible, and is 40 - 50 cm (16 -
20 in) aboveground.
Never travel over obstacles or slopes that will cause the
machine to tilt severely. Travel around any slope or obstacle FG008635
that causes the machine to tilt 10 degrees or more to the Figure 18
right or left, or 30 degrees or more from front to rear.
Do not operate the steering suddenly. The work equipment
may hit the ground and cause the machine to lose its
balance, and this may damage the machine or structures in
the area.
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed, and
avoid sudden changes in direction.
Always keep to the permissible water depth. Permissible
water depth is to the centerline of the axles.
When traveling over bridges or structures on private land,
check first that bridge or structure can withstand the weight
of the machine. When traveling on public roads, check with
the local authorities and follow their instructions.

Page 25
Traveling on Slopes
Never jump onto a machine that is running away to stop it.
There is a danger of serious injury.
Cm
Traveling on slopes could result in the machine tipping over 30
20~
or slipping.
On hills, banks or slopes, carry the bucket approximately 20
- 30 cm (8 - 12 in) above the ground. In case of an
emergency, quickly lower the bucket to the ground to help
stop the machine.
Do not travel on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel plates.
Even slight slopes may cause the machine to slip to the
side, so travel at low speed and make sure that machine is
always traveling directly up or down the slope.
Avoid changing travel direction on a slope. This could result
in tipping or sideslipping of the machine.
When possible, operate the machine up slopes and 20~
30
downslopes. Avoid operating the machine across the slope, Cm
when possible.
FG006114
Figure 19

Page 26
Prohibited Operations
Do not dig the work face under an overhang. This may
cause the overhang to collapse and fall on top of the
machine.
FG007135
Figure 20
Do not carry out deep digging under the front of the

machine. The ground under the machine may collapse and
cause the machine to fall.
Working heavy loads over loose, soft ground or uneven,
broken terrain can cause dangerous side load conditions
and possible tip over and injury. Travel without a load or a
balanced load may also be hazardous.
Never rely on lift jacks or other inadequate supports when
work is being done. Block tracks fore and aft to prevent any
movement.
FG007135
Figure 21
When using the machine, to prevent accidents caused by

damage to the work equipment and overturning because of
an excessive load, do not use the machine in excess of its
ability (in terms of the maximum load and stability
determined by the structure of the machine).
When working at the edge of an excavation or on a road
shoulder, the machine could tip over, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death. Investigate the configuration and
ground conditions of the work site beforehand to prevent the
machine from falling and to prevent the ground, stockpiles,
or banks from collapsing. FG007151
Figure 22

Page 27
Precautions for Operation
Be careful not to mistakenly travel too close to the edge of
a cliff.
Use the machine only for its main purpose. Using it for
other purposes will cause failures.
To ensure a good view, always do the following:
• When working in dark areas, attach working lights
and front lights to the machine. If necessary, set
up lighting at the work site. FG007152
• Stop operations when the visibility is poor, such Figure 23

as in fog, mist, snow, and rain. Wait for the
visibility to improve to a level which causes no
problems for the operation.
To avoid hitting the work equipment, always do the following:
• When working in tunnels, on bridges, under electrical
wires, or when parking the machine or carrying
out other operations in places with limited height,
be careful not to hit the bucket or other parts.
• To prevent collisions, operate the machine at a
safe speed when working in confined spaces,
indoors, or in crowded areas.
• Do not pass the bucket over the heads of workers
or over the operator's cabin of dump truck.
Avoid High-voltage Cables

Serious injury or death can result from contact or proximity to
high-voltage electrical lines. The bucket does not have to make
physical contact with power lines for current to be transmitted.
Use a spotter and hand signals to stay away from power
lines not clearly visible to the operator.
Voltage Minimum Safe Distance

6.6 kV 3 m (9' 10")
FG007153
33.0 kV 4 m (13' 1")
Figure 24
66.0 kV 5 m (16' 5")
154.0 kV 8 m (26' 3")
275.0 kV 10 m (32' 10")
Use these minimum distances as a guideline only.

Depending upon the voltage in the line and atmospheric
conditions, strong current shocks can occur with the boom
or bucket as faraway as 4 - 6 m (13 - 20 ft.) from the
power line. Very high voltage and rainy weather could
further decrease that safety margin.
NOTE: Before starting any operation near power lines (either
aboveground or buried cable type), you should
always contact the power utility company directly and
work out a safety plan with them.

Page 28
Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS)
When Required by Local Regulations
Global markets may or may not require a Roll Over
Protective Structure (ROPS). Always comply with all regional
and governmental regulations that apply to your market. The
following information is for a ROPS cabin.
General ROPS Guidelines for ROPS Certified Cabins

The operator's cabin is a ROPS certified structure for
protecting the seat-belted operator. It absorbs the impact
energy of a rollover impact. Do not allow machine weight
(mass) to exceed certified value on certification plate. If
weight is exceeded, the ROPS structure will not be able to
fulfill its safety function.
Do not increase machine weight beyond certified value by
modifying machine or by installing attachments on machine.
If weight limit of protective equipment is exceeded, protective
equipment will not be able to protect operator, and operator
may suffer serious injury or death. Always observe the
following:
• This machine is equipped with a protective
structure. Do not remove protective structure and
carry out operations without it.
• Never modify the operator’s cabin by welding,
grinding, drilling holes or adding attachments
unless instructed by DOOSAN. Changes to the
cabin can cause loss of operator protection from
rollover and falling objects, and operator may
suffer serious injury or death.
• When protective structure is damaged or deformed
by falling objects or by rolling over, its strength
will be reduced and it will not be able to properly
fulfill its function. In these cases, always contact
your DOOSAN distributor for advice. Never repair
a ROPS cabin.
• Always wear your seat belt when operating
machine.

Page 29
ROPS Certification
This DOOSAN excavator has an operator’s cabin that meets
ROPS requirements. The seat belt must be worn for rollover
protection.
The ROPS certification plate (Figure 25) is found on the left
side of the cabin on most models. It may vary slightly in its
location on some models.
Check the ROPS cabin, mounting, and hardware for damage.
Never modify the ROPS cabin. Replace the cabin and
hardware if damaged. See your DOOSAN dealer for parts.
Figure 25
ROPS − Roll Over Protective Structure complies with
ISO 12117-2:2008.
WARNING
Never modify the operator cabin by welding, grinding,
drilling holes or adding attachments unless instructed
by DOOSAN. Changes to the cabin can cause loss of
operator protection from rollover and falling objects, and
result in serious injury or death.
Protecting Cabin from Falling Object

(Optional) O I
In a work site where falling objects or flying objects are
expected, be sure to install adequate protective devices for 1
covering the cabin.
When using a breaker, be sure to install the front window
protection guard (Figure 26).
FG000175
FG000112
Figure 26

Page 30
In a work site where falling rocks can cause damage and
possibly crush personnel, or in a mining operation, be sure
to install the falling object protective structure (Figure 27).
Be sure to install any other additional protective structures
required for work site conditions.
When the falling object protective structure is installed, and
the front window needs to be cleaned, loosen the bolts
marked with an arrow. Be sure to tighten bolts when done.
2
Operate Carefully on Snow, Ice and in

Very Cold Temperatures
In icy cold weather avoid sudden travel movements and stay
away from even slight slopes. The machine could skid off to
one side very easily.
Snow accumulation could hide or obscure potential hazards. FG000113
Use care while operating or while using the machine to Figure 27
clear snow.
Warming up the engine for a short period may be
necessary, to avoid operating with sluggish or reduced
working capacity. The jolting shocks and impact loads
caused by bumping or bottoming the boom or attachment
are more likely to cause severe stress in very cold
temperatures. Reducing work cycle rate and workload may
be necessary.
When the temperature rises, frozen road surfaces become
soft, and machine travel becomes unstable.
In cold weather, do not touch metal surfaces with your bare
hands. If you touch a metal surface in extremely cold
weather, your skin may freeze to the metal surface.
Operations on Slopes
When working on slopes. there is a danger that machine
may lose its balance and turn over, when swinging, or when
work equipment is operated. Always carry out these
operations carefully.
Do not swing the work equipment from the uphill side to the
downhill side when the bucket is loaded. This operation is
dangerous.
If the machine has to be used on a slope, pile the soil to FG009194
make a platform that will keep the machine as horizontal as Figure 28
possible.
In addition, lower the bucket as far as possible, keep it pulled
into the front, and keep the swing speed as low as possible.

Page 31
Parking Machine
Avoid making sudden stops, or parking the machine
wherever it happens to be at the end of the workday. Plan
so the excavator will be on firm, level ground away from
traffic and away from high walls, cliff edges and any area of It drives
on underground
potential water accumulation or runoff. If parking on inclines Block
is unavoidable, block the wheels to prevent movement.
Lower the bucket or other working attachment completely to
the ground, or to an overnight support saddle. There should
be no possibility of unintended or accidental movement.
When parking on public roads, provide fences, signs, flags,
or lights, and put up any other necessary signs to ensure
that passing traffic can see the machine clearly. Park the Lock
machine so the machine, flags, and fences do not obstruct
traffic.
After the front attachment has been lowered to an overnight Unlock
storage position and all switches and operating controls are
in the "OFF" position, the safety lock lever must be set to Lock
FG006116
the "LOCKED" position. This will disable all pilot circuit
Figure 29
control functions.
Always close the door of the operator's cabin.
Never Let Anyone Ride on Attachment

Never let anyone ride on any work attachment, such as the
bucket, crusher, grapple, or clamshell (grab bucket). There is
a potential danger of the person falling and suffering serious
injury.
ARO1310L
Figure 30

Page 32
MAINTENANCE
Warning Tag
Alert others that service or maintenance is being performed WARNING
and tag operator's cabin controls – and other machine areas
if required – with a warning notice. OSHA mandated control
lever lockout can be made with any OSHA certified lockout
DO NOT OPERATE
device and a length of chain or cable to keep the safety when performing inspection
lever in the fully lowered, nonactive position.
or maintenance
Warning tags, for controls are available from DOOSAN
190-00695A
distributors.
FG012202
Figure 31
Clean Before Inspection or Maintenance

Clean the machine before carrying out inspection and
maintenance. This prevents dirt from getting into the
machine and ensures safety during maintenance.
If inspection and maintenance are carried out when the
machine is dirty, it will become more difficult to locate the
problems, and there is a danger that you may get dirt or
mud in your eyes or that you may slip and injure yourself.
When washing the machine, do the following:
• Wear shoes with nonslip soles to prevent yourself
from slipping and falling on wet places.
• Wear safety glasses and protective clothing when
washing the machine with high-pressure steam.
• Take action to prevent touching high-pressure
water and cutting your skin or having mud fly into
your eyes. ARO1330L
Figure 32
• Do not spray water directly on electrical
components (sensors, connector) (1, Figure 32). If
water gets into the electrical system, there is a
danger that it will cause defective operation and
malfunction.
Pick up any tools or hammers that are laying in the
workplace. Wipe up any grease or oil or any other slippery
substances, and clean the area to make it possible to carry
out the operation in safety. If the workplace is left untidy,
you may trip or slip and suffer injury.

Page 33
Proper Tools
Use only tools suited to the task. Using damaged, low
quality, faulty, or makeshift tools could cause personal injury.
There is a danger that pieces from, chisels with crushed
heads, or hammers, may get into your eyes and cause
blindness.
HDO1037L
Figure 33
Use of Lighting
When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, or window
washing fluid, always use lighting with antiexplosion
specifications. If such lighting equipment is not used, there
is a danger of an explosion.
If work is carried out in dark places without using lighting, it
may lead to injury, so always use proper lighting.
Even if the place is dark, never use a lighter or flame
instead of lighting. There is a danger of fire. There is also HDO1040L
danger that battery gas may catch fire and cause an
Figure 34
explosion.
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention

All fuels, most lubricants and some coolant mixtures are
flammable. Leaking fuel or fuel that is spilled onto hot
surfaces or onto electrical components can cause a fire.
Store all fuels and all lubricants in properly marked
containers and away from all unauthorized persons.
Store oily rags and other flammable material in a protective
container.
Do not smoke while you refuel the machine or while you are HDO1015I
in a refueling area.
Figure 35
Do not smoke in battery charging areas or in areas that
contain flammable material.
Clean all electrical connections and tighten all electrical
connections. Check the electrical wires daily for wires that
are loose or frayed. Tighten all lose electrical wires before
you operate the machine. Repair all frayed electrical wires
before you operate the machine.
Remove all flammable materials before they accumulate on
the machine.
Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain flammable
fluids. Do not flame cut on pipes or on tubes that contain
flammable fluids. Before you weld on pipes or on tubes or
before you flame cut on pipes or on tubes, clean the pipes
or tubes thoroughly with a nonflammable solvent.

Page 34
Burn Prevention
When checking the radiator coolant level, shut down engine,
let the engine and radiator cool down, then check the
coolant recovery tank. If the coolant level in the coolant
recovery tank is near the upper limit, there is enough
coolant in the radiator.
Loosen the radiator cap gradually to release the internal
pressure before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is below the
lower limit, add coolant.
Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Alkali can cause
personal injury. Do not allow alkali to contact the skin, the
eyes, or the mouth.
Allow cooling system components to cool before you drain
the cooling system.
Hot oil and hot components can cause personal injury. Do
not allow hot oil or hot components to contact the skin.
Remove hydraulic tank filter plug only after the engine has
been stopped. Make sure that hydraulic tank filter plug is
cool before you remove it with your bare hand. Remove
hydraulic tank filter plug slowly to relieve pressure.
Relieve all pressure in the hydraulic oil system, in the fuel
system, or in the cooling system before you disconnect any
lines, fittings, or related items. HAAE1980
Batteries give off flammable fumes that can explode. Figure 36
Do not smoke while you are checking the battery's

electrolyte levels.
Electrolyte is an acid. Electrolyte can cause personal injury.
Do not allow electrolyte to contact the skin or the eyes.
Always wear protective glasses when you work on batteries.

Page 35
Welding Repairs
CAUTION
When you connect or disconnect connectors between
ECU and Engine or connector between ECU and the
machine, always disconnect the source power to protect
damage of the ECU.
If you don't observe this procedure, the ECU would be
damaged or the engine would operate abnormally.
When carrying out welding repairs, carry out the welding in

a properly equipped place. The welding should be performed
by a qualified worker. During welding operations, there is the
danger of, generation of gas, fire, or electric shock, so never
let an unqualified worker do welding.
The qualified welder must do the following:
• To prevent explosion of the battery, disconnect
the battery terminals and remove batteries.
• To prevent generation of gas, remove paint from
the location of the weld.
• If hydraulic equipment, piping or places close to
them are heated, a flammable gas or mist will be
generated and there is a danger of it catching
fire. To avoid this, never subject these places to
heat.
• Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain
flammable fluids. Do not flame cut on pipes or on
tubes that contain flammable fluids. Before you
weld on pipes or on tubes or before you flame
cut on pipes or on tubes, clean the pipes or
tubes thoroughly with a nonflammable solvent.
• If heat is applied directly to rubber hoses or
piping under pressure, they may suddenly break,
so cover them with a fireproof covering.
• Wear protective clothing.
• Make sure there is good ventilation.
• Remove all flammable objects and provide a fire
extinguisher.

Page 36
Treatment for Electrical Welding on Body Structure
To prevent damage to ECU by electrical welding, please
observe the following procedures:
1. Open the door of the battery cover.
2. Detach the cover after loosening the bolts on the
battery.
3. Detach the positive and negative terminal cables from
the battery.
4. Detach the undercover, and after that detach the FG000312
connector (1) from the ECU that are installed at the Figure 37
engine.
5. Proceed with welding.
6. After welding, carefully reassemble the connector.
7. Connect the battery terminal cables. 1
8. Reassemble the undercover under the engine.
9. Reassemble the cover over the battery.
10. Close the cover of the battery.
FG000335
Figure 38
Warning for Counterweight and Front

Attachment Removal
DANGER
DOOSAN warns any user, that removal of the
counterweight from the machine, front attachment or
any other part, may affect the stability of the machine.
This could cause unexpected movement, resulting in
death or serious injuries. DOOSAN is not liable for any
misuse.
Never remove counterweight or front attachment unless
the upper structure is in-line with the lower structure.
Never rotate the upper structure once the counterweight
or front attachment has been removed.
FG007095
Figure 39

Page 37
Precautions for Removal, Installation,
and Storage of Attachments
Before starting removal and installation of attachments,
decide on the team leader.
Do not allow anyone except the authorized workers close to
the machine or attachment.
Place attachments that have been removed from the
machine in a safe place so they do not fall. Put up a fence
around the attachments and take other measures to prevent HDO1041L
unauthorized persons from entering. Figure 40
Precautions When Working on Machine

When carrying out maintenance operations on the machine,
keep area around your feet clean and tidy to prevent falls.
Always do the following:
• Do not spill oil or grease.
• Do not leave tools laying about.
• Watch your step when walking.
Never jump down from the machine. When getting on or off
ARO1380L
the machine, use the steps and handrails, and maintain a
Figure 41
three-point contact (both feet and one hand or both hands
and one foot) to support yourself securely.
If the job requires it, wear protective clothing.
To prevent injury from slipping or falling, when working on
the hood or covers, never use any area except the area
equipped with nonslip pads.
Lock Inspection Covers

When carrying out maintenance with the inspection cover
open, lock the cover securely in position with the lock bar.
If maintenance work is carried out with the inspection cover
open but not locked, there is a danger that it may suddenly
close and cause injury if there is a gust of wind.

Page 38
Prevention of Crushing and Cutting
You should always have at least two people working
together if the engine must be run during service. One
person needs to remain in the operator's seat, ready to
work the controls or stop the machine and shut off the
engine.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, never attempt
adjustments while the machine is moving or while the
engine is running.
Stay clear of all rotating parts and moving parts.
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan blades
will throw objects and the fan blades can cut objects.
Do not use a wire rope cable that is kinked or frayed. Wear
gloves when you handle a wire rope cable.
When you strike a retainer pin, the retainer pin might fly out.
The loose retainer pin can injure personnel. Make sure that
area is clear of people when you strike a retainer pin. To
avoid injury to your eyes, wear protective glasses when you
strike a retainer pin.
Supports and Blocking for Work

Equipment
Do not allow weight or equipment loads to remain
suspended.
Lower everything to the ground before leaving the operator's
seat.
Do not use hollow, cracked or unsteady wobbling supports.
Do not work under any equipment supported only by a lifting
HDO1042L
jack.
Figure 42
Action When Abnormality Is Found

During Inspection
If any abnormality is found during inspection, always carry
out repairs. In particular, if the machine is used when there
are still problems with the brake or work equipment systems,
it may lead to serious injury.
If necessary depending on the type of failure, please contact
your DOOSAN distributor for repairs.

Page 39
Precautions with High-pressure Lines,
Tubes and Hoses X
When inspecting or replacing high-pressure piping or hoses,
check to verify that pressure has been released from the
circuit. Failure to release the pressure may lead to serious
injury. Always do the following:
• Wear protective glasses and leather gloves.
• Fluid leaks from hydraulic hoses or pressurized
X
components can be difficult to see but pressurized
oil has enough force to pierce the skin and cause
serious injury. Always use a piece of wood or
cardboard to check for suspected hydraulic leaks.
Never use your hands or expose your fingers.
• Do not bend high-pressure lines. Do not strike
high-pressure lines. Do not install lines, tubes or
hoses that are bent or damaged.
• Make sure that all clamps, guards and heat
shields are installed correctly to prevent vibration,
rubbing against other parts, and excessive heat
during operation.
HDO1045I
– If any of the following conditions are found, Figure 43
replace the part:
– Damage or leakage from hose end.
– Wear, damage, cutting of covering, or
exposure of strengthening wire layer.
– Cover portion is swollen in places.
– There is twisting or crushing at movable
parts of hose.
– Foreign material is embedded in the
covering.
– Hose end is deformed.
NOTE: Refer to "Hose In-service Lifetime Limit
(European Standard ISO 8331 and EN982
CEN)" in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual, for additional European
regulations.

Page 40
Waste Materials
Physical contact with used motor oil may pose a health risk.
X
Wipe oil from your hands promptly and wash off any
remaining residue.
Used motor oil is an environmental contaminant and may
only be disposed of at approved collection facilities. To
prevent pollution of the environment, always do the
following:
• Never dump waste oil in a sewer system, rivers,
HAOA470L
etc.
Figure 44
• Always put oil drained from your machine in
containers. Never drain oil directly onto the
ground.
• Obey appropriate laws and regulations when
disposing of harmful materials such as oil, fuel,
solvent, filters, and batteries.

Page 41
BATTERY
Battery Hazard Prevention

Battery electrolyte contains diluted sulfuric acid and batteries
generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is highly explosive,
and mistakes in handling them can cause serious injury or
fire. To prevent problems, always do the following:
• Do not smoke or bring any flame near the battery.
• When working with batteries, ALWAYS wear
safety glasses and rubber gloves.
• If you spill battery electrolyte on yourself or your
clothes, immediately flush the area with water.
• If battery electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush
them immediately with large quantities of water
and see a doctor at once.
• If you accidentally drink battery electrolyte, drink a
large quantity of water or milk, raw egg or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor or poison prevention
center immediately.
• When cleaning the top surface of the battery,
wipe it with a clean, damp cloth. Never use
gasoline, thinner, or any other organic solvent or
detergent.
• Tighten the battery caps securely.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge
the battery or start the engine with power from
another source. There is a danger that battery
may catch fire.
Figure 45
• When charging the battery or starting with power
from another source, let the battery electrolyte
melt and check that there is no leakage of battery
electrolyte before starting the operation.
• Always remove battery from the machine before
charging.

Page 42
Boost Starting or Charging Engine
Batteries
If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the
booster cables, it may cause an explosion or fire. Always do
the following:
• Turn off all electrical equipment before connecting
leads to the battery. This includes electrical
switches on the battery charger or boost starting
equipment.
HAOA310L
• When boost starting from another machine or Figure 46
vehicle do not allow the two machines to touch.
Wear safety glasses or goggles while required
battery connections are made.
• 24 volt battery units consisting of two series
connected twelve volt batteries have a cable
connecting one positive terminal on one of the 12
volt batteries to a negative terminal on the other
battery. Booster or charger cable connections
must be made between the nonseries connected
positive terminals and between the negative
terminal of the booster battery and the metal
frame of the machine being boosted or charged.
Refer to the procedure and illustration in "Starting
Engine With a Booster Cable" in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
• Connect positive cable first when installing cables
and disconnect the negative cable first when
removing them. The final cable connection, at the
metal frame of the machine being charged or
boost started, should be as faraway from the
batteries as possible.

Page 43
TOWING
Precautions When Towing

If any mistake is made in the method of selecting or
inspecting the towing wire or in the method of towing, it may
lead to serious personal injury. Always do the following:
• Always use the method of towing given in this
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Do not use
any other method.
• Always release the parking brake (manual mode)
before towing.
• Use leather gloves when handling the wire rope.
• When carrying out the preparation work for towing
with two or more workers, determine the signals
to use and follow these signals correctly.
• Always fit the towing rope to the left and right
hooks and secure in position.
• If the engine on the problem machine will not
start or there is a failure in the brake system.
always contact your DOOSAN distributor.
• Never go between the towing machine and the
towed machine during the towing operation.
• It is dangerous to carry out towing on slopes, so
select a place where the slope is gradual. If there
is no place where the slope is gradual, carry out
operations to reduce the angle of the slope before
starting the towing operation.
• When towing a problem machine, always use a
wire rope with a sufficient towing capacity.
• Do not use a frayed, kinked rope or a rope with
any loss of diameter.
• Do not use the lightweight towing hook for towing
another machine.
• Insert protective material such as thick cloths
between track frame and wire rope to prevent the
wire rope from being damage.
• Towing speed must be below 10.0 km/h
(6.21 MPH) and towing distance must not exceed
5.0 km (3.11 Mile). When towing distance is over
5.0 km (3.11 Mile) use a trailer.

Page 44
SHIPPING AND
TRANSPORTATION
Obey State and Local Over-the-Road

Regulations
Check state and local restrictions regarding weight, width
and length of a load before making any other preparation for
transport.
The hauling vehicle, trailer and load must all be in
compliance with local regulations governing the intended
shipping route.
Partial disassembly or teardown of the excavator may be
necessary to meet travel restrictions or particular conditions
at the work site. See the Shop Manual for information on
partial disassembly.
Refer to the Transportation and Shipping section of this
Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on
loading, unloading and towing.
LIFTING WITH SLING
WARNING
Improper lifting can allow load to shift and cause injury
or damage.
1. Refer to Specification section of Operation and

Maintenance Manual for information on weight and
dimensions.
2. Use properly rated cables and slings for lifting.
3. Position machine for a level lift.
4. Lifting cables should have a long enough length to
prevent contact with the machine. Spreader bars may
be required.
NOTE: If spreader bars are used, be sure that cables are
properly secured to them and that the angle of the
cables is factored into the lift strength.

Page 45
Page 46
1Specifications
SP000957
SPECIFICATION FOR DX210WSP000957
Specification
for DX210W
Edition 1
Specification for DX210W SP000957

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Specification for DX210W
General Description ............................................. 7
Component Locations .......................................... 8
General Dimensions .......................................... 10
Working Range .................................................. 12
Front Pin size .................................................... 15
Hydraulic Cylinders ............................................ 17
General Specifications ....................................... 18
Hydraulic System Component Specifications... 19
System Component Specifications ................... 20
Engine Performance Curves
(Per DIN 6270 Standard) ................................. 22
Approximate Weight of Workload Materials .... 24
Performance Tests and Standards .................. 26
Excavator Performance Standards ................... 27
Test Conditions............................................................. 27
Travel Speed Tests...................................................... 27
Swing Speed and Deceleration Force Test ............... 29
Cylinder Performance Tests ........................................ 30

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
Remember, that ultimately safety is your own personal
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The excavator has three main component sections:
• The Upper Turntable
• The Lower Undercarriage and Chassis Frames
• The Excavator Front-end Attachment
The following illustration identifies main components and
their locations. (See Figure 1 on page -8.)

Page 7
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 41 22 17
38
37
36
35
33 24
23
18
34 32 30 31 29 28 27 26 39 40 25 21 20 19
FG008677
Figure 1

Page 8
Reference Reference
Description Description
Number Number
1 Counterweight 22 Wheel Chocks
2 Muffler 23 Bucket Tooth
3 Engine Cover 24 Side Cutter
4 Engine 25 Bucket
5 Hydraulic Oil Tank 26 Ram Cylinders
6 Fuel Tank 27 Front Axle
7 Control Valve 28 Swing Lock
8 Radiator And Oil Cooler 29 Step
9 Swing Motor 30 Travel Motor
10 Air Cleaner 31 Propeller Shaft
11 Swivel Joint 32 Transmission
12 Swing Bearing 33 Return Filter
13 Cabin 34 Rear Axle
14 Seat 35 Strainer
15 Boom 36 Dozer Blade
16 Boom Cylinder 37 Dozer Blade Cylinders
17 Arm Cylinder 38 Pumps
18 Arm 39 Outrigger
19 Bucket Cylinder 40 Outrigger Cylinder
20 Guide Link 41 Steering Column
21 Push Link

Page 9
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
One-Piece Boom
A
E
I
D
C
H
G
F
L J K
B
FG008161
Figure 2
Dimension
5.6 m (18' 4") One-Piece Boom
No. Description
3.0 m (9' 10") 2.4 m (7' 10")
2.75 m (9') Arm 2.0 m (6' 7") Arm
Arm Arm
A Shipping Length 9,400 mm 30' 10" 9,420 mm 30' 11" 9,470 mm 31' 8" 9,520 mm 31' 3"
B Shipping Width 2,500 mm 8' 2" 2,500 mm 8' 2" 2,500 mm 8' 2" 2,500 mm 8' 2"
Shipping Height
C 3,490 mm 11' 5" 3,200 mm 10' 6" 3,200 mm 10' 6" 3,250 mm 10' 8"
(Boom)
D Height Over Cab 3,140 mm 10' 4" 3,140 mm 10' 4" 3,140 mm 10' 4" 3,140 mm 10' 4"
Counter Weight
E 2,750 mm 9' 2,750 mm 9' 2,750 mm 9' 2,750 mm 9'
Swing Clearance
F Ground Clearance 1' 2" 1' 2" 1' 2" 1' 2"
350 mm 350 mm 350 mm 350 mm
G Frame Clearance 1,259 mm 4' 2" 1,259 mm 4' 2" 1,259 mm 4' 2" 1,259 mm 4' 2"
Engine Cover
H 2,485 mm 8' 2" 2,485 mm 8' 2" 2,485 mm 8' 2" 2,485 mm 8' 2"
Height
Upper Housing
I 2,530 mm 8' 4" 2,530 mm 8' 4" 2,530 mm 8' 4" 2,530 mm 8' 4"
Width
J Wheel Base 2,850 mm 9' 4" 2,850 mm 9' 4" 2,850 mm 9' 4" 2,850 mm 9' 4"
K,L Tread Width 1,914 mm 6' 3" 1,914 mm 6' 3" 1,914 mm 6' 3" 1,914 mm 6' 3"

Page 10
Two-Piece Boom
I E
C
H
G
J
L
B
FG008162
Figure 3
Dimension
No. Description 5.4 m (17' 9") Two-Piece Boom
2.4 m (7' 10") Arm 2.0 m (6' 7") Arm
A Shipping Length 9,210 mm 30' 3" 9,275 mm 30' 5"
B Shipping Width 2,500 mm 8' 2" 2,500 mm 8' 2"
Shipping Height
C 3,140 mm 10' 4" 3,140 mm 10' 4"
(Boom)
D Height Over Cab 3,140 mm 10' 4" 3,140 mm 10' 4"
Counter Weight Swing
E 2,750 mm 9' 2,750 mm 9'
Clearance
F Ground Clearance 350 mm 1' 2" 350 mm 1' 2"
G Frame Clearance 1,259 mm 4' 2" 1,259 mm 4' 2"
H Engine Cover Height 2,485 mm 8' 2" 2,485 mm 8' 2"
I Upper Housing Width 2,530 mm 8' 4" 2,530 mm 8' 4"
J Wheel Base 2,850 mm 9' 4" 2,850 mm 9' 4"
K,L Tread Width 1,914 mm 6' 3" 1,914 mm 6' 3"

Page 11
WORKING RANGE
WARNING
The actual value for "Digging Reach," depends on the
stability and support provided by ground conditions.
Digging too far underneath the excavator if soil
conditions are wet, loose or unstable can collapse
ground support, which could cause injury and/or
equipment damage.

Page 12
One-Piece Boom
C
D
B
A FG008672
Figure 4
Dimension
5.6 m (18' 4") One-Piece Boom
No. Description
2.4 m (7' 10") 2.0 m (6' 7")
3.0 m (9' 10") Arm 2.75 m (9') Arm
Arm Arm
A Max. Digging Reach 10,000 mm (32' 10") 9,730 mm (31' 11") 9,430 mm (30' 11") 9,050 mm (29' 8")
B Max. Digging Depth 6,255 mm (20' 6") 6,010 mm (19' 9") 5,655 mm (18' 7") 5,255 mm (17' 3")
C Max. Digging Height 10,050 mm (32' 12") 9,800 mm (32' 2") 9,690 mm (31' 9") 9,435 mm (30' 11")
D Max. Loading Height 7,250 mm (23' 9") 7,020 mm (23' 0") 6,890 mm (22' 7") 6,650 mm (21' 10")
E Min. Swing Radius 3,440 mm (11' 3") 3,375 mm (11' 1") 3,390 mm (11' 1") 3,680 mm (12' 1")

Page 13
Two-Piece Boom
C
D
A
FG008673
Figure 5
Dimension
No. Description 5.4 m (17' 9") Two-Piece Boom
2.4 m (7' 10") Arm 2.0 m (6' 7") Arm
A Max. Digging Reach 9,405 mm (30' 10") 9,005 mm (29' 6")
B Max. Digging Depth 5,625 mm (18' 5") 5,225 mm (17' 2")
C Max. Digging Height 10,560 mm (34' 8") 10,210 mm (33' 6")
D Max. Loading Height 7,620 mm (24' 12") 7,275 mm (23' 10")
E Min. Swing Radius 3,185 mm (10' 5") 3,380 mm (11' 1")

Page 14
FRONT PIN SIZE
One-Piece Boom
A C E D F
B K H J G
FG009222
Figure 6
Mounting Pin Diameter, mm (Inches) Length, mm (Inches)

A 90 mm (3.54 in) 811 mm (31.93 in)
B 80 mm (3.15 in) 221 mm (8.7 in)
C 80 mm (3.15 in) 792 mm (31.18 in)
D 90 mm (3.54 in) 548 mm (21.57 in)
E 80 mm (3.15 in) 241 mm (9.49 in)
F 80 mm (3.15 in) 274 mm (10.79 in)
G 71 mm (2.80 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
H 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)
I 80 mm (3.15 in) 227 mm (8.94 in)
J 80 mm (3.15 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
K 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)

Page 15
Two-Piece Boom
A D C E G F H
B M J L I
FG009246
Figure 7

A 90 mm (3.54 in) 811 mm (31.93 in)
B 80 mm (3.15 in) 221 mm (8.70 in)
C 100 mm (3.94 in) 791 mm (31.14 in)
D 90 mm (3.54 in) 306 mm (12.05 in)
E 90 mm (3.54 in) 306 mm (12.05 in)
F 90 mm (3.54 in) 548 mm (21.57 in)
G 80 mm (3.15 in) 246 mm (9.69 in)
H 80 mm (3.15 in) 274 mm (10.79 in)
I 71 mm (2.80 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
J 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)
K 80 mm (3.15 in) 227 mm (8.94 in)
L 80 mm (3.15 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
M 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)

Page 16
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
Two-Piece
Boom Arm Bucket Blade Outrigger Chocking
Boom
Quantity 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
120 mm 135 mm 115 mm 130 mm 130 mm 100 mm 170 mm
Bore
(4.72") (5.31") (6.9") (5.12") (5.12") (3.94") (6.69")
1,450 mm 1,060 mm
1,225 mm (4' 9") (3' 6") 245 mm 391 mm 153 mm 748 mm
Stroke
(4' 0") 1,470 mm 1,025 mm (9.6") (1' 3") (6.02") (2' 5")
(4' 10") (3' 4")
Rod Dia. 85 mm 95 mm 80 mm 80 mm 80 mm 100 mm 105 mm
(3.35") (3.74") (3.15") (3.15") (3.15") (3.94") (4' 13")
1,990 mm 1,630 mm
Closed 1,800 mm (6' 6") (5' 4") 680 mm 858 mm 267 mm 1,253 mm
Length (5' 11") 2,010 mm 1,525 mm (2' 3") (2' 10") (10.51") (4' 1")
(6' 7") (5' 0")
Retract.
X O X X X X X
Cushion
Extend.
O O O X X X X
Cushion
Maker Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang Dongyang
* DIMENSIONS ARE FOR OPTION BOOM CYLINDERS

FOR TWO-PIECE BOOM.

Page 17
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Shipping Weight NON-ROPS 20,800 kg (45,856 lb)
ROPS 20,910 kg (46,099 lb)
Includes 10% fuel, 5,600 mm (18' 5") one-piece boom, 3,000 mm (9' 10")
arm, 0.86 m3 (1.12 yd3) bucket and front outrigger & rear dozer.
Counterweight 3,800 kg (8,377 lb)
Upper Turntable Weight 5,650 kg (12,456 lb)
Lower (Below Swing Bearing) Weight 7,185 kg (15,840 lb)
Operating Weight NON-ROPS 21,140 kg (46,605 lb) with full fuel tank and operator
ROPS 21,250 kg (46,848 lb) with full fuel tank and operator
Major Component Weight Standard Boom 1,335 kg (2,943 lb)
Boom Cylinder 166 kg (366 lb)
Arm (Standard) 675 kg (1,488 lb)
Arm Cylinder 239 kg (527 lb)
Bucket (Standard) 675 kg (1,488 lb)
Bucket Cylinder 153.5 kg (338 lb)
Dozer (Standard) 660 kg (1,455 lb) each
Dozer Cylinder 83 kg (183 lb)
Outrigger Cylinder 107 kg (236 lb) each
Digging Force:
Bucket Cylinder 124.6 KN or 12,701 kg (28,000 lb) - (with 3,000 mm arm)
Arm Cylinder 92.7 KN or 9,449 kg (20,832 lb) - (with 5,600 mm boom, 3,000 mm arm)
Fuel Tank Capacity 350 liters (92.5 U.S. gal.)
Hydraulic System Capacity 280 liters (74 U.S. gal.)
Bucket Heaped Capacity Range PCSA 0.66 - 0.86 m3 (0.86 - 1.13 yd3)
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Load Weight, Bucket and Arm Length
Compatibility Table for information on which bucket sizes may be
used safely with which arm length, for load material weights.
Travel Dimensions:
Ground Clearance 350 mm (1' 2")
Wheel Base 2,850 mm (9' 4")
Dozer Blade Width x Height 2,498 mm x 6200 mm (8' 2" x 2")
Tire Size (Std. Double) 8 x 10.0 - 20 - 14PR
Transport Dimensions:
Overall Length 9,400 mm (30' 10")
Overall Width 2,500 mm (8' 2")
Overall Height 3,490 mm (11' 5")
Transport Loading Ramp:
15° angle CAUTION: Refer to Transport Maximum Procedure for
Allowable Slope
Safe Shipping Instructions.

Page 18
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
Control Valve
Relief Valves (Main): 350 kg/cm2 (4,978 psi) - travel
330/350 kg/cm2 (4,694/4,978 psi) - all other
Left Side Spools: Dozer/Outrigger
(28 mm [1.10"] diameter) Swing
Boom 2
Arm 1
Right Side Spools: Travel
(28 mm [1.10"] diameter) Option
Bucket
Boom 1
Arm 2
Overload Relief Pressure: 360 kg/cm2 (5,120 psi)

Boom, Arm, Bucket, Dozer/Outrigger
Remote Travel Control Valve

Type: Pilot Control
Pressure/Stroke: 28 kg/cm2 (398 psi) at at 3.8 mm (0.15") stroke
Remote Implement Control Valve

Type: Pilot Control
Pressure/Stroke: 26 kg/cm2 (370 psi) at 6.5 mm (0.256") or 7.5 mm
(0.295") stroke
Pilot Accumulator
PilotNitrogen Charge: 15 kg/cm2 (213 psi)
Volume: 320 cc (19.5 in3)
Brake Accumulator
Nitrogen Charge: 30 kg/cm2 (427 psi)
Volume: 750 cc (45.8 in3)

Page 19
SYSTEM COMPONENT
SPECIFICATIONS
DRIVE SYSTEM
Propeller Shaft (Front and Rear)
Max. Allowable Torque 425 kg•m (3,074 ft lb)
Max. Joint Angle 22.5°
Max. Rotating Speed 5,000 rpm
Tire and Wheel; Standard
Type Double
Tire 10.00 - 20 - 14PR, OTR, Tube
Rim 7.5V x 20
Disc Offset 155 mm (6.1 in)
SWING MECHANISM
Swing Reduction Gear
Drive Type 2-Stage Planetary Gear
Reduction Ratio 19.636
Max. Output Speed 81 rpm
Max. Output Torque 1,178 kg•m (8,521 ft lb)
Pinion Gear (Built in Reduction Gear)
Type Spur Gear
Gear P.C.D Dia 156 mm (6.14 in)
No. of Teeth 13
Module 12
Swing Bearing
Type Ball Bearing, Internal Gear
Gear P.C.D Dia 1,104 mm (43.46 in)
No. of Teeth 92
Ball Dia. Dia 31.75 mm (1.25 in)
Race O.D. Dia 1,327 mm (52.24 in)
Race Height 111.5 mm (4.39 in)
Static Thrust Load 39,500 kg (87,083 lb)
Weight 255 kg (562 lb)
Swing Performance
Max Swing Speed 11 rpm
Max Swing Torque 6,387 kg•m (46,197 ft lb)
Parking Brake
Control Type Pilot Pressure, Mechanical
Brake Torque 63 kg•m (456 ft lb)
Brake Release Pressure 23.0 kg/cm2 (327 psi)

Page 20
Swing Safety Lock
Type Manual Pin Locking
Motor Accessory
Brake Time Delayer 5 (+3 / -0) Sec.
Make Up Valve Characteristic 3 kg/cm2 (43 psi) at 120 lpm (31.7 gpm)
BRAKE SYSTEM
Accumulator
Nitrogen Charge Pressure 30 kg/cm2 (427 psi)
Volume 0.75 Liter (0.79 qt)
Service Brake Valve
Max Output Pressure 80.0 ± 3.0 kg/cm2 (1,137.9 ± 42.7 psi)
Brake Filter
Filtration Rating 20 micron, 1,000 cm2
Bypass Valve Pressure
3.5 kg/cm2 (50 psi) at 5 Liter/min
System and Pressure
System Full Hydraulic, Dual Line
Service Brake Pressure 80.0 kg/cm2 (1,137.9 psi)
Brake Distance 6.56 m (21' 6") at 24 km/h (15 MPH)
STEERING SYSTEM
Steering Cylinder (Built-in Front Axle)
Bore Size 100.0 mm (3.94 in)
Rod Diameter 50.0 mm (1.97 in)
Stroke 86.0 mm (3.39 in)
Maximum Pressure 180.0 kg/cm2 (2,560 psi)
CHOCKING SYSTEM
Chocking Valve
Maximum Working Pressure 400 kg/cm2 (5,689 psi)
Check Valve Cracking Pressure 2.0 kg/cm2 (28.4 psi)
Make-up Pressure
3.0 kg/cm2 (42.7 psi)
Oscillating Angle ± 8°

Page 21
ENGINE PERFORMANCE
CURVES (PER DIN 6270
STANDARD)
80
TORQUE (kg.m)
70
60
150
POWER OUTPUT (ps)
100
FUEL CONSUMPTION (g/ps.h)

50 160
150
140
500 1000 1500 2000
REVOLUTION (rpm)
FG007171
Figure 8

Page 22
Condition Specification
Engine Model DL06
Barometric Pressure 760 mmHg (20°C (68°F))
∅660.4 mm, SUCKER
Cooling Fan
(26 in)
Alternator 24V x 60A
Air Cleaner Installed
Muffler Installed
Performance Standard DIN 6270

164 ps @ 2,000 rpm
Power
(162 hp @ 2,000 rpm)
72 kg•m @ 1,400 rpm
Max. Torque
(521 ft lb @ 1,400 rpm)
150 g/ps•h
Fuel Consumption (Rated)
(5.36 oz/hp•h)

Page 23
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF
WORKLOAD MATERIALS
IMPORTANT
Weights are approximations of estimated average
volume and mass. Exposure to rain, snow or ground
water; settling or compaction due to overhead weight,
chemical or industrial processing or changes due to
thermal or chemical transformations could all increase
the value of weights listed in the table.
Low Weight or Medium Weight or High Weight or

Density Density Density
Material
1,100 kg/m3 1,600 kg/m 3 2,000 kg/m3
(1,850 lb/yd3), or Less (2,700 lb/yd3), or Less (3,370 lb/yd3), or Less
401 kg/m3
Charcoal --------------------- ---------------------
(695 lb/yd3)
433 kg/m3
Coke, blast furnace size --------------------- ---------------------
(729 lb/yd3)
449 kg/m3
Coke, foundry size --------------------- ---------------------
(756 lb/yd3)
Coal, bituminous slack, 801 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
piled (1,350 lb/yd3)
Coal, bituminous r. of 881 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
m., piled (1,485 lb/yd3)
897 kg/m3
Coal, anthracite --------------------- ---------------------
(1,512 lb/yd3)
Clay, DRY, in broken 1,009 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
lumps (1,701 lb/yd3)
Clay, DAMP, natural 1,746 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
bed (2,943 lb/yd3)
Cement, Portland, DRY 1,506 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
granular (2,583 lb/yd3)
Cement, Portland, DRY 1,362 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
clinkers (2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Dolomite, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
Earth, loamy, DRY, 1,202 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
loose (2,025 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Earth, DRY, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)

Page 24
Low Weight or Medium Weight or High Weight or
Density Density Density
Material
1,100 kg/m3 1,600 kg/m 3 2,000 kg/m3
(1,850 lb/yd3), or Less (2,700 lb/yd3), or Less (3,370 lb/yd3), or Less
1,762 kg/m3
Earth, WET, muddy --------------------- ---------------------
(2,970 lb/yd3)
Gypsum, calcined, 961 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
(heated, powder) (1,620 lb/yd3)
Gypsum, crushed to 3 1,522 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
inch size (2,565 lb/yd3)
Gravel, DRY, packed 1,810 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
fragments (3,051 lb/yd3)
Gravel, WET, packed 1,922 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
fragments (3,240 lb/yd3)
Limestone, graded 1,282 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
above 2 (2,160 lb/yd3)
Limestone, graded 1,362 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
1-1/2 or 2 (2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Limestone, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,602 kg/m3
Limestone, fine --------------------- ---------------------
(2,705 lb/yd3)
1,282 kg/m3
Phosphate, rock --------------------- ---------------------
(2,160 lb/yd3)
929 kg/m3
Salt --------------------- ---------------------
(1,566 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Snow, light density --------------------- ---------------------
(891 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Sand, DRY, loose --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,922 kg/m3
Sand, WET, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(3,240 lb/yd3)
1,362 kg/m3
Shale, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(2,295 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Sulphur, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(1,620 lb/yd3)

Page 25
PERFORMANCE TESTS AND
STANDARDS
1. Main Relief Pressure
normal operation : 320 kg/cm2 (4,551.5 psi)
with high travel "Pressure Up" : 350 kg/cm2 (4,970 psi)

2. Actuator Speeds
Operation Unit Power Mode Standard Mode
Up seconds 3.2 ± 0.4 3.6 ± 0.4

One-Piece Boom
Down seconds 2.1 ± 0.4 2.2 ± 0.4
Up seconds 5.8 ± 0.5 6.0 ± 0.5

Two-Piece Boom
Down seconds 5.8 ± 0.5 5.8 ± 0.5
Dump seconds 2.5 ± 0.4 2.6 ± 0.4

Arm
Crowd seconds 2.9 ± 0.4 3.0 ± 0.4
Dump seconds 2.1 ± 0.4 2.3 ± 0.4

Bucket
Crowd seconds 3.5 ± 0.4 3.6 ± 0.4
Up seconds 2.2 ± 0.3 2.2 ± 0.3

Dozer
Down seconds 1.9 ± 0.3 1.9 ± 0.3
Swing (3 Revolutions) seconds 16.5 ± 1.0 16.4 ± 1.0
Up seconds 4.2 ± 0.3 4.2 ± 0.3

Outrigger
Down seconds 3.8 ± 0.3 3.8 ± 0.3
High rpm (min.) 3,090 ± 50
Propeller Shaft Low rpm (min.) 771 ± 50
Creep rpm (min.) 314 ± 50
Braking Distance m 6.56 m (21' 6") at 24 km/h (15 MPH)

Page 26
EXCAVATOR PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS
Evaluation of equipment performance and operating condition
can be made by running the excavator through a series of
different tests, and recording results with a stop watch and
tape measure.
Compare results of performance tests against the
specifications and standards that follow, which are for
equipment in new or renewed condition.
Test Conditions
1. All tests should be performed on a flat, level, firm
supporting ground surface.
2. All recommended, applicable maintenance and
adjustment service should be completed before testing.
3. Hydraulic fluid and engine oil should be of appropriate
viscosity for ambient weather conditions. Warm up
hydraulic oil to standard operating temperature,
between 45° - 55°C (112° - 135°F).
4. Run all tests with the engine speed control set to
maximum rpm.
5. Repeat tests with Power Mode engine control settings
at both Standard Mode (standard work mode) and FG007172
Power Mode (high speed mode). Travel speed tests Figure 9
should also be repeated at both high and low speed.
Travel Speed Tests
Travel Mode Speed

High Speed (III) 36.9 km/h (22.9 MPH)
Low Speed (II) 9.2 km/h (5.72 MPH)
Creep Speed (I) 3.7 km/h (2.3 MPH)
1. Block up all wheels securely.

2. Check that rpm at drive shaft is above;
3,090 ± 50 rpm at high speed.
771 ± 50 rpm at low speed.
314 ± 50 rpm at creep speed.

Page 27
5
3
4
FG007173
Figure 10
1 Travel Motor
2 Transmission
3 Propeller Shaft
4 Front Axle
5 Swivel Joint

Page 28
Swing Speed and Deceleration Force
Test
Swing Speed Test
1.5 m
FG007174
Figure 11
Extend the bucket cylinder completely and retract the arm

cylinder, as shown in Figure 11, to test swing speed. The
lowest point of the bucket will be approximately 1.5 m (4'
11") off the ground.
Use paint marks at the same point on the turntable and
undercarriage, or select alternate measuring locations and
use a stopwatch to time 3 full 360° rotations. The time
required for 3 revolutions should be between 16.4 and 16.5
seconds in Standard and Power Mode.

Page 29
Swing Deceleration Force Test
With the boom, arm and bucket in the same position as for
the swing speed test, rotate the turntable so that the boom
is evenly centered between the side frames, pointing straight
ahead. Locate the 90° reference point, perpendicular to the
boom. Mark the turntable and undercarriage with paint at the 3
90° point.
Make several attempts to rotate the turntable exactly 90°,
starting from the boom straight ahead position. Engage the
swing lever and brake at the 90° point, shown as "swing 2
stop" in Figure 12.
Record how far the turntable drifts past the stop point,
measuring the distance between paint marks. Maximum
distance should be less than 700 mm (47-1/4"), in both
Power Mode and Standard Mode.
1
Reference
Description
Number
1 Start Swing
2 90° Swing
FG007175
3 Swing Force Figure 12
4 Swing Stop
Cylinder Performance Tests

NOTE: All tests are performed with standard boom, arm
and bucket configuration. The bucket should be
empty.
Boom Cylinders Test

The starting points for the test are with the boom and arm
extended away from the excavator, and the bucket curled
inward. The arm cylinder should be fully retracted; boom
and bucket cylinders must be extended. Test movement in
both directions, several times, and average results for both
Power Mode S and Power Mode H.
Arm Cylinder Test

Start with the boom up and the arm cylinder fully retracted.
Test movement in both directions several times, between the
"crowd" and "dump" positions, and average the results of
both tests, in both standard and extra-duty power modes.

Page 30
Bucket Cylinder Test
Start with the boom up and the teeth of the bucket hanging
vertically, 500 mm (1.5’ - 2’) above the ground. Dump and
crowd the bucket several times, and average results, for
both standard and extra-duty power modes.
Measurement in Seconds
Operation Power Mode Standard Mode
One-Piece Boom Up 3.2 ± 0.4 3.6 ± 0.4
One-Piece Boom Down 2.1 ± 0.4 2.2 ± 0.4
Two-Piece Boom Up 5.8 ± 0.5 6.0 ± 0.5
Two-Piece Boom Down 5.8 ± 0.5 5.8 ± 0.5
Arm Dump 2.5 ± 0.4 2.6 ± 0.4
Arm Crowd 2.9 ± 0.4 3.0 ± 0.4
Bucket Dump 2.1 ± 0.4 2.3 ± 0.4
Bucket Crowd 3.5 ± 0.4 3.6 ± 0.4
Hydraulic Cylinder Natural Drop Test

To check boom and arm cylinder tightness against the
specified performance standard for new cylinders, put a full
load of dirt in the bucket and move the attachment cylinders
so that the arm cylinder is extended 20 - 50 mm (1" - 2")
and boom cylinders are retracted the same amount, 20 - 50
mm (1" - 2"). The top of the bucket should be approximately
2 m (6’ - 7’) off the ground.
Turn off the engine and measure cylinder drop after 5
minutes. Maximum cylinder drops are as follows: boom and
bucket 20 mm (0.787"); arm 40 mm (1.57"); and blade 10
mm (0.39").

Page 31
Page 32
1General Maintenance
SP000016
GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SP000016
General
Maintenance
Procedures
Edition 1
General Maintenance Procedures SP000016

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
General Maintenance Procedures
Welding Precautions and Guidelines ................. 6
Hydraulic System - General Precautions........... 7
Maintenance Service and Repair Procedure..... 9
General Precautions ....................................................... 9
Hydraulic System Cleanliness and Oil Leaks . 10
Maintenance Precautions for Hydraulic System Service
...................................................................................... 10
Oil Leakage Precautions.............................................. 11
Cleaning and Inspection ................................... 12
General Guidelines ....................................................... 12
Bearing Inspection ........................................................ 13

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

ALL MODELS ALL RANGES

Page 5
WELDING PRECAUTIONS AND
GUIDELINES
IMPORTANT
To avoid accidents, personal injury and the possibility
of causing damage to the machine or to components,
welding must only be performed by properly trained and
qualified personnel, who possess the correct
certification (when required) for the specific welding
fabrication or specialized repair being performed.
WARNING
Structural elements of the machine may be built from a
variety of steels. These could contain unique alloys or
may have been heat treated to obtain particular strength
characteristics. It is extremely important that welding
repairs on these types of steel are performed with the
proper procedures and equipment. If repairs are
performed incorrectly, structural weakening or other
damage to the machine (that is not always readily
visible) could be caused. Always consult DOOSAN After
Sales Service before welding on integral components
(loader arm, frames, car body, track frames, turntable,
attachment, etc.) of the machine. It is possible that
some types of structurally critical repairs may require
Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant testing, to make
sure there are no hidden cracks or damage, before the
machine can be returned to service.
CAUTION
Always perform welding procedures with the proper
safety equipment on hand. Adequate ventilation and a
dry work area are absolutely essential. Keep a fire
extinguisher nearby and always wear protective clothing
and the recommended type of eye protection.

Page 6
CAUTION
Observe the following safety precautions:
1. Use extra caution and adequate safety shielding
when welding near fuel and oil tanks, batteries,
hydraulic piping lines or other fire hazards.
2. Never weld when the engine is running. Battery
cables must be disconnected before the welding
procedure is started.
3. Never weld on a wet or damp surface. The
presence of moisture causes hydrogen
embrittlement and structural weakening of the weld.
4. If welding procedures are being performed near
cylinder rods, operator's cabin window areas or any
other assemblies that could be damaged by weld
spatters, use adequate shielding protection in front
of the assembly.
5. During equipment setup, always attach ground
cables directly to the area or component being
welded to prevent arcing through bearings,
bushings, or spacers.
6. Always use correct welding rods for the type of
weld being performed and observe recommended
precautions and time constraints. AWS Class E7018
welding rods for low alloy to medium carbon steel
must be used within two hours after removal from
a freshly opened container. Class E11018G welding
rods for T-1 and other higher strength steel must
be used within 1/2 hour.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM -
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Always maintain oil level in the system at recommended
levels. Assemblies that operate under heavy loads, at high
speed, with extremely precise dimensional tolerances
between moving parts - pistons and cylinders, or shoes and
swash plates, for example - can be severely damaged if oil
supply runs dry.
Assemblies can be run dry and damaged severely in a very
short time when piping or hoses are disconnected to repair
leaks and/or replace damaged components. Hoses that are
inadvertently switched during disassembly (inlet for outlet
and vice versa), air introduced into the system or
assemblies that are low on oil due to neglect or careless
maintenance, could all produce sufficient fluid loss to cause
damage.

Page 7
When starting the engine (particularly after long layoff or
storage intervals), make sure that all hydraulic controls and
operating circuits are in neutral, or "OFF." That will prevent
pumps or other components that may be temporarily oil
starved from being run under a load.
Replacement of any hydraulic system component could
require thorough cleaning, flushing, and some amount of
prefilling with fresh, clean oil if the protective seal on
replacement parts has obviously been broken or if seal
integrity may have been compromised. When protective
seals are removed before installation and reassembly,
inspect all replacement parts carefully, before they are
installed. If the replacement part is bone dry (with no trace
of factory prelube) or has been contaminated by dirt or by
questionable oils, flushing and prefilling with clean hydraulic
fluid is recommended.
Vibration, irregular or difficult movement or unusual noise
from any part of the hydraulic system could be an indication
of air in the system (and many other types of problems). As
a general precaution (and to help minimize the risk of
potential long-term damage), allow the engine to run at no-
load idle speed immediately after initial start-up. Hydraulic
fluid will circulate, releasing any air that may have been
trapped in the system before load demands are imposed.
A daily walk-around prestart equipment safety inspection,
including a quick visual scan for any exterior evidence of
leaking hydraulic fluid, can help extend the service life of
system components.
IMPORTANT
Hydraulic system operating conditions (repetitive
cycling, heavy work loads, fluid circulating under high-
pressure) make it extremely critical that dust, grit or any
other type of contamination be kept out of the system.
Observe fluid and filter change maintenance interval
recommendations and always preclean any exterior
surface of the system before it is exposed to air. For
example, the reservoir fill cap and neck area, hoses that
have to be disassembled, and the covers and external
surfaces of filter canisters should all be cleaned before
disassembly.

Page 8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE AND
REPAIR PROCEDURE
General Precautions
Fluid level and condition should always be checked
whenever any other type of maintenance service or repair is
being performed.
NOTE: If the unit is being used in an extreme temperature
environment (in sub-freezing climates or in high
temperature, high humidity tropical conditions),
frequent purging of moisture condensation from the
hydraulic reservoir drain tap should be a regular and
frequent part of the operating routine. In more
moderate, temperate climates, draining reservoir
sediment and moisture may not be required more
than once or twice every few months.
Inspect drained oil and used filters for signs of abnormal
coloring or visible fluid contamination at every oil change.
Abrasive grit or dust particles will cause discoloration and
darkening of the fluid. Visible accumulations of dirt or grit
could be an indication that filter elements are overloaded
(and will require more frequent replacement) or that
disintegrating bearings or other component failures in the
hydraulic circuit may be imminent or have already occurred.
Open the drain plugs on the main pump casings and check
and compare drain oil in the pumps. Look for evidence of
grit or metallic particles.
Vibration or unusual noise during operation could be an
indication of air leaking into the circuit (Refer to the
appropriate Troubleshooting section for component or unit for
procedures.), or it may be evidence of a defective pump.
The gear type pilot pump could be defective, causing low
pilot pressure, or a main pump broken shoe or piston could
be responsible.
NOTE: If equipped, indicated operating pressure, as shown
on the multidisplay digital gauge on the Instrument
Panel ("F-Pump" and "R-Pump") will be reduced as a
result of a mechanical problem inside the pump.
However, pressure loss could also be due to
cavitation or air leakage, or other faults in the
hydraulic system.
Check the exterior case drain oil in the main pumps. If no
metallic particles are found, make sure there is no air in the
system. Unbolt and remove the tank return drain line from
the top part of the swing motor, both travel motors and each
main pump. If there is air in any one of the drain lines,
carefully prefill the assembly before bolting together the
drain line piping connections. Run the system at low rpm.

Page 9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
CLEANLINESS AND OIL LEAKS
Maintenance Precautions for Hydraulic

System Service
Whenever maintenance, repairs or any other type of
troubleshooting or service is being performed, it's important
to remember that the hydraulic system - including both the
interior and exterior surfaces of assemblies, and every drop
of operating fluid - must be protected from contamination.
Dust and other foreign contaminants are major contributors
to premature wear in hydraulic circuits. The narrow
tolerances, rapidly moving parts and high operating
pressures of the system require that fluid be kept as clean
as possible. The performance and dependability of the
machine (and the service lift of individual components) can
be noticeably reduced if proper precautions are not
observed:
• Use a safe, noncombustible, evaporative type,
low-residue solvent and thoroughly clean exterior
surfaces of assemblies before any part of the
circuit is opened up or disassembled.
NOTE: It's just as important to clean the cap and
reservoir top before routine fluid changes
or quick checks as it is before major
repairs. (Accumulated dirt attracts
moisture, oil and other fluids - and more
dirt.)
• Keep dismantled parts covered during
disassembly. Use clean caps, plugs or tape to
protect the disconnected openings of flanges,
manifolds and piping.
• Do not allow cleaning solvents or other fluids to
mix with the oil in the system. Use clean oil to
flush any traces of solvent or other residue before
reassembly.
• If metal or rubber fragments are found in the
system, flush and replace all fluid in the system
and troubleshoot the circuit to identify the source
of contamination.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that cleaning solvents will be compatible with
rubber materials used in the hydraulic system. Many
petroleum based compounds can cause swelling,
softening, or other deterioration of system sealing
elements, such as O-rings, caps and other seals.

Page 10
Oil Leakage Precautions
Oil that is visibly seeping from joints or seals should always
serve as a "red flag" alarm.
Leaks must alert the machine operator and maintenance
crew that air, water and dirt have an open, free passageway
through which to enter the circuit. Harsh, corrosive salt air,
freezing and thawing condensation cycles and working
environments that are full of fine dust are especially
hazardous. Clogging of valve spools or external piping
(especially pilot circuit piping) can gradually diminish or very
suddenly put a complete stop to normal hydraulic function.
You can prevent having to make these types of repairs by
following recommended assembly procedures:
1. Use new O-rings and oil seals whenever hydraulic
assemblies are rebuilt.
2. Prepare joint surfaces before assembly by
checking alignment and flatness. Clean and repair
corrosion or any other damage.
3. Follow bolt torque recommendations and all other
assembly requirements.
NOTE: Grease lip seals before assembly.
Figure 1

Page 11
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
General Guidelines
All parts must be clean to permit an effective inspection.
During assembly, it is very important that no dirt or foreign
material enters unit being assembled. Even minute particles
can cause malfunction of close fitting parts such as thrust
bearing, matched parts, etc.
WARNING
Care should be exercised to avoid inhalation of vapors,
exposure to skin and creating fire hazards when using
solvent type cleaners.
1. Clean all metal parts thoroughly using a suitable

cleaning fluid. It is recommended that parts be
immersed in cleaning fluid and moved up and down
slowly until all oils, lubricants, and/or foreign materials
are dissolved and parts are thoroughly clean.
2. For bearings that can be removed, soak them in a
suitable cleaning fluid for a minute or two, then remove
bearings from cleaning fluid and strike flat against a
block of wood to dislodge solidified particles of
lubricant. Immerse again in cleaning fluid to flush out
particles. Repeat above operation until bearings are
thoroughly clean. To dry bearings, use moisture-free
compressed air. Be careful to direct air stream across
bearing to avoid spinning bearings that are not
lubricated. DO NOT SPIN BEARINGS WHEN DRYING;
bearings may be rotated slowly by hand to facilitate
drying process.
3. Carefully inspect all bearing rollers, cages and cups for
wear, chipping or nicks to determine condition. Do not
replace a bearing cone or cup individually without
replacing mating cup or cone at the same time. After
inspection, dip bearings in light weight oil and wrap in
clean lintless cloth or paper to protect them until
installation.
For those bearings that are to be inspected in place;
inspect bearings for roughness of rotation, scoring,
pitting, cracked or chipped races. If any of these
defects are found, replace bearings. Also, inspect
defective bearing housing and/or shaft for grooved,
galled or burred conditions that indicate bearing has
been turning in its housing or on its shaft.
4. It is more economical to replace oil seals, O-rings,
sealing rings, gaskets and retaining rings when unit is
disassembled than waiting for premature failures; refer
to latest Micro Fiche and/or Parts Book for replacement

Page 12
items. Be extremely careful when installing sealing
members, to avoid cutting or scratching. Curling under
of any seal lip will seriously impair its efficiency. Apply
a thin coat of Loctite #120 to outer diameter, of metal
casing, on oil seals to assure an oil tight fit into
retainer. Use extreme care not to get Loctite on lips of
oil seals. If this happens, that portion of the seal will
become brittle and allow leakage.
When replacing lip type seals, make sure spring loaded
side is towards oil to be sealed.
5. If available, use magna-flux or similar process for
checking for cracks that are not visible to the eye.
Examine teeth on all gears carefully for wear, pitting,
chipping, nicks, cracks or scores. Replace all gears
showing cracks or spots where case hardening has
worn through. Small nicks may be removed with
suitable hone. Inspect shafts and quills to make certain
they have not been sprung, bent, or splines twisted,
and that shafts are true.
NOTE: Spline wear is not considered detrimental
except where it affects tightness of splined
parts.
Inspect thrust washers for distortion, scores, burs, and
wear. Replace thrust washer if defective or worn.
6. Inspect bores and bearing surfaces of cast parts and
machined surfaces for scratches, wear, grooves and
dirt. Remove any scratches and burrs with crocus cloth.
Remove foreign material. Replace any parts that are
deeply grooved or scratched which would affect their
operation.
Bearing Inspection
The conditions of the bearing are vital to the smooth and
efficient operation of the machinery. When any component
containing bearings is disassembled, always carefully
examine the condition of the bearings and all of its
components for wear and damage.
Once the bearing is removed, clean all parts thoroughly
using a suitable cleaning solution. If the bearing is
excessively dirty soak the bearing assembly in a light
solution and move the bearing around until all lubricants and
or foreign materials are dissolved and the parts are
thoroughly clean.
When drying bearings, moisture free compressed air can be
used. Be careful not to direct the air in a direction which will
force the bearing to dry spin while not being properly
lubricated.
After the bearings have been cleaned and dried, carefully
inspect all bearing rollers, cages and cups for wear, chipping
or nicks. If the bearing cannot be removed and is to be

Page 13
inspected in place, check foe roughness of rotation, scoring,
pitting, cracked or chipped races. If any of these defects are
found replace the whole bearing assembly. NEVER replace
the bearing alone without replacing the mating cup or the
cone at the same time.
After inspection lightly coat the bearing and related parts
with oil and wrap in a clean lintless cloth or paper and
protect them from moisture and other foreign materials until
installation.
It is also important to inspect the bearing housing and/or
shaft for grooved, galled or burred conditions that indicate
that the bearing has been turning in its housing or on its
shaft.
If available, use magna-flux or similar process for checking
for cracks that are not visible to the naked eye.
The following illustrations will aid in identifying and
diagnosing some of the bearing related problems.
NOTE: The illustrations will only show tapered roller
bearings, but the principles of identifying, diagnosing
and remedying the defects are common to all styles
and types of bearings.
Normal Bearing
Smooth even surfaces with no discoloration or marks.
Figure 2
Bent Cage
Cage damage due to improper handling or tool usage.
Figure 3

Page 14
Replace bearing.
Figure 4
Galling
Metal smears on roller ends due to overheat, lubricant
failure or overload.
Replace bearing - check seals and check for proper
lubrication.
Figure 5
Abrasive Step Wear

Pattern on roller ends caused by fine abrasives.
Clean all parts and housings, check all parts and housings,
check seals and bearings and replace if leaking, rough or
noisy.
Figure 6

Page 15
Etching
Bearing surfaces appear gray or grayish black in color with
related etching away of material usually at roller spacing.
Replace bearings - check seals and check for proper
lubrication.
Figure 7
Misalignment
Outer race misalignment due to foreign object.
Clean related parts and replace bearing. Make sure races
are properly seated.
Figure 8
Indentations
Surface depressions on race and rollers caused by hard
particles of foreign materials.
Clean all parts and housings, check seals and replace
bearings if rough or noisy.
Figure 9

Page 16
Fatigue Spalling
Flaking of surface metal resulting from fatigue.
Replace bearing - clean all related parts.
Figure 10
Brinelling
Surface indentations in raceway caused by rollers either
under impact loading or vibration while the bearing is not
rotating.
Replace bearing if rough or noisy.
Figure 11
Cage Wear
Wear around outside diameter of cage and roller pockets
caused by abrasive material and inefficient lubrication.
Replace bearings - check seals.
Figure 12

Page 17
Abrasive Roller Wear
Pattern on races and rollers caused by fine abrasives.
Clean all parts and housings, check seals and bearings and
replace if leaking, rough or noisy.
Figure 13
Cracked Inner Race

Race cracked due to improper fit, cocking or poor bearing
seat.
Replace all parts and housings, check seals and bearings
and replace if leaking.
Figure 14
Smears
Smearing of metal due to slippage caused by poor fitting,
lubrication, overheating, overloads or handling damage.
Replace bearings, clean related parts and check for proper
fit and lubrication.
Replace shaft if damaged.
Figure 15

Page 18
Frettage
Corrosion set up by small relative movement of parts with
no lubrication.
Replace bearing. Clean all related parts. Check seals and
check for proper lubrication.
Figure 16
Heat Discoloration
Heat discoloration can range from faint yellow to dark blue
resulting from overload or incorrect lubrication.
Excessive heat can cause softening of races or rollers.
To check for loss of temper on races or rollers, a simple file
test may be made. A file drawn over a tempered part will
grab and cut metal, whereas a file drawn over a hard part
will glide readily with no metal cutting.
Replace bearing if over heating damage is indicated. Check
seals and other related parts for damage.
Figure 17
Stain Discoloration
Discoloration can range from light brown to black caused by
incorrect lubrication or moisture.
if the stain can be removed by light polishing or if no
evidence of overheating is visible, the bearing can be
reused.
Check seals and other related parts for damage.
Figure 18

Page 19
Page 20
SP000813
STANDARD TORQUESSP000813
Standard
Torques
Edition 1
Standard Torques SP000813

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Standard Torques
Torque Values for Standard Metric Fasteners.. 6
Torque Values for Standard U.S. Fasteners..... 7
Type 8 Phosphate Coated Hardware ................ 9
Torque Values for Hose Clamps ..................... 10
Torque Values for Split Flanges ...................... 11
Torque Wrench Extension Tools ...................... 12
Torque Multiplication .................................................... 12
Other Uses for Torque Wrench Extension Tools ...... 13
Tightening Torque Specifications (Metric) .................. 14

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

ALL MODELS ALL RANGES

Page 5
TORQUE VALUES FOR
STANDARD METRIC
FASTENERS
NOTE: The units for the torque values are kg•m (ft lb).
Grade
Dia. x Pitc
h (mm)
3.6 4.6 4.8 5.6 5.8 6.6 6.8 6.9 8.8 10.9 12.9
(4A) (4D) (4S) (5D) (5S) (6D) (6S) (6G) (8G) (10K) (12K)
0.15 0.16 0.25 0.22 0.31 0.28 0.43 0.48 0.50 0.75 0.90
M5 x Std.
(1.08) (1.15) (1.80) (1.59) (2.24) (2.02) (3.11) (3.47) (3.61) (5.42) (6.50)
0.28 0.30 0.45 0.40 0.55 0.47 0.77 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.50
M6 x Std.
(2.02) (2.16) (3.25) (2.89) (3.97) (3.39) (5.56) (6.14) (6.50) (9.04) (10.84)
0.43 0.46 0.70 0.63 0.83 0.78 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.95 2.35
M7 x Std.
(3.11) (3.32) (5.06) (4.55) (6.00) (5.64) (8.67) (9.40) (10.12) (14.10) (16.99)
0.70 0.75 1.10 1.00 1.40 1.25 1.90 2.10 2.20 3.10 3.80
M8 x Std.
(5.06) (5.42) (7.95) (7.23) (10.12) (9.04) (13.74) (15.18) (15.91) (22.42) (27.48)
0.73 0.80 1.20 1.00 1.50 1.35 2.10 2.30 2.40 3.35 4.10
M8 x 1
(5.28) (5.78) (8.67) (7.23) (10.84) (9.76) (15.18) (16.63) (17.35) (24.23) (29.65)
1.35 1.40 2.20 1.90 2.70 2.35 3.70 4.20 4.40 6.20 7.20
M10 x Std.
(9.76) (10.12) (15.91) (13.74) (19.52) (19.99) (26.76) (30.37) (31.18) (44.84) (52.07)
1.50 1.60 2.50 2.10 3.10 2.80 4.30 4.90 5.00 7.00 8.40
M10 x 1.25
(10.84) (11.57) (18.08) (15.18) (22.42) (20.25) (31.10) (35.44) (36.16) (50.63) (60.75)
2.40 2.50 3.70 3.30 4.70 4.20 6.30 7.20 7.50 10.50 12.50
M12 x Std.
(17.35) (18.08) (26.76) (23.86) (33.99) (30.37) (45.56) (52.07) (54.24) (75.94) (90.41)
2.55 2.70 4.00 3.50 5.00 4.50 6.80 7.70 8.00 11.20 13.40
M12 x 1.25
(18.44) (19.52) (28.93) (25.31) (36.16) (32.54) (49.18) (55.69) (57.86) (81.00) (96.92)
3.70 3.90 6.00 5.20 7.50 7.00 10.00 11.50 12.00 17.00 20.00
M14 x Std.
(26.76) (28.20) (13.23) (37.61) (54.24) (50.63) (72.33) (83.17) (86.79) (122.96) (144.66)
4.10 4.30 6.60 5.70 8.30 7.50 11.10 12.50 13.00 18.50 22.00
M14 x 1.5
(29.65) (31.10) (47.73) (41.22) (60.03) (54.24) (80.28) (90.41) (94.02) (11.26) (158.12)
5.60 6.00 9.00 8.00 11.50 10.50 15.50 17.90 18.50 26.00 31.00
M16 x Std.
(40.50) (43.39) (65.09) (57.86) (83.17) (75.94) (112.11) (129.47) (133.81) (188.05) (224.22)
6.20 6.50 9.70 8.60 12.50 11.30 17.00 19.50 20.00 28.00 35.50
M16 x 1.5
(44.84) (47.01) (70.16) (62.20) (90.41) (81.73) (122.96) (141.04) (144.66) (202.52) (256.77)
7.80 8.30 12.50 11.00 16.00 14.50 21.00 27.50 28.50 41.00 43.00
M18 x Std.
(56.41) (60.03) (90.41) (79.56) (115.72) (104.87) (151.89) (198.90) (206.14) (296.55) (311.01)
9.10 9.50 14.40 12.50 18.50 16.70 24.50 27.50 28.50 41.00 49.00
M18 x 1.5
(65.82) (68.71) (104.15) (90.41) (133.81) (120.79) (177.20) (198.90) (206.14) (296.55) (354.41)
11.50 12.00 18.00 16.00 22.00 19.00 31.50 35.00 36.00 51.00 60.00
M20 x Std.
(83.17) (86.79) (130.19) (115.72) (159.12) (137.42) (227.83) (253.15) (260.38) (368.88) (433.98)
12.80 13.50 20.50 18.00 25.00 22.50 35.00 39.50 41.00 58.00 68.00
M20 x 1.5
(92.58) (97.64) (148.27) (130.19) (180.82) (162.74) (253.15) (285.70) (296.55) (419.51) (491.84)
15.50 16.00 24.50 21.00 30.00 26.00 42.00 46.00 49.00 67.00 75.00
M22 x Std.
(112.11) (115.72) (177.20) (151.89) (216.99) (188.05) (303.78) (332.71) (354.41) (484.61) (542.47)
17.00 18.50 28.00 24.00 34.00 29.00 47.00 52.00 56.00 75.00 85.00
M22 x 1.5
(122.96) (133.81) (202.52) (173.59) (245.92) (209.75) (339.95) (44.76) (405.04) (542.47) (614.80)
20.50 21.50 33.00 27.00 40.00 34.00 55.00 58.00 63.00 82.00 92.00
M24 x Std.
(148.27) (155.50) (238.68) (195.29) (289.32) (245.92) (397.81) (419.51) (455.67) (593.10) (655.43)
23.00 35.00 37.00 31.00 45.00 38.00 61.00 67.00 74.00 93.00 103.00
M24 x 2.0
(166.35) (253.15) (267.62) (224.22) (325.48) (202.52) (441.21) (484.61) (535.24) (672.66) (744.99)

Page 6
TORQUE VALUES FOR
STANDARD U.S. FASTENERS
S.A.E. Bolt Head
Type Description
Grade Marking
WILL HAVE NO MARKINGS IN THE CENTER OF THE

HEAD.
1 1 OR 2
Low or Medium Carbon Steel Not Heat Treated.
WILL HAVE THREE RADIAL LINES.

5 5
Quenched and Tempered Medium Carbon Steel.
WILL HAVE 6 RADIAL LINES.

8 8
Quenched and Tempered Special Carbon or Alloy Steel.
Recommended torque, in foot pounds, for all Standard

Application Nuts and Bolts, provided:
1. All thread surfaces are clean and lubricated with
SAE-30 engine oil. (See Note.)
2. Joints are rigid, that is, no gaskets or compressible
materials are used.
3. When reusing nuts or bolts, use minimum torque
values.
NOTE: Multiply the standard torque by:
0.65 When finished jam nuts are used.
0.70 When Molykote, white lead or similar
mixtures are used as lubricants.
0.75 When Parkerized bolts or nuts are
used.
0.85 When cadmium plated bolts or nuts and
zinc bolts w/waxed zinc nuts are used.
0.90 When hardened surfaces are used
under the nut or bolt head.
NOTE: When reusing bolts and nuts in service, use
minimum torque values.

Page 7
The following General Torque Values must be used in all
cases where SPECIAL TORQUE VALUES are not given.
NOTE: Torque values listed throughout this manual are lubricated (wet) threads; values should be
increased 1/3 for nonlubricated (dry) threads.
Heat Treated Material Grade 5 and Grade 8
Grade 5 Grade 8
Thread Size (3 Radial Dashes On Head) (6 Radial Dashes On Head)
Foot Pounds Newton Meter Foot Pounds Newton Meter
(ft lb) (Nm) (ft lb) (Nm)
1/4" - 20 6 8 9 12
1/4" - 28 7 9 11 15
5/16" - 18 13 18 18 24
5/16" - 24 15 20 21 28
3/8" - 16 24 33 34 46
3/8" - 24 27 37 38 52
7/16" - 14 38 52 54 73
7/16" - 20 42 57 60 81
1/2" - 13 58 79 82 111
1/2" - 20 65 88 90 122
9/16" - 12 84 114 120 163
9/16" - 18 93 126 132 179
5/8" - 11 115 156 165 224
5/8" - 18 130 176 185 251
3/4" - 10 205 278 290 393
3/4" - 16 240 312 320 434
7/8" - 9 305 414 455 617
7/8" - 14 334 454 515 698
1" - 8 455 617 695 942
1" - 14 510 691 785 1064
1 1/8" - 7 610 827 990 1342
1 1/8" - 12 685 929 1110 1505
1 1/4" - 7 860 1166 1400 1898
1 1/4" - 12 955 1295 1550 2102
1 3/8" - 6 1130 1532 1830 2481
1 3/8" - 12 1290 1749 2085 2827
1 1/2" - 6 1400 2034 2430 3295
1 1/2" - 12 1690 2291 2730 3701
1 3/4" - 5 2370 3213 3810 5166
2" - 4 1/2 3550 4813 5760 7810
NOTE: If any bolts and nuts are found loose or at
values less than what the chart states, it is
recommended that the loose bolt and/or nut be
replaced with a new one.

Page 8
TYPE 8 PHOSPHATE COATED
HARDWARE
This chart provides tightening torque for general purpose
applications using original equipment standard hardware as
listed in the Parts Manual for the machine involved. DO
NOT SUBSTITUTE. In most cases, original equipment
standard hardware is defined as Type 8, coarse thread bolts
and nuts and thru hardened flat washers (Rockwell "C" 38 -
45), all phosphate coated and assembled without
supplemental lubrication (as received) condition.
The torques shown below also apply to the following:
1. Phosphate coated bolts used in tapped holes in steel
or gray iron.
2. Phosphate coated bolts used with phosphate coated
prevailing torque nuts (nuts with distorted threads or
plastic inserts).
3. Phosphate coated bolts used with copper plated weld
nuts.
Markings on bolt heads or nuts indicate material grade
ONLY and are NOT to be used to determine required
torque.
Standard Torque ±10%

Nominal Thread Diameter Kilogram Meter Foot Pounds
(kg•m) (ft lb)
1/4" 1.1 8
5/16" 2.2 16
3/8" 3.9 28
7/16" 6.2 45
1/2" 9.7 70
9/16" 13.8 100
5/8" 19.4 140
3/4" 33.2 240
7/8" 53.9 390
1" 80.2 580
1 - 1/8" 113.4 820
1 - 1/4" 160.4 1160
1 - 3/8" 210.2 1520
1 - 1/2" 279.4 2020
1 - 3/4" 347.1 2510
2 522.8 3780

Page 9
TORQUE VALUES FOR HOSE
CLAMPS
The following chart provides the tightening torques for hose
clamps used in all rubber applications (radiator, air cleaner,
operating lever boots, hydraulic system, etc.).
Torque
Radiator, Air Cleaner, Boots,
Hydraulic System
Etc.
Clamp Type And Size
Kilogram Kilogram
Inch Pounds Inch Pounds
Meter Meter
(in lb) (in lb)
(kg•m) (kg•m)
"T" Bolt (Any Diameter) 0.68 - 0.72 59 - 63 ------- ------
Worm Drive - Under
44 mm (1-3/4 in) Open 0.2 - 0.3 20 - 30 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50
Diameter
Worm Drive - Over
44 mm (1-3/4 in) Open 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50 ------- ------
Diameter
Worm Drive - All
0.6 - 0.7 50 - 60 0.5 - 0.6 40 - 50
"Ultra-Tite"

Page 10
TORQUE VALUES FOR SPLIT
FLANGES
The following chart provides the tightening torques for split
flange connections used in hydraulic systems. Split flanges
and fitting shoulders should fit squarely. Install all bolts,
finger tight and then torque evenly.
NOTE: Over torquing bolts will damage the flanges and/or
bolts, which may cause leakage.
Bolt Torque
Flange Bolt
Kilogram Meter Foot Pounds
Size (*) Size
(kg•m) (ft lb)
1/2" 5/16" 2.1 - 2.5 15 - 18
3/4" 3/8" 3.0 - 3.7 22 - 27
1" 3/8" 3.7 - 4.8 27 - 35
1 - 1/4" 7/16" 4.8 - 6.2 35 - 45
1 - 1/2" 1/2" 6.4 - 8.0 46 - 58
2" 1/2" 7.6 - 9.0 55 - 65
2 - 1/2" 1/2" 10.9 - 12.6 79 - 91
3" 5/8" 19.1 - 20.7 138 - 150
3 - 1/2" 5/8" 16.2 - 18.4 117 - 133
(*) - Inside diameter of flange on end of hydraulic tube or

hose fitting.
NOTE: Values stated in chart are for Standard Pressure
Series (Code 61) Split Flanges.

Page 11
TORQUE WRENCH EXTENSION
TOOLS
Very large diameter, high grade fasteners (nuts, bolts, cap
screws, etc.) require a great deal of turning force to achieve
recommended tightening torque values.
Common problems that could occur as a result are:
• Recommended torque exceeds the measuring
capacity of the torque wrench.
• Specialized sockets do not fit the adapter on the
front end (nose) of the torque wrench.
• Generating adequate force on the back end
(handle) of the wrench is difficult or impossible.
• Restricted access or an obstruction may make
use of the torque wrench impossible.
• A unique application requires fabrication of an
adapter or other special extension.
Most standard torque wrenches can be adapted to suit any
one of the proceeding needs or situations, if the right
extension tool is used or fabricated.
Torque Multiplication
A wrench extension tool can be used to increase the
tightening force on a high capacity nut or bolt.
For example, doubling the distance between the bolt and the
back (handle) end of the torque wrench doubles the
tightening force on the bolt. It also halves the indicated
reading on the scale or dial of the torque wrench. To
accurately adjust or convert indicated scale or dial readings,
use the following formula:
I = A x T / A + B where:
I = Indicated force shown on the torque wrench scale or dial.
T = Tightening force applied to the nut or bolt (actual Figure 1
Torque).
A = Length of the torque wrench (between the center of the
nut or bolt and the center of the handle).
B = Length of the extension.
As an example, if a 12" extension is added to a 12" torque
wrench, and the indicated torque on the dial reads
"150 ft lb," the real force applied to the bolt is 300 ft lb:
A x 12 x 300 3600
I T
= = = 150
= A + 12 + 12 24
B

Page 12
NOTE: The formula assumes that there is no added
deflection or "give" in the joint between the extension
and torque wrench. Readings may also be
inaccurate:
• If the extension itself absorbs some of the
tightening force and starts to bend or bow out.
• If an extension has to be fabricated that is not
perfectly straight (for example, an extension made
to go around an obstruction, to allow access to a
difficult to tighten fastener), the materials and
methods used must be solid enough to transmit
full tightening torque.
Other Uses for Torque Wrench

Extension Tools
Torque wrench extensions are sometimes made up for
reasons other than increasing leverage on a fastener.
For example, a torque wrench and extension can be used to
measure adjustment "tightness" of a linkage or assembly.
Specially fabricated extensions can be used to make very
precise checks of the force required to engage or disengage
a clutch mechanism, release a spring-applied brake
assembly, or "take up" free play in most any movable
linkage.
Once the value of the adjustment force is established,
repeated checks at regular intervals can help to monitor and
maintain peak operating efficiency. These types of
adjustment checks are especially useful if physical
measurements of linkage travel are difficult to make or will
not provide the needed degree of precision and accuracy.
To allow the assembly or mechanism to accept a torque
wrench, welding a nut or other adapter on the end of a
linkage shaft or other leverage point will allow turning the
shaft or assembly manually.

Page 13
Tightening Torque Specifications (Metric)
(For coated threads, prelubricated assemblies.)
CAUTION
Disassembly, overhaul and replacement of components
on the machine, installation of new or replacement parts
and/or other service-related maintenance may require the
use of thread or flange sealing assembly compound.
Use the information on this page as a general guide in
selecting specific formulas that will meet the particular
requirements of individual assembly installations.
DOOSAN does not specifically endorse a specific
manufacturer or brand name but the following table of
"Loctite" applications is included for which
cross-references to other makers' products should also
be widely available.
IMPORTANT
Use primer "T" or "N" for all cold weather assembly of
fastener adhesives, with Thread locker sealers 222, 242/
243, 262, 271, 272, or 277.

Page 14
I. "Loctite" Fastener Adhesives
Breakaway Cure
Product Application Color Removal Strength (in lb)
of Sealer Alone
Low strength for 6 mm (1/4") or
222 Purple Hand tools 45
smaller fasteners.
242 or Medium strength for 6 mm (1/4")
Blue Hand tools 80
243 and larger fasteners.
High strength for high grade Heat/260°C (500°F)
262 fasteners subject to shock, stress Red Remove HOT 160
and vibration. (NO solvent)
Extra high strength for fine thread
Heat/260°C (500°F)
271 fasteners up to 25 mm (1") Red 160
Remove HOT
diameter.
High temperature/high strength for
Heat/316°C (600°F)
272 hostile environments to 232°C Red 180
Remove HOT
(450°F).
Extra high strength for coarse
Heat/260°C (500°F)
277 thread fasteners 25 mm (1") Red 210
Remove HOT
diameter and larger.
II. "Loctite" Pipe Thread Sealant
Product Application Color Removal Required Setup

"No-filler/nonclog" formula for
4 Hours (or 1/2
high-pressure hydraulic systems.
545 Purple Hand tools hour with Locquic
Over application will not restrict or
"T" Primer)
foul system components.
4 Hours (or 1/2
Solvent resistant, higher viscosity
656 White Hand tools hour with Locquic
tapered thread sealer.
"T" Primer)
III. "Loctite" gasket/flange sealer
Product Application Color Notes

Gasket eliminator specifically made
Use Locquic "N" primer for fast (1/2 - 4
for aluminum flanges/surfaces. For
518 Red hours) setup. Unprimed setup 4 - 24
hydraulic systems to 34,475 kPa
hours.
(5,000 psi).
Low-pressure/wide-gap gasket
Use Locquic "N" primer for faster (1/2 -
eliminator compound. Fills gaps to
504 Orange 4 hours) setup. Unprimed setup 4 - 24
0.0012 mm (0.030"), cures to rigid
hours.
seal.
General purpose, fast setup,
Use Locquic "N" primer for faster (1/4 -
flexible-cure gasket eliminator. For
515 Purple 2 hours) setup. Unprimed setup 1 - 12
nonrigid assemblies subject to
hours.
shock, vibration or deflection.

Page 15
IV. "Loctite" retaining compounds

For bushings, sleeves, press fit
Use Locquic "N" primer for increased
bearings, splines and collars. For
609 Green bond strength and all cold temperature
gaps to 0.0002 mm (0.005"),
applications.
temperatures to 121°C (250°F).
For high temperatures to 232°C
620 Green Same as 609, above.
(450°F).
For high strength bonds and tight
680 clearance gaps, to 0.00008 mm Green Same as 609, above.
(0.002").
V. "Loctite" Adhesives

Black Max instant adhesive for May take 120 hours to reach full cure
380 Black
shock and vibration-resistant bonds. strength.
454 Adhesive for porous surfaces. Clear Full strength in 24 hours.
Increased strength (+50%), shock
480 Black Full strength in 24 hours.
and vibration-resistant.

Page 16
1Upper Structure
SP002194
CABIN (NON-ROPS) SP002194
Cabin
(NON-ROPS)
Edition 1
Cabin (NON-ROPS) SP002194

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Cabin
(NON-ROPS)
Cab Identification ................................................. 6
Removal ............................................................... 7
Installation .......................................................... 11

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling the load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX170W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
CAB IDENTIFICATION
The excavator could be equipped with either a ROPS or
NON-ROPS cab.
Figure 1, shows a NON-ROPS cabin (1) and a ROPS cabin
(2). When servicing your cabin use the correct section.
Figure 1 (1) NON-ROPS CABIN (2) ROPS CABIN

Page 6
REMOVAL
CAUTION
Avoid disassembling cabin if there are strong wind
gusts, which could catch large surface area of cabin
shell and push it sideways during lift.
1. Park on firm and level ground. O I

2. Lower front attachment (bucket) to ground.
3. Shut down engine.
4. Set safety lever and stand on "RELEASED" position.
5. Turn starter switch to "I" (ON) position.
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE
when performing inspection
WARNING or maintenance
190-00695A
FG016934
If engine must be run while performing Figure 2
maintenance, use extreme care. Always have one
person in the cabin at all times. Never leave the
cabin with the engine running.
6. Fully stroke work levers (joysticks) in all directions to

relieve pressure from accumulators.
7. Set safety lever and stand on "LOCK" position.
8. Set parking brake switch to the "I" position
9. Apply the service brake with full stroke several time to
relieve pressure from accumulate functioning braking.
10. Turn key to "O" (OFF) position and remove from starter
switch.
11. Hang maintenance warning tag on controls.
12. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative (-)
battery terminal.
13. Prepare cabin shell for removal by disconnecting wiring
connectors for:
A. Cabin interior lighting.
B. External light wiring.
C. Radio antenna and connections.
D. Wiper/washer connections.
NOTE: Control console wiring harnesses and hydraulic
piping lines that pass through the floor of the
cabin do not need to be disassembled.
NOTE: If unit is equipped with a cabin protective
structure (for forestry, or hazardous working
conditions), it must be removed.

Page 7
14. Remove floor mat (1, Figure 3)
2
15. Remove seat (2, Figure 3).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage seat covering.
8
16. Remove cup holder (3, Figure 3).
Remove front cover (4, Figure 3) and side covers (5 5
and 6, Figure 3). Before removing front cover (4), 3
disconnect hour meter connector.
NOTE: Don't remove monitor panel (7, Figure 3) and 7
switch panel (8, Figure 3)
4 6 FG016935
Figure 3
17. After removing rear mat (1, Figure 4), remove rear
center cover (2. Figure 4), cassette cover (3) and rear
side covers (4 and 5, Figure 4)
Figure 4
18. Remove fuse box bracket (1, Figure 5) from left

sidewall without disassembly harness connector.
19. Disconnect cabin ground cable near fuse box bracket.
20. Remove cassette bracket (2, Figure 5) and disconnect
antenna and speaker wire.
21. Remove electric box (4, Figure 5) without disassembly
harness connectors.
Figure 5

Page 8
22. Remove air ducts (1,2,3 and 4, Figure 6) from cabin
rear panel.
23. Remove across bar (5, Figure 6) between left and right
side of cabin.
Figure 6
24. Remove air ducts (1,2,3 and 4, Figure 7) at the right

side of cabin sequently from the front duct.
25. Disconnect washer hose at floor plate bottom.
26. Disconnect cabin wiring connectors from main harness.
Figure 7
27. Remove four mounting nuts from four corners of cabin

floor (1, Figure 8).
28. Remove four M12 hex bolts (2, Figure 8) and two M10
hex bolts (3, Figure 8).
Figure 8

Page 9
29. Using a suitable lifting device, attach slings to four lift
points on top of cabin (Figure 9).
NOTE: Cabin weight is approximately 315 kg (700lb).
30. Lift cabin from 25 -50 mm (1" -2") above deck height.
Check that all electrical connections have been
disconnected and all other items unbolted.
31. Continue lifting with the assist crane to remove the
cabin shell. Lower the shell to a prepared safe blocking
support.
Figure 9

Page 10
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal.
1. Install four mounting nuts from four corners of cabin
floor (1, Figure 10)
• Mounting nut torque 21 kg•m (205 Nm, 150 lbf-ft)
2. Install four M12 hex bolts (2, Figure 10)
• Mounting bolt torque 11 kg•m (108 Nm, 80 lbf-ft)
3. Install four M10 hex bolts (3, Figure 10)
• Mounting bolt torque 6.5 kg•m (64 Nm, 47 lbf-ft)
Figure 10
4. Connect cabin wiring connectors from main harness.

5. Connect washer hose at floor plate bottom.
6. Install air ducts (1,2,3 and 4, Figure 11) at the right
side of cabin sequently from the front duct.
Figure 11
7. Install cross bar (5, Figure 12) between left and right
side of cabin.
8. Install air ducts (1,2,3 and 4, Figure 12) to cabin rear
panel.
Figure 12

Page 11
9. Install electric box (4, Figure 13).
10. Install cassette bracket (2, Figure 13) and connect
antenna and speaker wire.
11. Connect cabin ground cable located near fuse box
bracket.
12. Install fuse box bracket (1, Figure 13) from left
sidewall.
Figure 13
13. Install rear side covers (4 and 5, Figure 14) and install
cassette cover (3, Figure 14).
14. Install rear center cover (2, Figure 14) and install rear
mat (1, Figure 14) sequently.
Figure 14
15. Install front cover (4, Figure 15) and side covers (5
and 6, Figure 15). Before installing front cover (4), 2
connect hour meter connector.
16. Install cup holder (3, Figure 15). 8
17. Install seat (2, Figure 15) on the seat plate. 5

NOTE: Be careful not to damage seat covering. 3
18. Install floor mat (1, Figure 15).

7
4 6 FG016935
Figure 15

Page 12
SP002191
CABIN (ROPS) SP002191
Cabin (ROPS)
Edition 1
Cabin (ROPS) SP002191

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Cabin (ROPS)
Cab Identification ................................................. 6
When Required by Local Regulations .......................... 6
Removal ............................................................... 8
Installation .......................................................... 12

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling the load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 9909 and Up
DX170W 5099 and Up
DX190W 5436 and Up
DX210W 5839 and Up

Page 5
CAB IDENTIFICATION
The excavator could be equipped with either a ROPS or
NON-ROPS cab.
Figure 1, shows a NON-ROPS cabin (1) and a ROPS cabin
(2). When servicing your cabin use the correct section.
Figure 1 (1) NON-ROPS CABIN (2) ROPS CABIN

When Required by Local Regulations
Global markets may or may not require a Roll Over
Protective Structure (ROPS). Always comply with all regional
and governmental regulations that apply to your market. The
following information is for a ROPS cabin.
General ROPS Guidelines for ROPS Certified Cabins

The operator's cabin is a ROPS certified structure for
protecting the seat-belted operator. It absorbs the impact
energy of a rollover impact. Do not allow machine weight
(mass) to exceed certified value on certification plate. If
weight is exceeded, the ROPS structure will not be able to
fulfill its safety function.
Do not increase machine weight beyond certified value by
modifying machine or by installing attachments on machine.
If weight limit of protective equipment is exceeded, protective
equipment will not be able to protect operator, and operator
may suffer serious injury or death. Always observe the
following:

Page 6
• This machine is equipped with a protective
structure. Do not remove protective structure and
carry out operations without it.
• Never modify the operator’s cabin by welding,
grinding, drilling holes or adding attachments
unless instructed by DOOSAN. Changes to the
cabin can cause loss of operator protection from
rollover and falling objects, and operator may
suffer serious injury or death.
• When protective structure is damaged or deformed
by falling objects or by rolling over, its strength
will be reduced and it will not be able to properly
fulfill its function. In these cases, always contact
your DOOSAN distributor for advice. Never repair
a ROPS cabin.
• Always wear your seat belt when operating
machine.
ROPS Certification
This DOOSAN excavator has an operator’s cabin that meets
ROPS requirements. The seat belt must be worn for rollover
protection.
The ROPS certification plate (Figure 2) is found on the left
side of the cabin on most models. It may vary slightly in its
location on some models.
Check the ROPS cabin, mounting, and hardware for damage.
Never modify the ROPS cabin. Replace the cabin and
hardware if damaged. See your DOOSAN dealer for parts.
Figure 2
ROPS − Roll Over Protective Structure complies with
ISO 12117-2:2008.
WARNING
Never modify the operator cabin by welding, grinding,
drilling holes or adding attachments unless instructed
by DOOSAN. Changes to the cabin can cause loss of
operator protection from rollover and falling objects, and
result in serious injury or death.

Page 7
REMOVAL
CAUTION
Avoid disassembling cabin if there are strong wind
gusts, which could catch large surface area of cabin
shell and push it sideways during lift.

4. Set safety lever on "RELEASED" position.
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE
190-00695A
FG016919

relieve pressure from accumulators.
7. Set safety lever on "LOCK" position.
switch.
battery terminal.
11. Prepare cabin shell for removal by disconnecting wiring
connectors for:
A. Cabin interior lighting.
B. External light wiring.
C. Radio antenna and connections.
D. Wiper/washer connections.
NOTE: Control console wiring harnesses and hydraulic
piping lines that pass through the floor of the
cabin do not need to be disassembled.
NOTE: If unit is equipped with a cabin protective
structure (for forestry, or hazardous working
conditions), it must be removed.

Page 8
12. Remove mats from steps and floor.
13. Remove safety lever cover (1, Figure 4).
14. Remove two screws (2, Figure 4) in safety lever to
remove lever.
2
1 FG016920
Figure 4
15. Remove duct covers (1 and 2, Figure 5).
FG016921
Figure 5
16. Remove air ducts (3 thru 8, Figure 6) on right-hand

side of operator's cabin.
17. Disconnect monitor and sun sensor connectors. 4
3
18. Disconnect washer hose from floor plate.
7 8
6
5 FG015886
Figure 6
19. Remove glove box pad (1, Figure 7), and two bolts
under pad.
20. Remove three caps (2, Figure 7) from top of rear 2
cover. Remove three bolts securing rear cover in place.
21. Remove two bolts (3, Figure 7) from bottom of rubber
mounts in rear cover. 1
22. Remove rear cover.

3
FG015887
Figure 7

Page 9
23. Remove air ducts (4 thru 6, Figure 8). Remove
4 5
atmospheric air duct (7).
6
FG015888
Figure 8
24. Remove all bolts fastening brackets (8 thru 10, Figure

9) to separate brackets from body of operator's cabin.
25. Disconnect connectors on interior lights, speakers and
antenna.
8
9
10
FG015889
Figure 9
26. Remove four mounting nuts from four corners of cabin

1 11
floor (2, Figure 10).
27. Remove four bolts (3, Figure 10) from door side of
cabin floor.
2 5
28. Remove four bolts (1, Figure 10) on right-hand side of
floor in operator's cabin. 4
29. Remove two bolts (4, Figure 10) at front of floor in 3 3

operator's cabin, and bolt (5, Figure 10) at rear of floor
in operator's cabin.
FG015890
Quantity Description Figure 10
4 16 mm nuts at each corner of cabin.
4 10 mm x 1.5 bolts at door side of cabin.
10 mm x 1.5 mm bolts, 4 on right side of
cabin and 2 under front window. One bolt
7
is positioned in center of rear part of
operator's cabin.

Page 10
30. Remove ROPS bolt (1, Figure 10).
1
FG015891
Figure 11

NOTE: Cabin weighs approximately 490 kg (1081 lb).
32. Lift cabin approximately 25 - 50 mm (1" - 2") above
deck. Check that all electrical connections have been
disconnected and all other items unbolted.
33. Continue lifting with assist crane to remove cabin shell.
Lower shell to a prepared safe blocking support.
NOTE: Do not rapidly lift operator's cabin: The bottom
FG015892
of operator's cabin may come into contact with,
Figure 12
and scratch, control stand cover.

Page 11
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Cabin weights approximately 460 kg (1014 lb).
2. Lower cabin into position on cabin floor.
FG015892
Figure 13
3. Install four mounting nuts in four corners of cabin floor

1 11
(2, Figure 14).
NOTE: Mounting nut torque 21 kg•m (205 Nm,
150 ft lb).
2 5
4. Install four bolts (3, Figure 14) in door side of cabin
floor. 4
5. Install four bolts (1, Figure 14) on right of floor in 3 3

operator's cabin.
6. Install two bolts (4, Figure 14) on front of floor in
FG015890
operator's cabin, and one bolt (5) on rear of floor in
Figure 14
operator's cabin.
Quantity Description
4 16 mm nuts at each corner of cabin.
4 10 mm x 1.5 bolts at door side of cabin.
10 mm x 1.5 mm bolts, 4 on right side of
cabin and 2 under front window. One bolt
7
is positioned in center of rear part of
operator's cabin.
7. Once cabin is mounted to floor, unhook lifting device.

8. Connect cabin ground cable.
9. Connect cabin light wiring connector.
10. Install stereo assembly with bolts (2, Figure 14) after
connecting speaker and antenna wires.

Page 12
11. Install ROPS bolt (1, Figure 15).
NOTE: Mounting nut torque 250 kg•m (1807 ft lb)
1
FG015891
Figure 15
12. Install air ducts (1 thru 5, Figure 16). Install 2

1
atmospheric air duct (6).
4 6
5
FG015893
Figure 16
13. Install brackets (7 thru 9, Figure 17) on body of

operator's cabin.
7
8
9
FG015895
Figure 17
14. Install two bolts (2, Figure 18) and center bolts in
center, and three bolts on top to install dashboard
3
cover. Install cap (3, Figure 18) on top of dashboard
cover.
15. Install glove box pad (1, Figure 18).
16. Connect washer hose at floor plate bottom. 1
FG015896
Figure 18

Page 13
17. Install air ducts (1 thru 4, Figure 19) on right-hand side
of cabin.
18. Connect monitor, sun sensor connector, and washer 4
hose. 3
6
5 FG015897
Figure 19
19. Install duct covers (1 and 2, Figure 20).

20. Install safety lever. Apply Loctite on screws when
installing lever.
21. Install mats on steps and floor. 2
22. Connect negative (-) battery cable leading to frame

from battery.
FG016921
Figure 20

Page 14
SP002207
COUNTERWEIGHT SP002207
Counterweight
Edition 1
Counterweight SP002207
Page 1
MEMO
Page 2
Table of Contents
Counterweight
General................................................................. 6
Warning for Counterweight and Front Attachment
Removal .......................................................................... 6
Removal ............................................................... 8
Installation .......................................................... 10
Page 3
MEMO
Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up
Page 5
GENERAL
Warning for Counterweight and Front

Attachment Removal
DANGER
DOOSAN warns any user, that the removal of the
misuse.
Never remove the counterweight or front attachment
unless the upper structure is in-line with the lower
structure.
FG007176
Before any attempt is made to begin removal or installation Figure 1
of the counterweight, the excavator must be parked on a
firm and level supporting surface, with no sloping surfaces
or soft or muddy ground in the area where the assist lift
crane will be working. Position all accessories in the
overnight storage position.
WARNING
The weight of counterweight is given in the following
table. Use only rated and approved slings and hardware
when removal or installation lifts are being made. Lifting
slings, shackles and all other hardware must be rigged
safely. An assist crane that is rated above weight
capacity is required.
Model Weight of Counterweight

DX210W 3,800 kg (8,378 lb)
Responsibility should be assigned to one person to be in

charge of the lifting crew, and to verify that required safe
lifting precautions have been taken before each part of this
procedure has been started.
All members of the working crew should know and
understand the signals that will be used between the lifting
leader, the assist crane operator and the remainder of the
work crew.
Page 6
WARNING
If the turntable deck has been unbalanced by removal of
weight from one end only, traveling the excavator,
swinging the turntable, movement over bumps or
sloping and uneven surfaces could cause loss of
control and possible accidents or injuries.
To maintain stability the counterweight should be removed

whenever the front attachment is taken off the machine.
90 ~ 110
15 FG007177
Figure 2
When loading an excavator (either track or wheeled type) on

a trailer for transport after the front attachment has been
removed, always go backwards up the loading ramp. The
counterweight end of the deck has to get on the trailer first,
while the cabin is still going up the ramp (Figure 2).
15
FG007178
Figure 3
Page 7
REMOVAL
2. Lower front attachment (bucket) to the ground.
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE
190-00695A
FG016934

relieve any pressure from accumulators.
switch.
battery terminal.
11. Remove engine compartment cover.
Page 8
12. Remove two caps (1, Figure 5) from counterweight (2).
3
1
13. Install two lifting eyes in lifting holes (3, Figure 5).
3
Model Lifting Eye Size
DX210W M48 x 5.0
14. Using a suitable lifting device capable of handling a 2

heavy load, partially support counterweight (2, Figure 5)
before loosening four bolts (4). Stop lifting with assist
crane as soon as lifting slings are taut.
15. Remove four bolts (4, Figure 5) and washers (5) from
counterweight (2).
NOTE: Heat bolts if necessary, to free them.
16. When bolts (4, Figure 5) and washers (5) have been
removed, lift counterweight (2) a very short distance
above support frame (6) and stop. Check slings and
make sure counterweight is being supported evenly.
4 FG007180
Figure 5
Page 9
INSTALLATION
1. Using suitable lifting device capable of handling a
3
heavy load, raise counterweight (2, Figure 6) into 1
position just above support frame (6) leaving
counterweight suspended. Verify that counterweight is 3
level and even.
NOTE: Leave counterweight (2, Figure 6) suspended
3 mm (0.12") above support frame (6) until all 2
four mounting bolts (4) are started in
counterweight mounting holes.
2. Slide washers (5, Figure 6) onto bolts (4). Apply Loctite
#242 to mounting bolt threads.
3. Install four bolts (4, Figure 6) with washers (5) into
counterweight until washers contact support frame.
Fully lower counterweight onto support frame and finish
tightening bolts.
NOTE: Torque bolts (4, Figure 6) to values shown in
following table.
Model Bolt Torque

DX210W 250 kg•m (1,808 ft lb)
6
4. Remove lifting device and lifting eyes from 5
counterweight lifting holes (3, Figure 6).
4 FG007180
5. Install two caps (1, Figure 6) in lifting holes (3).
Figure 6
6. Install engine compartment cover.
7. Connect negative (-) battery cable to battery.
Page 10
SP002208
FUEL TANK SP002208
Fuel Tank
Edition 1
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 1
MEMO
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 2
Table of Contents
Fuel Tank
Parts List......................................................................... 6
Specifications .................................................................. 7
Removal ............................................................... 8
Installation .......................................................... 12
Start-up Procedures........................................... 15
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 3
MEMO
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
WARNING
Engine fuel is highly flammable and potentially
explosive. To prevent possible injury and/or damage to
equipment, extinguish or move to a safe distance all
potential fire hazards.
Parts List
11
10
17 18
16
12
15
14
15
14
9
13
2
8
7 3
13
5
6
4 7 FG007181
Figure 1
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 6
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Fuel Tank 10 Fuel Strainer
2 O-ring 11 Cap
3 Cover 12 Level Gauge
4 Bolt 13 Spacer
5 Spring Washer 14 Bolt
6 Drain Valve 15 Clip
7 Bolt 16 Fuel Sender
8 Shim 17 Bolt
9 Shim 18 Spring Washer
Specifications
Fuel tank capacity is 350 liters (92.5 U.S. gal).
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 7
REMOVAL
1. Look at fuel level display (Figure 2) on instrument
panel in operator's cabin to see what it displays. The
display is divided into ten separated segments, each
representing 10 percent of total fuel supply. Also, look
at level gauge on side of tank to estimate volume of
fuel left in tank.
NOTE: If possible, work excavator until available fuel
supply in tank has been run down as far as
possible.
E F
FG013666
Figure 2
2. Park on firm and level ground and swing turntable to

approximately a 90° with respect to wheels. See Figure
3.
FG007193
Figure 3
3. Lower front attachment (bucket) to ground. O I

WARNING
WARNING DO NOT OPERATE
or maintenance
190-00695A
If engine must be run while performing

FG016934
Figure 4

switch.
11. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable leading to frame
from battery.
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 8
12. Clean area around fuel tank fill cap (11, Figure 5).
Open fuel cap.
11
FG007182
Figure 5
13. Place a large enough container under fuel tank to

collect remaining fuel. Open drain valve (6, Figure 6) at
bottom of tank and drain.
NOTE: Fuel tank capacity is 350 liters (92.5 U.S. gal).
FG007183
Figure 6
14. Tag and disconnect fuel supply line (21, Figure 7) and
fuel return line (19) from fuel tank (1) and carefully 1
drain remaining fuel from lines.
15. Remove clamp (20, Figure 7) holding fuel return line
(19) to tank (1).
19
20
21
FG007184
Figure 7
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 9
16. If equipped, remove components from fuel filler pump
1
port (22, Figure 8) on side of fuel tank (1).
22
FG007185
Figure 8
17. Remove five bolts (23, Figure 9) and cover (24) from 23
fuel tank.
24
FG007186
Figure 9
18. Remove six bolts (25 and 26, Figure 10) and stay (27)
from fuel tank and frame.
27
Remove four bolts (28 and 29) and fuel tank cover
(30) from fuel tank. 28
26
Remove two bolts (31) and bracket (32) from tank.
Remove four bolts (33) and battery cover (34) from
frame. 32
33
29
31
30
34
25 FG007187
Figure 10
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 10
19. Tag and disconnect wires leading to fuel sender (16,
1
Figure 11) on side of fuel tank (1).
16
FG007188
Figure 11
20. Remove four bolts (35 and 36, Figure 12) and cover
(37) from fuel tank and support.
36 37
35 FG007189
Figure 12
21. Install two 12 mm eyebolts in threaded holes (38 and

39, Figure 13). Using a suitable lifting device, sling 38 1
eyebolts. 39
22. Remove six bolts (7) and spacers (13, Figure 13)
holding tank (1) to frame. Lift tank 25 mm (1") and
make sure it is balanced. Make sure that there are no
other electrical wires or hoses connected to tank.
Completely remove tank after inspection.
NOTE: The clear level gauge on the side of the tank is
easily damaged. Be careful of obstacles and
wind gusts.
23. Remove shims (9, Figure 13).
9
NOTE: If tank is to be reused note position and amount
13
of shims used for each mounting bolt location.
7 FG007190
Figure 13
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 11
INSTALLATION
1. Install two 12 mm eyebolts in threaded holes (38 and
39, Figure 14). Using a suitable lifting device, sling 38 1
eyebolts. 39
2. Set fuel tank (1, Figure 14) into position. Install six
bolts (7) and spacers (13) finger tight, to secure tank
to frame.
NOTE: The clear level gauge on the side of the tank is
easily damaged. Be careful of obstacles and
wind gusts.
3. Install shims (9, Figure 14) as needed to prevent tank
(1) from rocking or stress from mounting bolts (7).
4. Tighten mounting bolts (7, Figure 14) after shims are 9
installed.
13
NOTE: Bolt torque is 27 kg•m (195 ft lb).
7 FG007190
Figure 14
5. Install four bolts (35 and 36, Figure 15) and cover (37)
on fuel tank and support.
36 37
35 FG007189
Figure 15
6. Connect wires as tagged to fuel sender (16, Figure 16)

1
on side of fuel tank (1).
16
FG007188
Figure 16
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 12
7. Install four bolts (33, Figure 17) and battery cover (34)
on frame.
27
Install two bolts (31) and bracket (32) on fuel tank.
28
Install four bolts (28 and 29) and fuel tank cover (30) 26
on fuel tank.
Install six bolts (25 and 26) and stay (27) on fuel tank
and frame.
32
33
29
31
30
34
25 FG007187
Figure 17
8. Install five bolts (23, Figure 18) and cover (24) on fuel
23
tank.
24
FG007186
Figure 18
9. If equipped, connect components to fuel filler pump

port (22, Figure 19) on side of fuel tank (1). 1
22
FG007185
Figure 19
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 13
10. Connect as tagged, fuel supply line (21, Figure 20) and
fuel return line (19) to fuel tank (1). 1
11. Install clamp (20, Figure 20) to hold fuel return line
(19) to tank (1).
19
20
21
FG007184
Figure 20
12. Make sure fuel tank drain valve (6, Figure 21) on
bottom of tank is closed.
13. Fill fuel tank and check for signs of leaks. Correct any
problems found.
14. Connect negative (-) battery cable to battery.
FG007183
Figure 21
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 14
START-UP PROCEDURES
If engine does not start, the fuel system may need priming.
Prime the fuel system using the following procedure:
1. Stop Engine.
2. Open left side door and then there is fuel filter.
FG007191
Figure 22
3. Loosen plug (1, Figure 23) on top of fuel filter head.

1
4. Pump hand operated primer pump (2, Figure 23) by IN 2
the fuel injection pump. Pump primer until fuel is
present at plug hole in fuel filter head. IN
5. Tighten plug in fuel filter head.

6. Continue to pump primer pump until a strong
resistance is felt.
7. Start engine and look for signs of leaks.
Repeat procedure if necessary. FG007192
Figure 23
Fuel Tank SP002208

Page 15
Fuel Tank SP002208
Page 16
SP000021
FUEL TRANSFER PUMPSP000021
Fuel Transfer
Pump
Edition 1
Fuel Transfer Pump SP000021

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Fuel Transfer Pump
Theory of Operation ....................................................... 7
Troubleshooting .................................................... 8
Replacement of Rotor and Vane ....................... 8
Replacement of Rear Cover............................... 9
Replacement of Armature ................................... 9

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX300LC 5001 and Up
DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Theory of Operation
Fuel
4
1 2
6 5 3
Fuel Tank
IN OUT
2-2 2-1
FG007017
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Motor 3 Inlet Hose
2 Pump 4 Outlet Hose
2-1 Pump Cover 5 Check Valve
2-2 Rotor and Vane 6 Strainer Cap
The fuel pump consists of a motor, pump, switch, and hose

assembly.
Pump
Hose
Switch FG001143
Figure 2

Page 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
On some pumps the ON-OFF switch is installed separately
Switch Cover
at a remote location.
Connector "B"
A thermal limiter, built into the motor, will automatically shut
off power if motor is overheating to protect it from being
damaged.
Connector "A"
NOTE: OPEN TEMP: 150 ±5°C (302 ±41°F). After circuit is IV
automatically shut off due to overheating the pump
will stop running. When temperature drops below III
V
143°C (289°F) the circuit will reactivate allowing the
pump to restart. FG003882
Figure 3 WITH TOGGLE SWITCH
Check resistance at connectors "A." If reading is zero, or

very close to zero, the motor is bad and must be replaced. Connector "A"
On units equipped with a toggle switch, check the resistance

through the toggle switch, while the switch is in the "ON"
position. If continuity is not present, the switch is bad. Be
sure to check resistance through the motor. IV
III
V
FG001145
Figure 4 WITHOUT TOGGLE SWITCH
REPLACEMENT OF ROTOR
AND VANE
If dirt or other foreign materials enter the pump during
operation, it can become lodged between the rotor and/or
vanes and generate heat which can cause the pump
damage.
Remove the pump cover and check the rotor and vane. If
any pump parts or components become lost, damaged or
inoperable, immediately replace them with new ones.
FG000670
Figure 5 WITHOUT TOGGLE

Page 8
Insert vane, with the circled edge of vane facing in the
counterclockwise direction. (Detail A)
IN OUT
Insert a new O-ring during reassembly of pump cover.
FG003883
Figure 6
REPLACEMENT OF REAR
COVER
Brush assembly and a thermal limiter are installed in the
rear cover. If you find any damage, replace them with new
ones.
Remove the switch cover and screw (M5 x L95) from the
rear cover.
Remove cover.
At reassembly of rear cover, widen the space of the brush Figure 7
and insert it to the armature. Then fit the hole of screw in
the housing.
Be careful when installing the screw. The cover screw may
be attracted by the motor magnet.
REPLACEMENT OF ARMATURE
Rear Cover
Pump Side
You can replace only the armature in case motor was Side
damaged by a short circuit.
Remove the switch cover and rear cover, than remove the
armature from the housing.
Remove the pump cover and remove the rotor and vane.
Insert a new armature into the housing. Commutator
Refer to “Replacement of Rear Cover” on page 1-9, for FG001146

installation of the rear cover. Figure 8
Fit the rotor into the shaft flute of the armature. Insert vane
to the rotor being careful of the direction. Refer to
“Replacement of Rotor and Vane” on page 1-8.

Page 9
Page 10
SP001869
SWING BEARING SP001869
Swing Bearing
Edition 1
Swing Bearing SP001869

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Swing Bearing
Swing Bearing Maintenance ............................... 6
Operating Recommendation........................................... 6
Measuring Swing Bearing Axial Play ........................... 6
Measuring Bearing Lateral Play .................................... 6
Swing Bearing Basic Operation .................................... 7
Disassembly .................................................................... 7
Assembly ......................................................................... 9

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX170W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
SWING BEARING
MAINTENANCE
Operating Recommendation
The service life of the swing bearing may be extended if a
conscious, daily effort is made to equalize usage over both
ends of the excavator. If the excavator is used in the same
operating configuration day in and day out (for example, with
the travel motors always under the counterweight, or with
the attachment over one side of the machine more than the
other), the bearing's service life could be reduced. Taking a
few minutes in the middle of each work shift to reposition
the excavator, to work the opposite end of the bearing, will
provide a payoff in terms of more even, gradual rate of
wear and extended service life.
Measuring Swing Bearing Axial Play

Periodic, regular checks of bearing displacement should be
made at least twice a year. Use a dial indicator. Push the 1
attachment against the ground to lift the excavator off the
ground and take measurements at 4 points, 90° apart,
around the circumference of the bearing (Figure 1).
2
Record and keep all measurements. Play in the bearing
should increase minimally from one inspection to the next.
Eventually, however, as the bearing begins to approach the
limit of its service life, clearance increases become much
more pronounced and the actual measured play in the
bearing could exceed twice the value that was measured
when the machine was new.
Measuring Bearing Lateral Play

When vertical checks are made, the side to side play in the
bearing can be checked by fully retracting the arm and
bucket cylinders and extending the tip of the bucket as far
forward as it will go. With the excavator parked on a flat,
FG009224
level surface and the bucket tip just off the ground, push
Figure 1
against the bucket sideways to take up all of the lateral
clearance in the bearing. (Less than 100 lb of force should
be required to move the bucket over all the way.) Check
lateral play in both directions and record the values. When
the bearing is beginning to approach the end of its service
life, measured lateral clearance should start to show larger
and larger increases.

Page 6
Swing Bearing Basic Operation
The swing bearing, which connects the upper structure with
the lower structure, consists of a inner ring, outer ring and
ball bearings. During swing movement, power from the
swing motor is transferred to the pinion by planetary gears
connected to gears on the inner ring, which is fixed in the
undercarriage. Ball bearings turn the outer ring.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Outer Ring
2 Inner Ring
3 Tapered Pin
4 Plug
5 Ball
6 Retainer
7 Seal
Figure 2
Disassembly
1. Remove tip of tapered pin (3, Figure 3) using grinder

and tap lightly to remove debris.
Figure 3
2. Remove plug (4, Figure 4) using a M10 x P1.5 bolt.
Figure 4

Page 7
3. Lift outer ring and check that inner ring can move
freely. See Figure 5, if not, replace seal (7, Figure 6).
Figure 5
4. Turn inner ring and use magnet bar (C, Figure 6) to

remove steel balls (5).
Figure 6
5. Turn inner ring and use wire (D, Figure 7) to remove

retainers (6).
Figure 7

Page 8
Assembly
1. Clean (degrease) the seal groove for the outer and
inner seals (7).
Apply instant glue to seal (7).
Install both seals respectively into position.
Figure 8
2. Hoist the outer race by crane horizontally and match it

with the inner race coaxially.
Rotating the outer race, insert balls (5), support (6) into
the plug (4) hole one by one with a round bar.
Figure 9
Figure 10
3. Top plug (4) into outer race (1) and then, drive pin (3)
into the pin hole.
Caulk the head of pin (3) with a punch.
Fill grease through the grease fitting.
Figure 11

Page 9
Page 10
SP002204
SWING REDUCTION GEARSP002204
Swing
Reduction
Gear
Edition 1
Swing Reduction Gear SP002204

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Swing Reduction Gear
Parts List......................................................................... 8
Specifications .................................................................. 9
Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment........ 10
Removal ............................................................. 11
Disassembly ....................................................... 12
Cleaning and Inspection (Wear Limits and
Tolerances)......................................................... 18
Reassembly ........................................................ 19
Shaft and S/R Bearing Heat-fit................................... 19
Assembly of Carrier Subassemblies ........................... 21
Assembly of Main Case .............................................. 27
Installation .......................................................... 44

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Theory of Operation
The swing motor final drive is a two-stage planetary gearbox
with two planet gears, two sun gears and two-stage output
reduction. The planetary gear engages the ring gear. The
pinion gear is connected to the output shaft and spline.
The final drive reduces swing motor rpm in order to increase
swing motor output torque. The available maximum swing
speed provides a fast turning rate for efficient, rapid work
cycling with more than adequate power for good
acceleration.

Page 7
Parts List
24
32
26
23
25 22
21
20
6
18 14
13
10
12
30
11
8 15
19
29
27
1
28
27
4
3
16
5
31
33
17
Figure 1 FG007053

Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Casing 18 No. 2 Sun Gear
2 Drive Shaft 19 Lock Pin
3 Plate 20 No. 1 Carrier
4 Spherical Roller Bearing 21 No. 1 Thrust Washer
5 Cover Plate 22 No. 1 Planet Gear
6 Snap Ring 23 No. 1 Pin Assembly
7 Oil Seal 24 Socket Head Bolt
8 Spherical Roller Bearing 25 No. 1 Sun Gear
9 Ring Gear 26 Snap Ring
10 No. 2 Carrier 27 Plug
11 No. 2 Thrust Washer 28 Plug
12 No. 2 Planet Gear 29 Level Gauge Pipe
13 No. 2 Bush 30 Level Gauge
14 No. 2 Pin 31 Double Tap Washer
15 Spring Pin 32 Pipe
16 Hex Head Bolt 33 Hex Head Bolt
17 No. 3 Thrust Washer
Specifications
Swing Reduction Gearbox Specification
Drive Type Two-stage Planetary Gear
Reduction Ratio 19.636
Maximum Output Speed 81 rpm
1,178 kg•m
Maximum Output Torque
(8,521 lb•ft)
182 kg
Weight
(401 lb)
Pinion Gear Specification

Type Spur Gear
156 mm
Gear P.C.D
(6.14 in)
No. of Teeth 13
Module 12

Page 9
TROUBLESHOOTING, TESTING
AND ADJUSTMENT
Symptoms Possible Causes Remedies

1. No rotation and —
a. Pressure at swing motor inlet Swing brake not releasing Check brake engagement
increases and disengagement,
check release pressure
Internal damage to gearbox Replace broken gears,
drive train drive train assemblies
Overload Reduce load weight
b. Pressure at swing motor inlet Swing motor drive shaft damage Replace swing motor
shows no increase, and the swing
motor is making irregular noises Internal damage to gearbox Repair/replace broken or
drive train faulty assemblies
c. Pressure at swing motor inlet shows Hydraulic pump or valve broken Troubleshoot hydraulic
no increase, but without irregular system
noises from the swing motor
2. Oil leakage
a. From drive shaft Oil seal damaged Replace oil seal
b. From bolted connections or other Assembly compound (joint sealer) Disassemble and check
assembled surfaces old and not sealing, bolt not tight mating surfaces. Reapply
or flange warped Loctite, torque bolts to
specifications
3. Excess heat
Gearbox casing becomes excessively Low oil level Replace oil, refill to
hot, with or without irregular noise(s) specified level
during operation
Bearings or gear worn but not Repair or replace
completely inoperative gearbox
HAOE960L

Page 10
REMOVAL
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE
190-00695A
FG016934
If engine must be running while performing Figure 2
maintenance, always use extreme caution. Always
have one person in cab at all times. Never leave
cab with engine running.

switch.
9. Hang a maintenance warning tag on controls.
10. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable leading to frame
from battery.
11. Tag and disconnect hoses from swing motor (1, Figure
3). Plug and cap hoses and ports to prevent 1
contamination from entering hydraulic system or
component.
12. Assemble drain hose (3, Figure 3) to drain valve (8)
and drain oil from reduction gearbox (5, Figure 3).
13. Remove drain hose (3, Figure 3) from drain valve (8) 4
5
and disconnect hose (2, Figure 3) from reduction
gearbox (5). 6 8
14. Disconnect grease lubrication line (7, Figure 3) from 2
reduction gearbox (5).
15. Remove eleven bolts and washers (4, Figure 3) holding
swing reduction gearbox (5) to frame.
3
16. Using a suitable lifting device, sling swing motor (1, 7
Figure 3) and remove swing motor and reduction FG007055
gearbox (5) as an assembly from unit. Figure 3
NOTE: There is a alignment pin (6, Figure 3), on
reduction gearbox flange.

Page 11
DISASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT
Select a clean place.
Spread a rubber mat or cloth on top of the overhaul
workbench to prevent parts from being damaged.
1. Remove bolts and motor from swing reduction case.
CAUTION
The motor should be separated without damage or
any foreign substance.
Figure 4
CAUTION
Care should be taken not to damage mounting
surface of motor. Carefully remove all gasket
material from mounting surfaces.
Figure 5
2. Remove No. 1 sun gear from No. 1 carrier.
CAUTION
Care should be taken not to damage teeth of No. 1
sun gear.
Figure 6

Page 12
Figure 7
3. Remove No. 1 carrier.
Figure 8
4. Remove washer and No. 2 sun gear.
CAUTION
sun gear.
Figure 9

Page 13
5. Remove bolt in No. 2 carrier.
Figure 10
6. Install eye bolts in No. 2 carrier and remove it from

ring gear.
CAUTION
carrier and ring gear.
Figure 11
Figure 12

Page 14
Figure 13
Figure 14
7. Install eye bolts in ring gear and remove it.
CAUTION
Care should be taken not to damage mounting
surfaces of ring gear and case. Carefully remove all
gasket material from mounting surfaces.
Figure 15

Page 15
Figure 16
8. Use a rollover machine to turn assembly over.

9. Remove cover plate.
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19

Page 16
10. Use a rollover machine to turn case over and place a
jig on drive shaft. Use a press to remove drive shaft
from case.
CAUTION
Care should be taken not to have drive shaft drop
to floor when it is pressed out of case.
Figure 20
Figure 21
11. Remove bearing from case.
Figure 22

Page 17
12. Put drive shaft in press, and remove bearing and
spacer.
Figure 23
Figure 24

(WEAR LIMITS AND
TOLERANCES)
For general cleaning and inspection procedures, refer to
"General Maintenance Procedures" section.

Page 18
REASSEMBLY
Shaft and S/R Bearing Heat-fit

1. To cleaning shaft, remove any remnants of
anticorrosion liquid applied on shaft and remove all of
foreign substances using an air gun.
2. Insert spacer on cleaned shaft as shown in figure
below and heat bearing on a special heater.
Figure 25
Figure 26

Page 19
Figure 27
3. Stop heating when bearing temperature is between 90°

- 100°C (194° - 212°F) and insert it on shaft, holding it
with both hands to keep it level. Insert it slowly first by
4 - 5 mm (0.16 - 0.29 in) for bearing to seat itself and
then push it hard that it contacts to spacer assembled
in shaft completely.
4. After bearing assembly is completed, leave it air cool
for 1 - 2 hours.
Figure 28

Page 20
Assembly of Carrier Subassemblies
Cleaning Carrier
Put carrier, to whose corners grinding was made to remove
all foreign substances like burr, on steam washer if there
remain any foreign substance and put it on assembly die.
Cleaning Planet Gear

Check if planet gears are washed cleanly and got imprinted
and put it on assembly die.
Assembly of No. 1 Carrier

1. Put No. 1 carrier on assembly jig as shown in Figure
29.
Figure 29
2. Assemble the pin ass,y 1 and the washer into planet

gear 1 and arrange it on the pin hole of the carrier 1.
Figure 30
Figure 31

Page 21
Figure 32
Figure 33
3. Put the jig, while keeping the pin assembly 1

perpendicular, and push it with a press.
4. After its pressure insert, check the state of the
pressure insert visually.
Figure 34

Page 22
5. Insert the 2 remaining parts with pressure in the same
way.
Figure 35
Figure 36
6. Engage the snap ring (for φ 38 axis) to each thread of

the pin 1 and check if gear turns smooth by turning it.
Figure 37
Figure 38

Page 23
Assembly of No. 2 Carrier
1. Put No. 2 carrier on assembly jig as shown in Figure
39.
NOTE: Lifting eye hole should be facing up.
FG000888
Figure 39
2. Insert No. 2 bushing into No. 2 planetary gear, and

position a No. 2 thrust washer on it. 1
FG000889
Figure 40
3. Turn over gear assembly and insert it into No. 2

carrier. Align bushing hole with carrier holes.
NOTE: Thrust washer must be on bottom side of gear.
FG000890
Figure 41
FG000891
Figure 42

Page 24
4. Align spring pin hole in No. 2 shaft with spring pin hole
of No. 2 carrier. Insert shaft into carrier and No. 2
bushing.
NOTE: Shaft may need to be gently tapped with a soft- They should
faced hammer. be placed on
straight line.
FG001354
Figure 43
FG000893
Figure 44
5. Install three remaining No. 2 gears in same manner.
FG000894
Figure 45
6. After all four shafts are installed, align spring pin ( φ

10x25L) with carrier hole and drive it into position using
a hammer.
FG000895
Figure 46

Page 25
FG000896
Figure 47
7. Using a hammer and punch, calking spring pin into

position.
FG000897
Figure 48
FG000898
Figure 49
8. Repeat procedure for other three spring pins. Make

sure that gears properly rotate.
FG000899
Figure 50

Page 26
Assembly of Main Case
Cleaning Casing and Other Parts

Steam clean case and other parts, to remove any foreign
substances.
• Cleaning fluid: PK6540 (alkali)
• Liquid density: 3 - 5%
• Liquid temperature: 60° - 70°C (140° - 158°F)
Assembly of Shaft and Pinion

1. Insertion of shaft subassembly:
A. Set gear case as shown in Figure 51.
B. Using a suitable lifting device, lower shaft
subassembly into case.
C. Using special jig, keep bearing level and press it
into case.
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53

Page 27
Figure 54
2. Remove the bearing press fitting jig, place the cover

plate as shown in the figure, and tighten 8 Loctite
(#262) applied bolts (M10x25L) (with torque of
700kgf.cm).
Figure 55
Figure 56
Assembly of Seal and Bearing

1. Postion case so that pinion gear is pointing down.
Figure 57

Page 28
FG000919
Figure 58
2. Make sure that there is no foreign substance left on

seal assembly, apply grease to and around lip of oil
seal (TC5001300) as in Figure 59 and Loctite #609 to
its external part.
3. Using seal installation jig, press seal into case, keeping
it level during installation. Make sure that seall is fully
seated.
FG000920
Figure 59
CAUTION
Make sure that there is no foreign substances on
lip area. Use care not to damage seal when
inserting it. Chack for proper installation after
pressing seal into position.
FG000921
Figure 60
FG000922
Figure 61

Page 29
FG000923
Figure 62
FG000924
Figure 63
FG000925
Figure 64
FG000926
Figure 65

Page 30
FG000927
Figure 66
4. Using seal installation jig, position bearing on end of

shaft, with bearing trade mark on inner race facing up.
Press bearing firmly into place, making sure it is
properly seated.
N J2218E
FG004972
Figure 67
FG000929
Figure 68
FG000930
Figure 69

Page 31
FG000931
Figure 70
5. Rotate pinion by hand and check if it turns properly.
FG000932
Figure 71
6. Insstall plugs into PT1/2 and PT1/4 drain ports.
FG000933
Figure 72
FG000934
Figure 73

Page 32
FG000935
Figure 74
Assembly of Ring Gear

1. Insertion of lock pin.
Insert four lock pins in four reamed holes of case
flange. Tap them into place, by gently hitting them with
a soft-face hammer.
FG000936
Figure 75
FG000937
Figure 76
2. Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond #1104) evenly to ring

gear assembly of casing.
FG000938
Figure 77

Page 33
3. Lift ring gear with hoist, wipe its mating surface clean
Aim at holes.
with cloth, match and align holes after checking its
assembling direction, and press assembled parts firmly
by tightening special bolts (M12x150) on which no
Loctite has been applied.
FG001353
Figure 78
FG000940
Figure 79
Assembly of Carrier.
1. Using a suitable lifting device, lower No. 2 carrier
assembly into ring gear, making sure that planetary
gears are engaged. Continue to lower carrier and
engaging it onto splines of pinion shaft. Make sure that
carrier is resting on bearing.
NOTE: Make sure that carrier and drive shaft can
rotate.
FG000941
Figure 80
FG000942
Figure 81

Page 34
FG000943
Figure 82
2. Place a tongued washer on the thrust washer 3 of the

carrier assembly 2 and engage a hexagon bolt
(M16x25L, torque: 3,000kgf.cm) applied Loctite (#262)
with it.
CAUTION
The shorter part of the tongued washer should be
placed on the thread of the thrust washer 3 and
then bolt tightened. To prevent the washer from
Figure 83
moving, use a proper device like one shown in the
figure below to press a part of the washer and
tighten the bolt.
Figure 84
Figure 85

Page 35
3. After tightening the bolt, fix the carrier assembly 2 and
use a torque wrench to tighten it up to the standard
torque. After checking the torque, bend the longer part
of the tongued washer until it sticks to the head of the
hexagon bolt.
Figure 86
Figure 87
4. Install No. 2 sun gear in No. 2 carrier.
FG000944
Figure 88
5. Lift the carrier assembly 1, and turn it clockwise or

anticlockwise gently for it to engage with the spline of
the sun gear 2 and the ring gear.
Figure 89

Page 36
6. Assemble the sun gear 1.
Figure 90

Page 37
Assembly of the Motor
Assembly of the motor
1. Remove the compression bolts of the ring gear, wipe
out the motor assembly with clean cloth, and apply
liquid (#1104) gasket evenly.
Figure 91
2. Use a hoist to lift the prepared motor, wipe out the

assembly, and engage the snap ring on the shaft.
Figure 92
3. Put the motor on the reduction gear carefully with the

adjustment of its direction as shown in the figure below
(care should be taken not to have its flange touch the
surface of the ring gear to which liquid gasket was
applied). Assembly the motor by turning it clockwise or
anticlockwise gently that the spline of the shaft shall be
engaged with the sun gear 1.
Figure 93

Page 38
Figure 94
FG000954
Figure 95
4. Apply Loctite (#2652) to 16 socket bolts (M12x150L,

torque: 1,440 kgf.cm), insert into holes, and tighten with
an impact wrench.
Figure 96

Page 39
Figure 97
Figure 98
Figure 99
5. Engage the level gauge pipe sealed with Teflon tape to

the level gauge port of the port with a pipe wrench.
WARNING
Do not insert the level gauge bar before supplying
gear oil.
Figure 100

Page 40
Supply of Gear Oil and Grease
1. Open the oil inlet lid and supply gear oil (EP80W/90)
of 3.8ℓ
Figure 101
Figure 102
Figure 103
2. After the supply of oil, stick the level gauge into tank
and check the oil level.
Figure 104

Page 41
3. Put the nipple to supply grease in the PT1/4 tap hole
and start to supply grease until it flows out of the
opposite PT1/4 hole.
Figure 105
Figure 106
4. After the completion of supplying grease, release and

remove cokes, assemble the PT1/4 plug sealed with
Teflon tape (torque: 220 kgf.cm), tighten it with a
torque wrench, wipe out grease and other foreign
substance remaining on the surface, and check the
assembled position of the motor again.
Figure 107
Figure 108

Page 42
Figure 109
Figure 110

Page 43
INSTALLATION
1. Coat pinion gear with grease. Refer to operation
manual for specifications. 1
2. Make sure a alignment pin (6, Figure 111) is installed

in flange of swing reduction gearbox (5).
3. Using a suitable lifting device, sling swing motor (1,
Figure 111) and position swing motor and reduction
gearbox (5) as an assembly on unit. 4
5
4. Install eleven bolts and washers (4, Figure 111) to
secure swing reduction gearbox (5) to frame. 6 8
2
NOTE: Apply Loctite #262 to bolt threads.
NOTE: Tighten bolt to 55 kg•m (398 ft lb).
5. Connect hose (2, Figure 111) to reduction gearbox (5).
3
6. Connect grease lubrication line (7, Figure 111) to 7
reduction gearbox (5). FG007055
Figure 111
7. Connect hoses as tagged during removal to swing
motor (1, Figure 111).
8. Fill swing reduction gearbox with oil. Refer to operation
manual for specifications.
START-UP PROCEDURES
IMPORTANT
If air is not vented from system, it will cause damage to
swing motor and bearings.
1. Disconnect drain hose and fill swing motor case with

hydraulic oil.
2. Connect drain hose.
3. Start engine and set throttle at "LOW IDLE" and swing
FG001411
upper structure slowly two full revolutions to left and
right. Figure 112
4. Shut engine down and check hydraulic oil level. Fill

hydraulic oil tank to "H" mark on sight gauge.
5. Check for oil leaks and clean all fill and venting
locations.

Page 44
1Lower Structure and
Chassis
SP000923
RAM LOCK VALVE SP000923
Ram Lock
Valve
Edition 1
Ram Lock Valve SP000923

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Ram Lock Valve
Sectional Drawing and Part Names................... 6
Hydraulic Circuit................................................... 6
Operational Principle ........................................... 7
In Case of No Pilot Pressure at PI Port..................... 7
In Case of Pilot Pressure (Approx. 20 kg•cm2) at PI
Port.................................................................................. 7
Disassembly and Assembly ................................ 7
General Cautions............................................................ 7
Assembly and Disassembly of Chocking Valve .......... 8
Performance Test ................................................ 9
Oil Leakage Test............................................................ 9
Operational Test ............................................................. 9

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling the load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
SECTIONAL DRAWING AND
PART NAMES
4 3 1 2
FG007630
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 4 Cover Plate
2 Cartridge Ass'y 5 Bolt
3 Plunger
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Figure 2

Page 6
OPERATIONAL PRINCIPLE
In Case of No Pilot Pressure at PI Port

The hydraulic oil from the BR port and the BL port cannot
flow to the Y port as the check valves block the oil
passage.
In Case of Pilot Pressure (Approx.

20 kg•cm2) at PI Port
The pressure at the P port opens each check valve to make
the hydraulic oil from the BR port and BL port flow to the Y
port.
(BR → Y, BL → Y)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
General Cautions
It is the principle that the manufacturer carry out
disassembly and assembly of this valve. In case you
inevitably need to disassemble or assemble the valve
elsewhere, please observe the following cautions.
1. This chocking valve is precisely processed and the
gaps among each part are extremely tiny. Thus,
disassembly and assembly should be performed very
carefully so any foreign material such as dust or sand
cannot intrude into the valve.
2. For disassembly, you should start disassembly after
fully understanding the structure of this chocking valve
with structural drawings and reference drawings.
3. When you need to leave the disassembled parts of this
chocking valve unassembled for a while, be sure to
apply rust prevent oil to the parts and seal them to
prevent rusting.
4. Do not hit or treat any part of the product roughly even
in case disassembly and assembly is not peformed
smoothly.
5. After disassembly, attach ID tags to each part for
accurate assembly.
6. It is recommended to use new O-rings for replacement,
and be sure not to damage one during assembly.
(Apply a small portion of grease on the parts for
smooth assembly.)

Page 7
7. Fasten bolts with the specified standard torque.
8. Be careful not to damage or scratch the O-ring
contacting parts of this valve for preventing oil leakage.
Assembly and Disassembly of Chocking

Valve
1. Assemble the main poppet, the pilot poppet, the spring
and the spring seat in order. Insert the sub-assembly
to the block and fasten the hexa-head plug.
Hexa-head (41 mm) plug fastening torque : 7.0 kg•m
Figure 3
2. Insert each of the two plungers to each of the holes of

the block.
Figure 4
3. Mount the O-rings to the block and fasten the plate

with bolts.
A. O-ring: 1B-P24
B. Wrench bolt (5 mm) fastening torque : 1.2 kg•m
Figure 5
NOTE: Follow the reverse procedure for disassembly.

Page 8
PERFORMANCE TEST
Carry out performance tests as follows based on the
operational principle of this valve (refer to #3 "Operational
Test").
BL BL
Y
Y
PI
PI BR BR
FG007635
Figure 6
Oil Leakage Test

NOTE: The PI port should be opened.
1. Apply pressure of 350 kg•cm2 to the BR port.
2. Oil leakage amount from the Y Port should be less
than 1cc/min.
3. Apply pressure of 350 kg•cm2 to the BL port.
4. Oil leakage amount from the Y Port should be less
than 1cc/min.
Operational Test
1. Apply pressure of 350 kg•cm2 to the BR port.
2. When gradually increasing the pressure at the PI port,
the hydraulic oil should flow out to the Y port at
pressure of 19 kg•cm2 or less.
3. Apply pressure of 350 kg•cm2 to the BL port.
4. When gradually increasing the pressure at the PI port,
the hydraulic oil should flow out to the Y port at
pressure of 19 kg•cm2 or less.

Page 9
Page 10
SP000926
SELECTOR VALVE SP000926
Selector Valve
Edition 1
Selector Valve SP000926

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Selector Valve
Sectional Drawing and Part Names................... 6
Neutral Position : A → B.............................................. 7
Selective Position : A → C .......................................... 7
Assembly and Disassembly of Selector Valve ............ 9
Performance Test .............................................. 11
Oil Leakage Test.......................................................... 11
Operational Test ........................................................... 11

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling the load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
SECTIONAL DRAWING AND
PART NAMES
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 7 O-ring (1BP28)
2 Spool 8 Bolt 1 (M6 X 35L)
3 Cover 1 9 Spacer Bolt (M8 X 10L)
4 Spring Seat 10 Bolt 2 (M6 X 55L)
5 Spring 11 Cover 2
6 Spring 12 O-ring (1BP41)
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Figure 2

Page 6
Neutral Position : A → B
Hydraulic oil, flowing into the A port, passes through the
spool to flow out to the B port.
Selective Position : A → C
When pilot pressure is applied to the P port, the spool
moves to the right. This operation blocks the oil passage to
the B port and opens the oils passage to the C port, which
makes the hydraulic oil from the A port discharged to the C
port.
NOTE: The leaked oil, generated in process of this
operation, drains out to the T port.
Figure 3

Page 7
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY
General Cautions
It is the principle that the manufacturer carry out
disassembly and assembly of this valve. In case you
inevitably need to disassemble or assemble the valve
elsewhere, please observe the following cautions.
1. This selector valve is precisely processed and the gaps
among each part are extremely tiny. Thus, disassembly
and assembly should be performed very carefully so
any foreign material such as dust or sand cannot
intrude into the valve.
2. For disassembly, you should start disassembly after
fully understanding the structure of the valve with
structural drawings and reference drawings.
3. When you need to leave the disassembled parts
unassembled for a while, be sure to apply rust prevent
oil to the parts and seal them to prevent rusting.
4. Do not hit or treat any part of the product roughly even
in case disassembly and assembly is not peformed
smoothly.
accurate assembly.
6. It is recommended to use new O-rings for replacement,
and be sure not to damage one during assembly.
(Apply a small portion of grease on the parts for
smooth assembly.)
7. Fasten bolts with the specified standard torque.
8. Be careful not to damage or scratch the O-ring
contacting parts of this valve for preventing oil leakage.

Page 8
Assembly and Disassembly of Selector
Valve
1. Insert a spring seat in the spool and fasten it with a
spacer bolt.
A. Be careful not to damage the exterior of the spool
during fastening.
B. Fastening Torque: 1.7 - 2.1 kg•m
Figure 4
2. Assemble the spool ass'y to the body.

A. Insert the assembly to the hole of the C port
direction.
B. Insert the spool ass'y to the spool hole of the
body precisely and be careful not to allow
intrusion of foreign material. Do not apply
excessive force for assembly.
Figure 5
3. Assemble the return spring #1 and #2 to the body,

insert the O-ring into the cover #1 and fasten the cover
to the body with bolts.
A. Fastening O-RING: 1B-P41
B. Bolt Fastening Torque : 0.8 kg•m - 1.2 kg•m
Figure 6

Page 9
Figure 7
4. Insert the O-ring into the cover #2 for the opposite side
and fasten the cover #2 to the body with bolts.
A. Bolt Fastening Torque : 0.8 kg•m - 1.2 kg•m
Figure 8
NOTE: Follow the reverse procedure for disassembly.

Page 10
PERFORMANCE TEST
Carry out performance tests as follows based on the
operational principle of this valve (refer to #3 Operational
Test").
Figure 9
Oil Leakage Test

1. Apply pressure of 40 kg•cm2 to the P port. (Change
Spool)
2. Apply pressure of 140 kg•cm2 to the A port.
3. Oil Leakage Amount at B Port: 30cc/min or Less
Operational Test
1. Apply pressure of 140 kg•cm2 and 120 lpm to the A
port.
2. Check if the spool changes when applying pressure of
40 kg•cm2 to the P port.
3. Check if the position of the spool is restored when
reducing the pressure at the P port to 5 kg•cm2.

Page 11
Page 12
SP000927
DOUBLE PILOT CHECK VALVESP000927
Double Pilot
Check Valve
Edition 1
Double Pilot Check Valve SP000927

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Double Pilot Check Valve
Sectional Drawing & Parts ................................. 6
Hydraulic Diagram ............................................... 7
A → C, D → B ............................................................. 8
B → D, C → A ............................................................. 8
Assembly and Disassembly of Double Pilot Check
Valve ............................................................................. 10
Performance Test .............................................. 12
Cracking Pressure Test for Check Cartridge Ass'y .. 12
Pilot Cracking Pressure Test ...................................... 12
Oil Leakage Test.......................................................... 13

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
SECTIONAL DRAWING &
PARTS
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 7 Poppet (2 ea)
2 Plunger 8 Sleeve (2 ea)
3 Nipple (2 ea) 9 Spring Seat (2 ea)
4 O-ring (1B-P28, 2 ea) 10 Spring (2 ea)
5 O-ring (1B-P18, 2 ea) 11 O-ring (1B-P16, 2 ea)
6 Back-up Ring (1B-P18, 2 ea) 12 Plug (2 ea)

Page 6
HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
Figure 2

Page 7
Figure 3
A → C, D → B
The pressured oil, flowed in through the A port, is to be
flowed out to the C port through oil passage of the side of
the nipple (3) while pressing the poppet (7) and the sleeve
(8) simultaneously. The pressure of the hydraulic oil, flowed
in through the A port, pushes the plunger (2) of the center
to the left side. And if the pressure is greater than the
spring (10) force, the poppet is to be pushed back to make
a gap between the sleeve (8) and the plunger (2) and it
discharges the hydraulic oil, flowed in from the D port, to
the B port.
B → D, C → A
The same principle of 3.1 is to be applied to case of the
hydraulic oil, flowed in through the port B.

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY
General Cautions
It is the principle that disassembly and assembly of the
Double Pilot Check Valve (hereinafter referred as DPC V/V)
should be carried out by the manufacturer. In case
disassembly and assembly is inevitably required elsewhere,
the following cautions must be observed.
1. The DPC V/V is precisely processed and the
clearances among each part are extremely tiny. Thus,
disassembly and assembly should be performed very
carefully at a clean place so that any foreign material
such as dust or sand can not intrude into the DPC V/
V.
2. For disassembly of DPC V/V, a technician should start
disassembly after fully understanding the structure of
the valve with structural drawings and reference
drawings.
3. In case the DPC V/V needs to be placed unassembled
for a while, it must be treated with rust prevent oil and
sealed to prevent rusting.
4. Even in case disassembly and assembly of DPC V/V is
not peformed smoothly, do not hit or treat any part of
the product roughly.
accurate assembly.
6. For O-rings and back up-rings, it is the principle to use
new ones. And be sure not to damage one during
assembly. (Apply a small portion of grease on the parts
for smooth assembly.)
7. Fasten bolts, nipples and plugs with the specified
standard torque.
8. Be careful not to damage the O-ring contacting parts of
the DPC V/V for preventing oil leakage.

Page 9
Assembly and Disassembly of Double
Pilot Check Valve
1. Insert the poppet into the sleeve and put the spring
seat into the poppet.
Figure 4
Figure 5
2. Insert the above sub-assembly into the nipple, and then

insert the spring accordingly.
NOTE: Previously mount the O-ring and the back-up
ring to the nipple. (1B-p28 and 1B-P18)
Figure 6

Page 10
3. Mount the plug to the sub-assembly. (Temporary
assembly of the check cartridge assembly is
completed.)
NOTE: Previously install the O-ring to the plug. (1B-
P16)
Figure 7
4. Mount the check cartridge assembly to the body at the

specified standard torque with a torque wrench (38
Hex).
Standard torque: 5 kgf•m
5. Fasten the plug of the check cartridge assembly at the
specified standard torque with a torque wrench (24
Hex).
Standard torque: 3.5 kgf•m
Figure 8
6. Insert the plunger into the opposite port.
Figure 9
7. Assemble the remaining check cartridge assembly to

the opposite port according to the above procedure #1
~ #5.
Figure 10
NOTE: Disassembly can be performed in the reverse order.

Page 11
PERFORMANCE TEST
Carry out the performance tests as follows based on the
operational principle of this valve (refer to #3 "Operational
Test").
Figure 11
Cracking Pressure Test for Check

Cartridge Ass'y
1. Supply hydraulic oil to the A port and increase the
pressure gradually from "0" kgf/cm2.
2. Check if the pressure at the A port is 1.5 kgf/cm2
when the hydraulic oil begins to be flowed out through
the C port.
3. Supply hydraulic oil to the B port and increase the
4. Check if the pressure at the B port is 1.5 kgf/cm2
the D port.
Pilot Cracking Pressure Test

1. Supply hydraulic oil to the C port at 210 kgf/cm2 while
the D port is plugged.
2. Supply hydraulic oil to the B port and increase the
3. Check if the pressure at the B port is 30 ± 3 kgf/cm2
the A port.
4. Supply hydraulic oil to the D port at 210 kgf/cm2 while
the C port is plugged.
5. Supply hydraulic oil to the A port and increase the
6. Check if the pressure at the A port is 30 ± 3 kgf/cm2
the B port.

Page 12
Oil Leakage Test
1. Supply hydraulic oil to the C port at 140 kgf/cm2.
2. Check if the amount of leaked oil through the A port is
less than 1 cc/min.
3. Supply hydraulic oil to the D port at 140 kgf/cm2.
4. Check if the amount of leaked oil through the B port is
less than 1 cc/min.

Page 13
Page 14
SP000928
SOLENOID VALVE SP000928
Solenoid Valve
Edition 1
Solenoid Valve SP000928

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Solenoid Valve
Single Solenoid Valve Diagram.......................... 6
Functions of Single Solenoid Valve ................... 7
Disassembly and Reassembly Diagrams........... 8
Troubleshooting of Each Part............................. 9
Double Solenoid Valve Diagram ...................... 10
Functions of Double Solenoid Valve ............... 11
Disassembly and Reassembly Diagrams......... 12
Troubleshooting of Each Part........................... 13

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
SINGLE SOLENOID VALVE
DIAGRAM
The single solenoid valve consists of parts in the table
below.
3 4
6
LOT NO. C
5 1
FG007737
Figure 1
No. Parts Sizes Q'ty Remarks

1 Block 116 x 85 x 46 1
2 Solenoid Valve DC 24V 1
Torque:55~75kg•cm
3 Retaining Bolt M5 x 20L 4
(Torque wrench: M5 hex.)
Torque:600~700kg•cm
4 Logic Valve M33 x P2 1
(Torque wrench: M33 hex. socket)
5 Shuttle Valve M14 x P1.5 1
Torque:60~75kg•cm
6 Taper Plug NPTF 1/16 5

Page 6
FUNCTIONS OF SINGLE
SOLENOID VALVE
This valve lifts and lowers the dozer blade & outrigger legs
of wheeled excavator. When it is in the middle position, a
flow channel is created between A and C ports; when it is
powered on, its pilot pressure shuts off the logic valve to
terminate the oil flow.
Functions of Each Valve
No. Valve Functions Descriptions Remarks

Closes the drain line of logic valve (4).
When supplying DC 24V, pilot pressure is
2 Pilot cut-off generated behind the logic valve to
terminate the oil flow between A and C
ports.
Creates and terminates the oil flow
generated by the dozer blade cylinder. As
Creation and termination of
4 controlled by the pilot pressure, it is used
oil flow
for large oil flow and high pressure and
has less leakage.
No matter where pressure is generated at
Control of both directions of
either A→C or C→A of the oil flow, it
5 oil flow
ensures to generate the pilot line behind
(A→C, C→A)
the logic valve.

Page 7
DISASSEMBLY AND
REASSEMBLY DIAGRAMS
Table of page -6 shows torques of each part for the single
solenoid valve.
Use specified tools and torques.
Cap Housing
Disassembly
Retaining Bolt
Aassembly
Solenoid Piece
Plate Logic Valve
Spool
Guide
Spring Holder
Spring
Shuttle Valve Plug

FG007738
Figure 2
CAUTION
1. Clean the work area completely before starting
disassembly and reassembly.
2. For disassembly and reassembly, always follow
references in table of page -6.
3. Do not remove plates installed with coil.
4. Do not remove the logic valve.
5. Take care to prevent entering of contaminating
substances into valves after disassembly and
reassembly.
6. Always wash every removed part before its
reassembly.

Page 8
TROUBLESHOOTING OF EACH
PART
Valves Check Points What and How to Check Remedies
1. Press the rubber part of coil to the end
1. Manual status Repair coil
and check the normal action.
2. Foreign or 2. Disassemble the solenoid valve to Remove
contaminating check if there are any contaminating contaminating
substances in the substances in the spool and the guide. substances, wash,
solenoid valve and reassemble
A. Disassemble the solenoid valve and
check the resistance of coil.
Solenoid Resistance: 39Ω at 20°C
3. Breakage, short, or Breakage: ∞ (unlimited) resistance
Change coil
burn of coil Short: Low or over resistance
B. Disassemble the solenoid valve and
check if a molding part burns and melts
due to heat.
4. Check if the cap housing (where coil
4. Earth of the Change housing and/
lead is connected) and the (extended)
contactor terminal or terminal.
housing terminal are earthed correctly.
5. Disassemble the logic valve, and check
5. Foreign or Remove
if poppet is normally returned when
contaminating contaminating
Logic pressed and released and if there are
substances in the substances and
any contaminating substances in the
logic valve wash.
sleeve and the plug.

Page 9
DOUBLE SOLENOID VALVE
DIAGRAM
The double solenoid valve consists of parts in the table
below.
3 4
C1 C2
T LOT NO.
6
5 7 1
FG007739
Figure 3
No. Parts Sizes Q'ty Remarks

1 Block 116 x 95 x 94 1
2 Solenoid Valve DC 24V 2
Torque:55~75kg•cm
3 Retaining Bolt M5 x 20L 8
4 Logic Valve M33 x P2 2
5 Shuttle Valve M14 x P1.5 2
Torque:60~75kg•cm

Page 10
FUNCTIONS OF DOUBLE
SOLENOID VALVE
This valve lifts and lowers the outrigger of wheeled
excavator. When it is in the middle position, a flow channel
is created among A, C1, C2 ports; when it is powered on,
its pilot pressure shuts off the logic valve to terminate the oil
flow.
No. Valve Functions Descriptions Remarks

Closes the drain line of logic valve (4).
When supplying DC 24V, pilot pressure is
2 Pilot cut-off generated behind the logic valve to
terminate the oil flow between A and C1,
C2 ports.
Creates and terminates the oil flow
generated by the dozer blade cylinder. As
Creation and termination of
4 controlled by the pilot pressure, it is used
oil flow
for large oil flow and high pressure and
has less leakage.
No matter where pressure is generated at
Control of both directions of
either A→C1, C2 or C1, C2→A of the oil
5 oil flow
flow, it ensures to generate the pilot line
(A→C1, C2 ; C1, C2→A)
behind the logic valve.

Page 11
DISASSEMBLY AND
REASSEMBLY DIAGRAMS
Table of page -10 shows torques of each part for the
double solenoid valve.
Cap Housing
Disassembly
Retaining Bolt
Aassembly
Solenoid Piece
Plate Logic Valve
Spool
Guide
Spring Holder
Spring
Shuttle Valve Plug

FG007740
Figure 4
CAUTION
1. Clean the work area completely before starting
disassembly and reassembly.
2. For disassembly and reassembly, always follow
references in table of page -10.
3. Do not remove plates installed with coil.
4. Do not remove the logic valve.
5. Take care to prevent entering of contaminating
substances into valves after disassembly and
reassembly.
6. Always wash every removed part before its
reassembly.

Page 12
TROUBLESHOOTING OF EACH
PART
Valves Check Points What and How to Check Remedies
1. Press the rubber part of coil to the end
1. Manual status Repair coil
and check the normal action.
2. Foreign or 2. Disassemble the solenoid valve to Remove
contaminating check if there are any contaminating contaminating
substances in the substances in the spool and the guide. substances, wash,
solenoid valve and reassemble
A. Disassemble the solenoid valve and
check the resistance of coil.
Solenoid Resistance: 39Ω at 20°C
3. Breakage, short, or Breakage: ∞ (unlimited) resistance
Change coil
burn of coil Short: Low or over resistance
B. Disassemble the solenoid valve and
check if a molding part burns and melts
due to heat.
4. Check if the cap housing (where coil
4. Earth of the Change housing and/
lead is connected) and the (extended)
contactor terminal or terminal.
housing terminal are earthed correctly.
5. Disassemble the logic valve, and check
5. Foreign or Remove
if poppet is normally returned when
contaminating contaminating
Logic pressed and released and if there are
substances in the substances and
any contaminating substances in the
logic valve wash.
sleeve and the plug.

Page 13
Page 14
SP000929
FRONT AXLE SP000929
Front Axle
Edition 1
Front Axle SP000929

Page 1
MEMO
Front Axle SP000929

Page 2
Table of Contents
Front Axle
Examples of Gear-Tooth-Contact Patterns
for the Gleason Gear-Tooth System ............................ 6
Lubrication and Maintenance Specifications for
Axle MS-E 3050/3060/3070 ................................ 8
Brake Wear Measurement on Axles of MT/MS-E
3050/3060/3070 Range ..................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 12
Steering ......................................................................... 12
Output............................................................................ 16
Differential - Input ........................................................ 24
Pivot Bearing ................................................................ 29
Reassembly ........................................................ 30
Input .............................................................................. 30
Input Flange.................................................................. 42
Output............................................................................ 43
Pivot Bearing ................................................................ 62
Steering ......................................................................... 63
Oil Drain-Oil Filler and Oil Control Plugs and Grease
Lubrication Points ......................................................... 72
Front Axle SP000929

Page 3
MEMO
Front Axle SP000929

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Front Axle SP000929

Page 5
for the Gleason Gear-Tooth System
Ideal tooth-contact pattern i.e. pinion distance is correct
Coast side (concave)
BSS0090L
Figure 1
Drive side (convex)
BSS0100L
Figure 2
Pinion distance must be increased
(+) BSS0110L
Figure 3
BSS0130L
Figure 4
Front Axle SP000929

Page 6
BSS0140L
Figure 5
Pinion distance must be decreased
(-) BSS0120L
Figure 6
BSS0150L
Figure 7
BSS0160L
Figure 8
Front Axle SP000929

Page 7
LUBRICATION AND
MAINTENANCE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR AXLE
MS-E 3050/3060/3070
Oil Grade
Oils according to the "Table of Recommended Lubricants"
pages of operation manual are permitted for axles MS-E
3050/3060/3070.
Oil Change
A horizontal installation position of the axle in every direction
is precondition for an oil change according to specifications!
Place vehicle in a horizontal position!
Carefully clean all drain -, filler- and control plugs prior to
opening!
Drain oil only right after a longer travel period!
4
5
2
3
5 1
2
FG002279
Figure 9
Reference Reference
Number Number
Oil Drain Hole Oil Filler / Oil Check Hole
1 3
(M36x1.5 Axle Drive Housing) (M36x1.5 Axle Drive Housing)
Oil Drain / Oil Filler Hole 4 Brake Connection Pipe
2
(M36x1.5 Output Units) 5 Brake Breather Valve
1. Oil Drain From Axle

Loosen oil drain plugs (1) and drain oil from axle.
2. Oil Drain From Outputs
Front Axle SP000929

Page 8
WARNING
To avoid injury when opening the oil drain and oil
filler plug (2), due to a possible pressure build-up
in the oil system of the planetary carrier, bring
drain hole to topmost position (12 o’clock) and
carefully unscrew oil drain and oil filler plug (2).
Then bring drain hole to lowermost position (6
o’clock) and drain oil from outputs.
3. Oil Filling of Axle

Provide drain plug (1, with solenoid insert) with a new
O-ring and mount it.
Tightening torque (M36x1.5) .................... MA = 50 N•m
Fill up oil to the overflow of the filler hole (3).
Filling quantity : MS-E 3050 = approx. 9.00 liter, MS-E
3060 = approx. 10.5 liter, MS-E 3070 = appr. 11.00 liter
4. Check
Check oil level after some minutes and fill-up to the
specified level, until level remains constant.
Provide filling and checking plugs (3) with new O-ring
and mount them.
Tightening torque (M36x1.5) .....................MA = 50 N•m
5. Oil Filling of Outputs
Position both oil drain and oil filler hole (2) (reference
line horizontally to road level) and fill oil up to overflow.
Filling quantity per output : MS-E 3050/3060/3070 =
appr. 2.5 liter
Provide drain and filler plug (2) with new O-ring and mount it.
Tightening torque (M36x1.5) .....................MA = 50 N•m
Oil Change Interval

First oil change after 500 operating hours, any further one
after 2000 (i.e. after 2500/4500/6500 ....) operating hours,
however, at least once per year.
Oil Level Check

Check oil level every month, in particular, however, after putting
a vehicle into operation with new or repaired axles or axle parts.
Brake
The following oils are admissible for the pneum.-hydr.
operated or accumulator operated brake actuation
1. Motor oils SAE 10 W acc. to specification MIL-L 2104
C, MIL-L 46152, API-CC, CD, SC, SD, SE
2. ATF. oils type A, Suffic A, Dexron von II D
Front Axle SP000929

Page 9
BRAKE WEAR MEASUREMENT
ON AXLES OF MT/MS-E 3050/
3060/3070 RANGE
WARNING
The measurement of wear on the multi-disc brake only
gives limited information on the total state of the plate
pack.
without disassembling the output.
Make measurement of lining wear at least once per year, in

particular, however, in case of a different braking behaviour,
like:
• Brake noises
1
• Reduced braking power
• Different deceleration
• Different brake oil level
Oil Stand
• Different braking pressure
CAUTION
To avoid injury when opening the oil drain/oil filler plug
(1), due to a possible pressure build-up in the planetary FG006855
carrier bring drain hole to topmost position (12 o’clock) Figure 10
and carefully unscrew oil drain and filler plug (1).
Then turn output until oil filler/ oil drain hole (1) is on 9
o’clock position. Figure 10. 3
Sketches in Figure 11, Figure 12 are shown turned by 90°

Legend to Figure 10, Figure 11 and Figure 12
Reference
Description
Number
1 Oil filler-/oil drain hole 4 5 6 7
Gauge hole (ø = 10 mm) in ring gear - 9
2
o’clock position FG002281
3 Dial indicator with solenoid support Figure 11
4 Planetary carrier
5 Ring gear
6 Piston
7 Plate pack
X Piston stroke
Front Axle SP000929

Page 10
X
FG002282
Figure 12
Lining Wear Measurement of Multi-disc Brake

With unapplied brake, piston is in contact with ring gear by
compression spring return. see Figure 11
• get dial indicator (3) into touch with piston(6)
through oil filler /oil drain hole (1) and gauge hole
(2).
• Apply pressure on brake and determine piston
stroke (X. see Figure 12) by means of dial
indicator
• Take limit value of piston stroke (at max. wear)
from the chart below
Limit value of piston stroke (X) at

Axle type Lined discs Piston stroke with new discs
max. wear
MT-E 3050 8 pcs. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 7.0 mm
MT-E 3060 6 pcs. 0.7 ... 1.3 mm 6.0 mm
MT-E 3070 7 pcs. 0.7 ... 1.3 mm 6.5 mm
MS-E 3050 8 pcs. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 7.0 mm
MS-E 3060 6 pcs. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 6.0 mm
MS-E 3070 7 pcs. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 6.5 mm
Make lining wear measurement on both outputs!

Then provide oil drain/filler plug with new O-ring and install
it.
Tightening torque(M36x1.5) ................................ MA = 50 N•m
Front Axle SP000929

Page 11
DISASSEMBLY
Total view - axle installed on assembly truck.
Illustration shows version "MS-E 3060".
WARNING
Secure axle by means of a support (arrow).
Figure 13
Steering
1. View - Steering installed in axle.
Figure 14
2. Loosen hex nuts on both tie rods.
Figure 15
WARNING
Drive out tie rod from bevel seat.
use suitable mandrel (brass / aluminium).
Figure 16
Front Axle SP000929

Page 12
3. Warm up threaded joint area of piston rod / axial joint.
disassembly is more difficult (thread / axial joint is
installed with locking compound/Loctite no. 243).
Figure 17
4. Separate both tie rods (ass’y) from piston rod.
CAUTION
If work is just to be done on sealing elements and
/ or piston rod or guide, no disassembly of the
steering cylinder ass’y is required and you may
continue with Figure 24.
Figure 18
5. Disassemble both elbows (see arrows) or screw necks,

depending on version.
Figure 19
Front Axle SP000929

Page 13
6. Loosen threaded joint of steering / axle drive housing.
Figure 20
7. Steering cylinder is fixed with locking compound -

disassembly is more difficult!
Heat up both application areas of locking compound
(see arrows) of the axle drive housing by means of a
hot-air blower.
Figure 21
8. Drive out steering cylinder ass’y from axle drive

housing by means of a plastic / aluminium hammer.
Figure 22
9. Unsnap the circlip and remove flange.
Figure 23
Front Axle SP000929

Page 14
10. Unsnap retaining ring.
Figure 24
11. Drive the guide into the cylinder tube (direction of

arrow) until the circlip can be removed (see Figure 26).
Figure 25
12. Unsnap circlip.
Figure 26
13. Drive out piston rod together with guide from cylinder
tube.
Figure 27
Front Axle SP000929

Page 15
14. Pull off guide from piston rod.
Remove all sealing elements from piston, guide and
cylinder.
Figure 28
Output
1. Loosen screw plug and drain oil from the axle.
CAUTION
Use suitable collecting basin - environmental
protection!
Figure 29
WARNING
To avoid injury due to a possible pressure build-up
in the oil system of the planetary carrier, bring oil
filler and control plug to 12 o’clock position and
carefully unscrew! use suitable mandrel (brass /
aluminium).
Then bring drain hole to 6 o’clock position and
drain the oil!
Figure 30
CAUTION
Use suitable collecting basin - environmental
protection!
Front Axle SP000929

Page 16
CAUTION
Following illustration shows the complete
disassembly of the output (Figure 32 ~Figure 57)
- if work is required on the differential and / or
pinion, you may disassemble the output as one
unit. as shown on the adjacent photo.
2. Please take the required work steps (such as

dismantling the tie rod-, bearing pins ecc. ...) from
chapters
• “Steering” on page 12 and
• “Knuckle Housing” on page 21.
WARNING
Pay attention to seal ring in the axle housing - risk
Figure 31
of damage!
Planetary Carrier
1. Loosen both cylinder screws and separate planetary
carrier from hub.
Figure 32
2. Unsnap circlip.
Figure 33
Front Axle SP000929

Page 17
3. Pull off planetary gear by means of a two-armed puller.
Figure 34
4. Unsnap circlip and remove washer.

Then remove roller bearing, second circlip and washer
from planetary gear.
Figure 35
Brake / Hub
1. Unsnap retaining ring and remove both thrust washers.
Figure 36
2. Remove slotted nut mount (cylinder screw).
Figure 37
Front Axle SP000929

Page 18
3. Loosen slotted nut.
Figure 38
4. Press off ring gear with piston.

Pay attention to the releasing O-ring (arrow).
Figure 39
5. Loosen hex. screws, remove spring sleeves and

compression springs.
Figure 40
6. Press off piston from ring gear.
Figure 41
Front Axle SP000929

Page 19
7. Remove sealing elements (arrows) from ring gear.
Figure 42
8. Remove plate pack.
Figure 43
9. Remove O-ring (arrow) and lift-off disc carrier with

lever, then remove releasing O-ring.
Figure 44
10. Pull hub from hub carrier by means of pressure piece

and twoarmed puller.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the releasing bearing inner ring
Figure 45
Front Axle SP000929

Page 20
11. Lift-off shaft seal (arrow) with lever and remove both
bearing outer rings from hub.
Figure 46
12. Just for axle type MS-E 3060 :

Remove spacer bush.
Figure 47
13. Pull bearing inner ring from hub.
Figure 48
Knuckle Housing 7
1. Legend to the sketch
Reference
Description
Number
1 Bearing Pin 6
3
2 Knuckle Housing
2 5
3 Axle Housing
4 Shim (Only on Lower Bearing Pin) 4
1
FG002333
5 O-ring
Figure 49
6 Sealing Cap
7 Taper Roller Bearing
Front Axle SP000929

Page 21
2. Loosen threaded connection and remove upper bearing
pin.
WARNING
Remove lower bearing pin - by means of lifting
device / see Figure 51 - not before securing the
knuckle housing.
Figure 50
3. Secure knuckle housing by means of lifting device and

dismantle lower bearing pin.
CAUTION
Pay attention to releasing shim.
Figure 51
4. Remove bearing inner ring (7), O-ring (5), sealing cap

(6) and brake connection screw neck (8) from bearing
pin (1).
Figure 52
5. Separate knuckle housing with double u-joint shaft from

axle housing.
WARNING
of damage
Figure 53
Front Axle SP000929

Page 22
6. Pull out double u-joint shaft from knuckle housing.
WARNING
of damage
Figure 54
7. Pull out seal ring and afterwards the bushing behind

from the knuckle housing.
Figure 55
8. Pull out seal ring and afterwards the bushing behind

from the axle housing.
Figure 56
9. Pull out both bearing outer rings from the swivel

bearing holes.
Figure 57
Front Axle SP000929

Page 23
Differential - Input
If work is required on the differential and / or pinion, you may
disassemble the output(s) as one unit. as shown on the
adjacent photo.
Please take the required work steps (such as dismantling
the tie rod-, bearing pins ecc. ...) from chapters
• “Steering” on page 12 and
• “Knuckle Housing” on page 21 1/10.
Figure 58
WARNING
Pay attention to the seal ring in the axle housing - risk
of damage.
1. Fix axle housing part / II by means of a lifting strap,

loosen threaded joint of axle housing half on crown
wheel side (differential) and separate axle housing half
part / II from axle drive housing.
WARNING
Pay attention to the releasing differential.
Figure 59
2. Remove bearing outer ring (arrow1) and the shim

behind as well as O ring (arrow 2) from axle housing
part / II.
CAUTION
Mark shim (regarding position / bearing allocation) -
assembly aid.
Figure 60
Front Axle SP000929

Page 24
3. Lift off the differential from the axle drive housing.
Figure 61
4. Pull out bearing outer ring and the shim behind from
the bearing hole of axle housing part / I.
CAUTION
Mark shim (regarding position / bearing allocation) -
assembly aid.
Figure 62
Differential Version "D-500" and "D-750"

1. The illustration shows version "D-500".
Pull both taper roller bearings from differential carrier.
Figure 63
2. Loosen threaded joint (position "X").
CAUTION
n version "D-750" the hex. screws are installed with
locking compound (Loctite) - disassembly is more
difficult - if required, warm up area of threaded
joint (disassembly aid).
Figure 64
Front Axle SP000929

Page 25
A. Version "D-500"
X
FG002349
Figure 65
B. Version "D-750" X
FG002350
Figure 66
3. Separate differential carrier halves and remove the

releasing single components.
Figure 67
4. Press off crown wheel from differential carrier half.
Figure 68
Front Axle SP000929

Page 26
Input 10
1
1. Legend to Figure 69
Reference
Description
Number
1 Input Pinion 9
7
2 Hex. Nut
3 Washer 8
4 Input Flange 6 5
5 Screen Sheet 3 4
6 Seal Ring
2
7 Taper Roller Bearing
FG002353
8 Spacer Ring (Bearing Rolling Moment) Figure 69
9 Shim (Contact Pattern)
10 Input Housing
2. Loosen hex. nut and remove the washer behind.
WARNING
Pay attention to support of axle housing (arrow).
Figure 70
3. Remove flange.
If required. remove screen sheet from output flange.
Figure 71
Front Axle SP000929

Page 27
4. Lift-off seal ring with lever.
Figure 72
5. Drive out input pinion.
CAUTION
If taper roller bearings should not be replaced, pay
attention that the outside bearing inner ring - with
all its rolls - is in contact with bearing outer ring
when driving out the input pinion.
Figure 73
6. Remove spacer ring.
Figure 74
7. Press off bearing inner ring from input pinion.
Figure 75
Front Axle SP000929

Page 28
8. Extract outside bearing outer ring.
Figure 76
9. Drive out bearing outer ring from the inner bearing hole
- pay attention to the shim behind.
CAUTION
Mark shim (reg. position / bearing allocation) -
assembly aid.
Figure 77
Pivot Bearing
If required:
Provide bushings with a separating slot - see arrow -
(bushings are destroyed by this).
Then remove bushings from holes.
Figure 78
Front Axle SP000929

Page 29
REASSEMBLY
Input
Comment on Sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Drive Pinion
2 Differential (With Crown Wheel)
3 Shim for Contact Pattern (Bevel Gear Set)
Spacer Ring
4
(Bearing Rolling Moment / Pinion Bearing)
5 Shim For Backlash
Shim
6 (Bearing Rolling Moment / Differential Figure 79
Bearing)
7 Input Flange
8 Seal Ring
9 Axle Drive Housing
10 Axle Housing / Part I (Loa = O-ring)
11 Axle Housing / Part Ii (Crown Wheel Side)
Just for "New part" assembly or if disassembled:

Install O-ring (lOa) on axle housing / part I (10) and mount
axle drive housing (9) - observe installation position.
Tightening torque ......................... MA = 390 N•m (M 18/10.9)
Determine Shim for Pinion Positioning to Obtain An

Optimum Contact Pattern of Crown Wheel/pinion -
Refer to Contact Pattern Examples, (See page
-6~11)
1. Read dimension "I" (Position - see arrow) from axle
drive housing.
Dimension "I" e.g ......................................... 149.09 mm
Figure 80
Front Axle SP000929

Page 30
2. Read pinion dimension (basic distance) "X" from pinion
(see arrow) or measure it in case of a + or - deviation
of the pinion dimension caused by the production
(value concerned is marked by hand on the pinion,
e.g.+ 0.1).
Pinion dimen. "X" (without + or -deviation) = 116.0 mm
Pinion dimen. "X" with an indicated + 0.1 deviation = 116.1

mm
Pinion dimen. "X" with an indicated - 0.1 deviation =
115.9 mm Figure 81
Dimension "II" (Pinion basic distance) e.g. 116.00 mm
CAUTION
Measure dimension "III" bearing width, observing
that the rollers are located without any play (rotate
bearing inner ring in both directions several times -
roller setting).
3. Since the installed roller bearing is subject to a pre-

load in installation position, consider an experience
deduction of - 0.1mm! Figure 82
Dimension "III" = e.g. 32.00 mm - 0.1 mm → 31.90
mm
Calculation Example:
Dimension "I" ............................................... 149.09 mm
Dimension "II + III" (116.00 + 31.90) ........ -148.10 mm
Result ............................................................ = 1.01 mm
Shim reouired ............................................ "S" 1.00 mm
4. Insert the determined shim (e.g. "S" = 1.00 mm) into
the inner bearing hole / pinion bearing.
Figure 83
Front Axle SP000929

Page 31
5. Super-cool bearing outer ring (see arrow) and bring it
into contact position in the inner bearing hole / pinion
bearing by means of the fixture.
Figure 84
6. Instal outside bearing outer ring / pinion bearing.
Figure 85
7. Mount heated bearing inner ring until contact is

obtained and readjust after cooling-down.
Figure 86
Adjust Rolling Moment of Drive Pinion Bearing 1.0 ~ 2.0

N•m (Without Seal Ring):
1. Mount spacer ring (s = optional).
CAUTION
We would reconunend to re-install the spacer ring
found during disassembly. If, however, the required
rolling moment of 1.0 ~ 2.0 N•m (without seal ring)
is not achieved - see bearing rolling moment test - Figure 87
correct the bearing rolling moment by means of a
corresponding spacer ring.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 32
2. Insert the preas sembled drive pinion, mount the
heated bearing inner ring until contact is obtained.
Figure 88
3. Mount flange, fix with washer and hex. nut.

Tightening torque (M27x1.5).................... MA = 600 N•m
Figure 89
4. Check rolling moment of pinion bearing.

Bearing rolling moment (without seal ring) 1.0 ~ 2.0
N•m
Try to achieve upper value.
CAUTION
If the rolling moment differs from the required
value, correct it with a suitable spacer ring (See
Figure 21 on page -14). Figure 90
CAUTION
Reassemble seal ring - as shown in page -42~74
(after completed differential assembly and positive
contact pattern check).
Front Axle SP000929

Page 33
Differential Version "D-500" and "D-750"
1. Illustration shows version "D-500".
Mount slotted pins (arrows) into differential carrier half,
considering the assembly specification, see Figure 26.
Figure 91
2. Assembly Specification:
Bring slotted pin(s) in a position where slot shows into
the direction of force (arrow).
In case of double slotted pins - bring the slots in a
1800 degrees offset position to each other.
To sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Differential Carrier Figure 92
2 Slotted Pin
Slotted Pin
3
(Just for Double Slotted Pin Version)
X Direction of Force
3. Press differential carrier until contact is obtained.

Assembly aid - (just for version "D-500") Insert two
adjusting screws into crown wheel.
Figure 93
4. Insert thrust washer and axle bevel gear.
CAUTION
Put driving lugs of thrust washer into driving holes
/ differential carrier - do not locate in oil supply
recesses.
Figure 94
Front Axle SP000929

Page 34
5. Install differential bevel gears and thrust washers on
differential spider and insert in differential carrier half I.
CAUTION
Ensure radial installation position of thrust
washers.
Lug is looking vertically upward (see arrow).
Figure 95
6. Insert second axle bevel gear.
Figure 96
7. Stick thrust washer with grease (assembly aid) into

differential carrier half II.
Locate differential carrier half II on differential carrier
half I.
CAUTION
/ differential carrier - do not locate in oil supply
recesses. Figure 97
8. Fasten differential carrier halves with cylinder. screws

and washers (D-500, Pos. X) and with hex. screws (D-
750, Pos.X).
CAUTION
Ensure radial installation position - designation (ZF-
Nr. ...) at the same time corresponds to radial
position marking.
Figure 98
Front Axle SP000929

Page 35
A. Version "D-500"
Figure 99
B. Version "D-750"
CAUTION
Just for version "D-750", insert hex screws
with locking agent Loctite-no.262).
Figure 100
Version "D-500"
Tightening torque (M 12x1.5/12.9) .......... MA = 145 N•m
Version "D-750"
Install both bearing inner rings (arrows).
Figure 101
9. Wet some tooth flanks of the crown wheel with marking

ink (for contact pattern check - See Figure 112 on
page -40).
Figure 102
Front Axle SP000929

Page 36
Adjust Backlash of Bevel Gear Set and Bearing Rolling
Moment of Differential Bearing
Backlash (crown wheeVdrive pinion)
MS-E 3050/3060 = 0.12 ~ 0.24 mm
MS-E 3070 = 0.15 ~ 0.27 mm
Differential bearing preload = 0.10 ~ 0.15 mm

(corresponds to a bearing rolling moment of 1 ~ 4 N•m)
CAUTION
Bring axle drive housing / axle housing into upright
position.
1. Insert shim (backlash) into hole of axle housing / part I

and install bearing outer ring until contact is obtained.
We would recommend to install the shim (experience
value = approx. 1.25 mm) found during disassembly -
also refer to disassembly instructions, See Figure 131
on page -46.
CAUTION
However, the required backlash is decisive for the Figure 103
shim(s) be used.
2. Insert pre-assembled differential.
Figure 104
Front Axle SP000929

Page 37
3. Place bearing outer ring.
CAUTION
Locate the bearing outer ring on the bearing inner
ring, until all rollers are located without any play.
For this purpose rotate differential and bearing
outer ring both directions several times - roller
setting.
Figure 105
CAUTION
A correct positioning of bearing outer ring and
differential imperative for the following measuring
operation.
4. Determine dimension "I", from mounting face of axle

drive housing to bearing contact.
Dimension "I" e.g. ............................................ 18.10 mm
CAUTION
Make measurement on several points and calculate
mean value.
Figure 106
5. Determine dimension "II", from mounting face of axle

housing part II to contact face / bearing outer ring.
Dimension "II" e.g. .......................................... 17.20 mm
Dimension "I" e.g. .......................................... 18.10 mm
Dimension "II" e.g. ...................................... - 17.20 mm
Difference ..................................................... = 0.90 mm
requ. bearing preload (0.10 ~ 0.15mm)...... + 0.13 mm
Result ............................................................ = 1.03 mm
Reouired shim "S" → ................................... = 1.05 mm
Figure 107
Front Axle SP000929

Page 38
6. Insert determined shim(s) e.g. "S" = 1.05 mm into
bearing hole of axle housing / part II and instal bearing
outer ring so that contact is obtained.
CAUTION
Instal (stick) bearing outer ring into hole with
grease - assembly aid.
Figure 108
7. Locate preas sembled axle housing /part II (without O-

ring) (observe radial installation position) and
temporarily fix with hex. screws.
Figure 109
Backlash and Contact Pattern Check

1. Place dial indicator at right angles to a tooth flank of
the crown wheel (within the outer diameter area)
through oil drain hole and check backlash.
Backlash
MS-E 3050/3060 = 0.12 - 0.24 mm
MS-E3070 = 0.15 - 0.27 mm
CAUTION Figure 110
In case of a deviation from the specified backlash,

correct it with a suitable shim (See Figure 103).
Front Axle SP000929

Page 39
CAUTION
A correction of shim / backlash also requires a
correction of shim / bearing rolling moment to the
opposite direction (See Figure 108).
2. Rotate drive pinion in both directions several times over

crown wheel / differential (contact pattern impression - in
this connection see Figure 112).
Figure 111
3. Remove differential.
Compare contact pattern (see arrow) with contact
pattern examples on page -6~9).
CAUTION
If the contact pattern differs considerably, an error
was made when measuring the shim (See Figure
103 on page -37), which needs to be corrected by
all means. Figure 112
4. Oil O-ring and mount on collar (arrow) of axle housing

half / part II.
Figure 113
Front Axle SP000929

Page 40
5. Reinstall differential.
Figure 114
6. Instal pre-assembled axle housing half (observe radial

installation position), fix with hex. screws and washers.
Tightening torque (M18/10.9)................... MA = 390 N•m
Figure 115
WARNING
Bring axle into horizontal position and secure with
a support (arrow).
Figure 116
7. Disassemble flange.
Figure 117
Front Axle SP000929

Page 41
Input Flange
Comment on Figure 118 ... Figure 121
Reference
Description
Number
1 Drive Pinion
2 Hex. Nut
3 Washer
4 Input Flange
5 Screen
6 Seal Ring
7 Bevel Roller Bearing
8 Spacer Nng
9 Input Housing
Installation Dimension Figure 118
X MS-E 3050/3060 → 13.0 +0.2 mm
MS-E 3070 → 13.5 +0.2 mm
CAUTION
Illustration shows version - MS-E 3060
1. Place seal ring (6), considering the required installation

position (dimension "X") - see Figure 118.
Contact face (outer diameter) of seal ring:
- wet it with spirit (assembly aid) if rubber-coated
- apply sealing agent (Loctite no. 574) if made of
metal
Apply grease on seal and dust lip of the seal ring.
(Grease e.g. "PETAMO GHY 133 N" ZF-order no. 0671
190 099)
Figure 119
CAUTION
Ensure plane installation position of seal ring - use
suitable driver.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 42
2. Press screen / thrust plate (5) on the input flange until
contact is obtained - also see Figure 118.
CAUTION
Screen / thrust plate must not be deformed when
mounted - use suitable driver.
Figure 120
3. Install pre-assembled input flange (4+5) and washer

(3), fix with hex. nut (2).
WARNING
Secure hex. nut with locking agent (Loctite-no. 262).
Tightening torque (M27x1.5).................... MA = 600 N•m
Figure 121
Output
1. Comment on Figure 122
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axle Housing
2 Knuckle Housing
3 Hub
4 Multi-disc Brake
5 Planetary Carrier Figure 122
2. Mount just for cpl. output - Figure 123

Locate the cpl. output on the axle - by installing the u-
joint shaft in the differential toothing.
WARNING
of damage.
Other required work steps (bearing pin and tie rod Figure 123
assembly) can be taken in extracts from the complete
assembly (“Knuckle Housing” on page 45 ~ 53 and
“Steering” on page 63).
Front Axle SP000929

Page 43
Pre-assemble Axle Housim
1. Legend on Figure 124 ~ Figure 128
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axle Housing
2 Bushing (Observe Installation Position)
3 Seal Ring (Observe Installation Position)
4 Bearing Outer Rings (Pivot Bearing)
X Oil Chamber Side
Figure 124
Bushing - lubrication groove outlet installed in 6 o’clock
position (referred to the axle mounted in the vehicle).
2. Flush-mount bushing in the axle housing hole,
considering the installation position (see detailed
sketch).
Figure 125
Detailed sketch - 90° offset:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axle Housing
2 Bushing
Oil Chamber Side Observe Installation
X
Position of Bushing
lubrication groove outlet in 6 o’clock position (referred

to axle mounted in vehicle).
Figure 126
3. Flush-mount seal ring (item 3 - See Figure 124) into

axle housing hole, with seal lip showing to oil chamber.
CAUTION
- Wet it with spirit (assembly aid) if rubber-coated
- Apply sealing agent (Loctite no. 574) if made of
metal
Figure 127
Front Axle SP000929

Page 44
CAUTION
suitable driver.
4. Mount both bearing outer rings (Item 4- See Figure

124) into pivot bearing holes of the axle housing.
Figure 128
WARNING
Carefully install u-joint shaft (Risk of damage - seal
ring).
Figure 129
Knuckle Housing
1. Just for assembly of a new knuckle housing (Figure
130):
Shut machining openings (3x - see arrows) of oil
supply holes with plugs.
Figure 130
Front Axle SP000929

Page 45
2. Legend to Figure 131 ... Figure 134:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Knuckle Housing
2 Bushing (Observe Installation Position)
3 Seal Ring (Observe Installation Position)
Installation Dimension (Seal Ring)
E MS-E 3050 → Flush
MS-E 3060/3070 → 4.00 + 0.3 mm
Installation position of bushing Figure 131
X Lubrication groove outlet in 6 o’clock

position (referred to knuckle housing /
axle mounted in vehicle).
3. Flush-mount bushing into knuckle housing hole,

considering the installation position (See Figure 131
and detailed sketch).
Figure 132
Detailed sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Knuckle housing
2 Bushing
Oil chamber side Observe installation
position of bushing Lubrication groove
X outlet in 6 o’clock position (referred to
knuckle housing / axle mounted in
vehicle). Figure 133
4. Mount seal ring (item 3 - See Figure 131) into knuckle

housing hole - considering installation dimension "E"
(See Figure 131) and installation position (seal lip
showing to oil chamber).
Figure 134
Front Axle SP000929

Page 46
CAUTION
- wet it with spirit (assembly aid) if rubber-coated
- apply sealing agent (Loctite no. 574) if made of
metal
(Grease e.g. "PETAMO GHY 133 N" ZF-order no.
0671 190 099)
CAUTION
suitable driver.
CAUTION
Locate pre-assembled knuckle housing on axle
housing, carefully mount u-joint shaft Seal ring -
risk of damage).
Figure 135
5. Legend to Figure 136 .... Figure 139:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Bearing Pin
2 Sealing Cap
3 O-ring
4 Bevel Roller Bearing
5 Shim (just on Lower Bearing Pin)
6 Lubrication Nipple
Figure 136
7 Knuckle Housing
8 Axle Housing
X Area/Anti-corrosive Agent
Front Axle SP000929

Page 47
6. Mount sealing cap
observe installation position (See Figure 136).
Figure 137
7. Instal O-ring (arrow - 1) and apply anti-corrosive agent,

"Weicon Anti Seize" (Never Seez) ZF-order no. 0671
196001 on bearing pin collar (arrow-2).
Mount bearing inner ring.
Figure 138
8. Just on lower bearing pin:

Instal shim for pivot bearing roller moment setting.
e.g. S = 0.80 mm (experience value) on lower bearing
pin.
Figure 139
9. Instal pre-assembled lower bearing pin and fix with

hex. screws.
CAUTION
Observe installation position - mount bearing pin
with lubrication nipple showing to axle centre.
Figure 140
Front Axle SP000929

Page 48
10. Instal O-ring.
Figure 141
11. Instal pre-assembled upper bearing pin (Figure 137 and

Figure 138).
CAUTION
Observe installation position - oil supply holes for
multi-disc brake.
Figure 142
12. Fix both bearing pins definitively.

Tightening torque (M 16/10.9)................. MA = 280 N•m
Figure 143
13. Mount lubrication nipple (arrow-I) in both bearing pins

and provide pivot bearing with grease (grease acc. to
ZF-lubrication list "TE-ML 05", e.g. RENOLIT 283 EP
2).
Tightening torque (M 6xl) .......................... MA = 6 N•m
Just on upper bearing pin:
Mount screw neck (arrow-2) with O-ring
Tightening torque (M l4x1.5) ..................... MA = 35N•m
Mount breather valve (arrow-3) and apply dust cap.
Figure 144
Tightening torque (M l4x1.5) ..................... MA = 20N•m
Front Axle SP000929

Page 49
14. Check rolling moment of pivot bearing.
For this purpose locate torque wrench on a hex. screw,
align at bearing pin center and determine bearing
rolling moment considering the following formula.
Bearing rolling moment → 50 ~ 60 N•m
CAUTION
Try to achieve the upper value of bearing roller
moment. Figure 145
In case of a deviation from the specified bearing
rolling moment, correct it with a suitable shim. (See
Figure 139)
Reference
Description
Number
Effective torque on the central swivel
TE
point (bearing pin center)
Distance - from torque wrench point of
attach (hex. screw center) to grip
L Figure 146
center (torque wrench) e.g. L = 300
mm (0.3 m)
Distance - from torque wrench socket
(hex. screw center) to bearing pin
A
center (central swivel point) e.g. A =
60 mm (0.06 m)
Value of the torque to be read from
TS
the scale
TS × ( L + A )
TE = ---------------------------------
L
TE × L
TS = -----------------
L+A
As a result the scale of the torque wrench must
indicate a value of 46 ~ 50 N•m, which corresponds to
an effective bearing rolling moment of 50 ~ 60 N•m in
the swivel bearing.
Hub
1. Install heated bearing inner ring until contact is
obtained.
Figure 147
Front Axle SP000929

Page 50
2. Just for axle type MS-E 3060:
Install spacer bush.
Figure 148
3. Mount wheel bolts (l).

Install both bearing outer rings (2) of hub bearing until
contact is obtained.
Oil O-ring (3) and locate in annular groove of hub.
Figure 149
4. Mount shaft seal, considering installation position

(marking OUT - SIDE looking upward / outward) and
installation dimension "X" - see detailed sketch.
Legend to Figure 85 and detailed sketches:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Hub
2 Shaft Seal
X Installation Dimension
Figure 150
A. Version MT-E 3050/3060

X = 0.0 ~ 0.3mm
Figure 151
Front Axle SP000929

Page 51
B. Version MT-E 3070
X = 6.0 +0.2 mm
CAUTION
Apply sealing agent (Loctite-Nr. 574) to contact
face shaft seal / hub.
CAUTION Figure 152

Wet contact face of shaft seal/hub carrier with
spirit at the very beginning of the assembly -
assembly aid.
5. Install preas sembled hub until contact is obtained and

fix with heated outer bearing inner ring.
Figure 153
6. Oil a-rings and locate in annular groove (arrow) of

knuckle housing.
Then install disc carrier.
Figure 154
Front Axle SP000929

Page 52
7. Bring hub bearing into contact position (Figure 155 ~
157):
Install ring gear (without sealing elements).
Figure 155
8. Bring hub bearing into contact position - for this

purpose tighten slotted nut with a tightening torque of
max. 1400 N•m.
CAUTION
Apply lubricant (e.g. MOLYCOTE PASTE 1000) to
thread - knuckle housing / slotted nut.
Figure 156
CAUTION
While tightening the slotted nut rotate hub in both
directions several times - roller setting.
9. Loosen slotted nut again and remove ring gear.
Figure 157
Front Axle SP000929

Page 53
Multi-Disc Brake
1. Install disc pack alternately starting with an outer disc.
CAUTION
Pay attention to installation position of inner discs
- See Figure 159.
Figure 158
CAUTION
Take the actually required disc fitting from the
corresponding spare parts list.
2. Installation position of inner discs:
WARNING
Bring inner clutch discs in a position where one of
the tooth recesses (arrow) is in 6 o’clock position -
with axle being installed in the vehicle.
CAUTION Figure 159
Inner clutch discs s = 2.5 mm (Standard)

Install inner clutch discs with s = alternatively (2.0-
2.5-3.0 mm) - required for disc clearance
adjustment - on the outside of the disc pack.
3. Oil O-ring and locate in annular groove of disc carrier.
CAUTION
Stick O-ring by means of grease - assembly aid.
Figure 160
Front Axle SP000929

Page 54
4. Oil sealing elements and locate in annular grooves
(arrows) of the ring gear - as shown in the detailed
sketch.
CAUTION
Pay attention to installation position and
arrangement of sealing elements.
Figure 161
Legend to Figure 161 and detailed sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Ring Gear
2 Support Ring
3 U-ring
4 U-ring
5 Support Ring
Figure 162
5. Just for "assembly of new parts" or if disassembled:

Mount cylindrical pins into piston, considering
installation dimension "X"
MS-E 3050 = 18.00 mm
MS-E 3060 = 16.00 mm
MS-E 3070 = 16.00 mm
Figure 163
6. Install piston on preassembled ring gear.
Figure 164
Front Axle SP000929

Page 55
Legend to Detail "A":
Reference
Description
Number
1 Hex. Screw
2 Spring Sleeve
3 Compress. Springs (Outer)
4 Compress. Springs (Inner)
Fix piston with spring sleeve (2), compression springs

(3 and 4) and "new" hex screws (1). Figure 165
CAUTION
Use hex. screws just once for assembly.
Tightening torque (M 6/8.8) ..................... MA = 11 N•m
Figure 166
7. Mount preassembled ring gear considering the

installation position (markings 0 in 12 o’clock position -
see arrows, detail "B").
CAUTION
Ensure exact toothing position of oil supply holes -
knuckle housing / ring gear (pressure oil supply to
brake piston).
Figure 167
Detail "B"
Figure 168
Front Axle SP000929

Page 56
8. Oil O-ring and insert in recess (arrow) einsetzen.
CAUTION
Apply lubricant (e.g. MOLYCOTE PASTE 1000) on
thread - knuckle housing / slotted nut.
Figure 169
9. Fix ring gear with slotted nut.
CAUTION
First tighten slotted nut with 1400 N•m, then
retighten slotted nut until a fixing hole overlaps a
threaded hole in the knuckle housing - in this
connection also refer to Figure 176.
Figure 170
CAUTION
directions several times - roller setting.
Tightening torque (M 110 x 1.5) ........... MA = 1400 +200

N•m
Make Leakage Test of Multi-disc Brake

Mount breather valve (arrow) and connect HP pump (to
connection hole/bearing pin).
CAUTION
Breathe brake completely before starting the test.
• Test media:
Motor oils SAE-lO W correspond to, MIL-L 2104
C, MIL-L 46152, API-CC, CD, SC, SD, SE, ATF- Figure 171
oils type A, Suffic A Dexron of II D
• High-pressure test:
Build up test pressure p = 100 bar and close
locking valve of HP pump.
A pressure drop by max.3 bar is permissible
during a 5-minute test duration.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 57
• Low pressure test:
Reduce test pressure to p = 5 bar and close
locking valve.
No pressure drop is allowed during a 5-minute
testing duration.
Adjust and Check Disc Clearance/Piston Stroke

Disc clearance/piston stroke "X" = 1.2 ~ 1.8 mm
Legend to Figure 172 and sketches Figure 173 and
174:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Ring Gear
2 Piston
3 Compress. Springs (Outer)
4 Disc Clearance / Piston Stroke
Figure 172
CAUTION
Build up braking pressure (100 bar) and find dimension

"A", from face / ring gear (1) through measuring hole (2)
- See Figure 172 and Figure 173 - to face / piston (3).
Dimension "A" .................................... e.g. = 83.50 mm
Figure 173
Release pressure from brake - i.e. no pressure applied

on brake, piston is in contact with ring gear (reset
piston through compression springs) - and find
dimension "B" from face / ring gear (1) through
measuring hole (2) - See Figure 172 and Figure 174 -
to face / piston(3).
Dimension "B" e.g. .................................... = 82.10 mm
Dimension "A" e.g. ........................................ 83.50 mm
Dimension "B" e.g. ..................................... - 82.10 mm Figure 174
Result → disc clearance ............................. = 1.40 mm
Front Axle SP000929

Page 58
CAUTION
If the required disc clearance / piston stroke (X =
1.2 ~1.8 mm) is not achieved, correct it with
correspondng inner clutch disc(s) - See Figure 159.
Dismantle HP pump.
Just for transport protection, install screw plug with O-
ring in oil supply hole.
Tightening torque (M 14 x 1.5) ............... MA = 23 N•m
Figure 175
Secure slotted nut with cylinder screw - in this

connection refer to comment on Figure 170.
Tightening torque (M 10/8.8) ................... MA = 32 N•m
Figure 176
Install thrust washer.
CAUTION
Observe installation position - ensure that both
lugs of the thrust washer are engaged each in a
spare fixing hole of the slotted nut.
Figure 177
Front Axle SP000929

Page 59
Mount thrust washer (retaining ring fixing) - with
shoulder showing to retaining ring - then snap retaining
ring.
Figure 178
Planetary Carrier
Adjust axial play of sun gear shaft: 0.3 ~ 1.0 mm (Figure
179 ... Figure 186)
1. Determine dimension I from mounting face of planetary
carrier to contact face of thrust washer.
Dimension I, e.g. ......................................... 260.65 mm
Figure 179
2. Determine dimension II, from face (arrow) of sun gear

to mounting face of hub.
Dimension II, e.g. ........................................ 255.70 mm
Dimension I e.g. .......................................... 260.65 mm
Dimension II e.g. ...................................... - 255.70 mm
Difference. ........................................................ 4.95 mm
Required axial play (average) e.g. .............. - 0.65 mm
Result = requir.thrust washer(s) e.g. ..... s = 4.30 mm Figure 180
3. Insert thrust washer(s) (e.g. s = 4.30 mm) into

planetary carrier and press into contact position.
Figure 181
Front Axle SP000929

Page 60
4. Preassemble planetary gear - depending on version -
as shown in the figure beside.
Legend to Figure 182 and Figure 183 - version MS-E
3060/3070:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Planetary Gear
2 Roller Bearing
3 Washer
4 Circlip Figure 182
Legend to Figure 182 and Figure 183 - version MS-E

3050:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Planetary Gear
Bearing Inner Ring with Cylinder
2
Rollers
3 Plastic Ring (Assembly Aid)
4 Angle Ring
Figure 183
5. Warm up bearing inner ring and install pre-assembled

planetary gear until contact is obtained.
CAUTION
Mount planetary gear or bearing inner ring with
large radius looking to planetary carrier
(downwards).
Figure 184
6. Fix planetary gear by means of retaining ring.
Figure 185
Front Axle SP000929

Page 61
7. Install preassembled planetary carrier and fix with
cylinder screws.
Tightening torque (MI2/8.8) ...................... MA = 55 N•m
Figure 186
8. Install screw plug with new O-ring.

Figure 187
Pivot Bearing
Heat pivot bearing hole by means of hot-air blower and
insert super-cooled bushing(s).
CAUTION
Observe installation position for bushing version with
slot, insert bushings - with slot in 12 o’clock position.
Figure 188
Front Axle SP000929

Page 62
Steering
Figure 189
Legend to Figure 189 .... Figure 203
Reference Reference
Number Number
Steering Cylinder (Cylinder Tube 7 Rod Wiper
1
with Brake Head) 8 Dual Ring
2 Brake Head (Loose Part) 9 Circlip
3 Piston Rod 10 O-ring
4a O-ring Piston 11 Retaining Ring
4b Form Seal Ring Sealing 12 Flange
5 Guide Ring 13 Circlip
6 U-ring 14 Wrench Socket (Piston Rod)
1. Mount U-ring (6) and wiper (7) in the steering cylinder

(l).
CAUTION
Observe installation position - in this connection
see detailed sketch.
Figure 190
Front Axle SP000929

Page 63
Detailed sketch:
Figure 191
2. Position inner installer (S1) on piston rod (3), install O-

ring (4b) and press with inner installer (S2) into annular
groove (arrow) of piston (3).
Figure 192
3. Install form seal ring (4a) and press with inner installer
(S2) into annular groove (arrow) of piston (3).
Figure 193
Front Axle SP000929

Page 64
4. Calibrate form seal ring (4a) by means of calibration
bush (S3).
Figure 194
5. Place both guide rings (5) into annular grooves of the

piston rod.
Figure 195
6. Insert preassembled piston rod in the preassembled

steering cylinder.
CAUTION
Observe installation position - insert piston rod (3)
with wrench point of attach (14 - See Figure 189)
showing in direction of arrow.
Figure 196
CAUTION
Slightly oil all sealing elements before installing the
piston rod.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 65
7. Insert u-ring(6), rod wiper (7) and dual ring (8) in brake
head(2).
Observe installation position - in this connection refer to
detailed sketch.
Figure 197
Detailed Sketch:
Figure 198
8. Install preassembled brake head.
CAUTION
Slightly oil all sealing elements before inserting the
brake head.
Figure 199
9. Push brake head into the steering cylinder (arrow) so

that the circlip (9) can be mounted.
Figure 200
Front Axle SP000929

Page 66
10. Bring the inserted brake head (8) into contact position
(arrow) on the snapped circlip (9).
Oil O-ring (10) and insert into recess.
Figure 201
11. Fix brake head (8) with retaining ring (11).
Figure 202
12. Install flange (12) and snap circlip (13).
CAUTION
Observe installation position of flange - chamfer
(circlip contactarrow) to show towards circlip.
Figure 203
13. Provide both contact faces (steering cylinder/axle drive

housing) with sealing agent (Loctite-Nr. 574).
Figure 204
Front Axle SP000929

Page 67
14. Insert preassembled steering cylinder and fix with hex.
screws.
Fix hex screws with locking agent (Loctite-no. 243).
Figure 205
15. If required - preassemble both tie rods.

Legend to Figure 206:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axial Joint
2 Ball Joint with Tube
3 Clamp
16. Do not tighten the screw of the clamp before setting

the track. Figure 206
Tightening torque (M 12x1.5) .................. MA = 75 N•m
17. Provide connection - axial joint/piston rod (appr. 3
threads)- with locking agent (Loctite-no. 243).
CAUTION
Observe installation position of tie rods - offset to
show towards knuckle housing /axle housing (see
arrow).
18. Fix both tie rods on steering.

Figure 207
Tightening torque (M 30xl.5) ................. MA = 450 N•m
19. Hang up tie rod and fix with "new" locking nut.
CAUTION
Use locking nut just once for assembly.
Tightening torque (M 27xl.5) .... MA = 100 N•m + 200°
Figure 208
Front Axle SP000929

Page 68
Steering Setting and Checking
Figure 209
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Straightedge Stop Screw with Stop Washer
4
2 Measuring Device (Internal)
3 Clamp 5 Stop Screw (Outer)
Front Axle SP000929

Page 69
Basic Track Setting
Bring piston rod to central position = Dimension "X"
Determine dimension = "X" (measured from face /
steering cylinder to face /axial joint).
Piston (rod) stop / l-h in cylinder "Dimension I" z.B. 215
mm
Piston (rod) stop / r-h in cylinder "Dimension II" z.B.. 25
mm
Result ........................................................ = 190mm ÷ 2
Dimension "X" z.B.............................................. = 95mm
CAUTION
During track setting, the axial position of the piston
rod must not be changed any more.
Mount straighedges (1) in horizontal and central axis

position.
Fix measuring device (2) on input flange.
Loosen nut / clamp (3) and set length of tie rod (axial
joint) until the measuring device (2) indicates
0°(corresponds to a track setting of "zero" mm).
CAUTION
Make setting on both sides.
Check track setting (0°):

Determine dimension "A1 ".
Rotate both outputs by 180° - dimension "A2" must be
equal to "dimension A1 ".
Dimension "Y" = distance - wheel center to rim flange.
CAUTION
For a toe-in and toe-out setting, which might be
required, stick to the vehicle manufacturer’s
specification.
Afterwards fix both tie rods / axial joint again by means

of a clamp(3).
Front Axle SP000929

Page 70
Steering Angle Setting
CAUTION
Set steering angle - not before track setting is
completed.
Set steering angle always on the curve inner output

side.
Figure 210
Slew output until the required steering angle is

achieved on the measuring device (2/Figure 210)
(Measuring device must have parallel contact with the
straigtedge (1/Figure 210)).
CAUTION
Take the value of the steering angle "L" to be set
(See Figure 209) from the vehicle manufacturer’s
specification.
Set inner stop through setting screw (4) with stop

washer (s = optional).
Tightening torque (MI8/10.9) .................. MA = 390 N•m
Fix outer stop through setting screw (5) with counter
nut.
Tightening torque (MI8/10.9) .................. MA = 170 N•m
Make setting on both output sides.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 71
Check leakage of steering:
Test pressure: 250 bar
Test medium : Motor oil SAE lOW
MIL-L 2104 C 1MIL-L 46152
Connect HP pump, Build up test pressure P = max.
250 bar (bleed pressure chamber).
Close locking valve of HP pump.
A 5 bar pressure drop is permissible during a test
duration of 20 sec. Figure 211
An outer leakage is not permissible.
Make leakage test of steering in both steering
directions.
Oil Drain-Oil Filler and Oil Control Plugs

and Grease Lubrication Points
1. Mount oil drain plug with solenoid insert (1) - fitted with
"new" O-ring.
2. Mount oil filler and oil control plug (2) - fitted with
"new" O-ring.
Figure 212
3. Mount oil drain, oil filler and oil control plug with
solenoid insert (3) - fitted with "new" O-ring - in both
outputs.
CAUTION
Prior to putting the axle into operation, observe ZF
lubrication and maintenance instructions - see page
0/8 and 0/9 - as well as the vehicle manufacturer’s Figure 213
regulations and instructions.
Front Axle SP000929

Page 72
SP000930
REAR AXLE SP000930
Rear Axle
Edition 1
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 1
MEMO
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 2
Table of Contents
Rear Axle
for the Gleason Gear-Tooth System ............................ 6
Lubrication and Maintenance Specifications for
Axle MT-E 3050/3060/3070 ................................ 8
Brake Wear Measurement on Axles of MT/MS-E
3050/3060/3070 Range ..................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 12
Reassembly ........................................................ 18
Hub Carrier / Hub ........................................................ 18
Multi Disc Brake ........................................................... 22
Planetary Carrier .......................................................... 27
Assembly of An Output Ass’y (Figure 78)................. 29
Disassembly ....................................................... 30
Differential / Input......................................................... 30
Input - HL Transmission .............................................. 31
Differential Type "D 500" and "D-750"....................... 33
Reassembly ........................................................ 35
Differential / Input......................................................... 35
Reassembly of Output Ass’y (Figure 123 ~ 125) ..... 44
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 3
MEMO
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 5
for the Gleason Gear-Tooth System
Ideal tooth-contact pattern i.e. pinion distance is correct
Coast side (concave)
BSS0090L
Figure 1
Drive side (convex)
BSS0100L
Figure 2
Pinion distance must be increased
(+) BSS0110L
Figure 3
BSS0130L
Figure 4
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 6
BSS0140L
Figure 5
Pinion distance must be decreased
(-) BSS0120L
Figure 6
BSS0150L
Figure 7
BSS0160L
Figure 8
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 7
LUBRICATION AND
MAINTENANCE
SPECIFICATIONS FOR AXLE
MT-E 3050/3060/3070
Oil Grade
Oils according to the "Table of Recommended Lubricants"
pages of operation manual are permitted for axles MT-E
3050/3060/3070.
Oil Change
A horizontal installation position of the axle in every direction
is precondition for an oil change according to specifications.
Place vehicle in a horizontal position.
Carefully clean all drain -, filler- and control plugs prior to
opening.
Drain oil only right after a longer travel period.
4 2
4
5
3
1
2
5
FG002507
Figure 9
Reference Reference
Number Number
Oil Drain Hole Oil Filler / Oil Check Hole
1 3
(M36x1.5 Axle Drive Housing) (M36x1.5 Axle Drive Housing)
Oil Drain / Oil Filler Hole 4 Brake Connection Pipe
2
(M36x1.5 Output Units) 5 Brake Breather Valve
1. Oil Drain from Axle

Loosen oil drain plugs (1) and drain oil from axle.
2. Oil Drain from Outputs
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 8
WARNING
filler plug (2), due to a possible pressure build-up
in the oil system of the planetary carrier, bring
drain hole to topmost position (12 o’clock) and
carefully unscrew oil drain and oil filler plug (2),
o’clock) and drain oil from outputs.
3. Oil Filling of Axle

Provide drain plug (1, with solenoid insert) with a new
O-ring and mount it.
Tightening torque (M36x1.5) ................... MA = 50 N•m.
Fill up oil to the overflow of the filler hole (3).
Filling quantity approx. MT-E 3050 = ca. 11.20 liter
MT-E 3060 = ca.14.00 liter MT-E 3070 = ca. 14.50 liter
4. Check
Check oil level after some minutes and fill-up to the
specified level, until level remains constant.
Provide filling and checking plugs (3) with new O-ring
and mount it.
5. Oil Filling of Outputs
Position both oil drain and oil filler hole (2) (reference
line horizontally to road level) and fill up oil to overflow.
Filling quantity approx. MT-E 3050 = 2.4 liter MT 3060/
3070 = ca. 2.5 liter per output.
Provide drain and filling plug (2) with new O-ring and mount it.
Oil Change Interval

First oil change after 500 operating hours, any further one
after 2000 (i.e. after 2500/4500/6500 ....) operating hours,
however, at least once per year.
Oil Level Check

Check oil level every month, in particular, however, after putting
a vehicle into operation with new or repaired axles or axle parts.
Brake
The following oils are admissible for the pneum.-hydr.
operated or accumulator operated brake actuation:
1. Motor oils SAE 10 W acc. to specification MIL-L 2104
C, MIL-L 46152, API-CC, CD, SC, SD, SE
2. ATF. oils type A, Suffic A, Dexron of II D
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 9
BRAKE WEAR MEASUREMENT
ON AXLES OF MT/MS-E 3050/
3060/3070 RANGE
WARNING
The measurement of wear on the multi-disc brake only
gives limited information on the total state of the plate
pack - without disassembly of output.
Make measurement of lining wear at least once per year, in

particular, however, in case of modified braking behaviour,
like:
• Brake noises
1
• Reduced braking power
• Modified deceleration
• Modified brake oil level
Oil Stand
• Modified braking pressure
CAUTION
To avoid injury when opening the oil drain / oil filler plug
(1), due to a possible pressure build-up in the planetary FG006855
carrier bring drain hole to topmost position (12 o’clock) Figure 10
and carefully unscrew oil drain and oil filler plug (1),
Then turn output until oil filler / oil drain hole (1) is on 9
o’clock position - Figure 10.
Sketches in Figure 11, Figure 12 are shown turned by 90°
Legend to Figure 10, Figure 11 and Figure 12 3
Reference
Description
Number
1 Oil Filler-Oil Drain Hole
2 Gauge Hole (∅ = 10 mm) in Ring Gear -
9 o’clock Position 4 5 6 7
3 Dial Indicator With Solenoid Support
4 Planetary Carrier
FG002281
5 Ring Gear Figure 11
6 Piston
7 Plate Pack
X Piston Stroke
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 10
X
FG002282
Figure 12
Lining Wear Measurement of Multi-Disc Brake

With unapplied brake, piston is in contact with ring gear by
compression spring return - See Figure 11
• get dial indicator (3) into touch with piston(6)
through oil filler / oil drain hole (1) and gauge hole
(2).
• Apply pressure on brake and determine piston
stroke (X. See Figure 12) by means of dial
indicator
• Take limit value of piston stroke (at max. wear)
from the chart below
Limit value of piston stroke (X) at

Axle type Lined discs Piston stroke with new discs
max. wear
MT-E 3050 8 Stk. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 7.0 mm
MT-E 3060 6 Stk. 0.7 ... 1.3 mm 6.0 mm
MT-E 3070 7 Stk. 0.7 ... 1.3 mm 6.5 mm
MS-E 3050 8 Stk. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 7.0 mm
MS-E 3060 6 Stk. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 6.0 mm
MS-E 3070 7 Stk. 1.2 ... 1.8 mm 6.5 mm
Make lining wear measurement on both outputs!

Then provide oil drain / filler plug with new O-ring and install it.
Tightening torque(M36x1.5) .............................. MA = 50 N•m
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 11
DISASSEMBLY
1. Mount the axle to the assembly truck.
(Illustration shows axle version MT-E 3060 with
attached HL-transmission)
Figure 13
2. Loosen oil drain plug and drain oil from the axle - use
suitable collecting basin.
Figure 14
WARNING
filler plug, due to a possible pressure build-up in
the oil system of the planetary carrier
- bring drain hole to topmost position (12 o’clock)
and carefully unscrew oil drain and oil filler plug.
o’clock) and drain oil from outputs - use suitable Figure 15
collecting basin! Then bring drain hole to 6 o’clock
position and drain the oil.
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 12
CAUTION
When working on the differential / input, you can
disassemble the output as a cpl. unit (See Figure
16) and no complete disassembly is required as
illustrated in Figure 17 ~ Figure 35.
For this purpose secure output ass’y by means of

lifting bracket, loosen threaded connections and
separate output ass’y from axle housing.
Figure 16
3. Secure planetary carrier by means of lifting strap,

loosen both cylinder screws (arrows) and separate
planetary carrier from hub.
Figure 17
4. Unsnap retaining ring.
Figure 18
5. Pull off planetary gear by means of two-armed puller.
Figure 19
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 13
Unsnap circlip and remove the washer behind.
Then remove roller bearing, second circlip and
washer from planetary gear.
Figure 20

Unsnap the angle rings and pull out of the
planetary gear.
Figure 21
6. Remove slotted nut mount (cylinder screw).
Figure 22
7. Loosen slotted nut.
Figure 23
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 14
8. Remove sun gear shaft and stub shaft.
Figure 24
9. Press off ring gear with piston.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the releasing O-ring (arrow)
Figure 25
10. Loosen hex screws, remove spring sleeves and

compression springs.
Figure 26
11. Press piston from ring gear.
Figure 27
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 15
12. Remove sealing elements (arrows) from ring gear.
Figure 28
13. Remove plate pack.
Figure 29
14. Remove O-ring (arrow) and lift-off disc carrier with

lever, then remove releasing O-ring.
Figure 30
15. Secure hub by means of lifting bracket, pull hub from

hub carrier by means of pressure piece and two-armed
puller.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the releasing bearing inner ring
Figure 31
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 16
16. Lift-off shaft seal (arrow) with lever and remove both
bearing outer rings from hub.
Figure 32
17. Only for axle type MT-E 3060 :

Remove spacer bush.
Figure 33
18. Pull bearing inner ring from hub.
Figure 34
19. Fix hub carrier by means of a strap, loosen threaded

connection and separate hub carrier from axle housing.
Then remove single components such as screw neck,
breather valve and O-ring from hub carrier.
Figure 35
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 17
REASSEMBLY
Legend to Figure 36
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axle Housing
2 Hub Carrier
3 Hub
4 Multi-disc Brake
5 Planetary Carrier Figure 36
Hub Carrier / Hub

1. Oil O-ring (1) and install on hub carrier.
Only applicable for assembly of a new hub carrier
Close machining apertures (2) of the oil supply holes
with blanking plug.
Figure 37
2. Install pre-assembled hub carrier to axle housing,

considering the installation position - stamped circle in
12 o’clock position (see arrow) - fix with hex screws
and washers
Tightening torque (M16/10.9) ................. MA = 280 N•m
Figure 38
3. Install heated bearing inner ring until contact.
Figure 39
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 18
4. Only for axle type MT-E 3060:
Install spacer bush.
Figure 40
5. Mount wheel bolts (1).

Insert both bearing outer rings (2) of the hub bearing
until contact.
Oil O-ring (3) and locate in annular groove of hub.
Figure 41
6. Mount shaft seal, considering installation position

(marking OUT-SIDE looking upward / outward) and rim
offset "X" - see detailed sketch.
Figure 42
7. Legend to Figure 42 and detail sketch.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Hub
2 Shaft Seal
X Rim Offset
MT-E 3050/3060 → X = 0.0 ~ 0.3 mm
MT-E 3070 → X = 6.0+ 0.2

mm
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 19
Figure 43
Figure 44
CAUTION
Apply sealing agent (Loctite-Nr. 574) to contact
face of shaft seal / hub.
CAUTION
Wet contact face of shaft seal / hub carrier with
spirit at the very beginning of the assembly -
assembly aid.
8. Install preassembled hub until contact and fix with

Figure 45
heated outer bearing inner ring.
9. Oil O-ring and locate in annular groove (arrow) of disc

carrier.
Then install disc carrier.
Figure 46
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 20
10. Bring hub bearing into contact position (Figure 47 ~
50): Install ring gear (without sealing elements).
Figure 47
11. Insert stub shaft and sun gear shaft

(support for slotted nut wrench - See Figure 49).
Figure 48
12. Bring hub bearing into contact position. for this purpose
tighten slotted nut with a tightening torque of max.
1,400 N•m.
CAUTION
Apply thread - hub carrier / slotted nut - with
lubricant
Figure 49
CAUTION
directions several times - roller setting
13. Loosen slotted nut again and remove ring gear.
Figure 50
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 21
Multi Disc Brake
1. Install disc pack alternately starting with an outer disc.
CAUTION
Pay attention to installation position of inner discs
- See Figure 52
CAUTION Figure 51
Take the actual necessary plate arrangement from
the corresponding spare parts list.
2. Installation position of inner discs
CAUTION
Position inner discs in such a way that one of the
tooth recesses (arrow) is in 6 o’clock position -
when axle is installed in vehicle
CAUTION Figure 52
Inner clutch discs s = 2.5 mm (standard)

Install inner discs with s = alternatively (2.0-2.5-3.0
mm) - required to set the disc clearance - on
outside position in disc pack
3. Oil O-ring and locate in annular groove of disc carrier.
CAUTION
Stick O-ring by means of grease - assembly aid.
Figure 53
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 22
4. Oil sealing elements and locate in annular grooves
(arrows) of ring gear as shown in the detailed sketch.
CAUTION
Pay attention to installation position and
arrangement of sealing elements.
Figure 54
Legend to Figure 54 and detail
Reference
Description
Number
1 Ring Gear
2 Support Ring
3 U-ring
4 U-ring
5 Support Ring
Figure 55
5. Just for. assembly of new parts. or if disassembled.

Mount all cylindrical pins into piston considering
installation dimension "X"
MT-E 3050 = 18.00 mm
MT-E 3060 = 16.00 mm
MT-E 3070 = 16.00 mm
Figure 56
6. Install piston on preassembled ring gear.
Figure 57
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 23
Detail "A"
Reference
Description
Number
1 Hex. Screw
2 Spring Sleeve
3 Compression Springs (Outer)
4 Compression Springs (Inner)
Figure 58
7. Fix piston with spring sleeve (2), compression springs

(3 and 4) and. new. hex. screws (1).
CAUTION
Use hex. screws just once for assembly
Tightening torque (M6/8.8) ....................... MA = 11 N•m
Figure 59
8. Mount preassembled ring gear, considering installation

position (markings O in 12 o’clock position - see
arrows, Detail "B")
Figure 60
Detail "B"
Figure 61
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 24
9. Oil the O-ring and insert it in recess (arrow).
CAUTION
Apply thread - hub carrier / slotted nut - with
lubricant
Figure 62
10. Fix ring gear with slotted nut.
CAUTION
First tighten slotted nut with 1,400 N•m, then
retighten slotted nut until a fixing hole overlaps a
threaded hole in the hub carrier - in this
connection also refer to Figure 69
Figure 63
CAUTION
directions several times - roller setting
Tightening torque (M110 x 1.5) .. MA = 1,400+ 200

N•m
Make Leakage Test of Multi-Disc Brake

1. Mount breather valve (arrow) and connect HP-pump (to
connection hole on input side / hub carrier).
Test media
Motor oils SAE-10W correspond, MIL-L 2104 C, MIL-L
46152, API-CC, CD, SC, SD, SE, ATF-oils type A,
Suffic A, Dexron of II D
A. High pressure test
Build up testing pressure p = 100 bar and close Figure 64
locking valve of HP-pump.
The pressure is allowed to fall by max. 3 bar
during a 5-minute test duration.
B. Low pressure test
Reduce testing pressure to p = 5 bar and close
locking valve.
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 25
The pressure is not allowed to fall during a 5-
minute testing duration!
Adjust and Check Disc Clearance/Piston Stroke

1. Disc clearance / piston travel "X" = 1.2~ 1.8 mm
Legend to Figure 65 and Figure 66 and Figure 67
Reference
Description
Number
1 Ring Gear
2 Measuring Hole
3 Piston
X Disc Clearance / Piston Stroke Figure 65

Build up braking pressure (100 bar) and find dimension
"A", from front face / ring gear (1) through measuring
hole (2) - See Figure 65 and Figure 66 - to front face
/ piston (3).
Dimension A. e.g......................................... = 83.50 mm
Release pressure from brake - i.e. no pressure applied
on brake, piston is in contact with ring gear (reset
piston through compression springs) - and find
dimension "B" from front face / ring gear (1) through
measuring hole (2) - See Figure 65 and Figure 67 - to Figure 66
front face / piston (3).
Dimension "B" z.B. .................................... = 82.10 mm
Dimension "A" z.B. .................................... 83.50 mm
Dimension "B" z.B. ...................................... - 82.10 mm
Result → disc clearance ............................. = 1.40 mm
CAUTION
If the required disc clearance / piston stroke (X =
1.2 .... 1.8 mm) is not achieved, correct it with Figure 67
corresponding inner clutch disc(s) - See Figure 52!
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 26
2. Dismantle HP-pump abbauen and mount screw neck
with O-ring. (Just for transport protection - mount
protection cap with O-ring on screw neck).
Figure 68
3. Secure slotted nut with cylinder screw - in this

connection refer to note on Figure 63!
Figure 69
Planetary Carrier
adjust axial play of sun gear shaft : 0.3 ~ 1.0 mm (Figure
70~ 80)
1. Determine dimension I, from mounting face of planetary
carrier to contact face of thrust washer.
Dimension I, e.g. ......................................... 260.65 mm
Figure 70
2. Determine dimension II, from front face (arrow) of sun

gear to mounting face of hub.
Dimension II, e.g. ........................................ 255.70 mm
Dimension I e.g. .......................................... 260.65 mm
Dimension II e.g. ...................................... - 255.70 mm
Difference ....................................................... = 4.95 mm
Required axial play (average) e.g. .............. - 0.75 mm
Figure 71
Result = requ. thrust washer(s) e.g. ..... s = 4.20 mm
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 27
3. Insert thrust washer(s) (e.g. s = 4.20 mm) into
planetary carrier and press into contact position.
Figure 72
4. Preassemble planetary gear, as shown in the figure

beside - see different versions.
Legend to Figure 73 and Figure 74 - version MT-E
3060/3070:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Planetary Gear
2 Roller Bearing
3 Washer
Figure 73
4 Circlip
Legend to Figure 73 and Figure 74 - version MT-E

3050:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Planetary Gear
2 Bearing Inner Ring
3 Plastic Ring (Assembly Aid)
4 Angel Ring
Figure 74
5. Warm up bearing inner ring and install pre-assembled

planetary gear until contact.
CAUTION
Mount planetary gear or bearing inner ring with
large radius looking to planetary carrier
(downwards).
Figure 75
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 28
6. Fix planetary gear by means of retaining ring.
Figure 76
7. Install planetary carrier and fix with cylindrical screws.

Tightening torque (M12/8.8) ..................... MA = 55 N•m
Figure 77
Assembly of An Output Ass’y (Figure

78)
Bring output ass’y into position on axle housing by installing
stub shaft into differential (axle bevel gear) - and fix with
hex.
screws and washers
Tightening torque (M16/10.9) ......................... MA = 280 N•m
Figure 78
WARNING
Prior to putting the axle into operation fill it with oil -
for this purpose stick to lubrication and maintenance
instructions, page -8~12.
In addition observe the vehicle manufacturer's
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 29
DISASSEMBLY
Differential / Input
1. Loosen oil drain plug and drain oil from the axle - use
suitable collecting basin.
Figure 79
WARNING
filler plug due to a possible pressure build-up in
the oil system of the planetary carrier - bring drain
hole to topmost position (12 o’clock) and carefully
unscrew oil drain and oil filler plug.
o’clock) and drain oil from outputs - use suitable
Figure 80
collecting basin.
CAUTION
When working on the differential you can dismantle
the output(s) as a complete unit (Figure 81).
2. Secure output ass’y by means of lifting bracket, loosen

threaded connection and separate output ass’y from
axle housing.
Figure 81
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 30
Input - HL Transmission
1. Fix HL transmission by means of a lifting strap and
loosen threaded connection. (HL-transmission / axle drive
housing).
Figure 82
2. Separate HL-transmission from axle.
CAUTION
For assembly and disassembly of the HL
transmission stick to Repair Manual "2 HL 250/270/
290".
Figure 83
3. Loosen threaded connection of axle housing half on

crown wheel side.
Figure 84
CAUTION
Secure axle by means of a support (arrow).
4. Carefully separate axle housing half.
CAUTION
Pay attention to releasing differential.
Figure 85
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 31
5. Lift off differential ass’y from axle drive housing.
Figure 86
6. Pull bearing outer ring out of hole by means of a

striker and remove shim behind (backlash).
CAUTION
Mark shim (installation position / bearing allocation)
- assembly aid.
Figure 87
7. Remove bearing outer ring and shim behind (rolling

torque differential bearing) from second axle housing
half.
CAUTION
Mark shim (installation position / bearing allocation)
- assembly aid!
Figure 88
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 32
Differential Type "D 500" and "D-750"
1. Illustration shows differential version "D-500".
Pull both taper roller bearings from differential carrier.
Figure 89
2. Loosen threaded connection (see position "X").
Figure 90
A. Version "D-500"
Figure 91
B. Version "D-750"
CAUTION
At Version "D-750" screw connection are insert
with Loctite - difficult disassembly - heating-up
if necessary.
Figure 92
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 33
3. Separate differential carrier halves and remove
releasing single components.
Figure 93
4. Push crown wheel off from differential carrier half.
Figure 94
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 34
REASSEMBLY
Differential / Input
Differential - Type "D-500" and "D-750"

1. Illustration shows differential version "D-500"
Mount slotted pins (arrows) - considering the assembly
specification, See Figure 96 - into differential carrier
half.
Figure 95
Assembly Specifications
Position slotted pin(s) so that slot is looking into the
direction of force (arrow). In case of double slotted pins
- bring the slots in a 180° degrees offset position to
each other.
To Sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Differential Carrier
Figure 96
2 Slotted Pin
Slotted Pin
3
(Just for Double Slotted Pin Version)
4 Force Direction
2. Insert two adjusting screws into crown wheel and press

differential carrier until contact.
Figure 97
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 35
3. Insert thrust washer and axle bevel gear.
CAUTION
/ differential carrier - do not position in oil supply
recesses.
Figure 98
4. Instal differential bevel gears and thrust washers on

differential spider and insert in differential carrier half I.
CAUTION
Ensure radial installation position of thrust
washers.
Lug is looking vertically upward (see arrows).
Figure 99
5. Insert second axle bevel gear.
Figure 100
6. Stick thrust washer with grease (assembly aid) into

differential carrier half II.
WARNING
Put driving lug of thrust washer into driving bores /
differential carrier - do not position in oil supply
recesses.
Figure 101
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 36
A. Version "D-500"
Figure 102
B. Version "D-750"
Figure 103
7. Fasten differential carrier halves with cylinder. screws

and washers (version D-500, pos. X) resp. with hex.
screws (version D-750, pos. X).
CAUTION
Only version "D-750" - insert the hex. screws with
locking compound (Loctite No. 262).
Figure 104
WARNING
Ensure radial installation position - designation
corresponds to radial position marking.
A. Version "D-500"
Tightening torque (M 12x1.5/12.9) . MA = 145 N•m
B. Version "D-750"
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 37
8. Instal both bearing inner rings (arrows).
Figure 105
9. Wet some tooth flanks of the crown wheel with marking

ink (for contact pattern check - See Figure 119 on
page -43).
Figure 106
Determine Shim for Backlash (Crown Wheel/Drive Pinion)
Backlash
MT-E 3050/3060 = 0.12 - 0.24 mm
MT-E 3070 = 0.15 - 0.27 mm
Legend to Figure 107 ~ Figure 117
Reference
Description
Number
1 Axle Drive Housing
2 Shim Ring (∅ = 160 mm)
3 Differential (Crown Wheel)
4 Shim (Backlash)
5 Axle Housing Half
6 O-ring
7 Hexagon Screws (With Washer) Figure 107
Mounting Face / Axle Drive Housing Until
A
Shim Ring (Outer Diameter)
B ½ ∅ Of Shim Ring
Mounting Face / axle Drive Housing Until
C
Plane Face / Crown Wheel
Distance - Plane Face / Crown Wheel Until
D
Centre / Differential (Imprinted On Crown Wheel)
Mounting Face / Axle Drive Housing Until
X
Centre/Axle Drive Housing (Drive Pinion Bore)
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 38
Only for "New Part" Assembly or If Disassembled :
Install O-ring (6) and mount axle drive housing(1) - Pay
attention to installation position axle drive housing(1) versus
axle housing half(5).
Tightening torque (M18/10.9) ......................... MA = 390 N•m
1. Insert shim (backlash) into hole of axle housing half
and install bearing outer ring until contact.
We would recommend to install the shim (e.g. s = 1.20
mm), found during disassembly - also refer to
disassembly instructions page -32, Figure 87.
WARNING
However, the required backlash is decisive for the
shim(s) to be used. Figure 108
2. Instal shim ring (arrow, ∅ = 160 mm) and determine

dimension "A" - See Figure 107, then remove shim
ring.
Dimension "A" e.g. ........................................ 39.92 mm
Dimension "A" z.B. ........................................ 39.92 mm
Dimension "B" ................................................ 80.00 mm
Result = Dimension "X" ............................ = 119.92 mm
Figure 109
3. Install pre-assembled differential.
CAUTION
Ensure that inserted differential is perfectly
positioned (for this purpose rotate in both
directions several times - roller setting).
Figure 110
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 39
4. Determine dimension "C" - take measurements at
several points and find out mean value.
CAUTION
Upon determination of dimension "C" take a
corrective value of + 0.07 mm (½ value of bearing
preload of differential bearing) into consideration.
Dimension "C" e.g. ........................................ 48.98 mm Figure 111

Corrective value ............................................ - 0.07 mm
Result .......................................................... = 48.91 mm
5. Read dimension "D" (distance) from crown wheel, or
measure it in case of a + or - deviation of the distance
due to production (the concerned value is marked by
hand on the crown wheel).
Distance "D" (without a + or - deviation) = 71.0 mm
Distance "D" with an indicated + 0.1 deviation = 71.1

mm
Distance "D" with an indicated - 0.1 deviation = 70.9
mm
Dimension "X" z.B. ...................................... 119.92 mm
Dimension "C"(48.91)+ "D"(71.00) .......... = 119.91 mm
Result ............................................................ = 0.01 mm
CAUTION
If the value of dimension "X" is not achieved, use
a corresponding shim for correction (see item 4 -
Figure 107).
CAUTION
Position the bearing outer ring on the bearing inner
ring, until all rollers are located without any play.
For the following determination of dimension pay
attention to an exact contact of the bearing outer
ring and to a correct positioning of the differential.
6. Determine dimension "Y" - from mounting face / axle

drive housing to front face / bearing outer ring (take Figure 112
measurements at several points and determine mean
value).
Dimension "Y" e.g. ........................................ 18.11 mm
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 40
7. Determine dimension "Z" - from mounting face / axle
housing to bearing hole / bearing outer ring contact.
Dimension "Z" e.g. ........................................ 17.25 mm
Dimension "Y" e.g. ........................................ 18.11 mm
Dimension "Z" e.g. ..................................... - 17.25 mm
Difference ......................................................... 0.86 mm
Bearing preload (0.15 ^ 3.0 ... 4.0 N•m + 0.15 mm
Result ............................................................ = 1.01 mm
Required shim (s) ........................................ = 1.00 mm
CAUTION
A bearing preload of 0.15 mm corresponds to a
bearing rolling moment of approx. 3.0 ~ 4.0 N•m,
when using new taper roller bearings.
Figure 113
8. Insert the determined shim (e.g. s = 1.00 mm) into

bearing hole and instal bearing outer ring until contact.
Figure 114
9. Instal pre-assembled axle housing half (pay attention to

radial installation position), fix with hex. screws and
washers.
Figure 115
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 41
WARNING
Bring axle into horizontal position and secure with
support.
10. Position HL transmission on the axle and fix it.

Figure 116
Check Backlash and Contact Pattern

1. Place dial indicator through oil drain hole at right
angles to a tooth flank of the crown wheel (in the outer
diameter area) and check backlash.
Backlash
MT-E 3050/3060 = 0.12 - 0.24 mm
MT-E 3070 = 0.15 - 0.27 mm
CAUTION Figure 117
If, in case of a deviation, the required backlash is

not achieved, correct it with a suitable shim (See
Figure 108).
A correction of the shim / backlash also requires a
correction to the opposite direction of shim / bearing
rolling moment (See Figure 114).
2. Disassemble HL transmission again.
Figure 118
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 42
3. Remove differential.
Compare contact pattern (see arrow) with contact
pattern examples on page -6 ~ 9.
CAUTION
If contact pattern differs considerably, check pinion
distance of HL transmission - for this purpose refer
to repair manual 2 HL-250/270/290 acc.
Figure 119
4. Reinstall differential.
Figure 120
5. Oil O-ring and install on axle housing half (arrow).
Figure 121
6. Bring axle housing half into correct position (pay

attention to correct installation position), fix with hex
screws and washers.
Figure 122
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 43
Reassembly of Output Ass’y (Figure 123
~ 125)
1. Install plug shaft into toothing of axle bevel gear.
Figure 123
2. Bring output ass’y on axle housing into correct position,

by mounting the plug shaft into the sun gear shaft.
CAUTION
Observe O-ring (arrow).
Figure 124
3. Fix output unit with hex screws and washers.

4. Mount the second drive in the same way.
WARNING
Prior to putting the axle into operation fill it with oil
- for this purpose stick to the lubrication and
maintenance instructions, page -8 ~ 12. Figure 125
In addition observe the vehicle manufacturer's
Rear Axle SP000930

Page 44
1Engine and Drive Train
SP000962
TRANSMISSION SP000962
Transmission
Edition 1
Transmission SP000962
Page 1
MEMO
Page 2
Table of Contents
Transmission
Layout 2 HL 250/270/290 Axle Attachment ...... 6
Layout 2 HL 250/270/290 Separate Installation 7
Measuring Points and Connections or
Installation View 2 HL 250/270/290 Layout "Axle
Attachment" .......................................................... 8
Measuring Points and Connections on the 2 HL
250/270/290 Transmission - Version "Separate
Installation" ......................................................... 10
Notes to the Required Oil Quality and Oil Filling
Capacity.............................................................. 11
Separate the HL-Transmission from the Axle
Casing ................................................................ 12
Disassembly - Brake / Clutch / Planet Carrier
............................................................................ 13
Lube Oil Pump/Downshift Interlock ............................. 13
Speed Transmitter ........................................................ 14
Emergency Release (Parking Brake).......................... 14
Input Housing and Modulation Valve ......................... 15
Brake / Clutch .............................................................. 16
Planet Carrier ............................................................... 22
Disassembly - Output........................................ 26
Version - Axle Attachment .......................................... 26
Version - "Separate Installation" ................................. 30
Reassembly - Output ........................................ 34
Version - Axle Attachment .......................................... 34
Reassembly - Brake / Clutch / Planet Carrier 53
Planet Carrier ............................................................... 53
Brake/Clutch .................................................................. 59
Modulation Valve and Input Housing ......................... 72
Emergency Release (Parking Brake).......................... 74
Page 3
MEMO
Speed Transmitter ........................................................ 79

Lube Oil Pump/Downshift Interlock ............................. 80
Disassembly - Lube Oil Pump/Downshift
Interlock .............................................................. 81
Version "with" Lube Oil Pump .................................... 81
Version "with" hydr. Downshift Interlock..................... 84
Version "with" electr. Downshift Interlock- mounted to
Transmission ................................................................. 87
Reassembly - Lube Oil Pump/Downshift
Interlock .............................................................. 88
Version "with" Lube Oil Pump .................................... 88
Version "with" hydr. Downshift Interlock..................... 94
Version "with" electr. Downshift Interlock - mounted to
the Transmission ........................................................ 101
Attach the HL-Transmission to the Axle ....... 102
Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Page 5
LAYOUT 2 HL 250/270/290
AXLE ATTACHMENT
INPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
FG007281
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
Cup Springs for Multi-disk Brake 6 Lube Oil Pump
1
and Multi-disk Clutch 7 Spur Gear Drive
2 Input Shaft Output Pinion - Rear Axle Direct
8
3 Multi-disk Brake Attachment
4 Multi-disk Clutch 9 Output Flange - Front Axle
5 Planetary Drive 10 Attachment Hydro - Motor
Page 6
LAYOUT 2 HL 250/270/290
SEPARATE INSTALLATION
1 2 3 4 5 6
INPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
10 9 8
FG007282
Figure 2
Reference Reference
Number Number
Cup Springs for Multi-disk Brake 6 Lube Oil Pump
1
and Multi-disk Clutch 7 Spur Gear Drive
2 Input Shaft 8 Output Flange - Rear Axle
3 Multi-disk Brake 9 Output Flange - Front Axle
4 Multi-disk Clutch 10 Attachment Hydro - Motor
5 Planetary Drive
Page 7
MEASURING POINTS AND
CONNECTIONS OR
INSTALLATION VIEW 2 HL 250/
270/290 LAYOUT "AXLE
ATTACHMENT"
(With electr, downshift interlock integranted in the vehicle)
Figure 3
Reference Reference
Number Number
8 Lube Oil Pump S Lubrication Pressure (M10x1)
B Brake (M16x1.5) Bleeder Valve (Emergency
EN
K Clutch (M16x1.5) Actuation Parking Brake)
J Road Speed (Brake - M10x1) Pressure Relief Valve
UN (Emergency Actuation Parking
M Off-road Speed (Clutch - M10x1)
Brake)
N Speed Transmitter (Output Speed)
Page 8
Figure 4
Reference Reference
Number Number
Oil Filter and Oil Drain Plug Oil Drain Plug - Transmission
1 12
(M36x1.5) (M24x1.5)
2 Wheel Head LH and RH Model Identification Plate -
13
3 Bleeder Service Brake Transmission
Connection Service Brake (13/16 EB Bleeder Valve (Brake)
4
- 16 UNF) EK Bleeder Valve (Clutch)
5 Axle Casing Emergency Actuation Parking
6 Axle Drive Housing PN Brake (Grease Nipple -
Connection to Din 71 412)
7 Model Identification Plate - Axle
Pressure Relief Valve
8 Lube Oil Pump
UN (Emergency Actuation Parking
9 Transmission 2 HL 250/270/290 Brake)
10 Connection Hydro-motor
11 Output Flange - Front Axle
Page 9
MEASURING POINTS AND
CONNECTIONS ON THE 2 HL
250/270/290 TRANSMISSION -
VERSION "SEPARATE
INSTALLATION"
(With electr, downshift interlock integranted in the vehicle)
3
4
3 4
7 2
1 8
1
2
5
11
7
6
10
5
8 9
6
9
10
11
INSTALLATION "HORIZONTAL" INSTALLATION "VERTICAL"
FG007283
Figure 5
Reference Reference
Number Number
Pressure Oil Connection - Multi- Bleeder Pressure Relief Valve
1
disk Clutch 7 (Emergency Release Parking
Pressure Oil Connection - Multi- Brake)
2
disk Brake 8 Speed Transmitter
3 Bleeder Valve - Clutch Measuring Point - Road Speed
9
4 Bleeder Valve - Brake (Brake)
Lubrication Nipple (Emergency Measuring Point - Off-road
5 10
Release Parking Brake) Speed (Clutch)
Bleeder Valve (Emergency Measuring Point - Lubrication
6 11
Release Parking Brake) Pressure
Page 10
NOTES TO THE REQUIRED OIL
QUALITY AND OIL FILLING
CAPACITY
Oil Quality / Oil Grade
Only oils according to the "Table of Recommended
Lubricants" pages of operation manual.
Oil Filling Capacity for Power Shift Transmissions (2 HL-

250/270/290)
• vertical installation position: approx. 2.5 liters
• horizontal installation position: approx. 3.0 liters
oil sump volume - in the transmission to be filled
initially (i.e. after dis - and reassembly).
The values indicated are approximate values.
Specifications - as to oil level check, oil and filter
change - are indicated in the Operating Instructions.
For the Version "Axle Attachment"

Oil level check and oil change for the Axle see the
respective lubrication and maintenance instructions in
the relating repair manuals!
Page 11
SEPARATE THE HL-
TRANSMISSION FROM THE
AXLE CASING
(Only for the Version "Axle Attachment")
1. Drain oil from the axle casing.
use a suitable collector.
Figure 6
2. Pick-up the HL-Transmission by means of the lifting

tackle, loosen the bolt connection and the complete
HL-Transmission from the axle casing.
Figure 7
Page 12
DISASSEMBLY - BRAKE /
CLUTCH / PLANET CARRIER
1. Mount the transmission to the assembly truck.
CAUTION
Illustration shows the HL-Version "Axle Attachment"
Figure 8
2. Loosen the screw plug and drain the oil - use a

suitable collector.
Figure 9
Lube Oil Pump/Downshift Interlock
Version "Lube Oil Pump"

Remove the lube oil pump or the downshift interlock
(depending on the version) (Illustration shows - Version
"Lube Oil Pump").
CAUTION
Figure 10
Cpl. disassembly of the lube oil pump/downshift
interlock - See “Disassembly - Lube Oil Pump/Downshift
Interlock” on page -81..
Page 13
Speed Transmitter
Loosen the screw and pull off the speed transmitter.
Figure 11
Emergency Release (Parking Brake)

(Illustration - Figure 12 ~ 15 - shows Version "Transmission
Installation Position Vertical")
CAUTION
Position of the single connection or bleeder valves /
lubrication nipples etc. ... as to the Version
"Transmission Installation Position Horizontal" - See
Figure 215 on page -78. Figure 12
1. Remove the bleeder.

2. Remove the compression spring and the ball.
Figure 13
3. Remove the threaded element (see Detail "X") with O-

ring from the bore.
Figure 14
Page 14
4. Remove the lubrication nipple, both screw plugs and
the bleeder valve - see arrow.
Figure 15
Input Housing and Modulation Valve
CAUTION
Loosen the bolt connection of the input housing equally
- the input housing is subject to a cup spring and
compression spring preload.
Figure 16
1. Take off the input housing and remove the O-ring

(arrow).
Figure 17
Page 15
2. Modulation valve:
Remove the compression spring and the O-ring (arrow).
Figure 18
3. Pull the complete piston out of the bore.
Figure 19
Brake / Clutch
1. Remove the cup springs from the brake.
Figure 20
Page 16
2. Remove the cup springs from the clutch.
Figure 21
3. Remove the piston.
Figure 22
4. Pull off both cyl. pins (arrows).
Figure 23
WARNING
Attach 2 (two) eyebolts and pull the piston
cautiously out of the housing - risk of damage.
Figure 24
Page 17
5. Remove both seals (arrows) from the piston.
Figure 25
6. Remove the axial roller cage with both thrust washers.
Figure 26
7. Remove the pressure piece and the compression

spring.
Figure 27
WARNING
Remove the pressure ring with ring - also See
Figure 29 - cautiously by means of lever action -
risk of damaging the sealing surfaces.
CAUTION
Figure 28
Ring can also remain in the housing - disassemble
the ring separately.
Page 18
WARNING
Remove the pressure ring from the ring cautiously
by means of lever action - risk of damaging the
sealing surfaces.
Figure 29
8. Remove the gasket and O-rings from the pressure ring

/ ring.
Figure 30
9. Take the disc set of the brake with end shim(s) out of
the housing.
CAUTION
Illustration shows version / components of the 2 HL-
290.
Figure 31
10. Unsnap the retaining ring.
Figure 32
Page 19
11. Remove the snap ring and the shim.
Figure 33
12. Take the disc set of the clutch (with end shim/s) out of
the internal gear.
CAUTION
Illustration shows version / components of the 2 HL-
290.
Figure 34
13. Remove the cpl. input shaft with internal gear from the
housing.
Figure 35
Figure 36
Page 20
15. Press the input shaft out of the ball bearing/internal
gear.
Figure 37
Figure 38
17. Press the centering disc from the input shaft.
CAUTION
In case of an extremely fixed seat - heat the
centering disc - disassembly aid.
Figure 39
18. Unsnap the retaining ring and remove the ball bearing.
Figure 40
Page 21
Planet Carrier
1. Remove the axial needle cage with both thrust
washers.
Figure 41
2. If not yet disassembled before ñ remove the lube oil

pump or the downshift interlock (depending on the
version) (illustration shows - version - "Lube Oil
Pump").
CAUTION
Cpl. disassembly of the lube oil pump/downshift
interlock - See “Disassembly - Lube Oil Pump/
Downshift Interlock” on page -81.
Figure 42
3. Loosen the bolt connection and remove the washer -

fasten the output flange by means of the fixture.
Figure 43
4. Press the cpl. planet carrier out of the roller bearing.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the released planet carrier and the
bearing innerring.
Figure 44
Page 22
5. Pull the second bearing inner ring from the planet
carrier.
Figure 45
6. If required - expel both bearing outer rings (arrow) from

the bearing bore.
CAUTION
If the taper roller bearings are reused - pay
attention to the bearing location, i.e. respective
bearing inner ring to bearing outer ring.
Figure 46
Figure 47
8. Remove the planetary gear by means of lever action -

pay attention to the released shim and the cylindrical
rollers.
Figure 48
Page 23
9. Pull off the bearing inner ring ñ in case of an
extremely fixed seat heat the bearing inner ring.
Figure 49
10. Remove both seals (1).

Remove both bleeder valves (2) and all screw plugs
(3) with sealing and O-ring respectively.
(Illustration shows the positions for the transmission
version "Installation Position Vertical")
Figure 50
11. Only for the Version "Transmission Installation Position

Horizontal" (Figure 51 and Figure 52)
Loosen the countersunk screws and remove the screen
sheet.
CAUTION
Countersunk screws are installed with locking
compound (Loctite) - heating for disassembly, if
necessary. Figure 51
Page 24
12. Remove the screen sheet (2) from the planet carrier
(1).
Figure 52
Page 25
DISASSEMBLY - OUTPUT
Version - Axle Attachment

(HL-Transmission mounted directly to the axle)
1. Loosen the bolt connection, remove the cover and the
O-ring.
Figure 53
2. Pull off the flange.
Figure 54
3. Remove the shaft seal by lever action.
Figure 55
4. Fasten the pinion by means of the device and press it

off.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the released bearing inner ring and
the adjusting ring (rolling moment / pinion bearing)
behind it.
Figure 56
Page 26
5. Remove the O-ring (arrow) and the bush from the
pinion.
Figure 57
6. Pull off and press off respectively the bearing inner

ring.
Figure 58
7. Pull the bearing outer ring out of the bearing cover.
CAUTION
Pay attention to the shim behind it (pinion gap
setting).
Figure 59
Page 27
8. Pull off the bearing cover.
Figure 60
9. Remove the O-rings (arrows).
Figure 61
10. Remove the shaft seal.
Figure 62
11. Lift the output gear with oil baffle plate out of the
housing.
Remove the oil baffle plate from the output gear.
Figure 63
Page 28
12. Remove the screen sheet.
Figure 64
13. Expel the bearing outer ring from the housing bore
(arrow).
Figure 65
14. Remove the stud bolts, if necessary.
Figure 66
Page 29
Version - "Separate Installation"
(HL-Transmission installed separately from the axle)
In case of the transmission version "Separate Installation" it
is possible, differently from the transmission version "Axle
Attachment", to remove and to install the output - without
the previous disassembly of brake/clutch and planet carrier.
2 3
FG007292
Figure 67
1. Legend to Figure 67
Reference
Description
Number
1 Input
2 Output - Front Axle
3 Output - Rear Axle
Page 30
2. Fasten the output flange by means of the fixture.
Loosen the bolt connection ñ pull off washer, O-ring
and flange.
Figure 68
3. Press off the shaft seal by lever action.
CAUTION
Install the second output flange and the shaft seal
analogously.
Figure 69
4. Loosen the bolt connection.
Figure 70
5. By means of lifting tackle separate the output gear with

cover from the transmission housing.
Figure 71
Page 31
6. Press the output gear out of the ball bearing/cover.
remove the released oil baffle plate.
Figure 72
7. Unsnap the retaining ring and expel the ball bearing

from the cover.
Figure 73
8. Remove both O-rings (arrows) from the cover.
Figure 74
9. Remove the screen sheet from the transmission

housing.
Figure 75
Page 32
10. Expel the ball bearing from the housing bore.
Figure 76
Page 33
REASSEMBLY - OUTPUT
Only when a new housing is installed (Figure 77):
Seal the finished holes (8x) of the oil supply bores with
screw plugs.
Figure 77
Version - Axle Attachment

(HL-Transmission directly attached to the axle)
1. Install the stud bolts.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position. See Figure 78.
Tightening torque ...................................... MA = 20 N•m Figure 78
2. Insert the bearing outer ring until contact.
Figure 79
3. Insert the slotted pin (arrow).
Figure 80
Page 34
4. Position the screen sheet - with slotted pin (See Figure
80) into the fixing bore (arrow).
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - slotted pin =
radial fixing of the screen sheet.
Figure 81
5. Insert the output gear - Observe the installation

position.
Figure 82
6. Contact face (external shell of the shaft seal) if:

• rubberized ⇒ to be wet with spirit
• metal ⇒ to be provided with sealing compound
(Loctite No. 586).
CAUTION
Installation position of the shaft seal - Sealing lip
showing to the oil sump (See Figure 84). Figure 83
CAUTION
Install the shaft seal (1) considering the required
installation position (Dim. "X" - See Figure 84).
CAUTION
Grease the shaft seal in the area around the
sealing and dust lip.
Page 35
7. Exact installation position of the shaft seal is
guaranteed by use of the specified mounting tool.
Legend to the sketch:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Shaft seal
2 Bearing cover
X Installation Dimension → 69.5 - 0.5 mm
Figure 84
Determine Adjusting Shim for Pinion Gap
1. Legend to Figure 85 ~ 96:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Pinion
2 Roller Bearing
3 Bearing Cover
4 Ball (ø = 7 mm)
A Auxiliary Dimension
B Bearing Width
C Reference Dimension
Contact Surface / Bearing Cover to
D
Contact / Bearing Bore
E 73.0 mm (Constant Value)
Pinion Dimension (Engraved on the
X
Pinion)
189.0 mm (Contact Surface / Bearing
Z
Cover to Center / axle Casing)
Figure 85
CAUTION
For a correct installation and positioning of the
pinion, the following steps are to be carried out as
exactly as possible.
Page 36
2. Determine the auxiliary dimension "A".
Position the ball (ø = 7 mm) into the centering bore of
the pinion and determine Dim. "A", from the contact
surface /pinion shoulder to the ball.
Auxiliary dimension "A" = e.g. 42.56 mm
CAUTION
Auxiliary dimension "A" is obligatory to determine
the reference dimension "C" - on the installed
pinion (Figure 112).
Figure 86
3. Read pinion dim. "X" on the pinion (see arrow) or

measure it in case of manufacturing-specific + or -
deviation from the pinion dim. (relating value is marked
by hand on the pinion e.g. + 0.1).
Pinion dim. "X" (without + or - deviation) = 116.0 mm
Pinion dim. "X" with an indicated deviation + 0.1= 116.1

mm
Pinion dim. "X" with an indicated deviation - 0.1 = 115.9
mm
Figure 87
4. Determine Dim. "D" bearing width, paying attention that

the rollers are seated without clearance (aligning of
rollers - rotate the bearing inner ring in both directions
several times).
CAUTION
Since the installed roller bearing is subject to a
preload, deducting an empirical value of - 0.1 mm is
to be considered.
Figure 88
Dim. "B" = e.g. 36.65 mm - 0.1 mm → 36.55 mm

5. Determine Dim. "D" (contact surface / bearing cover to
contact / bearing bore).
Dim. "D" = e.g. 34.50 mm
Figure 89
Page 37
EXAMPLE:
Dim. "Z" ....................................................... 189.00 mm
Dim. "X" z.B. ............................................ - 116.00 mm
Result → Dim. "E" .................................... = 73.00 mm
Dim. "E" ......................................................... 73.00 mm
Dim. "B+D" (e.g. 36.55 + 34.50) ............. - 71.05 mm
Result → required shim "S" ....................... = 1.95 mm
6. Insert the determined shim(s) "S" = e.g. 1.95 mm and
install the bearing outer ring subsequently until contact
is obtained.
Figure 90
7. Oil the O-rings (arrows) and insert them into the ring
grooves of the bearing cover.
Figure 91
8. Bend the edges of the fixing straps of the oil baffle

plate slightly - assembly aid (sheet is fixed to the
bearing cover - See Figure 93).
Figure 92
Page 38
9. Mount the oil baffle plate on the bearing cover.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - locate the fixing
lug of the oil baffle plate into the recess of the
bearing cover (see arrow).
Figure 93
10. Oil the contact face/oil baffle plate/housing (assembly

aid).
Mount the preassembled bearing cover and by means
of hexagon nuts (use washers) locate it equally until
contact.
Then remove the hexagon nuts again.
Figure 94
11. Mount the heated bearing inner ring until contact and
after
cooling-down install it subsequently until contact is
obtained.
Figure 95
Page 39
12. Mount the bush, oil the O-ring (arrow) and put it into
the ring groove.
Figure 96
13. Mount the preassembled pinion.
Figure 97
14. Fasten the pinion by means of the clamping bar.
Figure 98
Page 40
Determine the Adjusting Ring for Rolling Moment/Pinion
Bearing
1. Rotate the transmission by 180°.
Mount the adjusting ring (s = optional).
CAUTION
It is recommended to reinstall the adjusting ring
(e.g. s = 1.35 mm) from the disassembly, if
however the required rolling moment of 1.5 ~ 3.0 Figure 99
N•m (without shaft seal) is not obtained - see
bearing rolling moment check Figure 104 - the
bearing rolling moment is to be corrected with an
adequate adjusting ring.
2. Mount the heated bearing inner ring and install it

subsequently until contact.
Figure 100
3. Mount the flange.
Figure 101
4. Put on the washer and fasten the flange with hexagon

screws.
CAUTION
Rotate the pinion - when tightening - in both
directions (aligning of rollers) several times.

Figure 102
Page 41
5. Turn back the pinion fastening and remove the
clamping bar respectively.
Figure 103
Check the Rolling Moment of the Pinion Bearing

1. Bearing rolling moment (without shaft seal) 1.5 ~ 3.0
N•m (When using new roller bearings - upper value
should be achieved)
CAUTION
If the required rolling moment deviates, it is to be
corrected with an adequate adjusting ring (See
Figure 99).
Figure 104
2. Remove the flange again.
Figure 105
Page 42
Shaft Seal/Output Flange
1. Contact face (external shell of the shaft seal) if
(Loctite No. 586).
CAUTION
Installation position of the shaft seal. Sealing lip
showing to the oil sump (See Figure 107).

installation position (Dim. "M" - See Figure 107).
Grease the shaft seal in the area around the sealing
and dust lip.
Exact installation position of the shaft seal is Figure 106
Reference
Description
Number
1 Shaft Seal
2 Screen Sheet
3 Flange
4 Roller Bearing
5 Bearing Cover
M Installation Dimension → 17.6 - 0.5 mm
Figure 107
N Installation Dimension → 27.5 + 0.3 mm
2. Only for installation of a new flange or if stud bolts

were removed (Figure 108) Install the stud bolts
Installation position - Stud bolts with short thread length
into flange.
Tightening torque (M10x1) ....................... MA = 20 N•m
Figure 108
Page 43
3. Only for installation of a new flange/screen sheet or if
removed (Figure 109) Install the screen sheet (2),
considering the required installation position (Dim. "N" -
See Figure 107).
Exact installation position of the screen sheet is
Figure 109
4. Mount the preassembled flange and put the O-ring into

the recess.
Figure 110
5. Place the washer and fasten it by means of hexagon

screws.
Figure 111
Check the Pinion Gap

1. Position the ball [use ø = 7 mm → ball ø like for the
determination of auxiliary dimension "A"] into the
centering bore of the pinion and determine Dim. "C"
(See Figure 85), from the contact surface/bearing cover
to the ball.
Example:
Reference dimension "C" e.g. ....................... 115.58 mm
Auxiliary dimension "A" (See Figure 86) e.g- 42.56 mm
Figure 112
Result (Dim. "E") ....................................... = 73.02 mm
Page 44
CAUTION
If the constant value of Dim. "E" = 73.00 ± 0.05 mm
is not achieved, it is to be corrected with an
adequate shim / pinion gap (See Figure 90).
2. For a correction of the shim/pinion gap, a

countercorrection of the adjusting ring of the rolling
moment / pinion gap - Figure 99 is also to be
considered.
Page 45
Version Separate Installation
(HL-Transmission installed separately from the axle)
In case of the transmission version "Separate Installation" it
is possible, differently from the transmission version "Axle
Attachment", to remove and to install the output - without
the previous disassembly of brake/clutch and planet carrier.
Figure 113
Legend to Figure 113 ~ Figure 132
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Transmission Housing 9 Output Gear
2 Ball Bearing 10 Shaft Seal
3 Screen Sheet 11 Output Flange
4 Cover 12 Stud Bolt
5 Ball Bearing 13 Dirt Deflector
6 Retaining Ring 14 O-ring
7 O-ring 15 Washer
8 Oil Baffle Plate 16 Hexagon Screw
Page 46
1. Insert ball bearing (2) until contact is obtained.
Figure 114

Insert the slotted pin (arrow).
Figure 115
3. Position the screen sheet - with slotted pin (See Figure

115) into the fixing bore (arrow).
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - slotted pin =
radial fixing of the screen.
Figure 116
4. Insert the ball bearing into the cover and fasten it by

means of the retaining ring.
Figure 117
Page 47
5. Oil both O-rings (arrows) and put it into the ring
grooves of the planet carrier.
Figure 118
6. Bend the edges of the fixing straps of the oil baffle

plate slightly - assembly aid (sheet is fixed to the
bearing cover - See Figure 120).
Figure 119
7. Mount the oil baffle plate on the bearing cover.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - locate the fixing
lug (arrow) into the recess of the bearing cover
(radial fixing).
Figure 120
8. Press the output gear into the ball bearing/bearing

cover.
CAUTION
Rest the ball bearing against the bearing inner ring.
Figure 121
Page 48
9. Heat the bearing inner ring of the ball bearing.
Figure 122
10. Attach two adjusting screws (M12) and mount the

preassembled bearing cover/output gear until contact is
obtained.
Figure 123
CAUTION
Observe the installation position of the bearing
cover (2) in the transmission (1) - Transmission
Installation "Vertical" or "Horixontal" - see detailed
sketches below
Figure 124
11. Fasten the bearing cover by means of hexagon screws.

Figure 125
Page 49
Shaft Seal/Output Flange
1. Legend to the sketch: N 3
M
2 5
Reference
Description
Number 1
1 Shaft Seal
4
2 Screen Sheet
3 Flange
4 Ball Bearing
FG007318
5 Bearing Cover Figure 126
M Installation Dimension → 17.6 - 0.5 mm
N Installation Dimension → 27.5 + 0.3 mm
2. Contact face (external shell of the shaft seal) if

(Loctite No. 586).
CAUTION
Installation position of the shaft seal - Sealing lip
showing to the oil sump (See Figure 126).
Figure 127
CAUTION
installation position (Dim. "M" - See Figure 126).
Grease the shaft seal in the area around the sealing

and dust lip.
CAUTION
Exact installation position of the shaft seal is
Page 50
3. Only for installation of a new flange or if stud bolts
were removed (Figure 128)
CAUTION
Install the stud bolts.
Installation position - Stud bolts with short thread
length into flange.
Tightening torque (M10x1)......................... MA = 20 N•m Figure 128
4. Only for installation of a new flange/screen sheet or if

removed (Figure 129)
Install the screen sheet (2), considering the required
installation position (Dim. "N" - See Figure 127).
CAUTION
Exact installation position of the screen sheet is
Figure 129
5. Mount the preassembled output flange.
Figure 130
6. Insert the O-ring.
Figure 131
Page 51
7. Position the washer and fasten the output flange by
means of hexagon screws.
CAUTION
Install the second shaft seal/output flange (front
axle output) analogously.
WARNING Figure 132
Prior to put the unit into operation the

specifications and regulations respectively as well
as the instructions of the operating and
maintenance instructions as well as the
specifications and instructions of the vehicle
manufacturer have to be observed.
Page 52
REASSEMBLY - BRAKE /
CLUTCH / PLANET CARRIER
Planet Carrier
1. Illustration shows the HL-Version "Axle Attachment".
Install the bearing outer ring until contact.
CAUTION
Observe the bearing location - bearing inner ring to
bearing outer ring - also see instructions for
disassembly page -23, Figure 46. Figure 133
2. Rotate transmission by 180°.

Install the second bearing outer ring until contact.
CAUTION
Observe the bearing location - bearing inner ring to
bearing outer ring - also see instructions for
disassembly page -23, Figure 46.
Figure 134
3. Only for the Version "Transmission Installation Position

Horizontal" (Figure 135 and 144)
CAUTION
Insert the screen sheet and fasten it with
countersunk screws.
Secure the countersunk screws with locking
compound (Loctite No. 243).
Figure 135
Page 53
4. Install the screen sheet (2) considering the installation
dimension "X" (see detail sketch) onto the planet
2
carrier (1).
3
1
Figure 136
Legend to detail sketch:
Reference
Description
Number 1
2 X
1 Planet Carrier
3
2 Screen Sheet
Contact Surface - Axial Needle Cage/
3
axial Washer
X Install. Dim. 1.5 - 0.5 mm
Figure 137
5. Insert the slotted pins (6x), considering the installation

dimension "X" = 28.0 - 1.0 mm and the installation
position - See Figure 139 (slot is showing to the
center).
CAUTION
Prior to installation grease the slotted pin -
X
assembly aid.
Figure 138
Page 54
1
Reference
Description 2
Number
1 Planet Carrier
2 Slotted Pins (6x)
3 Center (Planet Carrier)
3
Figure 139
Legend to Figure 140 ~ Figure 146:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Bearing inner ring with cyl. rollers
1a Packing Sleeve + Assembly Aid
2 Planetary Gear
3 Cyl. Rollers
3a Packing Sleeve + Assembly Aid
4 Shim
Figure 140
6. Position the planetary gear (2) - with the marking

showing downwards.
Put the bearing inner ring (1) onto the planetary gear
(2) and press it until contact is obtained.
Then remove the loose packing sleeve (1a).
CAUTION
Keep the bearing inner ring to contact and rotate
the planetary gear by 180°. Figure 141
7. Position the cyl. rollers (3) onto the planetary gear (2).
Figure 142
Page 55
8. By means of the mounting tool press the cyl. rollers (2)
into the planetary gear (2).
Then remove the two loose packing sleeves (3a).
Figure 143
CAUTION
Keep the bearing inner ring with cyl. rollers to
contact - and mount the preassembled the
planetary gear to the planet carrier pin.
Figure 144
9. Press the planetary gear (bearing inner ring) until

contact.
Figure 145
10. Mount the shim (4). marking showing upwards. and

snap in the retaining ring.
CAUTION
Install the retaining ring subsequently until contact
at the groove base is obtained.
Install the remaining planetary gears analogously.

Figure 146
Page 56
11. Press the bearing inner ring onto the planet carrier until
contact ist obtained.
Figure 147
12. Insert the preassembled planet carrier.
Figure 148
13. Fasten the planet carrier by means of pressure plate

and clamping bar.
Figure 149
Page 57
Check locating of the bearing outer ring (arrow) -
installation of the bearing outer ring - See Figure 133.
Figure 150
15. Mount the heated bearing inner ring until contact.
Figure 151
16. Position the shim and attach the hexagon screws by

hand (fixing of the planet carrier).
Then remove the clamping bar - See Figure 149.
Figure 152
Page 58
17. Fasten the fixture to the output flange.
CAUTION
Tighten the hexagon screws equally - risk of
distortion.
Figure 153
WARNING
When tightening the hexagon bolts rotate the planet
carriers - into both directions. several times
(aligning of rollers).
Brake/Clutch
1. Mount the heated centering disc and press it until
Figure 154
2. Fasten the centering disc by means of the retaining

ring.
Figure 155
Page 59
3. Insert the ball bearing into the internal gear and fasten
it by means of the retaining ring.
Figure 156
4. Heat the bearing inner ring of the ball bearing.
Figure 157
5. Mount the preassembled internal gear to the input shaft

until contact is obtained.
Figure 158
6. Snap in the retaining ring.
Figure 159
Page 60
Position the axial needle cage with both thrust washers
(1x each, underneath and onto the axle needle cage
resp. - see Figure).
CAUTION
Fix the axial needle cage and the thrust washers by
means of grease centrically - assembly aid.
Figure 160
8. Mount the preassembled input shaft (with internal gear).
Figure 161
Disc Components Brake and Clutch

Reassembly of both disc sets in the Version "2 HL-290" -
See Figure 162 and Figure 165 ~ Figure 170 - is shown
below.
Reassembly as to the Versions "2 HL-270" and "2 HL-250"
is to be made as shown in the Figure 163 and 172
respectively.
For information about number and arrangement of the discs
- also see the perspective illustration in the respective spare
parts list.
1. Version "2 HL-290"
Reference
Description
Number
Figure 162
Lower Ring Groove (2 HL-290, Item
A
Retaining Ring -1)
Upper Ring Groove (2 HL-250/270,
B
Item Retain. Ring -1)
1 Retaining Ring
2 End Shim / Brake (1 Pc.)
3 Outer Disc / Brake (9 Pcs.)
4 Inner Disc / Brake (8 Pcs.)
5 Inner Disc / Clutch (12 Pcs.)
Page 61
Reference
Description
Number
7 Transmission Housing
8 Disc Carrier / Internal Gear
2. Version "2 HL-270"

Reference
Description
Number
Lower Ring Groove (2 Hl-290, Item
A
Retaining Ring -1)
Upper Ring Groove (2 Hl-250/270,
B
1 Retaining Ring
2 End Shim / Brake (1 Pc.)
3 Outer Disc / Brake (6 Pcs.)
4 Inner Disc / Brake (6 Pcs.)
5 End Shim / Clutch (1 Pc.)
Figure 163
9 Disc Carrier / Internal Gear
3. Version "2 HL-250":

Reference
Description
Number
Lower Ring Groove (2 Hl-290, Item
A
Retaining Ring -1)
Upper Ring Groove (2 Hl-250/270,
B
1 Retaining Ring
2 End Shim / brake (2 Pcs.)
3 Outer Disc / brake (5 Pcs.)
4 Inner Disc / brake (4 Pcs.)
5 End Shim / clutch (2 Pcs.)
6 Inner Disc / clutch (8 Pcs.)
Figure 164
7 Inner Disc / clutch (7 Pcs.)
9 Disc Carrier / internal Gear
Page 62
A. Brake
Snap the retaining ring (1) into the ring groove
(A).
CAUTION
Observe the installation position of the
retaining ring (1) - ring groove (A) only for
Version "2 HL-290"
Figure 165
B. Insert the end shim (2).
Figure 166
C. Insert the disc set (outer / inner discs) - beginning

with an outer disc - alternately.
CAUTION
Position the outer disc (1 Pc.) s = variable 2.8
~ 3.7 mm, in the disc set on the top (piston-
side).
With outer disc s = variable, the disc
clearance /piston stroke will be adjusted - See Figure 167
Figure 180.
D. Clutch:
Insert the disc set (outer / inner discs) - beginning
with an outer disc - alternately.
CAUTION
Position the outer disc (1 Pc.) s = variable 1.2
~ 1.6 mm, in the disc set on the top (piston
side).
With outer disc s = variable, the disc Figure 168
clearance /piston stroke will be adjusted - See
Figure 179.
Page 63
Adjust and check the Disc Clearance/Piston Stroke of
Brake and Clutch
1. Mount the pressure piece (without compression spring).
Figure 169
2. Oil the axial roller cage and mount it with both thrust
washers (1x each, positioned underneath and onto the
axial needle cage respectively - see Figure).
Figure 170
3. Insert the piston (brake) - without sealing elements

installed.
Figure 171
4. Insert the piston (clutch) - without sealing elements

installed.
Figure 172
Page 64
5. Insert both cup springs / clutch.
Fix the cup springs by means of grease and position
them centrically. assembly aid.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - also see Figure
175.
Figure 173
6. Insert both cup springs / brake.

Fix the cup springs by means of grease and position
them centrically. assembly aid.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - also see Figure
175.
Figure 174
Legend to Figure 175 ~ Figure 180:
Reference l ll lll
Description
Number
1 Measuring Fixture D C B A
5
2 Piston / Clutch 3 X
Y
3 Cup Springs / Clutch 2 4
4 Piston / Brake 6
5 Cup Springs / Brake
6 Transmission Housing FG002838
Figure 175
Measuring Bore (Disc Clearance /
I
Clutch)
Measuring Bore (Disc Clearance /
II
Brake)
A Mounting Face / Housing - Face / Piston
Mounting Face / Housing - Piston
B
Contact / Housing
C Mounting Face / Housing - Face / Piston
Mounting Face / Housing - Piston
D
Contact / Housing
Y Disc Clearance / Clutch → 2.4 +0.3 mm

(Piston Stroke)
X Disc Clearance / Brake → 1.8 + 0.3

mm (Piston Stroke)
Page 65
CAUTION
Locate the measuring fixture with hexagon screws
equally (risk of breakage) until contact is obtained.
Figure 176
7. Determine Dim. "A" (Measuring bore "I") from mounting

face / housing to the face / piston (clutch).
Dim. "A" e.g. .............................................. = 22.45 mm
Figure 177
8. Determine Dim. "C" (Measuring bore "II") from

mounting face / housing to the face / piston (brake).
Dim. "C" e.g. .............................................. = 11.85 mm
Figure 178
9. Determine Dim. "B" from mounting face / housing to

clutch piston contact / housing.
Dim. "B" e.g. .............................................. = 19.95 mm
Example:
Dim. "A" e.g. ................................................. 22.45 mm
Dim. "B" e.g. .............................................. - 19.95 mm
Result ............................................................ = 2.50 mm
Clutch disc clearance (piston stroke) = 2.4 + 0.3 mm

Figure 179
Page 66
WARNING
If the required disc clearance (piston stroke) is not
obtained, this is to be corrected with a suitable
outer disc - See Figure 168.
10. Determine Dim. "D" from mounting face / housing to

brake piston contact / housing.
Dim. "D" e.g. ................................................. = 9.95mm
Example:
Dim. "C" e.g. ................................................. 11.85 mm
Dim. "D" e.g. ................................................ - 9.95 mm
Result ............................................................ = 1.90 mm
Disc clearance (piston stroke) Brake = 1.8 + 0.3 mm

Figure 180
WARNING
If the required disc clearance (piston stroke) is not
obtained, this is to be corrected with a suitable
outer disc n see Figure 167.
11. Remove the measuring fixture again. loosen the screws

equally.
Remove all cup springs, both pistons, axial roller cage
with thrust washers and pressure piece.
Figure 181
12. Insert the oil baffle plate into the disc carrier and fix it
with the snap ring.
Figure 182
Page 67
13. Oil the sealing faces and the O-ring.
Insert the O-ring (arrow) into the groove and insert the
ring.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - See Figure 183.
Figure 183
14. By means of the mounting tool locate the ring until

Figure 184
15. Oil the sealing faces and the sealing elements.
Figure 185
16. Insert the seal (1) with the sealing lip showing to the
oil sump. also see detail sketch.
Put both O-rings (2) into the ring grooves of the
pressure ring (3) and insert the preassembled pressure
ring - observe the installation position.
Figure 186
Page 68
17. By means of the mounting tool locate the pressure ring
until contact.
Figure 187
18. Insert the compression spring.
Figure 188
19. Insert the pressure piece.
Figure 189
Page 69
20. Oil the axial roller cage and mount it with both thrust
washers (1x each to be positioned underneath and
onto the axial needle cage respectively - See Figure).
Figure 190

Insert the seal (2, with the sealing lip showing to the
oil sump) and the seal (3) - See Figure 192 - into the
housing (1).
Figure 191
22. Legend to Figure 192 as well as Figure 191 and

Figure 193:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Housing
2 Seal (With Sealing Lip)
3 Seal
4 Piston / Brake
7 Piston / Clutch
Figure 192

Insert the seals (5 and 6, See Figure 192), with the
sealing lip showing to the oil sump, into the piston /
brake (4).
Figure 193
Page 70
24. Insert the preassembled piston / brake until contact is
obtained.
CAUTION
Piston is to be positioned that the oil supply bore
(arrow) - with the HL-Transmission installed into the
vehicle n is at 12 o’clock position.
Observe the version as to the transmission
installation position "Horizontal - Vertical". Figure 194
25. By means of the mounting tool locate the piston until

contact.
Figure 195
26. Insert both cyl. pins (arrow).
Figure 196
27. Insert the piston / clutch.
Figure 197
Page 71
28. Press the piston axially, contrary to the compression
spring preload, and seal the pressure oil supply bore
by means of screw plug / sealing ring (arrow) - thus the
piston is kept in axial position - assembly aid for input
housing assembly (Figure 204 and 213).
Figure 198
29. Insert both cup springs/clutch.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position - See Figure 199
and also Figure 175 respectively.
Figure 199
30. Insert both cup springs/brake.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position -See Figure 200
and also Figure 175.
Figure 200
Modulation Valve and Input Housing

1. Insert the modulation valve (cpl. - can only be replaced
as unit).
Figure 201
Page 72
2. Place the O-ring (arrow) and insert the compression
spring.
Figure 202
3. Input housing:
Oil the O-ring and put it into the ring groove of the
input housing.
Figure 203
4. Position the cup springs centrically - assembly aid.

Insert two adjusting screws (M 12), mount the input
housing and fasten it with hexagon screws.
Figure 204
WARNING
Locate the input housing with hexagon screws
equally (risk of breakage) until contact is obtained.
Figure 205
Page 73
Emergency Release (Parking Brake)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Input Housing
2 Housing
3 O-ring
4 Threaded Element (Orifice)
5 Ball
6 Compression Spring
7 O-ring
8 Bleeder
Position of lubrication nipple for the Figure 206
version "Transmission Installation Position
9 Vertical" - Position of lubrication nipple for
the version "Transmission Installation
Position Horizontal" -See Figure 211
1. Install the threaded element (4) with O-ring (3).

Tightening torque (M 10x1) ..................... MA = 24 N•m
Figure 207
2. Insert the ball (5).
Figure 208
Page 74
3. Insert the compression spring (6).
Figure 209
Page 75
Check the Emergency Release for Leak Tightness
CAUTION
Illustration shows the Version "Transmission Installation
Position Vertical" (Figure 210)
CAUTION
For the version "Transmission Installation Position
Horizontal" the connection and positions respectively of
the bleeder valves / lubrication nipple etc. ... are to be
considered according to the illustration in Figure 211.
1. Install both bleeder valves (1), screw plugs (2) with

sealing ring and screw plugs (3) with O-ring.
Tightening torque
Bleeder valve (M 10x1) ........................... MA = 22 N•m
Figure 210
Screw plug (M 10x1 with sealing ring) .. MA = 15 N•m
Screw plug (M 10x1 with O-ring) ........... MA = 25 N•m
Legend to Sketch No. 77:
Reference
Description
Number
Bleeder/pressure-relief Valve (Emerg.
1
Release - Park. Brake)
2 Screw Plug
Bleeder Valve (Emergency Release -
3
Parking Brake)
Lubrication Nipple (Emergency Release
4
- Parking Brake) Figure 211
5 Bleeder Valve (Multi-disc Clutch)
6 Bleeder Valve (Multi-disc Brake)
Pressure Oil Connection - Multi-disc
7
Brake
Pressure Oil Connection - Multi-disc
8
Clutch
Page 76
2. Install the bleeder valve (1), screw plugs (2) with O-
ring screw plug (3) with O-ring and compressed air
connection piece (4).
Tightening torque
Bleeder valve (M 10x1) ........................... MA = 22 N•m
Screw plug (M 10x1 with O-ring) ........... MA = 25 N•m
Screw plug (M 18x1.5 with O-ring) ........ MA = 35 N•m
Compr.air connect. piece (M 10x1) w. seal. ring) ..MA = 15
N•m
Figure 212
3. Pressurize the emergency release with compressed air

p = 5 + 1bar and close the shut-off valve.
During a test duration of 3 minutes no pressure drop is
allowed.
Figure 213
4. Remove the screw plug and the compressed air

connection piece (See Figure 212).
Install the bleeder (3) with O-ring and lubrication nipple
(4).
Tightening torque
Lubrication nipple (M 10x1) ..................... MA = 22 N•m
Bleeder (M 18x1.5) ................................... MA = 22 N•m
Figure 214
Page 77
Check the Multi-Disc Brake and Multi-Disc Clutch for
Leak Tightness as well as Closing Pressure
Reference
Description
Number
2 Input Housing
AB Pressure Oil Connection - Multi-disc Brake
AK Pressure Oil Connection - Multi-disc Clutch
EB Bleeder Valve - Multi-disc Brake
EK Bleeder Valve - Multi-disc Clutch
Figure 215
CAUTION
Illustration shows the version "Transmission Installation
Position Vertical"
CAUTION
For the version "Transmission Installation Position
Horizontal" the connections and positions respectively
of the bleeder valves / lubrication nipple etc. ... are to be
considered according to the illustration in Figure 211.
1. Multi-disc brake:
Connect the HP-Pump ("AB" - See Figure 215 and
Figure 211), Build up a pressure of p = 30 ... max. 35
bar
- Bleed the pressure chamber (several times).
Close the shut-off valve.
During a test duration of 3 minutes no measurable
pressure drop is allowed!
Test medium:
Figure 216
According to List of Lubricants TE-ML 07
Page 78
2. Closing pressure test (Cup spring preloading force):
When measuring the closing pressure the valve block
is not allowed to be attached to the transmission due
to the by-pass function between brake and clutch.
Connection "AK" (See Figure 215 and Figure 211
respectively) open (not closed and tank connection
respectively).
Reduce the pressure slowly, when pressure range 11 ~
9 bar (closing pressure) is reached, the input shaft has
to be locked at a tightening torque of 50 ± 5 N•m.
Figure 217
3. Multi-disc clutch:
Connect the HP-Pump ("AK" - See Figure 215 and
Figure 211), Build up a pressure of p = 30 ... max. 35
bar
- Bleed the pressure chamber (several times).
Close the shut-off valve.
During a test duration of 3 minutes no measurable
pressure drop is allowed.
Test medium:
Figure 218
According to the "Table of recommended lubricants" of
operation manual.
4. Closing pressure test (Cup spring preloading force):
When measuring the closing pressure the valve block
(only for the version "with" mounted electr. downshift
interlock) is not allowed to be attached to the
transmission due to the by-pass function between brake
and clutch.
Connection "AB" (See Figure 215 and Figure 211
respectively) open (not closed and tank connection
respectively).
Reduce the pressure slowly, when pressure range 15.5
~ 13.5 bar (closing pressure) is reached, the input Figure 219
shaft has to be locked at a tightening torque of 50 ± 5
N•m.
Speed Transmitter
Install the speed transmitter with O-ring.
Tightening torque (M 8/8.8) .............................. MA = 23 N•m
Figure 220
Page 79
Lube Oil Pump/Downshift Interlock
1. Install the lube oil pump (with O-rings) or the downshift
interlock - depending on the version - (Illustration
shows - Version "Lube Oil Pump").
CAUTION
Cpl. assembly of the lube oil pump / downshift
interlock - See “Reassembly - Lube Oil Pump/
Downshift Interlock” on page -88. Figure 221
WARNING
as the instructions of the transmission operating
and maintenance instructions as well as the
manufacturer have to be observed
Page 80
DISASSEMBLY - LUBE OIL
PUMP/DOWNSHIFT INTERLOCK
Version "with" Lube Oil Pump

1. Loosen the bolt connection and pull off the cpl. lube oil
pump.
Figure 222
2. Loosen the cover bolt connection, remove the cover (1)

with gasket (2) and the filter (3) from the housing (4).
Figure 223
3. Remove the cpl. pressure limiting valve and both O-

rings (arrows).
Figure 224
Page 81
4. Loosen the pump cover bolt connection, keep the
housing in vertical position - disassembly aid (also see
Figure 226).
Figure 225
CAUTION
Keep pump to contact and rotate it by 180°.
disassembly aid.
5. Then pull the pump in vertical position out of the

housing - pay attention to possibly released balls/
compression springs (See Figure 226 and 236).
Figure 226
6. Remove the outer (1) and internal rotor (2) and take
the released ball [(3) driver] out of the control housing
(4).
CAUTION
Outer, internal rotor and control housing = rotor set
Figure 227
7. Remove the control housing and the released balls and

compression springs (3 pcs. each).
Figure 228
Page 82
Figure 229
9. Pull the cpl. pump shaft out of the pump cover.
Figure 230
10. Unsnap the retaining ring and press the ball bearing
from the shaft.
Figure 231
11. Pull the needle sleeve out of the housing bore.
Figure 232
Page 83
Version "with" hydr. Downshift Interlock
1. Disassemble both oil tubes.
Figure 233
2. Loosen the bolt connection of the shift interlock (3 x

cap screws) and remove the cpl. shift interlock.
Figure 234
3. Loosen the cover bolt connection, remove the cover

and flat gasket (also see Figure 236).
Figure 235
4. Take the filter out of the housing.
Figure 236
Page 84
5. Loosen pump cover bolt connection.
Figure 237
CAUTION
Keep pump to contact and rotate it by 180° -
disassembly aid.
6. Then pull the pump in vertical position out of the

housing - pay attention to possibly released balls/
compression springs (See Figure 239 and 248).
Figure 238
7. Remove the outer (1) and internal rotor (2) and take
the released ball [(3) driver] out of the control housing
(4).
Outer, internal rotor and control housing = rotor set
Figure 239
8. Remove the control housing and the released balls and

compression springs (3 pcs. each).
Figure 240
Page 85
Figure 241
10. Pull the cpl. pump shaft out of the pump cover.
Figure 242
11. Unsnap the retaining ring and press the ball bearing
from the shaft.
Figure 243
12. Pull the needle sleeve out of the housing bore.
Figure 244
Page 86
Legend to the Sketch No. 24:
Reference
Description
Number
1 Housing
2 O-rings
3 Check Valve (010)
4 G.shift Piston
5 Check Valve (009)
6 Check Valve (008)
Figure 245
7 Pressure Limiting Valve
13. Remove the O-rings and all single parts/valves.
Version "with" electr. Downshift

Interlock- mounted to Transmission
1. Loosen the fixing bolts and remove the cpl. downshift
interlock.
Figure 246
2. Remove both O-rings (arrow).
CAUTION
Make no further disassembly - electr. downshift
interlock can only be replaced as complete part.
Figure 247
Page 87
REASSEMBLY - LUBE OIL
PUMP/DOWNSHIFT INTERLOCK
Version "with" Lube Oil Pump

1. Mount the ball bearing onto the shaft and fasten it by
means of the retaining ring.
Figure 248
2. Press the preassembled pump shaft into the pump

cover and fasten it by means of the retaining ring.
Figure 249
3. Insert the compression springs (1) and ball (2) into the
bores (see arrows - 3x).
WARNING
Prior to installation oil single parts of the pump /
rotor set (control housing, internal and outer rotor)
- use oil acc. to the "table of recommended
lubricants" pages of operation manual.
Figure 250
CAUTION
Keep the pump shaft / cover in "vertical" position -
pay attention to the position of the inserted balls /
compression springs - See Figure 250 ~. Figure
256).
Page 88
4. Mount the control housing.
Control housing/internal and outer rotor = rotor set
Figure 251
5. Position the ball - see arrow -(drive for internal rotor)

with grease (assembly aid) into the recess of the pump
shaft.
Figure 252
6. Mount the internal rotor
CAUTION
Place the groove of the internal rotor over the
driving ball (see arrows).
Figure 253
7. Assemble the outer rotor.
Figure 254
Page 89
8. Check passage of the orifice / oil bore in the housing
bottom.
CAUTION
Insert the needle sleeve to installation dimension
"X".
"X" = 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm below plane face/housing

Figure 255
CAUTION
The exact installation position is ensured by use of
the specified mounting tool.
CAUTION
Insert the needle sleeve with marked face showing
upwards.
9. Keep the preassembled pump in "vertical" position (See

Note Figure 250) and put on the housing.
Figure 256
CAUTION
Keep the assembled pump to contact.
10. Rotate the housing by 180° and fasten the pump with
hexagon screws.
Figure 257
Page 90
11. Fasten the pump finally.
Tightening torque (M6/8.8) ...................... MA = 9.5 N•m
Figure 258
12. Functional test of the lube oil pump:

With counter-turning motions on the pump shaft, the
swivelling of the control housing (stop LH/RH in the
pump cover) is audible.
Figure 259
13. Oil both O-rings (arrows) and put them into the ring
groove of the housing.
Figure 260
14. Check the O-rings (arrows) of the pressure limiting

valve and replace them, if necessary.
Figure 261
Page 91
15. Insert the pressure limiting valve.
Tightening torque ...................................... MA = 20 N•m
Figure 262
16. Secure the pressure limiting valve by blows with the

center punch (2x).
Figure 263
17. Insert the filter. Observe the installation position.
Figure 264
18. Place the gasket.
Figure 265
Page 92
19. Place the cover and fasten it with hexagon screws and
washers.
Tightening torque (M8/8.8) ....................... MA = 23 N•m
Figure 266
20. Insert the screw plug with O-ring.

Tightening torque (M10x1) ....................... MA = 15 N•m
Figure 267
21. Mount the cpl. lube oil pump and fasten it with cap
screws and washers.
Figure 268
Page 93
Version "with" hydr. Downshift Interlock
Reference
Description
Number
1 Housing
2 G.shift Piston
3 Pressure Limiting Valve
4 Check Valve (008)
5 Check Valve (009)
6 Check Valve (010)
Figure 269
7 Filter
8 Lube Oil Pump
Install the gasket (consisting of plastic and O-ring (Fig. No.

23 and 24)
1. Put the O-ring (see arrow) into the ring groove of the
piston.
Lead the plastic ring by means of the mounting bush
(S) over the piston and position it at the O-ring.
Figure 270
2. Calibrate the plastic ring by means of the bush.
Figure 271
Page 94
3. Insert the compression spring, oil and mount the
preassembled piston.
Figure 272
4. Fix the piston with screw plug (1- with O-ring).

Install the screw plug (2. with sealing ring).
Tightening torque:
Screw plug (M24x1.5) ............................ MA = 50 N•m
Screw plug (M10x1) ............................... MA = 15 N•m
Figure 273
5. Install the single parts according to the illustration on

the left.
CAUTION
Observe the installation position of the different
check valves.
Oil the single parts acc. to the "table of
recommended lubricants" pages of operation
manual.
Figure 274
1 = Pressure limiting valve (cpl.) ............ MA = 10 N•m
2 = Check valve (cpl.) ............................. MA = 10 N•m
Page 95
6. Secure the check valves and the pressure limiting
valve by two blows each with the center punch.
Figure 275
7. Check passage of the orifice / oil bore in the housing

bottom.
CAUTION
Insert the needle sleeve to installation dimension
"X".
"X" = 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm below plane face/housing

Figure 276
CAUTION
The exact installation position is ensured by use of
the specified mounting tool.
CAUTION
Insert the needle sleeve with marked face showing
upwards.
8. Mount the ball bearing onto the shaft and fasten it with
the retaining ring.
Figure 277
Page 96
9. Press the preassembled pump shaft into the pump
cover and fasten it with the retaining ring.
Figure 278
10. Insert the compression springs (1) and ball (2) into the
bores (see arrows - 3x).
WARNING
Prior to installation oil single parts of the pump /
rotor set (control housing, internal and outer rotor)
- use oil acc. to the "table of recommended
lubricants" pages of operation manual.
Figure 279
CAUTION
Keep the pump shaft / cover in "vertical" position -
pay attention to the position of the inserted balls /
compression springs - See Figure 250 ~ Figure
256).
11. Mount the control housing.

Control housing/internal and outer rotor
Figure 280
Page 97
12. Position the ball - see arrow -(drive for internal rotor)
with grease (assembly aid) into the recess of the pump
shaft.
Figure 281
13. Mount the internal rotor
CAUTION
Place the groove of the internal rotor over the
driving ball (see arrows).
Figure 282
14. Assemble the outer rotor.
Figure 283
15. Keep the preassembled pump in "vertical" position (see

Instructions Figure 279) and put on the housing.
Figure 284
Page 98
CAUTION
Keep the assembled pump to contact and rotate
the housing by 180°.
Fasten the pump with hexagon screws.

Tightening torque (M6/8.8) ...................... MA = 9.5 N•m
Figure 285
16. Insert the screen filter - Observe the installation

position.
Figure 286
17. Place the gasket.
Figure 287
18. Position the cover, fasten it with hexagon screws and

washers.
CAUTION
Pay attention to different screw length.
Figure 288
Page 99
19. Oil both O-rings (arrows) and put them into the ring
grooves of the housing.
Figure 289
20. Mount the preassembled downshift interlock and fasten

it with cap screws and washers.
CAUTION
Pay attention to different screw length.
Figure 290
21. Install both screw-in sleeves and the screw plug (see
arrows) - with O-rings.
Tightening torque:
Screw-in sleeve (M 16 x 1.5) .................. MA = 23 N•m
Screw plug (M 18 x 1.5) ......................... MA = 35 N•m
Figure 291
Reference
Description
Number
1 Oil Tube
2 Union Screw (M 16 X 1.5)
3 Sealing Ring
4 Union Screw (M 14 X 1.5)
5 Sealing Ring
Figure 292
Page 100
22. Install both oil tubes.
Tightening torque:
Union screw (M 14 x1.5) ......................... MA = 25 N•m
Union screw (M 16 x1.5) ......................... MA = 45 N•m
Figure 293
Version "with" electr. Downshift

Interlock - mounted to the
Transmission
1. Position both O-rings (arrows).
Figure 294
2. Fasten the cpl. downshift interlock with cap screws and

washers.
WARNING
and maintenance instructions as well as the Figure 295
Page 101
ATTACH THE HL-
TRANSMISSION TO THE AXLE
(only for the version "Axle Attachment")
1. Position the cpl. HL-Transmission to the axle.
Figure 296
2. Fasten the HL-Transmission to the axle by means of

hexagon screws and nuts.
WARNING
and maintenance instructions as well as the Figure 297
Page 102
SP000963
DRIVE COUPLING (MAIN PUMP)SP000963
1Drive Coupling
(Main Pump)
Edition 1
Drive Coupling (Main Pump) SP000963

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Drive Coupling (Main Pump)
Drive Coupling ..................................................... 7
Special Tools ....................................................... 9
Drive Coupling Installation ................................ 10
Installation Procedure ................................................... 12

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling the load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
DRIVE COUPLING
When installing the main pump on the engine, it is very
important to properly adjust clearance between the face of
the coupling hub and end of pump driveshaft ("Measurement
H" shown in the following procedure) to a specific value.
Figure 1 thru Figure 3, show typical drive coupling
installations.
ARS1710L
Figure 1
ARS1720L
Figure 2 S340LC-V - S470LC-V

Page 7
BMS0040L
Figure 3 S175LC-V, S180W-V, DX140W, DX160W, DX190W, DX210W

Page 8
SPECIAL TOOLS
This tool is used to control the distance between the end of
the pump driveshaft and the front face of the drive coupling
hub (Figure 4 and Figure 3). This distance will be referred
to as "Measurement H" in the installation instructions that
follow.
NOTE: In manufacturing drawings (Figure 3), dimension "A"
and "B" equal the "Measurement H." The two tools
shown are designed to be used on various models of
equipment. Only one end of the tool is used for a
specific model of equipment.
HAAA8020
Figure 4
A C
B
E G
F
H
RELIEF
RELIEF
KNURL
HAAA8360
Figure 5
Dimensional Details for Figure 5

Dimension Measurement Models
A 10.5 ±0.1 mm
S300LC-V, S300LL, DX190W, DX210W
(0.4134 ±0.0039 in)
B 8.5 ±0.1 mm S340LC-V, S420LC-V, S470LC-V, DX140W,
(0.3346 ±0.0039 in) DX160W
C 20.0 mm (0.787 in)
D 7.0 mm (0.275 in)
E 14.0 mm (0.551 in) Radius
F 17.0 mm (0.669 in) Radius
G 25.0 mm (0.984 in) Radius
H 1.0 mm (0.039 in) x 45° Chamfer

Page 9
DRIVE COUPLING
INSTALLATION
Whenever the drive coupling for main pump is installed, the
following mounting dimensions and installation procedures
must be observed.
NOTE: If these procedures are not followed, noise will occur
and/or the service life of drive coupling or main pump
will be reduced.
2 3
1
7
10
5 H
11 5
8
HAAA8040
Figure 6 Drive Coupling Installation

Page 10
Table 1 Parts Information and Torque for Figure 6
Reference Torque
Description Qty.
Number (See Table 2)
1 Spring Pin 4
2 Insert 4
3 Bolt 4 Ta
4 Flywheel 1
5 Spring Pin 8
6 Insert 4
7 Hub 1
8 Bolt 4 Ta
9 Pump shaft 1
10 Clamping screw 2 Tb
11 Element 1
Specification for "Measurement H," from front hub face to

pump shaft end, and TIGHTENING TORQUE of bolts and
screws written in the "Table 2" must be observed.
Table 2 Specification for "Measurement H" and Torque (Refer to Figure 6)

Coupling Part Torque Value for Torque Value for
Model "Measurement H"
Number "Ta" "Tb"
DX140W 8.0 - 9.0 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
K1013823
DX160W (0.315 - 0.354 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
DX190W 10.0 - 11.0 mm 21 - 23 kg•m 10 - 12 kg•m
K1013827
DX210W (0.394 - 0.433 in) (152 - 166 ft lb) (72 - 87 ft lb)
S300LC-V 5.5 - 6.5 mm 44 - 49 kg•m 20 - 22 kg•m
414-00040
S300LL (0.216 - 0.256 in) (318 - 354 ft lb) (145 - 159 ft lb)
S340LC-V
6.5 - 7.5 mm 44 - 49 kg•m 20 - 22 kg•m
S420LC-V 414-00041
(0.256 - 0.295 in) (318 - 354 ft lb) (145 - 159 ft lb)
S470LC-V

Page 11
Installation Procedure
NOTE: Refer to Figure 6 while using following procedure.
1. Install spring pin (1) and attach insert (2) with bolt (3)
to engine flywheel (4). 4
NOTE: Tighten bolts to value "Ta" in the tables.

2. Install two spring pins (5) and attach insert (6) to hub
2 3
(7) bolts (8).
NOTE: Tighten bolts to value "Ta" in the tables. 1
10 7
3. Attach flywheel cover to the main pump with bolts.
(S300LC-V, S340LC-V only.)
9
4. Slide hub (7) into place on pump shaft (9) as specified 5 H
in the "Table 2" for "Measurement H" and secure it in
position with clamping screws (10).
NOTE: Tighten clamping screws to value "Tb" in the
tables.
NOTE: Coat clamping screws (10) with Loctite #262.
11 5
5. Install element (11) between inserts (2) on engine 8
flywheel (4)
6. Install main pump and hub (7) by pushing it softly into
element (11).
HAAA8040-1
7. Attach flywheel cover / pump housing to flywheel Figure 7
housing with bolts
CAUTION
1. Bolts (3 and 8) are coated against loosening
with a bonding compound. Do not use any
additional bonding compounds, oils or
cleaning solvents on them.
2. Element (11) is nonresistant to bonding
compounds, oil or grease. Be careful not to
expose it to them.
3. Remove oil or dirt from flywheel cover and
pump shaft before assembly.
4. Misalignment between pump and engine
should be controlled to less than 0.6 mm
(0.023 in).

Page 12
1Hydraulics
SP002227
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING,
TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTSP002227
Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting,
Testing and
Adjustment
Edition 1
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment SP002227

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting,

Testing and Adjustment
Hydraulic System - General Notes .................... 6
Hydraulic Schematic ............................................ 7
General Notes ................................................................ 7
Operation of Working Components .................... 9
Boom Operating Circuit ................................................. 9
Boom Up Circuit............................................................. 9
Boom Down Circuit ........................................................ 9
Arm Operating Circuit .................................................. 10
Arm Crowd Circuit........................................................ 10
Arm Dump Circuit ........................................................ 11
Bucket Operating Circuit .............................................. 11
Bucket Crowd Circuit ................................................... 11
Bucket Dump Circuit .................................................... 12
Swing Operating Circuit ............................................... 12
Right Swing Operating Circuit..................................... 12
Left Swing Operating Circuit ....................................... 12
Swing Relief Valve and Makeup Valve...................... 12
Procedural Troubleshooting Baseline
Recommendations.............................................. 13
Initial Checks and Tests to Establish Operating
Condition of the Excavator .......................................... 13
Pilot Pressure .................................................... 15
Adjustment and Testing ............................................... 15
Power Mode Valve ............................................ 16
Current Signal and Hydraulic Pressure Adjustments 16
Pressure Up Valve ............................................ 18
Checks and Adjustments ............................................. 18
Pump Input Power Control ............................... 20

Page 3
Pump Regulator Adjustment........................................ 20
Flow Meter and Flow Meter Kit Installation and
Testing ................................................................ 23
Swing System Troubleshooting ........................ 25
Precautions/Initial Checks ............................................ 25
Swing Relief Valve Checking and Adjustment .......... 26
Troubleshooting – Swing Gearbox ................... 28
Troubleshooting – Hydraulic Problems ............ 29
Troubleshooting – Control Valve ...................... 31
Troubleshooting – Travel Control Valve .......... 32
Troubleshooting – Joystick Control Valve ....... 33

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM -
GENERAL NOTES
Center Joint
Travel Motor
Transmission
FG007723
Figure 1
The hydraulic system has several improvements over

conventional hydraulic systems - including crosssensing total
horsepower control - to maximize output efficiency.
The system features an electronically controlled output
optimization system, which allows the operator to choose
between two, distinctly different power modes: high-output/
rapid cycling maximum-speed power mode, and a standard
power mode for most types of general operation.
Electronic management of hydraulic control valves assists in
optimizing the application speed and overall operator control
of hydraulic actuators and functions.

Page 6
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
The hydraulic schematic(s) is available in the "Hydraulic and
Electrical Schematic Shop Manual." This manual is a
collection of diagrams and schematics for a number of
models.
General Notes
When referring to the schematic, refer to the following items:
• As shown in the schematic, the main pump
assembly is driven by the engine. Mechanical
energy is converted to hydraulic power, generating
the required hydraulic flow which drives the
system. Two main pumps (a right side pump and
a left side pump) make up the main pump
assembly.
• Hydraulic output from the right side pump is
transmitted to the right side of the control valve.
Output from the left side pump is transmitted to
the valve spools on the left side of the control
valve. Hydraulic output from the pilot pump is
used to control the pump and to operate pilot and
solenoid valves.
• The right half of the hydraulic control valve,
supplied by the right pump in the pump assembly,
operates valve spools for right travel, swing, boom
up and arm functions. The amount of oil flow to
the actuators at the output end of each of those
circuits is regulated through the movement of
each individual valve spool.
• The left half of the hydraulic control valve, fed by
the left pump in the pump assembly, has control
spools for left travel, bucket, boom and arm
operation.
• Two-stage operation is a feature of boom and arm
function. All of these circuits can be operated
using the output of only one half of the hydraulic
pump assembly (one pump or the other), or –
since both halves of the control valve have a
spool and available circuit for these functions –
the output of both pumps can be combined,
allowing higher speed operation. Boom up, arm
crowd and dumping functions can operate in any
one of the two available power modes – the
standard or general duty mode, the high speed/
rapid cycling mode.
• Whenever the travel control spools are shifted,
output from the main pump assembly passes
through the center joint to the axial piston motors
driving the wheel.

Page 7
• The hydraulic reservoir return line and the pilot
circuit both have 10 micron full flow filters. The
disposable elements in these two canister type
filters trap and remove impurities from the oil in
the system. An 80 mesh, 177 micron reservoir
intake strainer also helps maintain system
cleanliness and should be cleaned each time
hydraulic fluid is drained and replaced. An oil
cooler in the hydraulic system helps maintain the
operating temperature of the system at
approximately 50°C (122°F).
• The arm cylinder operating circuit includes
anticavitation valves which protect the hydraulic
system from vacuum that could result from
external shocks or other unusual conditions.
Boom, Arm, and Bucket cylinder circuit are also
protected by overload relief valves. Whenever
high-pressure is generated as a result of a shock
or overload, excess pressure is dumped to the
reservoir return circuit through the relief valve.

Page 8
OPERATION OF WORKING
COMPONENTS
Boom Operating Circuit

The boom operating circuit includes the right and left main
hydraulic pumps (both halves of the main pump assembly),
both sides of the control valve and the boom cylinder. The
circuit operates in boom down mode through the first shift
position and through the second shift position in boom up
mode. Overload relief valves set at 360 kg/cm2 (5,112 psi)
protect the hydraulic system from being damaged as a result
of overloads or shocks to the boom.
Boom Up Circuit
When you pull the boom control lever backward, the right
side pilot valve generates secondary boom up pilot pressure
that is transmitted to the right and left sides of the control
valve simultaneously. When secondary pilot pressure
reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2 (100 - 128 psi), boom control valve
spools open and oil from both pumps goes to the boom
cylinder.
Figure 2
Boom Down Circuit

When the boom control lever is pushed forward, the right
side pilot valve generates secondary boom down pilot
pressure that is transmitted only to the right side of the
control valve. When secondary pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9
kg/cm2 (100 - 128 psi), the valve spool on the right side of
the control valve opens so that oil from only one half of the
pump assembly goes to the boom cylinder for boom
lowering.
Figure 3

Page 9
Arm Operating Circuit
The arm operating circuit includes both the right and left
hydraulic main pumps, the right and left halves of the
control valve, a slow return orifice, and the arm cylinder.
The circuit can be operated in the two-stage speed control
mode which works through both halves of the control valve
and doubles the volume of oil flowing to the cylinder.
Overload relief valves set at 360 kg/cm2 (5,112 psi) have

been installed at the AC 1 and AD 1 ports on the left side
of the control valve to protect the circuit and system
components from possible damage caused by shocks and/or
overload pressure. Additional protection - to prevent
cavitation of the cylinder - is provided by a make-up valve
and reservoir return circuit, which ensures that the volume of
oil going to the cylinder will not exceed the volume of oil
coming out.
Arm Crowd Circuit

When the arm control lever is put in the crowd mode, the
left side pilot valve generates secondary pressure that is
transmitted to the right and left sides of the control valve
simultaneously.
When secondary pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2 (100 -

128 psi), the arm control valve spool on the right and left
sides of the control valve opens. Output flow from both
halves of the pump assembly is directed to the arm cylinder.
When working in the arm crowd mode, under certain
conditions, oil in the cylinder could suddenly be forced out
by the weight of the arm and bucket itself. Insufficient oil
flow to the cylinder could lead to cavitation in the cylinder
and/or surging or irregular movement. This is prevented by a
regeneration valve attached to the control valve which
Figure 4
maintains the balance between oil flowing into the cylinder
and oil flowing out.

Page 10
Arm Dump Circuit
When the arm control lever is put in "dump" mode, the left
side pilot valve generates secondary pilot pressure that goes
to both halves of the control valve simultaneously.
When pilot pressure reaches 7 - 9 kg/cm2 (100 - 128 psi),

the control spools open on both sides allowing oil from the
right and left pumps to flow to the arm cylinder.
Figure 5
Bucket Operating Circuit

The bucket operating circuit includes the right and left main
pumps, the right and left halves of the control valve and the
bucket cylinder. 360 kg/cm2 (5,112 psi) overload relief valves
at BKC and BKD 1 ports of the control valve protect the
circuit and its components from damage.
Bucket Crowd Circuit

When the bucket control lever is placed in the crowd
position, the bucket control valve spool on the right side of
the control valve opens and oil from left main pump flows to
the bucket cylinder.
Figure 6

Page 11
Bucket Dump Circuit
When the bucket control lever is put in the dump mode, the
bucket control valve spool in the right half of the control
valve opens to supply oil from the left main pump to the
cylinder.
Swing Operating Circuit

The swing operating circuit consists of the right main pump
in the pump assembly, the left half of the control valve and Figure 7
the swing motor. To keep the upper works from coasting
when the swing control is in neutral, an electrical sensor in
the control circuit activates a valve to automatically engage
a mechanical brake.
Right Swing Operating Circuit

When the swing control lever is pushed to the right swing
position, pilot pressure from the left side pilot valve is
directed to the right side pump regulator and right half of
the control valve. Output flow from the left pump is then
directed through the PSR and SR ports of the control valve
to the SR port of the swing motor.
Figure 8
Left Swing Operating Circuit

When the swing control lever is pushed to the left swing
position, the control valve spool at the left side of the
control valve moves in the opposite direction and output flow
from the right pump is directed through the PSL and SL
ports of the control valve to the SL port of the swing motor.
Swing Relief Valve and Makeup Valve

Whenever the spool is shifted to the neutral mode during Figure 9
swing operation, the possibility exists that surge pressure in
the circuit - caused by inertial momentum of the upper
works and correspondingly reduced pressure at the opposite
motor port - could produce cavitation in the circuit. To keep
that from happening, a 270 kg/cm2 (3,840 psi) relief valve is
installed in the swing motor and a large-capacity make-up
valve is connected to the entrance port of the hydraulic
reservoir, helping maintain acceptable pressures on both
sides of the circuit.

Page 12
PROCEDURAL
TROUBLESHOOTING BASELINE
RECOMMENDATIONS
Initial Checks and Tests to Establish

Operating Condition of the Excavator
Triage Summary
An excavator that fails to deliver designed performance
should be checked for the following:
• Hydraulic flow, first, and.
• Hydraulic pressure, afterwards, in a specified
order of priority through different points of the
system.
To verify adequate available hydraulic flow, before any other
tests are performed through the circuit:
Check engine operation (power mode)
• at 1,880 rpm with no load.
• at 1,800 rpm stall load.
If engine rpm drops excessively with a load or fails to
surpass rated speed (1,800 rpm), performance problems
may be due to inadequate hydraulic flow caused by lagging
rotational speed.
NOTE: Verify actual flow on the excavator against rated
performance, with a flow meter.
If engine tests meet specifications and adequate torque and
horsepower are available at the pump drive flex coupling,
pull out the electrical tray under the operator’s seat to
inspect the self-diagnostic display.
If the EPOS trouble code display is clear, check hydraulic
functions in the following sequence:
• Pilot pressure.
• Negacon, negative control pressure.
• Main relief pressure (front and rear pump)
• Swing pressure.
• Port relief pressure (individual control functions;
boom, arm, bucket, swing, and travel).
• Power boost circuit.
• Standard performance tests; cylinder speed,
hydraulic motor (travel and swing) speed, cylinder
oil tightness "permissible drift" test.

Page 13
NOTE: System specification performance tests of
individual activator function are
determined by flow rate through the
component or circuit, not the control
pressure or system pressure available to
the actuator. Poor flow through the
individual circuit may indicate that the
component is worn beyond tolerance
limits, while all other hydraulic functions
are adequate.
IMPORTANT
It is suggested that the troubleshooter maintain the
testing sequence of the preceding list. Checks and
adjustments nearer the middle or the end of the list may
depend on adequate functioning of systems tested
nearer the top of the list.

Page 14
PILOT PRESSURE
Adjustment and Testing
WARNING
This procedure should be done with two people. To
reduce the chance of accident or unintended start-up,
one person should remain at the operator’s control
stand while checks and adjustments are made.
Vent hydraulic pressure from the reservoir before breaking

the seal on fittings to install two in-line "t-style" adapters and
test gauges (60 bar/1,000 psi) at the gear pump outlet port,
and at the joystick control valve pilot line.
Start the engine and turn the engine speed control dial to
the maximum setting. After the excavator has been operated
long enough to reach normal operating temperature, back off
the engine control dial to minimum rated rpm speed. With all
controls in neutral, make sure the left console control stand
is locked in the down (operating) position and check
pressure at the gear pump outlet port and at the joystick.
If gear pump pressure is outside the tolerance specified in
the table, adjust gear pump relief pressure by loosening the
lock nut and turning the set screw in (clockwise) to increase
pressure, or turning it out to decrease it.
NOTE: Be aware that serial number changes and variation in
the joystick assemblies used on different excavators
could produce slight change in actual performance
characteristics. Comparison of part numbers to serial
numbers stamped on your assembly may be
required, if questions or doubt exists.
IMPORTANT
Top off the hydraulic fluid reservoir if there is any
measurable loss of hydraulic oil during test gauge and
adapter fitting installation.
Engine RPM Pilot Pressure @ Pump Pilot Pressure - Joystick

Minimum Speed Setting (full left) 40 ± 5 bar 40 ± 5 bar
on Speed Control Dial (580 ± 73 psi) (580 ± 73 psi)

Page 15
POWER MODE VALVE
Current Signal and Hydraulic Pressure

Adjustments
WARNING
The electromagnetic pressure proportioning control (EPPR)

"power mode" valve is on the underside of the pumps (not
visible in the harness connections drawing, because it is
underneath the assembly), near the engine/pump flexible
coupling, adjacent to the pump return line. To test and
adjust power shift current and pressure through the power
mode valve a multilead jumper harness is required. The
jumper harness (which is available through Doosan After
Sales Service, or could be spliced together from commonly
available, purchased parts) has extra leads so that a VOM
meter can be connected to the circuit.
To set up the testing equipment, turn off the engine and
disconnect the single electrical lead from the power mode
valve. Attach the jumper harness to the terminal on the
valve, connect the test leads of the multimeter to the extra
leads on the harness and reconnect the valve electrical lead.
Vent the lever on top of the hydraulic tank to relieve pressure
and connect an in-line "t-style" adapter to the valve pressure
port. Install a 60 bar/870 psi (1,000 psi) test gauge in the adapter.
Restart the engine and increase engine rpm by turning the
speed control to the maximum speed setting. Warm up the
engine and hydraulic system until hydraulic oil temperature
is at least 45°C (113°F). Select Power Mode III on the
Instrument Panel. Check current readings (in milliamps) on
the VOM meter and hydraulic pressure gauge readings and
make sure both conform to the values in the table below.
NOTE: If recorded values do not conform to the specified
current or pressure in the table, back off the lock nut
on the end of the valve, turn the adjusting screw 1/4
turn and re-check current and pressure. Repeat
adjustment as required to obtain specified
performance and retighten the valve lock nut.

Page 16
Mode Engine RPM Current Pressure
260 ± 20 mA
1.6 ± 1 bar
Power Mode 1,880 rpm Mid-range value corresponding to engine rpm
(22.8 ± 14.5 psi)
for both current and hydraulic pressure readings.
4.7 ± 3 bar
Standard Mode 1,780 rpm 320 ± 20 mA
(68.6 ± 43.5 psi)
7.9 ± 3 bar
Economy Mode 1,700 rpm 380 ± 20 mA
(114.4 ± 43.5 psi)
22.1 ± 4.5 bar
Auto Idle Mode 1,200 rpm 650 ± 20 mA
(320.5 ± 65.3 psi)

Page 17
PRESSURE UP VALVE
Checks and Adjustments
WARNING
Vent hydraulic pressure from the reservoir to install an in-

line "t-style" adapter and test gauge (60 bar/1,000 psi) at
the pilot pump signal port relief valve outlet.
Start the engine and turn the engine speed dial to
maximum. When normal operating temperature is reached.
• Check pilot pressure and readjust it, if required:
• Select the Instrument Panel rear pump "pressure
display".
• Select Power Mode.
• Stall the boom cylinder (towards the extend side).
• Read rear pump pressure on the Instrument Panel
display.
Repeat all tests with and without "pressure up" selected
through the console rocker switch and joystick button.
If the 2-stage main relief valve was not set correctly and
main relief high-stage pressure ("pressure up") is outside the
tolerance range, begin valve adjustment by loosening the
outside (widest diameter) lock nut on the relief valve. Turn
the adjusting screw clockwise to increase pressure, or
counterclockwise to decrease it. Pressure must be 350 bars
(5,075 psi), or up to 10 bars (145 psi) higher.
Because one adjustment can affect the other, check low-
stage main relief pressure by repeating the cylinder stall test
without "pressure up." Readjust standard relief pressure by
turning the inner-most (smallest diameter) screw clockwise to
increase the setting, or counterclockwise to decrease it.
Pressure should be at least 330 bars (4,785 psi), but less
than 335 bars (4,858 psi).
IMPORTANT
Pressure adjustments and checks cannot be made if
pilot pressure is outside the specified range. Refer to
the pilot pump adjustment procedure if required, then
proceed with any necessary adjustments to main relief
pressure settings.

Page 18
Main Pressure and Pilot Pressure and
Power Mode Operation
Tolerance Tolerance
20 - 40 bar 30 bar +10 bar
Power Mode Neutral, No Operation
(290 - 580 psi) (435 psi +145 psi)
330 bar +5 bar 30 bar +10 bar
Power Mode Cylinder Stall
(4,785 psi +75 psi) (435 psi +145 psi)
Power Mode W/ 350 bar +10 bar 30 bar +10 bar
Cylinder Stall
Pressure Up (5,075 psi +145 psi) (435 psi +145 psi)
NOTE: The electrical pressure up (power boost) solenoid

valve alongside the swing priority solenoid and arm
speed control solenoid, in compartment rear of the
operator’s cab, must be operating correctly, or
pressure tests and further adjustments cannot be
made.

Page 19
PUMP INPUT POWER
CONTROL
Pump Regulator Adjustment
WARNING
one person should remain at the operator's control
To perform these adjustments accurately the use of a flow

meter is strongly recommended, as is consulting the factory
(before starting work) to validate the need for making
regulator adjustments. Vent hydraulic pressure from the
reservoir before breaking the seal on fittings to install the
flow meter kit. (Refer to the "Flow meter Installation and
Testing" procedure.)
IMPORTANT
Before starting this procedure or going onto make any
changes of adjustment settings:
• Verify engine output to the rated speed –
2,070 ± 50 rpm.
• Permanently mark setscrew positions at the
current regulator control setting.
Use a scribe or other permanent marker to identify a

reference point on adjusting screws with a corresponding
reference on the body of the valve. The adjustment process
affects a complex balance and could require some time to
complete. If adjustment has to be interrupted or postponed,
reference marks at the adjustment point allow immediate
restoration of original performance.
This adjustment procedure is normally performed:
• If the engine is being consistently overloaded (and
engine troubleshooting shows engine performance
to be at or above rated output).
• If reduced cylinder speed and diminished work
performance provide an indication that rated,
maximum pump flow may not be available (and all
other troubleshooting gives no indication of other
flaws or hydraulic system defects).
• If pump output is out of balance and one pump is
failing to keep up with the output flow of the
other.

Page 20
To check pump imbalance without a flow meter, travel the
excavator forward on flat, level terrain. If the machine veers
off despite neutral control input and even, balanced track
adjustment, the pump which supplies output to the track
frame toward which the excavator is veering is weak.
2
2
1
1 ASS0320L
Figure 10
Refer to the illustration of the pump regulator control valve

(Figure 10) for the location of adjustment screws (1, 2 and
3). There are two different adjustments, along with the
Negacon, negative control, adjustment screw (3, directly
below 1 and 2). Each one of the adjustment procedures
could affect the setting of the others.
Check and record the arm dump speed performance test
before and after input power adjustment, whether or not a
flow meter is used.
NOTE: Regulator adjustments affect total cumulative
horsepower, since each regulator compensates for
the output of the other. It is not necessary to adjust
both regulators at the same time, but after checking
or adjusting one of them, the remaining unit should
also be checked.

Page 21
Start the engine and turn the engine speed dial to
maximum. When normal operating temperature is reached,
loosen the largest diameter lock nut around the adjustment
screw (2) for the outer regulator spring. Tightening the screw
shifts the P/Q (Pressure/Flow) control curve to the right, and
increases compensating control pressure.
On the other hand, if the persistent cause of performance
problems is engine overloading, decreasing the adjustment
by turning the larger diameter adjusting screw (2) out will
decrease pump input horsepower. 1/4 turn on the adjusting
screw is equal to approximately 17 horsepower.
Figure 11
IMPORTANT
Because changing the position of adjusting screw (2)
also affects the setting of the adjustment for the inner
spring, the smaller diameter adjusting screw (1), turn in
the inner screw 198° (slightly more than 1/2 turn, 180°)
before screw (2) is backed out 1/4 turn (90°).
NOTE: For each full turn of adjustment on the larger

diameter screw (2), the square-tipped adjusting
screw should be turned in the opposite direction 2.2
turns to avoid changing inner spring adjustment.
Pump input power adjustments are normally made in small
increments, 1/4 turn (90°) or less, each time.
Turning the square-tipped, smaller diameter screw (1)
clockwise moves the flow curve up, increasing flow and then
input horsepower.
Figure 12
The adjusting screw (1, Figure 10) affects the delivery rate
(Q) of the pump. Tightening the adjusting screw decreases
the maximum cut flow (as shown in Figure 13) while
backing out the screw increases cut flow delivery rate.
Balance both pumps for equal output.
Q
P HDA3008L
Figure 13

Page 22
FLOW METER AND FLOW
METER KIT INSTALLATION
AND TESTING
Checking regulator and pump output, to assess the output
balance between the front and rear pumps and to verify
operating adjustment of each regulator, will require
installation of a flow meter.
The After Sales Service department of the nearest local
DOOSAN dealer can assist you with these tests or, if you
prefer carrying out your own testing, they should be able to
help in putting together a hose and fitting kit (or the required
dimensions and specifications for hoses and fittings) to allow
you to install a flow meter downstream from the main pump
assembly.
Installation and Testing Procedure

• Shut down engine and operate controls to release
hydraulic pressure from the accumulator.
• Vent the reservoir to release all pressure from the
hydraulic system.
• Remove guard panels from around the main pump
assembly.
• Disconnect the main pump discharge output line.
Install the input flange of the flow meter on the
pump end of the output line.
• Cap off the unused (input) end of the pump
discharge line with a blocking flange.
• Connect a premeasured length of hydraulic hose,
between the output end of the flow meter
assembly and the top of the reservoir. Use
appropriate fittings and adapter flanges to
guarantee a pressure tight seal.
NOTE: Be sure to maintain even tightening torque
on all flange fittings. Use Loctite brand
"PST 545" (or an alternate manufacturer's
hydraulic system joint seal) if required, to
give an airtight seal.
• An assistant – who must remain at the operator's
control station at all times – should restart the
engine and run it long enough (at minimum rpm)
to de-aerate the system and warm up the engine
and hydraulic system to operating temperature.
Record the values of all test results in three columns,
comparing 1) pump pressure (from the instrument panel
display) with 2) measured flow, in gallons or liters per
minute, from the installed flow meter. The third column of
test results should provide a record of engine rpm measured
during each of the following tests – with the engine speed

Page 23
control dial set at maximum, the power mode selector at
Power Mode and the work mode selector at digging mode:
• Unloaded maximum engine speed baseline test
(all controls in neutral).
• Front pump test – operate "travel right" lever.
Record values at all specified pressures.
• Rear pump test – operate "travel left" lever.
Record values at all specified pressures.
Record the values for each of the three tests (neutral, travel
right and travel left) at the following pump pressure levels,
with travel speed control set at "high speed."
Engine RPM Pressure Flow

100 kg/cm2 (1,422 psi)
135 kg/cm2 (1,930 psi)
180 kg/cm2 (2,560 psi)
240 kg/cm2 (3,413 psi)
320 kg/cm2 (4,550 psi)*
*See below note.
Compare recorded values with output shown in the P-Q

curve in the specifications section of this book.
If test results do not measure up to specified values, pump
output tests can be repeated using different control levers.
Recheck front pump operation while stroking the bucket
cylinder out lever, and the rear pump by actuating the swing
control lever.
NOTE: When testing bucket and swing functions, read
maximum flow tests at 330 kg/cm2 (4,785 psi), not
350 kg/cm2 (5075 psi).

Page 24
SWING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Precautions/Initial Checks
1. Stop work. Release all weight or any type of load
safely before proceeding. Avoid risking injury or adding
to damage.
2. Shut down engine and disengage control functions until
initial tests are ready to be made.
WARNING
Prevent possible injury and/or loss of operating control.
Stop work and park the excavator at the first indication
of:
1. Equipment breakdown.
2. Inadequate control response.
3. Erratic performance.
Stop the machine, put the boom and arm in the inoperative
(overnight park) position and begin by making the fastest,
simplest checks first:
• Check oil level.
• Check for overheating, oil leaks, external oil cooler
clogging or broken fan belt. Consult service record
for prior repair/service work.
• Drain some tank oil to a clean, clear container.
Look for metal shavings/grit, cloudiness/water or
foam/air bubbles in the oil.
• Check for wobble through the engine/pump flex
coupling. Run engine with the pump input
hydraulic power control nut turned to the lowest
power to check the engine.
• Investigate unusual operating noises or vibration.
Check for loose bolts, connections.

Page 25
Swing Relief Valve Checking and
Adjustment
Make a check of operating pressures through the swing
relief valve if:
• The swing motor fails to turn.
• Swings in one direction only.
• Swings but continues to coast.
• There is drifting on a slope.
1. Check operation by connecting:
A. Two 600 bar (8,700 psi) pressure gauges to the
inlet and outlet measuring ports on top of the
swing motor.
Pressure should be between 260 and 280 bar
(3,770 psi and 4,061 psi), with both swing locks
engaged. With swing locks released, during full
acceleration and deceleration, pressure should
approach 270 bar (3,916 psi) in each direction.
B. Connect a 60 bar (870 psi) pressure gauge at the
"SH" port of the hydraulic brake.
Pressure should always stay at or above 4 bar
(58 psi) when operating swing, boom or arm.
C. Connect a 10 bar (145 psi) gauge at the motor
makeup valve.
Pressure should stay consistently above 2.5 bar
(36 psi). If pressure falls below the recommended
minimum level, forceful acceleration of the swing
motor could lead to cavitation of the circuit and
stalling, slowed rotation, noise and possible
damage.
2. If main inlet and outlet pressures were off in the
preceding tests in Step 1, adjust swing relief valve
pressure.
Following adjustment, repeat the operating pressure
tests (with gauges connected to the inlet and outlet test
ports on top of the swing motor) and check pressures
with the swing locks engaged and released.
If pressure adjustment fails to restore adequate
performance, proceed to the Troubleshooting - Swing
table.
3. If pressure tests were at recommended levels through
the main inlet and outlet ports, and through the "SH"
port of the swing brake, the causes of poor swing
performance could include a faulty swing motor, drive
train overloading or gearbox defect, or a problem in the
brake assembly or swing control valve. Proceed to the
troubleshooting information in the next procedure.

Page 26
If pressure through the "SH" port was tested below the
minimum 13 bar (189 psi) level, check the shuttle valve
in the rear compartment behind cabin. When pressure
through the port is at the recommended level, the
brake release valve should disengage the swing brake,
allowing the swing motor to rotate the excavator. If
pressure adjustment to the valve has been restored but
the brake still fails to release, the brake piston or
friction plate may be frozen, requiring disassembly of
the motor and parts repair/replacement.
4. If pressure tested at the motor makeup valve falls
below recommended minimum level, and consequent
problems with cavitation, stalling and surging are
observed, check the restriction valve. If pressure
adjustment to the valve has been restored but if
problems with cavitation continues, disassemble the
upper swing motor housing and clean or replace
assembly components as required.
NOTE: If all tested pressures are at or above
recommended levels, and there are no
mechanical problems in the drive train or in the
motor/brake assembly, the problem will require
further hydraulic troubleshooting. It’s also
possible that a defective joystick, an intermittent
short in an electrical control circuit or a problem
in the e-EPOS circuit is causing diminished
swing performance. Pull out the e-EPOS
indicator panel from underneath the operator’s
seat and perform the self-diagnosis test. If the
display panel reads code "0.2," it is reporting
that the swing priority proportional valve is not
functioning, except in the minimum "failsafe"
mode. Refer to the Electrical section of this
book for more information.

Page 27
TROUBLESHOOTING – SWING
GEARBOX
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
Swing motor fails to operate and:
Three pressure tests at Swing relief valve defective Brake Adjust pressure to recommended
motor, brake or makeup release valve defective Motor range in affected valve.
valve show low reading(s). makeup valve defective.
OR
Disassemble and clean valve
assembly. Replace all valve
components that show damage.
All three pressure checks Exchange front and rear pump If swing and left travel are restored
are OK but left travel also inlet and outlet hoses to test but right travel stops working, replace
fails to run. pump function. or repair P1 pump.
All three pressure tests Brake assembly or motor friction Check for binding. Disassemble and
are OK, but machine fails plate failing to release. repair.
to swing at all. Pilot (control) pressure low or Disassemble / Repair pilot pressure
swing control valve stuck. swing spool (305) and / or swing
control valve.
Swing motor defective. Test motor drain rate. Replace /
Repair motor.
Gear train defective. Refer to "Swing Gear Troubleshooting"
procedure.
Swing functions but only Causes listed above could also Check above list; then replace oil, test
at reduced rpm. produce dragging swing, OR hot motor drain rate and check for "02"
or wrong oil OR worn-out parts. reading (e-EPOS self-test).
Left travel speed is also Low output at P1 pump or Clean and repair piping or repair or
reduced. external pilot piping leaks/is replace pump P1.
clogged.
Swing control movement Inlet / outlet piping reversed. Reset controls or reverse piping.
is reversed.
Machine swings but Swing control valve spool not Replace return spring; clean/ repair
continues coasting on past centered. valve piston and spool.
stopping point. Pilot pressure may be outside Disassemble, clean or replace pilot
range. relief valve or pilot valve.
Swing relief valve may be faulty. Repair/Replace swing relief valve.
Swing movement is in one Check to see that pilot pressure If pilot pressure is unequal, clean or
direction only. is the same right and left. repair piping or repair/replace valve.
Swing control valve spool may be Repair/Replace the swing control
stuck. valve.
Swing relief valve may be faulty. Repair/Replace the swing relief valve.
No rotation and:
Pressure at swing motor Swing brake not releasing. Check brake engagement and
inlet increases. disengagement; check release
pressure.
Internal damage to gearbox drive Replace broken gears and drive train
train. assemblies.
Overload. Reduce load weight.

Page 28
Pressure at swing motor Swing motor drive shaft damage. Replace swing motor.
inlet shows no increase, Internal damage to gearbox drive Repair/Replace broken or faulty
and the swing motor is train. assemblies.
making irregular noises.
Pressure at swing motor Hydraulic pump or valve problem. Troubleshoot hydraulic system.
inlet shown no increase,
but without irregular
noises from the swing
motor.
Oil Leakage:
From drive shaft From Oil seal damaged Assembly Replace oil seal Disassemble and
bolted connections or compound (joint sealer) old and check mating surfaces. Reapply
other assembled surfaces. not sealing, bolt not tight or Loctite; torque bolts to specifications.
flange warped.
Excess heat:
Gearbox casing becomes Low oil level. Replace oil; refill to specified level.
excessively hot, with or Bearings or gears worn but not Repair or replace gearbox.
without irregular noise (s), completely inoperative.
during operation.
TROUBLESHOOTING –
HYDRAULIC PROBLEMS
Attachment cylinders, Main pump(s) malfunction. Repair or replace.
swing and travel motors Low oil level in hydraulic system. Refill.
are all inoperable. Loud
Main pump inlet (oil supply) Repair or replace.
noises are heard from
piping or hose damaged.
main pump assembly.
Attachment cylinders, Pilot pump malfunction. Repair or replace.
swing and travel motors Pilot cutoff solenoid stuck. Repair or replace.
are all inoperable. No
Pilot cutoff switch faulty. Repair or replace.
usual or loud noises can
be heard. Engine/pump flex coupling Replace flex coupling.
damaged.
Sluggish performance of Main pump(s) damaged or worn. Repair or replace.
all hydraulic functions – Main relief valve pressure off. Readjust pressure.
attachment, swing and
Low oil level in hydraulic system. Refill.
travel.
Hydraulic reservoir intake strainer Clean.
clogged.
Pump inlet (supply side) piping or Tighten connection.
hose allowing air into hydraulic
system.

Page 29
Oil temperature abnormally Oil cooler clogged or air Clean.
high. circulation to cooler blocked.
Cooling fan belt tension too Readjust belt tension.
loose.
Relief valve set too low. Readjust valve.
Relief valve in constant use. Reduce or slow work load or cycling
rate.
Hydraulic oil severely neglected Replace oil.
or incorrect for application.
One circuit in hydraulic Overload relief valve malfunction. Readjust or replace.
system inoperable. Oil leak at makeup valve. Clean, repair.
Control valve spool damaged. Repair or replace.
Dirt in control valve spool. Clean or replace.
Actuator (joystick, foot pedal) Repair or replace.
damaged or worn.
Internal seal leak in cylinder. Repair or replace.
Cylinder rod damaged. Repair or replace.
Pilot valve or piping malfunction. Repair or replace.
Mechanical linkage frozen, loose Repair or replace.
or damaged.
Travel motors inoperable. Center joint damaged. Repair or replace.
Parking brake not releasing. Repair or replace.
Travel motor worn or damaged. Repair or replace.
Travel motor pilot piping Repair or replace.
damaged.
Travel motors operate Track tension poorly adjusted Readjust tension Refill.
very slowly. Low oil in idlers or rollers.
Travel brake dragging. Repair.
Track frame out of alignment, Repair.
deformed or twisted.
Swing motor inoperable. Swing brake not releasing. Repair or replace.
Relief valve malfunction. Repair or replace.
Pilot piping damaged. Repair or replace.
Swing motor operates Swing gear, bearing or mounting Repair or replace.
unevenly. loose or worn.
Lubricant worn away, inadequate. Grease.
Swing relief valve may be faulty. Repair/Replace the swing relief valve.

Page 30
TROUBLESHOOTING –
CONTROL VALVE
Check control valve problems only after other hydraulic
circuit operational tests have been made. Refer to the
"Troubleshooting Baseline Recommendations" procedure.
Pump flow, pilot pressure, Negacon pressure, main relief
pressure, and port relief pressure should all be checked
before starting to work on the control valve. Make sure the
hydraulic system is topped up to the required level and free
of oil leaks or air in the system that could cause cavitation
problems.

Main relief valve. Particulate contamination. Disassemble, clean main poppet.
Broken or damaged spring. Replace.
Adjusting screw loose. Readjust.
Main poppet sticking. Repair/replace.
Clogged orifice in pilot passage Clean/replace.
to control valve.
Cylinder goes down in Excessive clearance between Replace spool or casing.
spool neutral. casing and spool.
Spool does not return to neutral/ Check secondary pilot pressure.
sticking spool.
Spool does not return to neutral Clean.
because of dirt or other
contaminants.
Main relief or port relief not See above.
operating properly.
Impurities in pilot circuit. Clean.
Cylinder drops before start Rod check valve damaged or Clean/replace.
at boom up operation. clogged.
Poppet sticking. Clean/replace.
Slow operation or Excessive clearance between Check pilot pressure and/or replace
response. spool or casing. spool or casing.
Sticking spool. Clean/replace.
Main or port relief valve Check pressure/replace.
damaged.
Swing priority not Sticking spool. Clean/replace.
operating correctly. Solenoid valve faulty. Replace.
Boom and arm cylinders Priority valve faulty or spool Check pilot pressure.
do not perform normally in sticking.
combined operation. Broken or deformed spring. Replace.
Excess clearance between right Clean/replace.
and left casing and valve spool.
Clogged spool passage. Clean/replace, replace filter.

Page 31
Relief valve malfunctions:
Pressure does not Main poppet or pilot poppet stuck Clean/replace.
increase at all. open.
Irregular or uneven Poppet seat damaged or pilot Clean/replace.
pressure. piston sticking to main poppet.
Loose lock nut and adjusting Readjust.
screw.
Components worn out, past wear Replace.
limits.
TROUBLESHOOTING – TRAVEL
CONTROL VALVE
Secondary pressure does Low primary pressure. Check primary pressure.
not increase. Broken spring. Replace spring.
Spool sticking. Clean, repair or replace.
Excess spool to casing clearance. Replace spool casing.
Worn or loose universal joint Repair or replace U-joint subassembly.
(handle) subassembly.
Secondary pressure too Dirt, other interference between Clean, repair or replace.
high. valve parts.
Return line pressure too high. Redirect return line.
Secondary pressure does Dirt, other interference between Clean, repair or replace.
not hold steady. valve parts, or worn spool
sticking intermittently.
Interference or binding on spool Clean, repair or replace.
return spring.
Interference, restriction or Repair or reroute tank return line.
unsteady pressure in tank return
line.
Air bubbles in piping (temporary) Vent air, or repair leak.
or air leak.
NOTE: Look for evidence of leaking oil.

Page 32
TROUBLESHOOTING –
JOYSTICK CONTROL VALVE
Secondary pressure does Low primary pressure. Check primary pressure.
not increase. Broken spring. Replace spring.
Spool sticking. Clean, repair or replace.
Excess spool to casing clearance. Replace spool casing.
Worn or loose handle Repair or replace handle subassembly.
subassembly.
Secondary pressure too Dirt, other interference between Clean, repair or replace.
high. valve parts.
Return line pressure too high. Redirect return line.
Secondary pressure does Dirt, other interference between Clean, repair or replace.
not hold steady. valve parts, or worn spool
sticking intermittently.
Interference or binding on spool Clean, repair or replace.
return spring.
Unsteady pressure in tank return Redirect return line.
line.
Air bubbles in piping (temporary) Vent air, or repair leak.
or air leak.
NOTE: Look for evidence of leaking oil to help locate damaged seals or gaskets that could be the cause of
air leaks.

Page 33
Page 34
SP000984
ACCUMULATOR SP000984
Accumulator
Edition 1
Accumulator SP000984
Page 1
MEMO
Page 2
Table of Contents
Accumulator
Specifications .................................................................. 8
Page 3
MEMO
Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The accumulator is a gas-charged storage device designed
to hold a reserve quantity of hydraulic fluid under pressure. 1
Accumulators are used in hydraulic circuits in much the
same way that condensers (or capacitors) are used to 2
collect, store and maintain electrical charge in a circuit.
In a hydraulic circuit, minor variations or lags in pump output
that might otherwise cause unsteady or irregular operation
are made up from the supply of pressurized oil in the
accumulator.
3
Reference
Description
Number
1 Screw Plug
2 Steel Pressure Vessel
4
3 Diaphragm
ARS1790L
4 Fluid Valve
Figure 1
Accumulators are solidly constructed to resist the high
operating pressures of the fluids they contain. There are
only three main moving parts: a plug at the top allows
precharging or expelling gas from the compressible,
precharged upper chamber; a valve assembly at the bottom
of the accumulator for passing hydraulic fluid in and out,
and an elastic diaphragm to separate the two chambers.
The flexible diaphragm changes shape to conform to the
changing pressures and volumes of the two fluids in the
upper and lower chambers.
There are six possible positions the diaphragm can be in
and they are as follows: Pressure Fluid Nitrogen
1. With no gas charge in the upper chamber 0 bar (0 psi,

empty) and no oil in the bottom 0 bar (0 psi, dry) the
elastic diaphragm hangs loosely.
2. When the prepressure charge of gas (usually nitrogen)
is introduced through the port at the top of the
accumulator, the diaphragm expands to maximum size. 1 2 3
The valve button in the center of the diaphragm
pushes into the fluid opening in the bottom chamber,
sealing off the lower valve. If the pressure of the gas
charge exceeds system oil pressure, no fluid enters the
accumulator. The button also keeps the diaphragm
from protruding into the lower valve opening.
NOTE: Precharge pressure is referred to as the "P1"
pressure. The accumulator manufacturer's "P1" 4 5 6
ARS1800L
rated pressure should be stamped or marked on
the accumulator's rating plate. Annual checks of Figure 2
actual precharge pressure should be made by
tapping a hydraulic pressure gauge (and 3-way
adapter coupling) into the valve on the bottom
of the accumulator. When hydraulic fluid is
pushed out the lower valve opening by the
pressure of the gas charge on the other side of
Page 6
the diaphragm - and there is no
counterpressure from system oil - the valve
button on the bottom of the diaphragm
eventually seals off the lower oil passage. Just
after the needle on the gauge reaches its
highest point (when there is 0 bar (0 psi)
resistance from hydraulic system pressure)
pressure on the gauge will drop sharply to zero,
as the accumulator is completely emptied of oil
and the diaphragm button closes.
Record the highest gauge reading and compare to the
"P1" rated precharge pressure on the accumulator
manufacturer's data label. Repeat this test at least
once a year to verify proper functioning of the
accumulator.
3. As hydraulic system pressure overcomes accumulator
precharge pressure, the flexible diaphragm begins to
retract upward.
4. When system oil is at highest working pressure and
the accumulator fills to maximum reserve capacity, the
flexible diaphragm is pushed up into the top of the
upper chamber.
The highest working pressure is sometimes referred to
as the "P3" pressure and can also be referenced on
the manufacturer's data label on the exterior of the
accumulator.
5. If system oil pressure begins to fall off or is
momentarily checked or interrupted, the energy stored
on the other side of the diaphragm, in the form of
compressed gas, pushes oil back out of the lower
chamber, maintaining oil pressure of the circuit.
6. With minimal system pressure, an equilibrium point may
be reached in which accumulator precharge pressure
and hydraulic system oil pressure achieve a rough
balance. In this condition a minimal amount of oil is
stored in the accumulator.
Page 7
Specifications
Model Serial Number System Charge Pressure Volume
DX140W 15 kg/cm2 320 cc
Pilot
DX160W (213 psi) (19.53 in3)
S/N 5001 and Up
DX190W 30 kg/cm2 750 cc
DX210W Brake
(427 psi) (45.77 in3)
Page 8
SP000919
CENTER JOINT (SWIVEL)SP000919
1Center Joint
(Swivel)
Edition 1
Center Joint (Swivel) SP000919

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Center Joint (Swivel)
Parts List......................................................................... 7
Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjustment.......... 8
Inspection ........................................................................ 8
Testing............................................................................. 8
Disassembly ......................................................... 9
Reassembly ........................................................ 13

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The center joint (swivel) is designed to allow hydraulic oil
from the upper structure to flow to components in the lower
structure.
It is capable of allowing continuous 360° rotation of the
upper structure in relationship to the lower structure.

Page 6
Parts List
6 7 11 8
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Spindle 12 Bolt
2 Body 13 Spring Washer
3 Rotary Seal 14 Socket Plug
4 O-ring 15 Socket Plug
5 O-ring 16 Socket Plug
6 Shim-A 17 Socket Plug
7 Thrust Plate 18 Socket Plug
8 Retaining Ring 19 Plug
9 O-ring 20 O-ring
10 Cover 21 Bolt
11 Shim-B

Page 7
TROUBLESHOOTING, TESTING
AND ADJUSTMENT
Inspection
The center joint should be checked for evidence of external
oil leakage every 2,000 operating hours. Leaking or
defective O-rings are an indication that dirt and other
contaminants could be getting inside the assembly, which
will promote accelerated, abnormal wear and may cause
early failure of the assembly.
If internal seals or other sliding surface components are
worn and there is internal fluid leakage, complete overhaul
and repair or replacement of the center joint may be
required.
Testing
Pressure
To check pressure through the center joint, make up a test Gauge
kit from the following equipment list:

• 700 bar (10,000 psi) pressure gauge.
• Adapters, connectors, piping and flange block-off Swivel Joint
Body (Outer)
plates conforming to those used in high-pressure
Swivel Joint
piping connections of the excavator. Stem (Inner)
• A high-pressure relief valve with a setting

pressure 1.5 times maximum system pressure.
• A stop valve.
Stop
Valve
• A manually operated, in-line changeover valve.
Install the changeover valve upstream from one of the stem
high-pressure ports. Connect the pressure gauge Manually-Operated
Changeover Valve
downstream from one of the body ports. Install the stop

valve between the changeover valve and the stem of the
Relief
center joint. Other components should be installed according Valve
(1.5x)
to the layout in the block diagram. The test kit is used to
pressurize the center swivel above normal working pressure High Pressure
Pump
Tank
and lock in the higher pressure (as the stop valve is closed
manually) for a leak down test. 0370
Figure 2
NOTE: The same type of kit can also be made up for the
drain port (return line) side of the center joint. Use
appropriate piping, connectors, test gauges, etc., and
follow the same block diagram general layout (Figure
2).

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY
Refer to the assembly drawing of the swivel joint for
component references (Figure 1).
IMPORTANT
Do not unbolt the center joint from the lower car body
until an adequate number of piping block-off plates are
available, for disconnected piping lines. Be sure that
system pressure has been vented - including the
hydraulic accumulator and tank reserve pressure -
before disassembly is started.
1. Remove the Swivel Joint from the Vehicle

Move the Swivel Joint removed from the vehicle to the
work table using a crane.
FG003764
Figure 3
2. Remove Cover
• Remove the bolts and washers using a spanner
(wrench) or air impact.
• Remove the cover.
FG003767
Figure 4
Figure 5

Page 9
3. Disassembling the Retainer Ring
Insert an appropriate jig into the Retainer Ring holes,
widen the Ring and remove it.
FG003769
Figure 6
4. Remove Seam-A, Seam-B, and Thrust Plate

① Shim-A 1
2 3
② Thrust Plate
③ Shim-B
FG003770
Figure 7
5. Disassembling the Spindle and Body

1
Lay the Cylinder horizontally. Drive the Spindle a little
way out using a plastic hammer.
① Plastic Hammer
FG003771
Figure 8
Figure 9

Page 10
6. Disassembling the Spindle and Body
Place the jig on the Spindle, disassemble the Spindle
using a plastic hammer.
① Plastic Hammer
② Jig
Figure 10
Figure 11
7. O- Disassembling the Ring and Seal

Remove the seal in the groove of the Swivel Joint
body. Be careful not to damage the O-ring and seal.
CAUTION
O-rings and seals should be replaced whenever the
assembly is being overhauled or re-assemble.
For repair procedures or emergency tear down, use
a thin, smooth-edged scraper or spatula with a Figure 12
rounded tip to remove the O-rings or seals, to
avoid causing damage to those that can be reused.
The "back-up ring" shown in the assembly drawing
(above the swivel joint stem lower seals) should not
be overlooked. It is tucked behind the top slip ring,
doubled up inside the same groove in the body of
the stem.
Figure 13

Page 11
8. Body, Spindle, Cover
Be sure to check for any defects such as scratches or
dents on the Spindle, Body, and Seals.
CAUTION
Be sure to check for any dent-like scratches in the
direction of operation.
9. Before reassembling the center swivel, visually inspect Figure 14

ball bearing surfaces for visible signs of wear, damage
or discoloration and replace any worn component.
Check clearance between the spindle and thrust plate.
Replace any component that shows more than 0.5 mm
(0.020") of visible wear.
Clearance between the spindle and body of the center
swivel must be tight. Replace or repair either
component if there is more than 0.1 mm (0.0039") of
measurable wear.

Page 12
REASSEMBLY
1. Prelubricate O-rings with hydraulic oil, white grease or
petroleum jelly.
CAUTION
Apply a very light film of white grease or petroleum
jelly to the lower rim of the stem and inner surface
of the center swivel body. Apply slow, even-handed
pressure, using both hands, to slowly push the
stem into the body. Seals may be damaged if the
stem is pushed in too quickly.
2. Thoroughly clean all other component surfaces of dirt

or grease before reassembly.
3. Reverse disassembly steps for reassembly.
4. Clean threads of fasteners before preapplying Loctite
#243 to the threads, and before torquing the thrust
plate and cover bolts.
5. Prefill the center swivel with clean hydraulic fluid before
reassembly of high-pressure and drain line piping.
Clean and prefill piping line ends to reduce the amount
of air in the system. Bleed air from the hydraulic
system and verify hydraulic tank fluid level before
returning the excavator to service.

Page 13
Page 14
SP001098
CYLINDERS SP001098
Cylinders
Edition 1
Cylinders SP001098
Page 1
MEMO
Cylinders SP001098
Page 2
Table of Contents
Cylinders
Parts List......................................................................... 8
Special Tools and Materials ............................. 14
Piston Nut ..................................................................... 14
Piston Jig ...................................................................... 16
Steel Bushing Jig ......................................................... 18
Dust Wiper Jig ............................................................. 20
Slipper Seal Jig ............................................................ 22
Slipper Seal Straightening Jig ..................................... 24
Disassembly ....................................................... 26
Reassembly ........................................................ 31
Cylinders SP001098
Page 3
MEMO
Cylinders SP001098
Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Cylinders SP001098
Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Two essentially similar types of hydraulic cylinders are used
on the excavator. The cylinder that is used to operate the
excavator boom or bucket is equipped with a rod stopper,
which acts as a cushion only when the cylinder rod is fully
retracted (and the bucket is pulled close to the arm). This
type of cylinder is shown in the lower drawing.
Arm cylinders have a cushion or stopper for operation in
both directions. This type of cylinder is shown in the upper
drawing.
Theory of Operation
1 Piston
2 Oil Path A 1
3 Oil Path B
D
Cylinder piston rods are extended or retracted by oil flow to

the back side of the cylinder (shown as ("oil path A") or to 3
the front of the cylinder ("oil path B"). 2
The cylinder rod is extended as oil flow is pumped through
the circuit to the back side of the piston. The force (F1) of
the piston stroke can be expressed by the formula below, FG001456
where P = circuit oil pressure and the inside diameter of the Figure 1
cylinder is expressed by D (Figure 1).
F1 = P
x πD2
4
(P: Pressure, π = 3.14, D: Cylinder Inside Diameter)
1 Cylinder Inside Diameter - D

2 Oil Path A
4
3 Oil Path B
4 Rod Diameter - R
1
When the cylinder rod is retracted, oil flow through the
circuit from the pump to the front side of the cylinder 2
generates a force (F2) that can be expressed by the formula
3
in which the diameter of the piston rod is expressed by R,
and the other two terms are the same as in the preceding FG001458
expression.
Figure 2
F2 = P
x π(D2-R2)
4
Cylinders SP001098
Page 6
Because the volume of oil needed to lengthen the cylinder
rod (Q1) is greater than the volume of oil required to retract
the cylinder rod, it takes more time to extend a cylinder than
it does to retract it. 1
Q1 = S
x π(D2)
4
Q2 = S
x π(D2-R2)
4 FG001459
Q1 > Q 2 Figure 3
Cylinders SP001098
Page 7
Parts List
The following parts list is a partial listing only; for full and
complete parts list information, refer to the Hydraulic
Equipment Component Parts List.
Cross section in Figure 4 shows an arm cylinder.
Cross section in Figure 5 shows a boom cylinder.
The bucket and boom cylinders are identical and differ only
in the attached pipes.
Arm Cylinder
20 19 18 21,22 23 24 26
35 4 11,12 9,10 8 6 27 7 5 15 13,14 1 3 16 17
25 2 35
28, 29, 30, 31

FG005226
Figure 4
Boom and Bucket Cylinder
32, 33, 34
4 35 11, 12 9, 10 8 6 7 15 13, 14 5 3 1
16 17 20 19 18 21,22 23
24 2 35
FG005227
Figure 5
Cylinders SP001098
Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Tube Assembly 19 Wear Ring
2 Bushing 20 Ring
3 Rod Assembly 21 O-ring
4 Bushing 22 Backup Ring
5 Rod Cover 23 Piston Nut
6 DD-Bushing 24 Set Screw
7 Retaining Ring 25 Socket Head Bolt
8 Buffer Seal 26 Pipe Band Assembly
9 U-Packing 27 Hex Socket Bolt
10 Backup Ring 28 Check Valve
11 Dust Wiper 29 Spring
12 Retaining Ring 30 Spring Support
13 O-ring 31 Hex Socket Plug
14 Backup Ring 32 Spring Washer
15 O-ring 33 Hex Bolt
16 Cushion Ring 34 Pipe Assembly
17 Piston 35 Grease Nipple
18 Slipper Seal
Cylinders SP001098
Page 9
Dozer Cylinder
LH
RH
23,24
27,28
26 25
16 17 18,19 20 21
4 22 10 5 13 9 8 11,12 6,7 3 1 14 15
22 2
FG008717
Figure 6
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Tube Assembly 15 Slipper Seal
2 Rolled Bush 16 Wear Ring
3 Rod Assembly 17 Slyd Ring
4 Rolled Bush 18 O-Ring
5 Rod Cover 19 Backup Ring
6 DU-Bush 20 Piston Nut
7 Retaining Ring 21 Set Screw
8 Buffer Seal 22 Grease Nipple
9 U-Packing 23 Pipe Assembly
10 Dust Wiper 24 O-Ring
11 O-Ring 25 Valve Assembly
12 Backup Ring 26 Hex Socket Bolt
13 O-Ring 27 Hex Socket Bolt
14 Piston 28 Washer
Cylinders SP001098
Page 10
Outrigger Cylinder
LH
RH
23,24
27,28
26 25
16 17 18,19 20 21
4 22 10 5 13 9 8 11,12 6,7 3 1 14 15
2
FG008718
Figure 7
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Tube Assembly 15 Slipper Seal
2 Rolled Bush 16 Wear Ring
3 Rod Assembly 17 Slyd Ring
4 Rolled Bush 18 O-Ring
5 Rod Cover 19 Backup Ring
6 DU-Bush 20 Piston Nut
7 Retaining Ring 21 Set Screw
8 Buffer Seal 22 Grease Nipple
9 U-Packing 23 Pipe Assembly
10 Dust Wiper 24 O-Ring
11 O-Ring 25 Valve Assembly
12 Backup Ring 26 Hex Socket Bolt
13 O-Ring 27 Hex Socket Bolt
14 Piston 28 Washer
Cylinders SP001098
Page 11
Ram Cylinder
1 7 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10
RH
LH Port Detail
FG008719
Figure 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 6 Retaining Ring
2 Wear Ring 7 Rod
3 U-Packing 8 Plug A
4 Backup Ring 9 O-Ring
5 Dust Wiper 10 Dust Cap
Cylinders SP001098
Page 12
Cylinders SP001098
Page 13
SPECIAL TOOLS AND
MATERIALS
Piston Nut
( )
15
-0.1
C -0.2
(C3~C5)
D +0.1
+0.2
A
35
B
∅8 Through Hole
5
0.
R
R(R15 ~ R20)
4-
350
ARS4730L
Figure 9
Material SM45C (AISI 1045)
Rockwell Harden from 22 - 27
Oil Quench
Cylinders SP001098
Page 14
MODEL CYLINDER ∅A ∅B C D MODEL (CYLINDER)
142.0 mm 102.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM
(5.59 in) (4.02 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
147.0 mm 107.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
140.0 mm 98.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(5.52 in) (3.86 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
145.0 mm 105.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(5.71 in) (4.13 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
147.0 mm 107.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
145.0 mm 105.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(5.71 in) (4.13 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
147.0 mm 107.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
147.0 mm 107.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
DX420LC ARM
(5.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
155.0 mm 115.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BUCKET
(6.10 in) (4.53 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
125.0 mm 85.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM
(4.92 in) (3.35 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
130.0 mm 90.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
ARM
(5.12 in) (3.54 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
115.0 mm 75.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (4.53 in) (2.95 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
DX160W 120.0 mm 79.0 mm 10.0 mm 5.0 mm
DOZER
(4.72 in) (3.11 in) (0.39 in) (0.20 in)
125.0 mm 85.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
OUTRIGGER
(4.92 in) (3.35 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
TWO-PIECE 155.0 mm 115.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM (4.79 in) (4.21 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
130.0 mm 90.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM
(5.12 in) (3.54 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
140.0 mm 98.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
ARM
(5.51 in) (3.86 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
DX190W
125.0 mm 85.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BUCKET
(4.92 in) (3.35 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
BOOM (6.10 in) (4.53 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
130.0 mm 90.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
BOOM
(5.12 in) (3.54 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
142.0 mm 102.0 mm 12.0 mm 5.0 mm
ARM
(5.59 in) (4.02 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
DX210W
125.0 mm 102.0 mm 11.0 mm 4.5 mm
BUCKET
(4.92 in) (4.02 in) (0.43 in) (0.18 in)
BOOM (6.10 in) (4.53 in) (0.47 in) (0.20 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 15
Piston Jig
( )
15
2-∅"B"
)
F /2
∅8 Through Hole
R(
"
"D
∅
"A"
∅"
C "
R(R15~20)
( ) 35
R5
4-
30
ARS4740L
Figure 10
Material SM45C (AISI 1045)
Rockwell Harden from 22 - 27
Oil Quench
Cylinders SP001098
Page 16
MODEL CYLINDER A ( ±0.1) ∅B ∅C ∅D MODEL (CYLINDER)
110.0 mm 13.0 mm 76.0 mm 140.0 mm
BOOM
(4.33 in) (0.51 in) (2.99 in) (5.51 in)
120.0 mm 13.0 mm 85.0 mm 150.0 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(4.72 in) (0.513 in) (3.35 in) (5.91 in)
110.0 mm 13.0 mm 76.0 mm 140.0 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(4.33 in) (0.51 in) (2.99 in) (5.51 in)
120.0 mm 13.0 mm 85.0 mm 150.0 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(4.72 in) (0.51 in) (3.35 in) (5.91 in)
130.0 mm 13.0 mm 93.0 mm 165.0 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(5.12 in) (0.513 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
120.0 mm 13.0 mm 85.0 mm 150.0 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(4.72 in) (0.51 in) (3.35 in) (5.91 in)
130.0 mm 13.0 mm 93.0 mm 165.0 mm
BOOM
(5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
130.0 mm 13.0 mm 93.0 mm 165.0 mm
DX420LC ARM
(5.12 in) (0.513 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
130.0 mm 13.0 mm 93.0 mm 165.0 mm
BUCKET
(5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
80.0 mm 11.0 mm 58.0 mm 110.0 mm
BOOM
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (2.28 in) (4.33 in)
80.0 mm 11.0 mm 58.0 mm 110.0 mm
ARM
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (2.28 in) (4.33 in)
70.0 mm 11.0 mm 46.0 mm 95.0 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (2.76 in) (0.43 in) (1.81 in) (3.74 in)
DX160W 70.0 mm 11.0 mm 53.0 mm 95.0 mm
DOZER
(2.76 in) (0.43 in) (2.09 in) (3.74 in)
80.0 mm 11.0 mm 58.0 mm 110.0 mm
OUTRIGGER
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (2.28 in) (4.33 in)
BOOM (5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.5 in)
90.0 mm 11.0 mm 63.0 mm 115.0 mm
BOOM
(3.54 in) (0.43 in) (2.48 in) (4.53 in)
96.0 mm 13.0 mm 69.0 mm 130.0 mm
ARM
(3.78 in) (0.51 in) (2.72 in) (5.12 in)
DX190W
80.0 mm 11.0 mm 58.0 mm 110.0 mm
BUCKET
(3.15 in) (0.43 in) (2.28 in) (4.33 in)
BOOM (5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
110.0 mm 13.0 mm 76.0 mm 140.0 mm
BOOM
(4.33 in) (0.51 in) (2.99 in) (5.51 in)
110.0 mm 13.0 mm 76.0 mm 140.0 mm
ARM
(4.33 in) (0.51 in) (2.99 in) (5.51 in)
DX210W
90.0 mm 11.0 mm 63.0 mm 115.0 mm
BUCKET
(3.54 in) (0.43 in) (2.48 in) (4.53 in)
BOOM (5.12 in) (0.51 in) (3.66 in) (6.50 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 17
Steel Bushing Jig
( )
(5)
"A" - 20
"B" + 40
∅"B"
∅"A"
(∅20)
15 F E
ARS4750L
Figure 11
Material: SM45C which is done thermal refining <QT> Hrc 22 - 28
Undefined Chamfer C/R = 0.5 Max.
1 Place: Finally work to used DNMG Tip <Nose R0.4>
Cylinders SP001098
Page 18
MODEL CYLINDER ∅ A-0.05
-0.15
∅ B ( ±0.1) E F+0.05
0
Part MODEL (CYLINDER)
90.0 mm 105.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.28 in)
90.0 mm 105.0 mm 40.0 mm 6.5 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.26 in)
90.0 mm 105.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.58 in) (0.28 in)
100.0 mm 115.0 mm 45.0 mm 7.5 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(3.94 in) (4.53 in) (1.77 in) (0.30 in)
100.0 mm 115.0 mm 45.0 mm 7.5 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(3.94 in) (4.53 in) (1.77 in) (0.30 in)
100.0 mm 115.0 mm 45.0 mm 7.5 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(3.94 in) (4.53 in) (1.77 in) (0.30 in)
110.0 mm 130.0 mm 70.0 mm 11.0 mm
BOOM
(4.33 in) (5.12 in) (2.76 in) (0.43 in)
110.0 mm 130.0 mm 70.0 mm 11.0 mm
DX420LC ARM
(4.33 in) (5.12 in) (2.76 in) (0.43 in)
110.0 mm 130.0 mm 70.0 mm 11.0 mm
BUCKET
(4.33 in) (5.12 in) (2.76 in) (0.43 in)
71.0 mm 86.0 mm 40.0 mm 6.5 mm
BOOM
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.57 in) (0.26 in)
71.0 mm 86.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
ARM
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.57 in) (0.28 in)
65.0 mm 80.0 mm 30.0 mm 6.0 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (2.56 in) (3.14 in) (1.18 in) (0.24 in)
DX160W 60.0 mm 70.0 mm 30.0 mm
DOZER -
(2.36 in) (2.76 in) (1.18 in)
60.0 mm 75.0 mm 30.0 mm 6.5 mm
OUTRIGGER
(2.36 in) (2.95 in) (1.18 in) (0.26 in)
BOOM (3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.57 in) (0.24 in)
71.0 mm 86.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.57 in) (0.28 in)
71.0 mm 86.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
ARM
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.57 in) (0.28 in)
DX190W
71.0 mm 86.0 mm 40.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET
(2.80 in) (3.39 in) (1.57 in) (0.28 in)
BOOM (3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.57 in) (0.24 in)
80.0 mm 95.0 mm 35.0 mm 6.5 mm
BOOM
(3.15 in) (3.74 in) (1.38 in) (0.26 in)
90.0 mm 105.0 mm 40.0 mm 6.5 mm
ARM
(3.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.57 in) (0.26 in)
DX210W
65.0 mm 80.0 mm 35.0 mm 6.5 mm
BUCKET
(2.56 in) (3.15 in) (1.38 in) (0.26 in)
BOOM (2.54 in) (4.13 in) (1.57 in) (0.24 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 19
Dust Wiper Jig
. 5
C1
3-
R0.2
1
)
DIA. (B+40)
DIA. (A-20)
)
DIA. A
DIA. B
(
(
15 C D
ARS4760L
Figure 12
Material: SM45C which is done thermal refining <QT> Hrc 22 - 28
Undefined Chamfer C/R = 0.5 Max.
1 Place: Finally work to used DNMG Tip <Nose R0.4>
Cylinders SP001098
Page 20
MODEL CYLINDER ∅A-0.2
-0.3 ∅B -0.2
-0.3 C 0-0.1 D MODEL (CYLINDER)
95.0 mm 109.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(3.74 in) (4.29 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
105.0 mm 121.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(4.13 in) (4.76 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
90.0 mm 104.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
100.0 mm 114.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
115.0 mm 131.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
100.0 mm 114.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(3.94 in) (4.49 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
115.0 mm 131.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
120.0 mm 136.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
DX420LC ARM
(4.72 in) (5.35 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
110.0 mm 126.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET
(4.33 in) (4.96 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
75.0 mm 89.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
80.0 mm 94.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
ARM
(3.15 in) (3.70 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
65.0 mm 79.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (2.56 in) (3.11 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
DX160W 60.0 mm 74.0 mm 5.0 mm 6.0 mm
DOZER
(2.36 in) (2.91 in) (0.20 in) (0.24 in)
70.0 mm 84.0 mm 0.5 mm 6.0 mm
OUTRIGGER
(2.76 in) (3.31 in) (0.02 in) (0.24 in)
BOOM (3.54 in) (4.10 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
80.0 mm 94.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(3.15 in) (3.70 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
90.0 mm 104.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
ARM
(3.54 in) (4.09 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
DX190W
75.0 mm 89.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
BOOM (4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
85.0 mm 99.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BOOM
(3.35 in) (3.90 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
95.0 mm 109.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
ARM
(3.74 in) (4.29 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
DX210W
75.0 mm 89.0 mm 6.0 mm 7.0 mm
BUCKET
(2.95 in) (3.50 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
BOOM (4.53 in) (5.16 in) (0.24 in) (0.28 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 21
Slipper Seal Jig
0
R1
R1
∅(A+2)
∅A
∅(A-14)
5
B
10°
(B+40)
ARS4770L
Figure 13
Cylinders SP001098
Page 22
MODEL CYLINDER ∅A+0.2
+0.1 B+0.2
+0.1 MODEL (CYLINDER)
140.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM
(5.51 in) (1.12 in)
150.0 mm 28.5 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(5.91 in) (1.12 in)
140.0 mm 28.5 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(5.51 in) (1.12 in)
150.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(5.91 in) (1.12 in)
170.0 mm 34.5 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(6.69 in) (1.36 in)
150.0 mm 28.5 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(5.91 in) (1.12 in)
165.0 mm 34.5 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(6.50 in) (1.36 in)
180.0 mm 41.5 mm
DX420LC ARM OPT ARM
(7.09 in) (1.63 in)
160.0 mm 34.5 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(6.30 in) (1.36 in)
110.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM
(4.33 in) (1.12 in)
115.0 mm 28.5 mm
ARM
(4.53 in) (1.12 in)
95.0 mm 28.5 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (3.74 in) (1.12 in)
DX160W 100.0 mm 28.5 mm
DOZER
(3.94 in) (1.12 in)
110.0 mm 28.5 mm
OUTRIGGER
(4.33 in) (1.12 in)
TWO-PIECE 150.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM (5.91 in) (1.12 in)
115.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM
(4.53 in) (1.12 in)
110.0 mm 28.5 mm
ARM
(4.33 in) (1.12 in)
DX190W
110.0 mm 28.5 mm
BUCKET
(4.33 in) (1.12 in)
BOOM (7.09 in) (1.63 in)
135.0 mm 28.5 mm
BOOM
(5.31 in) (1.12 in)
135.0 mm 28.5 mm
ARM
(5.31 in) (1.12 in)
DX210W
115.0 mm 28.5 mm
BUCKET
(4.53 in) (1.12 in)
BOOM (7.09 in) (1.63 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 23
Slipper Seal Straightening Jig
1
2-C
R
2-5
∅(A+15)
∅A
1
2-R
100
25
50
ARS4780L
Figure 14
Cylinders SP001098
Page 24
MODEL CYLINDER ∅A+0.2
+0.1 MODEL (CYLINDER)
140.0 mm
BOOM
(5.51 in)
150.0 mm
DX300LC ARM S/ARM
(5.91 in)
140.0 mm
BUCKET S/BUCKET
(5.51 in)
150.0 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(5.91 in)
170.0 mm
DX340LC ARM OPT ARM
(6.69 in)
150.0 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(5.91 in)
165.0 mm
BOOM OPT BOOM
(6.50 in)
180.0 mm
DX420LC ARM OPT ARM
(7.09 in)
160.0 mm
BUCKET OPT BUCKET
(6.30 in)
110.0 mm
BOOM
(4.33 in)
115.0 mm
ARM
(4.53 in)
95.0 mm
BUCKET
DX140W (3.74 in)
DX160W 130.0 mm
DOZER
(5.12 in)
130.0 mm
OUTRIGGER
(5.12 in)
TWO-PIECE 150.0 mm
BOOM (5.91 in)
115.0 mm
BOOM
(4.35 in)
125.0 mm
ARM
(4.92 in)
DX190W
110.0 mm
BUCKET
(4.33 in)
TWO-PIECE 180.0 mm
BOOM (7.09 in)
135.0 mm
BOOM
(5.31 in)
135.0 mm
ARM
(5.31 in)
DX210W
115.0 mm
BUCKET
(4.53 in)
TWO-PIECE 180.0 mm
BOOM (7.09 in)
Cylinders SP001098
Page 25
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION
Vent air from the hydraulic system before disconnecting
cylinder piping connections. Use the lever on the
reservoir, while the engine is running. Discharge the
hydraulic accumulator and vent residual tank pressure
after the engine is shut off. Pour clean replacement fluid
back into the system if excessive fluid is lost.
1. Following removal of cylinder from excavator

attachment, support cylinder on some type of sturdy
work platform and drain all oil. Rotate cylinder so that
piping ports are on top, to allow trapped air to vent.
Figure 15
2. Position piston rod so that it is extended approximately

one half meter (20").
Figure 16
3. Remove bolts (27) on the end of cylinder.

NOTE: Wrap a cloth or other protective material around
piston rod, to avoid possibility of accidentally
scratching or scoring rod surface while
fasteners are being loosened and removed.
Component parts (numbered in parentheses)
are keyed to Figure 4.
Figure 17
Cylinders SP001098
Page 26
4. Tap two bolts into cover of cylinder head, 180° apart.
Tighten them in a staggered, even sequence, to back
off piston rod end cover from edge of cylinder wall.
Look for adequate clearance between cover and end of
cylinder wall before using a plastic or other soft-faced
hammer for final disassembly.
Figure 18
5. Begin withdrawing piston rod assembly, away from

cylinder. Attach a lifting support when final 1/3 of rod is
still inside barrel of cylinder. Prepare support blocks for
piston rod before it has been completely withdrawn.
Figure 19
6. Lower piston rod to support blocks and detach wear

ring (outer surface) (19) from end of rod.
Figure 20
7. Immobilize piston rod by inserting a wooden or other

nonscoring, nonmetallic support through end of rod.
Figure 21
Cylinders SP001098
Page 27
8. Remove set screw using socket wrench.
HAOF340L
Figure 22
9. Fabricate or purchase a piston nut removal wrench.

(Dimensions are called off at beginning of this
procedure. This tool may also be ordered through your
local DOOSAN Parts distributor). Remove nut from end
of piston.
Figure 23
10. Use second piston tool described at beginning of this

procedure to separate piston. Detach cushion ring (16),
taking care not to damage cushion ring.
Figure 24
11. Use a plastic hammer to evenly pull off rod cover (5)
from end of piston rod. Be careful not to damage rod
bushing (6) and dust wiper, U-packing and other seals.
Figure 25
Cylinders SP001098
Page 28
12. Use a dull, rounded tip tool to pry off O-ring (13) and
backup ring (14).
HAOF37OL
Figure 26
13. Find a screwdriver with an appropriate width tip to

facilitate removal of slipper seal (18), wear ring (19)
and slide ring (20) from piston (17).
Figure 27
14. Remove O-ring (21) and backup ring (22) from cylinder
head.
HAOF38OS
Figure 28
15. During disassembly of cylinder head, be careful not to

damage buffer seal (8) and U-packing (9).
HAOF39OL
Figure 29
Cylinders SP001098
Page 29
16. Disassemble retaining ring (12) and dust wiper (11).
Separate retaining ring (7) and rod bushing (6).
Figure 30
17. Force out pin bushing (2), (4) from body of cylinder.
Figure 31
Cylinders SP001098
Page 30
REASSEMBLY
IMPORTANT
Replace any part that shows evidence of damage or
excessive wear. Replacement of all O-rings and flexible
seals is strongly recommended. Before starting the
cylinder reassembly procedure, all parts should be
thoroughly cleaned and dried, and/or prelubricated with
clean hydraulic fluid. Prepare the work area beforehand
to maintain cleanliness during the reassembly
procedure.
NOTE: Reassemble the subassemblies of the cylinder in the

following order:
1. Body of the cylinder.
2. Piston rod.
3. Piston assembly.
4. Cylinder head assembly.
1. Reassemble pin bushing (2), (4) to piston rod and body
of cylinder.
Figure 32
2. Following reassembly of rod cover components, install

the dust wiper (11) and rod bushing (6) to the rod
cover (5). Insert retaining rings (7 and 12).
Figure 33
Cylinders SP001098
Page 31
3. Prelubricate O-rings and seals before reassembly
(Figure 34).
Figure 34
4. Before starting to rebuild piston assembly, heat slipper

seal for 5 minutes in an oil bath warmed to 150° -
180°C (302° - 356°F). Use special slipper seal jig (third
item in list of specialized tools at the beginning of this
procedure) to attach seal. Cool seal by pushing a
retracting jig against seal for several minutes. Apply a
strip of clean, see-through sealing tape around slipper
seal to keep it free of dust.
Figure 35
5. Immobilize piston rod on solid support blocks.

Assemble O-ring (21) and backup ring (22). Prepare to
attach rod cover assembly to piston rod. Push rod
cover by tightening piston nut (23).
Figure 36
6. Assemble cushion ring (16) and attach piston assembly

to piston rod.
Figure 37
Cylinders SP001098
Page 32
7. Use specially fabricate or factory sourced tool to tighten
piston nut (23).
Figure 38
8. Assemble wear ring (19), slide ring (20) and set screw
(24) to piston assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Set Screw
Figure 39
9. Immobilize body of cylinder before reassembly.
Figure 40
Preapply fastener locking compound (Loctite #242 or #243

or an alternate manufacturer's equivalent product) to all end
cover retaining bolts. Wrap a protective cushion around end
of rod while tightening fasteners, to prevent possible damage
to polished surface of rod, should a wrench slip during
retightening.
Figure 41
Cylinders SP001098
Page 33
Cylinders SP001098
Page 34
SP000966
MAIN CONTROL VALVESP000966
Main Control
Valve
Edition 1
Main Control Valve SP000966

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Main Control Valve
Control Valve Operation...................................... 6
Arm Priority Circuit ......................................................... 7
Bucket (Junction) Circuit ................................................ 8
Main Relief Valve ........................................................... 9
Overload Relief Valve .................................................. 10
Arm Load Holding Valve ............................................. 12
Boom Load Holding Valve .......................................... 15
Arm Regeneration ........................................................ 17
Boom Regeneration...................................................... 19
Foot Relief Valve ......................................................... 20
Parts List....................................................................... 21
Specifications ................................................................ 29
Control Valve Drawing and Hydraulic Circuit.. 30
Disassembly and Reassembly .......................... 34
General Disassembly ................................................... 34
General Reassembly .................................................... 34
Plunger Replacement ................................................... 34
Main Plunger Element - Disassembly and Assembly
...................................................................................... 35
Tool ............................................................................... 35
Main Relief Valve ......................................................... 38
Overload Relief Valve .................................................. 40
Arm Load Holding Valve ............................................. 42
Boom Load Holding Valve .......................................... 44
Arm Regeneration Valve.............................................. 45
Bucket Unity Check ..................................................... 46
Foot Relief Valve ......................................................... 47
Center Bypass Valve (CB Valve) ............................... 48
Boom Parallel Switch Valve ........................................ 49
Boom Unity Check Valve ............................................ 50

Page 3
MEMO
Check Valve - Locations ............................................. 51

Check Valve ................................................................. 52

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
CONTROL VALVE OPERATION
Following pages show the various functions of the control
valve with a brief description of each function.
They are;
1. “Arm Priority Circuit” on page 1-7
2. “Bucket (Junction) Circuit” on page 1-8
3. “Main Relief Valve” on page 1-9
4. “Overload Relief Valve” on page 1-10
5. “Arm Load Holding Valve” on page 1-12
6. “Boom Load Holding Valve” on page 1-15
7. “Arm Regeneration” on page 1-17
8. “Boom Regeneration” on page 1-19
9. “Foot Relief Valve” on page 1-20

Page 6
Figure 1
Pp P2 P1
Main Control Valve

P1 P2
Fr
F1
Arm Priority Circuit
TR
TL OPT
SW BKT
BM-2 BM-1
AM-1 AP VALVE AM-2
SPOOL;BP
Pa1
Aa1 Ba1 P1 P2
XAa1
AM-1 BM-1
XBb1
XAa2 BM-2 BM-1

AM-2 BM-2
XBb2
AM-1 AM-2
FG007226
Page 7
SP000966
Page 8
Figure 2
Pp P2 P1
Main Control Valve

P2 R
Fr P1
F1
TR
Bucket (Junction) Circuit
OPT
BKT
BM-1
AM-2
XAk2
Center Bypass
Valve CK1
To tank SPOOL;CB
thru the Foot R/V P1 P2
AK1
BK1 BKT
XAk
CK2
BKT
FG007227
SP000966
1. Hydraulic oil from the P2 pump flows to the bucket. Oil
from the P1 pump and the bucket plunger that controls
pilot pressure act simultaneously on the center bypass
valve triggering spool CB to send oil from the center
bypass through an external line (CK1 => CK2) which
opens the bucket pressure check valve and joins with
oil flow from the P2 pump.
Main Relief Valve

1. Normal (low pressure) Operation (Pz pilot signal:
"OFF").
A. Piston (d, Figure 3) is pushed to the right most 2 3 Pilot Poppet B
position by spring (c).
1 Pilot sign
B. The pressurized oil from the main pump flows into From to set up
Main light
chamber (3, Figure 3) through the orifice (2) of Pump pressure
the main poppet A. Main poppet A is completely Main Poppet Piston
5 4 Spring
closed because d1>d2. Tank Path
HAOG250P
Figure 3
C. When the oil pressure reaches the set pressure of

spring (C, Figure 3) the pilot poppet (B) is opened
and oil flows to the tank through paths (4) and
(5).
Figure 4
D. During oil flow when pressure drops in front and

back of orifice (2, Figure 5) and pressure of
chamber (1) d2 > pressure of chamber (1) d1,
main poppet A will open and pressurized oil flows
to the tank.
Figure 5

Page 9
2. High pressure operation (Pz pilot signal: "ON").
When piston (D, Figure 6) is in the left most position
and the pressure has increased above the set pressure
of spring (C), high pressure condition is achieved.
Figure 6
Overload Relief Valve

1. Operation of overload relief valve.
A. The pressurized oil from the cylinder port enter
into chamber (2, Figure 7) through orifice (3) of
piston (A). Main poppet (B) is closed shut due to
d1>d2.
Figure 7
B. When the pressurized oil overcomes the set

pressure of spring (C, Figure 7) pilot poppet (D)
opens and oil flows to the tank through the
transverse hole (4) and path (5).
Figure 8
C. Oil flows and pressure decreases in orifice (3,

Figure 9) of piston A moving the piston to the left
and seating at the edge of pilot poppet (D). The
oil in chamber (1) flows to the tank through orifice
(6) of piston (A), traverse hole (4) and passage
(5).
Figure 9

Page 10
D. Pressure decreases behind orifice of piston A and
if chamber (1, Figure 9) pressure xd2 > chamber
(2) pressure xd1 the main poppet (B) opens and
the pressurized oil of cylinder port flows to the
tank to protect the actuator.
Figure 10
2. Operation of make-up valve.

A. The main poppet area d1 > d2 (Figure 11) and
since the cylinder port pressure is usually higher
than the tank pressure the main poppet will be in
place. When the cylinder port pressure drops
(approaches pressure load), and cylinder port
pressure < tank pressure the main poppet (B)
opens due to the area difference d1 and d2 and
the tank pressure and oil flows from the tank to
the cylinder port preventing cavitation.
Figure 11

Page 11
Arm Load Holding Valve
1. When plunger is in neutral position (Pal pilot signal:
"OFF").
Figure 12
A. Piston (A, Figure 12) and poppet (B) are in

position blocking path (5 and 6). As oil flows from
chamber (1) to chamber (2), the pressure at
orifice (4) is Pe. Since d1 > d2, check valve (D)
is seated completely blocking out chambers (2
and 3).

Page 12
2. When plunger is operated.
Figure 13
A. Arm Dump Operation (p1 > pc) (PaL pilot signal:

"OFF")
Oil passes through path (4, Figure 13) and
chamber (1) pressure becomes pressure (Pc). At
squeeze (2), poppet (D) opens and high pressure
oil is supplied to rod side of the cylinder.

Page 13
Figure 14
B. Arm Crowd (Pc > Pv) (PaL pilot signal: "ON")

Pilot signal pressure enters signal port, piston (A,
Figure 14) moves to the left and poppet (B) is
opened and paths (5 and 6) are connected. The
oil from chamber (1) flows back to the tank
through path (7). The oil pressure in chamber (1)
is released allowing the poppet to open, and oil
from the rod side flows to the tank.

Page 14
Boom Load Holding Valve
1. When plunger is neutral (Pi pilot signal: "OFF").
Spool (A, Figure 15) is in the position as shown
closing off the path between chamber (1) and
drain (Dr1). Chamber (1) and chamber (2) are
connected through squeeze (4) and the pressure
is Pc. d1 > d2, poppet (B) is seated closing off
chamber (2) and chamber (3).
Figure 15
2. When plunger is operated.

A. Boom-up (Pv > Pc) (Pi pilot signal: "OFF")
As the plunger is operated, high pressure oil flows
in through chamber (3, Figure 16). Chamber (1)
and chamber (2) pressures are Pc and equalized
through squeeze (4). Pv overcomes set spring
pressure and high pressure oil is supplied to the
cylinder head.
Figure 16

Page 15
B. Boom-down (Pc > Pv) (Pi pilot signal: "ON").
Pilot signal pressure enters signal port, spool (A,
Figure 17) moves to the right and chamber (1)
and drain (1) are connected allowing chamber (1)
to drain. Since pressure Pc is greater than Pv, oil
flows through the opened poppet (B) and flows
back to the tank.
Figure 17

Page 16
Arm Regeneration
Parallel Route
Aa1 Ba1 C2
C1
Tank Route
XAa1
High Pressure Supply Route 2 1 3 4
Center Bypass Route Pistion A Spool B FG003186

Figure 18
1. If the arm plunger is operated to crowd side, the

plunger moves to the right side and the center bypass
route is interrupted. The oil from pump opens check
valve C1 from parallel route and flows to the cylinder
head through the high-pressure supply route.
Aa1 Ba1 C2
C1
Tank Route
XAa1
FG003187
Figure 19
2. Oil returning from the rod side flows back to the tank
through regeneration valve route (2) to route (1).

Page 17
Low Pressure Route
Aa1 Ba1
C1
Tank Route
XAa1
2 1 3 4
Spring C
Pistion A Spool B
FG003188
Figure 20
3. When the pilot signal is supplied to port (XRE, Figure

20), piston (A) is moved to the left. Rod side pressure
is raised up due to spool (B) closing route (1) and
check valve (C2) in plunger is opened, as a result oil
is regenerated to the head side through route (3) to
route (4) of the plunger.

Page 18
Boom Regeneration
Figure 21
To operate boom cylinder downward, the plunger moves to

the left and the center bypass route is interrupted. Oil
flowing from pump through the parallel route opens check
valve (C1, Figure 21) and is supplied to the cylinder rod
through the high pressure supply route. The oil returned
from the cylinder head flows to the tank route however, as
the return line pressure is raised up, check valve (C2) in the
plunger is opened up. The oil will be regenerated to the rod
side through sleeve traverse hole route (1) to route (2).

Page 19
Foot Relief Valve
1. Oil from center bypass route flows to tank route
through orifice (A, Figure 22) of poppet. The pressure
(fp) generated by flow passed through orifice is fed
back to the pump to control the discharge volume by
the pump.
Figure 22
2. A large amount of fluid flow from delayed pump

response causes pressure (fp) to overcome set spring
pressure and the poppet is opened, allowing oil to flow
to the tank operating as a relief valve.
Figure 23

Page 20
Parts List
Main Plunger Element
Figure 24
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Plunger 11 Cap
2 Bolt With Hole 12 Backup Ring
3 Cover 13 O-ring
4 Plunger Cap 14 Sleeve
5 Spring 15 Backup Ring
6 Spring Guide 16 O-ring
7 Spacer 17 Check Valve
8 O-ring 18 Spring
9 O-ring 19 Spring
10 Retainer 20 Check Valve

Page 21
Main Relief Valve
Figure 25
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Adjusting Screw 10 Sleeve
2 Hexagonal Nut 11 Orifice
3 Adjusting Screw 12 Spring
4 Hexagonal Nut 13 O-ring
5 Cap 14 Pilot Sheet
6 Spring 15 Piston
7 Pilot Poppet 16 O-ring
8 O-ring 17 Backup Ring
9 Main Poppet 18 O-ring

Page 22
Figure 26
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Hex Nut 11 Main Poppet
2 Cap 12 Piston
3 O-ring 13 O-ring
4 Sleeve 14 Pilot Sheet
5 Spring 15 Pilot Poppet
6 Spring 16 Spring
7 O-ring 17 O-ring
8 Backup Ring 18 Spring Tray
9 Backup Ring 19 Adjusting Screw
10 O-ring

Page 23
Bucket Unity Check
Figure 27
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Spring 4 Backup Ring
2 Check 5 Cap
3 O-ring
Figure 28
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Cover 8 Spring Seat
2 Spool 9 Spring
3 Spring 10 Manifold
4 Cap 11 Poppet
5 O-ring 12 Bolt With Hole
6 Backup Ring 13 O-ring
7 O-ring 14 O-ring

Page 24
Boom Unity Check
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Stopper
4 Spring
5 Check
Figure 29
Arm Regeneration Valve

1, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Spacer
4 O-ring
5 Spring
6 Spool FG003197
7 Sleeve Figure 30
8 Piston
Foot Relief Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Shim
3 Shim
4 Cap
5 Spring
6 Poppet
7 O-ring
Figure 31

Page 25
Arm Priority Valve [AP Valve]
Reference 1, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Description
Number
1 Cap 11
2 O-Ring
3 Spool 12
4 Spring
5 Check
6 Bolt ; Socket FG003199
7 Spring Guide Figure 32
8 Spacer
9 Spring
10 Seam
11 Bolt ; Socket
12 Cover
Check Valve [Am-2]
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spacer
3 Backup Ring
4 O-ring
5 Spring
6 Nylon Chip
7 Check Figure 33
Check Valve [Opt, Bkt, Bm-1, Bm-2, Am-1]
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spacer
3 Backup Ring
4 O-ring
5 Spring
6 Nylon Chip
7 Check Figure 34

Page 26
Check Valve
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Spring
5 Nylon Chip
6 Check
Figure 35
Cap
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring
3 O-ring
4 Nylon Chip
Figure 36
Cap
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Backup Ring
Figure 37
Check Valve [Sw]

1
Reference 2
Description
Number 3
1 Cap
4
2 Spacer
3 Backup Ring
7
4 O-ring
5 Spring 6
5
6 Check HAAA7930
7 Nylon Chip Figure 38

Page 27
Center Bypass Valve [Cb Valve]
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 O-ring
3 Spring
4 Cb Spool
Figure 39
Figure 40
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Poppet 12 O-ring
2 Spring 13 Poppet
3 O-ring 14 Spring
4 O-ring 15 O-ring
5 O-ring 16 Cap
6 Cap 17 Bolt With Hole
7 Piston 18 Cover
8 Backup Ring 19 Cap
9 O-ring 20 Spring
10 Sleeve 21 Check
11 Backup Ring

Page 28
Specifications
Control Valve Relief Valves (Main): 330 kg/cm² (4,694 psi) - work
350 kg/cm² (4,978 psi) - travel
Left Side Spools: Dozer: left 28 mm (1.1") diameter
(and spool diameter)
Swing: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Boom-2: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Arm-1: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Right Side Spools: Travel: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
(and spool diameter)
Option: open 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Bucket: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Boom-1: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Arm-2: 28 mm (1.1") diameter
Overload Relief Pressure: 360 kg/cm² (5,120 psi)

Page 29
CONTROL VALVE DRAWING
AND HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
D D D D
A B B A
A B B A
C C C C
Control Valve Top View Control Valve Bottom View
Control Valve Left View A-A Control Valve Right View B-B
Control Valve Front View C-C Control Valve Rear View D-D FG007245
Figure 41

Page 30
P2 Py Pg Px P3 P1 P4 Pz
MR
XAt
Bt TR(R)
XBt At XAd
Dr5 (ROD)
XBo DOZER Bd
OPT XBd (HEAD)
Bo Ad
XAo Ao
(Ck2)
XBk XAs
SWING Bs
(ROD) BUCKET
XAk Bk1 As
XBs
(HEAD) Ak1
(HEAD)
Bb1
P1 XBb1
BOOM1 BOOM2 OP
Dr1 XBb2
XAb1 Ab1
(ROD)
XBa2 XBa1
ARM2 ARM1
Ba1 XAa1(ROD)
XAa2
Aa1 (HEAD)
PBP HV
NR2 NR1 BC
Fr Dr2 (Ck1) Fl PaL Dr4

XAk2
FG007246
Figure 42 CONTROL VALVE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
22
B
Ts TR
B
TL OPT
SW BKT
BM-2 BM-1
AM-1 AM-2
C
C C
D
FG007247
Figure 43

Page 31
P1 P2 R
1
13 12
14 10
15 11
16 11
11 11
11 10
20 9
21 FG007248
Figure 44
13 12 8 FOOT RELIEF VALVE
A-A ARM2
7 ARM1
D-D C-C
B-B
FG007249
Figure 45

Page 32
17
TR OPT
TL
2 3
BKT
6
BM-1
SW
BM-2
FG007250
Figure 46
Reference Reference
Description Quantity Description Quantity
Number Number
1 Main Plunger 9 Check Valve (OPT, BKT,
11 5
2 Main Relief Valve 1 BM-1, BM-2, AM-1)
3 Overload Relief Valve 8 12 Check Valve 1
4 Bucket 2-Speed Check 1 13 Check Valve 2
5 Boom Holding Valve 1 14 Cap 3
6 Boom 2-Speed Check 1 15 Check Valve (TL) 1
Arm Regeneration 16 Check Valve (SW) 1
7 1
Valve 17 Plug assembly 1
8 Foot Relief Valve 2 Center Bypass Valve
20 1
Arm Priority Valve (CB Valve)
9 1
(AP Valve) 21 Arm Holding Valve 1
10 Check Valve (AM-2) 1 22 Orifice (Px, Py) 1

Page 33
DISASSEMBLY AND
REASSEMBLY
General Disassembly
To disassemble control valve, remove bolts from left and
right side of the control valve.
Socket Bolt Size 12.0 mm
General Reassembly
Stand control valve on flat surface and tighten bolts with
correct torque.
15 kg•m
Socket Bolt Tightening Torque
(108 ft lb)
Socket Bolt
IMPORTANT FG007251
Figure 47
Be sure to use extreme care when assembling and
disassembling control valve. All O-rings should be
replaced with new ones. Never reuse old O-rings.
Plunger Replacement
1. The plunger is selected and toothed into the housing;
as a result it is a non serviceable part and cannot be
replaced on site.
A. If for some reason it needs to be replaced, please
contact us with the following information;
Make and/or model number.
Identification color for selected teething as
inscribed on the name plate.
B. Identification color is painted on the right or left
edge of the machine body. It is visible from the
bottom if the paint has been removed.
FG007252
Figure 48

Page 34
Main Plunger Element - Disassembly
and Assembly
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Main Plunger element tag and label
each component so that all parts can be reassembled in
the proper order.
IMPORTANT
The hydraulic control valve used in the S200W-V uses 3
different plungers. Care should be taken when
disassembling and reassembling plunger assemblies.
Tool
This holding tool is used to clamp and hold plunger for
further disassembly, without damaging it. The holder is
comprised of 2 halves of a hexagonal rod made from soft
brass, with the appropriate size hole and outside
dimensions.
Outside
Inside Diameter Application
Diameter
28.20 mm 41.0 mm
Main Plunger
(1.1102 in) (1.6142 in)
100.0 mm Figure 49
Length
(3.9370 in)
Figure 50
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 8 mm Hex Head Bolts 3 Plunger Cap Bolt
2 Plunger Cover

Page 35
1. Remove two bolts (1, Figure 50) from cover and
remove cover (2) from valve housing.
Hex Head Style Bolt 8.0 mm

5 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(36 ft lb)
2. Pull out plunger sub-assembly from housing.
IMPORTANT
Do not force out plunger. Pull out plunger slowly,
to avoid damage.
Figure 51
3. Use the holder tool described above to clamp plunger

assembly and loosen plunger cap bolt.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Plunger Holding Tool
2 Spring Guide
Plunger Cap Bolt
3 Tightening Torque: 6 kg•m (43 ft
lb)
Figure 52
4. Remove plunger cap bolt (3, Figure 53), upper spring

guide (4), spring (5), spacer (6) and lower spring guide
(4).
IMPORTANT
Use caution when disassembling and assembling
plungers. The travel straight plunger does not have
a spacer. In addition the spring and plunger cap
bolts are different.
Figure 53

Page 36
5. Plunger (Lower side)
AM-1: Remove cap (7, Figure 54), O-rings, backup
ring, spring (8) and check valve (9).
Lower Cap Hex Hole 8.0 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 54
BM-1: Remove cap (7, Figure 55), O-ring, backup ring,

sleeve (10), check valve (11) and spring (12).

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 55
TS: Remove cap (7, Figure 56), O-ring and backup

ring.

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 56

Page 37
Main Relief Valve
Disassembly
Reference
Description Size
Number
1 Adjusting Screw 22 mm
2 Hexagonal Nut 30 mm
3 Hexagonal Nut 30 mm
4 Cap 30 mm
5 Pilot Sheet
6 Lower Sleeve
7 Sleeve 27 mm
Figure 57
1. Hold adjusting screw (1, Figure 57) and loosen
hexagonal nut (2).
2. Hold cap (4, Figure 57) and loosen hexagonal nut (3).
3. Loosen cap (4, Figure 57) and remove valve assembly
by unscrewing cap (4).
Reference
Description
Number
6 Lower Sleeve
8 Piston
9 Spring
10 Orifice
4. Remove lower sleeve (6, Figure 58) from cap (4) by

gently pulling sleeve out of cap. Remove piston (8), Figure 58
spring (9) and orifice (10) from lower sleeve (6).
IMPORTANT
Further disassembly of pilot sheet from the cap is
not recommended, as it is pressed in at the factory.
Reassembly
1. Insert piston (A) into sleeve (7). Assemble hex nut (2)
onto adjust screw (1). Assemble adjust screw (1) to
sleeve (7), until piston (A) is seated.
2. Insert pilot poppet (B) into pressure adjust spring (C)
and insert into sleeve (7). Assemble cap (4) onto
sleeve (7), making sure pilot poppet (B) is properly
seated.
3. Insert orifice (10), spring (9) and piston (8) into lower
sleeve (6).
4. Assemble lower sleeve (6) onto cap (4).
5. Insert assembled relief valve into control valve body
and tighten cap (4).
10 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(72 ft lb)

Page 38
Main Relief Valve Adjustment
IMPORTANT
Improper relief valve pressure settings may cause
severe damage to the hydraulic system. Extreme caution
should be taken when making pressure adjustments.
IMPORTANT
Inspect all O-ring gaskets for damage and replace as
Figure 59
necessary. Never reuse damaged or questionable O-
rings.
High Pressure Adjustment

1. Install an accurate pressure gauge at the discharge
outlet of the hydraulic pump.
2. Start the engine and drive hydraulic pump at normal
rpm.
3. Completely stroke one of BM-up, AM or BKT plungers
and read pressure gauge.
4. Adjust pressure by turning sleeve (7) while monitoring
pressure gauge. Each 1/4 turn changes pressure by
approximately 45 kg/cm² (640 psi)
IMPORTANT
The relief valve is extremely sensitive and sudden
extreme changes should be avoided.
5. Tighten hexagonal nut (3) while sleeve (7) is secured.

Recheck high side pressure.
6 kg•m
TIghtening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Low Pressure Adjustment

1. After the High Pressure adjustment has been
completed, Low Pressure adjustment can be made by
turning the Adjust screw (1).
2. After the desired pressure has been adjusted, tighten
hexagonal nut (2) while adjust screw (1) is secured.
Recheck low side pressure.
6 kg•m
TIghtening Torque
(43 ft lb)

Page 39
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Overload Relief Valve, tag and label
the proper order.
IMPORTANT
Do not disassemble the pressure adjustment element.
The pressure is factory set and cannot be correctly
adjusted on the vehicle.
IMPORTANT
Each Overload Relief Valve must be reinstalled into its
original position.
1. Loosen sleeve (1) and remove valve assembly.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Sleeve
2 Cap
Sleeve Hexagonal Base 32 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 60
2. Loosen cap (1) subassembly from sleeve assembly and

remove O-ring, spring (2) and pilot poppet (3).
Reference
Description
Number
2 Cap
3 Spring
4 Poppet
Cap Hexagonal Base 27 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque Figure 61
(43 ft lb)

Page 40
3. Remove pilot seat (1), outer spring (2), inner spring (3),
piston (4), O-ring, backup ring and main poppet (5).
Reference
Description
Number
1 Pilot Seat
2 Outer Spring
3 Inner Spring
4 Piston
5 Main Poppet
Figure 62
Figure 63

Page 41
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Load Holding Valve, tag and
label each component so that all parts can be
reassembled in the proper order.
Check Valve Main Body

1. Remove allen-style bolts (1) and cover (2).
Figure 64
Mounting Bolt Allen Socket 10 mm

10 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(72 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
When assembling cover, inspect O-rings for any
damage and replace as necessary.
2. Remove spring (3) and poppet (4).
Figure 65

Page 42
Cover Assembly
Reference Number Description

1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
4 Cap
5 Piston
6 Sleeve
7 Poppet
8 Spring Figure 66
9 Cap
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove spring (2) and check (3).
Cap Hex Hole Size 8.0 mm

5 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(36 ft lb)
Figure 67
2. Loosen cap (4) and remove piston (5).
Cap Hex Hole Size 10 mm

6 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(43 ft lb)
Figure 68
3. Loosen cap (9) and remove spring (8) and poppet (7).
Cap Hex Hole Size 8.0 mm

5 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(36 ft lb)
4. Remove sleeve from poppet bore by gently tapping it

from the right side.
IMPORTANT
Be careful not to damage the edges of the inner Figure 69
and outer surfaces of the sleeve.

Page 43
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Boom Load Holding Valve, tag and
Figure 70
Reference Reference
Description Quantity Description Quantity
Number Number
1 Cover 9 5 Spring Tray 1
2 Spool 1 6 Allen Head Bolt 1
3 Spring 8 7 Spring 1
4 cap 1 8 Poppet 2
1. Remove allen head bolts (6) and remove cover (1).
Allen Head Bolt Size 8.0 mm

5 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(36 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
When assembling cover, inspect O-rings for any

Page 44
2. Remove spring tray (5), spring (7) and poppet (8) from
manifold bore.
Figure 71
3. Loosen cap (4) and remove spring (3) and spool (2).
Cap Allen Wrench Size 6 mm

3 kg•m
Tightening Torque
(22 ft lb)
Figure 72
Arm Regeneration Valve
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Regeneration Valve, tag and
Reference
Description
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Cap
2 Cap
3 Spring
4 Spring Guide
5 Spool
6 Sleeve
7 Piston
FG003253
Figure 73

Page 45
1. Cap (1), loosen cap (2) and remove guide ; spring (4)
2
Lower Cap Hex Hole (1) 6 mm
3 kg•m 1
Tightening Torque
(22 ft lb)
Cap Wrench Size (2) 27 mm

10 kg•m
Tightening Torque 3
(72 ft lb)
4 FG003254
Figure 74
5
6
FG003255
Figure 75
Bucket Unity Check
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Arm Regeneration Valve, tag and
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Check
3 Spring
Figure 76

Page 46
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove check (2) and spring (3).
Cap Wrench Size 32 mm

Tightening Torque 10 kg•m (72 ft lb)
Figure 77
Foot Relief Valve
IMPORTANT
When disassembling foot relief valve, tag and label each
component so that all parts can be reassembled in the
proper order.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Poppet
3 Cap
4 Shim
5 Spring
Figure 78
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove poppet (2).

Figure 79

Page 47
2. Loosen cap (3) and remove shim (4) and spring (5).

IMPORTANT
Shim is necessary for correct pressure adjustment
and must not be left out.
Figure 80
Center Bypass Valve (CB Valve)
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Center Bypass Valve, tag and label
the proper order.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Spool
Figure 81
1. Loosen cap (1) and remove spring (2) and spool (3).

Figure 82

Page 48
Boom Parallel Switch Valve
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Boom Parallel Switch Valve, tag
and label each component so that all parts can be
Special Tool
This holding tool is used to clamp and hold AP Spool for
further disassembly, without damaging it. The holder is
comprised of 2 halves of a hexagonal rod made from soft
brass, with the appropriate size hole and outside
dimensions.
Inside Diameter Outside Diameter Application

19.0 mm (0.7480 32.0 mm (1.2598 AP Spool
in) in)
Figure 83
Length 100.0 mm (3.9370 in)
Reference
Description
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check
4 Spool
5 Bolt with Hole
6 Spring Guide
FG003199-1
7 Spacer Figure 84
8 Bolt with Hole
9 Spring
10 Shim
11 Cover
1. Remove allen head bolts (5) and Cover (11).

Tightening Torque 1.2 kg•m (9 ft lb)
IMPORTANT
When assembling AP spool, inspect O-rings and
backup rings for any damage and replace as
necessary.

Page 49
2. Side out spool assembly and using the tool described
above, clamp and hold the spool assmbly in space. 6
Remove bolt with hole (8).
4
10
1
9
FG003263
Figure 85
3. Using the tool discribed above, clamp and hold the

spool (4) in place. Remove cap (5), spring (6), and
check (7).
5
FG003264
Figure 86
Boom Unity Check Valve
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Boom Unity Check Valve, tag and
IMPORTANT
When assembling components, inspect O-rings for any

Page 50
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Stopper
3 Spring
4 Check
Figure 87
1. Loosen cap (1), remove stopper (2), spring (3) and

check (4).
Cap Wrench Size 8.0 mm

Figure 88
Check Valve - Locations

Valve Location B
Description Cap Only
Reference
E
A Main Relief Valve
D
B P2
TR
D
C AM-2
OPT D
D OPT, BKT, BM-1, BM-2, AM-1
E TL BKT C
F SW BM1
AM-2
FG007269
Figure 89

Page 51
A
Cap Only
DOZER
F
SW
D
BM-2
D
AM-1
HAAA7660
Figure 90
Check Valve
IMPORTANT
When disassembling Check Valves, tag and label each
component so that all parts can be reassembled in the
proper order.
A: Check Valve (Main Relief Valve)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check

1. Loosen cap (1), remove spring (2) and check (3).
Figure 91

Page 52
B: Check Valve (P2)
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check

20 kg•m (145 ft
Tightening Torque
lb)
Figure 92
C: Check Valve [AM-2]
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check

20 kg•m (145 ft
Tightening Torque
lb)
Figure 93

Page 53
D: Check Valve [OPT, BKT, BM-1, BM-2, AM-1]
IMPORTANT
Even though the valve caps look the same, they are
different, and cannot be interchanged.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check

20 kg•m (145 ft
Tightening Torque
lb)
Figure 94
E: Check Valve [TL]

1
Reference
Description
Number 2
1 Cap
2 Backup Ring 3
3 O-ring
Cap Wrench Size 36 mm HAAA7950

Tightening Torque 10 kg•m (72 ft lb) Figure 95

Page 54
F: Check Valve [SW]
IMPORTANT
Even though the valve caps look the same, they are
different, and cannot be interchanged.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Cap
2 Spring
3 Check

20 kg•m (145 ft
Tightening Torque
lb)
Figure 96

Page 55
Page 56
SP000985
SWING MOTOR SP000985
Swing Motor
Edition 1
Swing Motor SP000985

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Swing Motor
Instruction Manual ............................................... 6
Indication of Type .......................................................... 6
Specifications .................................................................. 7
Construction & Principles of Working ........................... 8
Precaution in Use ........................................................ 16
Troubleshooting............................................................. 20
Maintenance Manual ......................................... 23
Disassembling & Assembling ...................................... 23
Maintenance Standards................................................ 36

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Indication of Type
TSM 140 CH B — 10 A -01 / 270
Relief Valve
Setting Pre.
Design Code
Specification
A: Swing Specification
Shaft Geometry
10 : Male Spline
20 : Female Spline
Mechanical Brake Yes Or No

B : Brake Built-in
Valve Cover Code
Displacement
64 : 64 cc/rev
72 : 72 cc/rev
86 : 86 cc/rev
128 : 127.9 cc/rev
140 : 140.5 cc/rev
Motor Type

Page 6
Specifications
Model TSM64 TSM72 TSM86 TSM128 TSM140
Displacement 64 72 86 127.9 140.5
Rated 330 330 330 330 330
Pressure (kgf/cm2)
Max 400 400 400 400 400
-1 2500 2200 1900 2000 1800
Maximum speed (min )
*1 Theoretical output torque (kgf•m) 33.6 37.8 45.1 67.1 73.7
*2 Theoretical output power (KW) 75.8 85.2 86.0 134.2 134.5
Brake torque (kgf•m) 36.8 36.8 36.8 70 70
Brake release pressure (kgf/cm2) 24 24 24 26 26
Weight (kgf) 42.3 42.3 42.3 62 62
NOTE: *1. The theoretical value at the rated pressure, not

including mechanical efficiency.
*2. The theoretical value at the rated pressure and
the max. speed.
NOTE: TSM86 series can be applied from 64cc/rev to 86cc/
rev by the change of displacement.
TSM140 series can be applied from 127.9cc/rev to
140.5cc/rev by the change of displacement.

Page 7
Construction & Principles of Working
Construction
The Construction
202 203 204 205 306 305 307 308 309 112 311 106 102 103 104 105
101
304 110 402

111
303
401
made by
Tong Myung Heavy Industries Co.,Ltd
MFG. NO. :
PART NO. :
DAEWOO HEAVY IND. LTD.

302
108
KOREA
403
212
201
213
404
301
113
206 207 208 209 210 405 400 211 310 210 109 107 312
FG001843
Figure 1 Construction of Motor

Page 8
Parts No. & Names
Reference Reference
Number Number
101 Valve Casing 209 Roller
102 Plug 210 Washer
103 Spring 211 Spring
104 Plunger 212 Ring Snap
105 Swing Reactionless Valve Ass’y 213 Valve Plate
106 O-ring 301 Casing
107 Relief Valve 302 Oil Seal
108 Ball Bearing 303 Ball Bearing
109 Socket Bolt 304 Parallel Pin
110 Vp Plug 305 Separation Plate
111 O-ring 306 Friction Plate
112 O-ring 307 O-ring
113 Pin Spring 308 O-ring
201 Drive Shaft 309 Brake Piston
202 Swash Plate 310 Brake Spring
203 Shoe 311 PT-plug
204 Piston 312 PT-plug
205 Cylinder Block 400 Brake Valve
206 Thrust Ball 401 Name Plate
207 Retainer Plate 402 Rivet Screw
208 Collar

Page 9
Principles of Working
Motor Part
High pressure oil from the control valve is routed through
valve casing and valve plate to pistons. When the oil enters
the cylinder bores through port, it forces the pistons against
the fixed inclined swash plate (F1,F2). The force (F2)
causes the piston shoes to slide on the swash plate forcing
the rotating group to turn, thereby rotating the output shaft.
During the second half of the motor's revolution, low
pressure oil is discharged as the pistons ride to toward a
higher position on the shoe plate.
A small amount of supply oil flows through the center of
each piston to lubricate the piston ball joint and the piston
shoe face. The motor is internally lubricated from leakage
inside the motor.
To reverse rotation, system oil flow is changed from inlet
port to outlet port and viceversa. Theoretical output torque is
as follow formula.
p×q
T = ------------
2×π
p : Effective Pressure (kgf/cm2)
q : Displacement (cc/rev)
Low Press. Oil High Press. Oil
Swash Plate (3) Shoe (2) Piston Cylinder Block (4)

Outlet Port Inlet Port
F1
F
F2
Drive Shaft
Valve Plate (1)

FG007419
Figure 2 Diagram Showing the Working Explanation

Page 10
Valve Casing Part
1. Anticavitation Check Valve

The motor can be rotated faster than supplied oil flow
because there is no counter-balancing valve to prevent
over speed ;
in order to prevent cavitation of the motor, oil
compensation insufficient flow is drawn through the
anti-cavitation check valve. C Port
2. Relief Valve: KRD22EK10C (See Figure 4 on page -12)

We consider that port P is applied pressure by tank Control Valve FG007421
pressure.
Figure 3
Port P, R are affected by tank pressure at first, as
shown fig. 3-(1). The relief valve starts operating when
the force that is determined by multiply the pressure
area (A1) of plunger (301) by pressure P1 is equal to
the sum spring (321) force (Fsp) and the force that is
determined by multiply the pressure area (A2) by
pressure Pg of room 'g' in the plunger (301).
Here, Pg is the pressure of room 'g' applied pressure
by passing oil through orifice m. If Pg arrives at the
pressure which is determined by spring (321) pushing
the piston (302), the piston move to left side. when
piston (302) move left side, room 'h' operates as
damping room because of orifice (n) which is designed
at the side of adjustment plug (401) and piston (302).
Because of this mechanism, the pressure of room 'g'
increases smoothly while the piston (302) reaches end
of adjustment plug (401). (Figure 4-(2))
P1 × A1 = Fsp + Pg × A2
P1 = Fsp + Pg × A2
--------------------------------------
A1
If the piston (302) reaches end of adjustment plug
(401), it doesn't move left side anymore. So, the
pressure of room 'g' is Ps and spring (321) force is
Fsp. (Figure 4-(3)) Therefore, the pressure P changes
as shown Figure 4-(4). The pressure (Ps) of last state
is following equation.
P1 × A1 = Fsp′ + Pg × A2
Fsp′
P1 = ---------------------
A1 – A2

Page 11
Spring (321) Piston (302) h g
R Port
(1) P Port
(Pressure : P1)
Hyd. Area Al m Plunger (301) Hyd. Area A2 n Adjustment Plug (401)

(Pressure : Pg)
(2)
(3) Pressure : Ps
Pressure : Ps
Ps
(4)
P1
T FG007422
Figure 4 Relief Valve : KRD22EK10C Working Description

Page 12
3. Swing Reactionless Valve
By the spool's shift in the main control valve, oil is
supplied to Hydraulic motor's A port (or B port), and
moving the poppet of reactionless valve, blocks the
bypass and operates swing-device. (Figure 5-(1))
Returning the spool to neutral position, block the two
ports of Hydraulic motor, but the swing-device tends to
swing by inertia-force. The swing force is transmitted to
hydraulic motor by reduction gear. After stops the
swing-device by brake pressure which is created in B
port (or A port) and tends to shift to the opposite
direction. Because of the brake pressure, the swing
device stop, first, and tends to reverse. Although the oil
pressure of B port tries to shift the poppet to left side,
delays the operating by the orifice of the A port. At this
time, forms bypass between A port and B port, and the
pressure oil in B port flows into A port through the
bypass. (Figure 5-(2))
And the B side poppet moves to left side till blocking
the bypass. (Figure 5-(3)) At the reverse pressure
generating process of B port, this process prevents the
reverse and stop the motor by bypassing the pressure
oil to A port.

Page 13
Motor Inlet Motor Outlet
A Port B Port
Bypass Way
Orifice Poppet
Bypass Way
FG007423
Figure 5 Swing Reactionless Valve Working Description

Page 14
4. Brake Part
The swing brake is spring applied and hydraulically
released. Friction plate are splined to and rotate with
cylinder block (111). separation plates (743) are splined
to the motor casing (301). When the swing controller
blocks pilot pressure at port (SH), the brake springs
(712) force on brake piston (702) squeeze the
separation and friction plates together to prevent the
upper structure from swinging.
Oil Press
Spring Force
310
309 305
306
Oil Pressure
301
201 205
FG007424
Figure 6 Brake Working Description

Page 15
Precaution in Use
Inspection
Prior to installation of a new motor, inspect the following
items.
1. Inspect whether or not there is any damage during
transit, or if any parts are lost missing.
2. Inspect each tightened part is loosened or not.
3. Check whether or not covers for flange surface and
drain port are perfect, and the inside of the motor is
dirty with intruded dust.
Rotation Direction
The relation between the oil flow and the revolutionary
direction of the shaft is self-explanatory as shown in Figure
7 and table.
The revolutionary direction of a motor vary according to the
slope surface of casing.
Pay attention to discriminate between geometry of casing
and the direction of flange as the direction of tilting angle.
Anti-clockwise Clockwise (Attach a label M type)

FG007425
Figure 7 Brake Working Description
Revolutionary Direction of Shaft

Direction Inlet Port Outlet Port
Facing the Shaft Side
Anti-clockwise A B Right-handed
Clockwise B A Left-handed

Page 16
External Load of Shaft
Pay attention to the shaft of motor in order not to applied
radial and thrust load.
Hydraulic Fluids & Range of Temperature

1. Mineral Oil
Please use a highly viscosity index working fluid which
has additions of anti-foam agent, oxidation inhibitors,
corrosion inhibitors, viscosity index improvers, oiliness
agent and the oil with a high viscosity.
2. Optimum viscosity and temperature (Figure 8)
In order to obtain the highest performance of the
motor, oil which has a viscosity in a range of 10 to
200 cst is most suitable. But, it can be used a viscosity
in a range of 10 to 1000 cst. The range of working
temperature is limits to -25 °C ~ -100 °C because of
the oil seal, O-ring. Further, the deterioration of the
working fluid becomes excessive beyond 65 °C ;
therefore, it is desirable not to exceed 60 °C.
Higher Limits of Viscosity
Higher Temperature Limit

Low Temperature Limit
Optimum Working Range
Low Viscosity Limit
FG007426
Figure 8 The Proper Range of Viscosity and Tempera-

Page 17
3. Except Mineral Oil
Incase if using special fluid (phosphate ester
compounds, water-glycol, fluid fatly acid ester
compound, etc.), please consult us for instruction prior
to use.
Filter
If fine particles of dirt and metal are mixed with oil, they
enter into sliding surfaces and accelerate wear in each part,
and in the worst case seizure will be likely to occur.
It is recommended, therefore, that the customer not only will
take necessary measures to prevent oil from contamination
with such fine particles but also to provide an oil filter in the
circuit without fail. For satisfactory service life of these
motors in application, the operating fluid should be
continuously filtered to the minimum cleanliness level of
class 9 of NAS. Also, install a 10μ filter in the hydraulic
circuit and MILLIPRE FILTER pollution level recommends
below 2 ~ 4mg/100cc.
Installation & Piping

1. When the motor is installed that its shaft turns
downside.
2. The motor should be installed that it is concentricity
below 0.05mm.
3. The tightening torque of bolts for fixing the motor to
the bracket is shown in assembly drawing the
customer's reference.
4. Since the casing inside is always kept filled with oil,
the drain must be returned to the tank through the
return pipe which is once raised higher tank that of the
motor itself as shown in Figure 9.
5. Motors will tolerate in the casing pressure up to
maximum 3kgf/cm2, but for common pressure, 2kgf/cm2
below should be kept. Figure 9
6. Piping should be cleaned and flashing well.
7. Be care to as the installation to piping.
8. Use the drain pipe bigger than the port size and form
shortly as possible as.

Page 18
Oil Filling & Air Bleeder
1. Fill in the casing with oil using the drain port before
the operating.
In the motor, there are many kinds of high-speed
sliding surface like bearing, piston, shoe, spherical
bush, and etc. So If there isn't enough oil, can make
some problem like sticking or breaking in those parts.
Use the PF 1/4 port for venting air.
2. All the air in the motor and circuit must be removed,
otherwise, it will be likely to be causes of imperfect Air
Bleeder
working or a damage of the motor.
Precaution in Starting Operations

1. If the direction of revolution is correct or not.
2. Whether or not there is any leakage of oil from the
motor. FG007427
Figure 10
3. If the equipment vibrates abnormally or not during
operation or when the revolution direction is changed.
4. If the oil temperature rises rapidly in spite of running
for a short period of time.
5. Whether the pressure varies to a great extent as
compared with the established one.
6. If the piping is fully connected or not.

Page 19
Troubleshooting
General Cautions
Here, counter-measures to be taken when troubles have
happened while the motor is in operation are described.
As for general precaution.
1. Consider a cause of the trouble before repairing Before
setting to work, think whether the same thing has
happened before or not.
Also, think again whether it is the motor that is in
trouble.
2. Be careful of dust
It is not too much to say that most troubles are
ascribed to dust so that measures for dust prevention
is taken into consideration with utmost care in the case
of partial disassembling.
3. Handling part
Pay attention to the handling of parts not to injure
them, especially to moving parts such as pistons,
bearing and valves etc.
4. Pay attention to work the handling of o-ring, gasket
Once seals have been disassembled, they should be
replaced even if damage is not observed.
Investigation Manner of the Motor Body

It is extremely difficult to trace trouble in the hydraulic
circuits. Inspect the following items and investigation whether
or not the fault is caused by the motor.
1. Inspection the oil in casing
Remove the drain plug and inspect the hydraulic oil in
the casing. If a large amount of metallic particles come
out with the oil, you should suspect a failure of internal
parts.
2. Presence of abnormal noise
Check whether the motor emits an abnormal noise.
3. Pressure measurement of various points.
Measure pressures at various points and check for
faults, instead of disassembling parts at random.
4. Measurement of drain quantity
A. In the case of locking the swing and adding the
pressure oil to motor, it's normal the drain rate
would be about under 25(10)l/min.
B. In normal swing mode, the drain rate would be
under 2(1)l/min.
Where ( ) is TSM72.

Page 20
Condition & Countermeasures of Troubles
1. Motor dose not rotation
Condition Cause Remedy

The pressure of the 1. Setting pressure of relief valve is 1. Reset the pressure to correct value.
circuit is not incorrect.
2.
increasing
2. Working defectiveness of relief
1) Revise or exchange of stick face.
valve.
2) disassembly or cleaning.
1) Plunger stick.
3. Replace for damaged seat part.
2) Close up an orifice hole of
plunger.
3. Seat defectiveness of plunger.
The pressure of the 1. Overload. 1. Load removes.
circuit is increasing
2. Stick of motion portion. 2. Do repair or inspect the piston/
shoe, cylinder block, valve plate
3. The brake dose not release.
etc.
4. Stick of brake piston.
3.
5. Stick of friction plate.
1) Do repair or inspect circuit
2) Check for the break valve.
3) Assembly and inspection.
4) Assembly and inspection.
Replace for the stick parts.
2. The revolutionary direction is reverse

The revolutionary 1. The revolutionary direction of motor 1. Reassemble them after disassembling.
direction is reverse is reverse.
2. Correct piping.
2. The inlet and outlet in piping is
reversely connected.
3. The number of revolution does not reach the

established value

The number of 1. The volume of flowing is not 1. Check discharge volume of pump
revolution does not sufficient. and circuit up to the motor.
reach the
2. The temperature is too high and 2. Reduce the oil temperature.
established value
too much oil is leaking.
3. Replace it.
3. Valves/pistons/rings etc. are worn
away and broken.

Page 21
4. Brake torque is not sufficient.

Brake torque is not 1. Friction plates are worn. 1. Disassembly or inspection.
sufficient
2. Brake piston is becoming stick. When it is worn better than
standard, replace it.
3. Brake releasing pressure is not
working. 2. Disassembly or inspection
4. Spline of friction plates are 3. 1) Check for the circuit.
damaged.
2) Check for the brake valve
4. Disassembly or inspection.
1) Replace for damaged parts.
5. Motor is much slip

Investigates the DRAIN quantity for motor.
Normal: app. 200cc/min (TSM140:500cc/min)

Motor is much slip 1. Working defectiveness of relief 1. It is the same 1) an item
valve is the same 1) an item.
2. Replace it.
2. Seat defectiveness of plunger.
6. Oil Leak
A. Oil leak from the oil seal

Oil leak from the oil 1. The lip is dirty or damaged. 1. Replace the oil seal.
seal
2. The shaft may be damaged or 2. Replace the driving shaft or
worn out. defective centering of the driving
shaft.
3. The lib is damaged too high
pressure in the casing. 3. It repairs the drain piping which is
closed up.
4. The shaft is rusty.
4. Disassemble, repair, and replace
the oil seal.
B. Oil leak from the blind and union

Oil leak from the 1. O-ring is not in. 1. Insert O-ring.
blind and union
2. O-ring is broken. 2. Replace it.
3. Seal face is defective. 3. Disassemble or repair.
4. The bolt is loose or not tightened. 4. Tighten adequately or replace it.

Page 22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Disassembling & Assembling
Tightening Torque of Bolts

In table 1. is shown tightening torque of bolts used in motor.
In case of reassembling, tighten accurately each bolt in
accordance with table 1.
Table 1 ( ) : TSM72
Tightening Torque
Bolt Size Name Part No.
(kgf•cm)
M6 Hexagon Bolt 120 ±20 400
M20 (M16) Hexagon Socket Bolt 4400 ±660 (2400 ±360) 109
M22 RO Plug 1100 ±100 105
M36 (M24) RO Plug 2450 ±250 (1300 ±100) 105
PF 1/4 Plug 370 ±20 111
M33 Relief Valve 1800 ±100 105

Page 23
Necessary Tools
In table 2, 3 Figure 11. is shown necessary tools for
disassembling and reassembling.
Table 2 ( ) : TSM72
2-face
Name Size Application part Tool
width
Hexagon bolt M6 10 Brake valve Hexagon spanner socket wrench
Hexagon socket
M20 (M16) 17 (14) Hexagon spanner wrench
bolt
Plug M22 10 RO plug Hexagon spanner wrench
Plug M36 (M24) 17 (12) RO plug Hexagon spanner wrench
Plug VP-1/4 19 VP plug Hexagon spanner socket wrench
36 Relief valve Hexagon spanner socket wrench
Table 3 etc. ( ) : TSM72

Spec.
Dimensions
Tool
Plier (For lock ring) For ∅65 axis (∅50)
Driver - Type 2EA
Steel rod About 10 x 8 x 200 1EA
Hammer One each of plastic hammer and metal hammer.
Torque range
• For 100 ~ 450kgf•cm
Torque wrench
• For 400 ~ 1,800kgf•cm
• For 1,200 ~ 4,800kgf•cm
Slide hammer bearing plier
Special tool for removing the break piston 25page reference

Page 24
2 x 7
40
M10
(Effectiveness
Screw Length : 20)
100
250
11
M10
9 7 M10
136
169 (TSM140)
240
FG007428
Figure 11 Special Tool for Removing the Brake Piston

Page 25
Procedures for Disassembly
Please use the following procedures for the inspection and
repair of the motor.
Numerals given in parentheses following the parts names
indicate the parts number shown by the drawing in the
instruction and maintenance manual.
1. Wind the wire rope at motor outside, lift up the motor,
and clean the motor with cleaning oil.
After cleaning, dry with compressed air.
2. Draw the oil out of the casing (301).
3. Mount on a suitable table for the driven-axis (201)
below.
Before disassembling make a match mark on motor
casing (301) and valve casing (101).
FG001856
Figure 12
4. Remove brake valve (400).
FG001857
Figure 13
5. Remove relief valve (107) from valve casing (101).
FG001858
Figure 14

Page 26
6. Remove RO plug (102) and take out spring (103) and
plunger (104) from valve casing (101).
Figure 15
7. Remove swing reactionless valve ass'y (105) from

valve casing (101).
Figure 16
8. Remove hex socket bolts (109, 110) and disassemble

valve casing (101) from casing (301) (When loosening
bolts, the valve casing will be raised by brake springs
(310). Remove valve plate (213) from the valve casing
(101).
Figure 17
9. Remove brake springs (310) from the brake piston

(309).
FG001862
Figure 18

Page 27
10. Disassemble brake piston (309) from casing (301) by
using the special tool for removing the brake piston.
Lit it up straight by using the bolt hole in the brake
piston.
Figure 19
11. After placing the motor horizontally, take out cylinder

block (205) from casing (301).
Remove piston ass'y (203, 204), retainer (207),
spherical bush (206), spacer (208).
When taking out the cylinder block, be careful not to
pull out roller (209).
Be careful not to damage the sliding parts of the
cylinder block, spherical bush and shoe.
And washer (210, 2EA), spring (211), snap ring (212)
are not disassemble at the disassembled cylinder block. Figure 20
12. Pull out friction plate (306, 2EA) and separation plate
(305, 3EA) from casing (301).
(TSM72 : friction plate : 3EA
separation plate : 4EA)
Figure 21
13. Remove swash plate (202) and drive shaft with ball
bearing (303) from casing (301)
Be careful not to damage the ball bearing (303) and oil
seal contact surface.
If you beat a drive shaft end with plastic hammer, it is
easy to be disassembled.
Figure 22

Page 28
14. Do next step if required.
A. Remove parallel pin (304) from casing (301).
FG001867
Figure 23
B. Remove ball bearing (303) with a press from the

Press
drive shaft (201).
Strike the rod lightly and do not reuse the
Drive Shaft
disassembling bearing.
Ball Bearing
Press Table Hangs

in the Inner Ring.
FG007429
Figure 24
C. Take out oil seal (302) from the casing (301) with
a using of tool.
Do not reuse the disassembling oil seal (302). Press
Oil Seal
Rod Casing
FG007430
Figure 25
D. Take out ball bearing from the valve casing (303).
FG001870
Figure 26
15. Disassembling is finished, check each component

throughly.

Page 29
Procedures for Assembly
Following are caution to be specially borne in mind.
A. Rework damaged parts and before assembling,
prepare all parts to be replaced.
B. Clean all parts and dry with compressed air.
C. Coat the sliding parts and bearing with clean
hydraulic oil.
D. Replace o-ring, oil seal.
E. For the mounting of bolts to install the various
parts, please use a torque wrench, etc. and
tighten the bolts with the torque shown in table 1.
1. Place casing (301) on the work table with the valve
casing side downward.
FG001871
Figure 27
2. (It is necessary when oil seal was disassembled from

the casing.)
Insert oil seal (302) at the casing (301) with a using of
tool.
(Be careful to note the direction of oil seal. and insert
until fully seated at the casing end.)
FG001872
Figure 28
3. (It is necessary when ball bearing was disassembled

from the drive shaft.)
Ball bearing (303) is press-fit by the heat to drive shaft
(201).
FG001873
Figure 29

Page 30
4. Insert the drive shaft (101) complete with ball bearing
into casing (301).
Impact the outside surface of outer loop uniformly till
stop at casing section.
Coat the lip of the oil seal with grease and tape
the shaft spline for the protection of spline.
Tap evenly.
Figure 30
5. (It is necessary when parallel pin was disassembled

from the casing.)
Assemble parallel pin (304) to casing (301).
FG001875
Figure 31
6. Assemble swash plate (202) to casing (301).

If casing is horizontal position from the bottom, It is
easy to work.
Figure 32
7. Insert roller (209) to cylinder block (205).

Make sure that cylinder block is assembled with all
component.
(washer (210), spring (211), ring snap (212))
(Be careful not to damage the sliding surface of the
cylinder block. Insert roller to each hole one by one.)
Figure 33

Page 31
8. Place spacer (208), spherical bush (206) to the cylinder
block (205).
Figure 34
9. Assemble the retainer with the piston sub assembly

(203, 204) unit to the cylinder block (205).
Figure 35
10. Insert cylinder block to drive shaft (101) aligning the

spline.
Figure 36
11. Place casing (301) downward and assemble separation

plate (305, 3EA) and friction plate (306, 2EA) in
sequence.
Align 4 tangs to the notches.
Align cut the jaw and assemble that part.
(TSM72 : friction plate : 3EA
separation plate : 4EA)
FG001880
Figure 37

Page 32
12. Mount o-ring (307, 308) to casing (301).
(Coat the O-rings with grease. O-ring can be protected
by grease.)
FG001881
Figure 38
13. Assemble brake piston (309) to casing (301).

The piston is difficult to assemble because of the
restriction of the o-ring; screw in two M8 bolts on the
brake piston and tap them gently with plastic
hammer.
FG001882
Figure 39
14. Assemble brake springs (310) into brake piston (309).

Confirm the springs are fitted to the brake piston
completely.
FG001862
Figure 40
15. (It is necessary when ball bearing (108) was

disassembled from the valve casing.)
Assemble of ball bearing (108).
Insert it to valve casing (101) while tapping it lightly.
Tap evenly on the outer diameter of the outer race
with a brass drift until it completely stops.
Do not use a steel punch or bar on the bearing since
it can chip or crack the race.
FG001884
Figure 41

Page 33
16. Assemble valve plate (231) to valve casing (101) and
fit o-ring (113).
Be careful to note the direction of the valve plate.
Mount the valve plate with its round part toward the
opposite side of the flange.
Coat lightly with grease.
Figure 42
17. Mount valve casing (101) to casing (301) and tighten

hex socket bolts (109, 110) to specification.
Be careful to note the mounting direction of the valve
casing.
(Reference to the drawing)
Be careful not to drop the valve plate or let the brake
springs pop out.
Tighten the bolts evenly.
Figure 43
18. Install plunger (104) and spring (103) to valve casing

(101) and tighten RO plug (102) with o-ring (106).
Confirm the smooth movement of the plunger before
installing the plug.
Figure 44
19. Install swing reactionless valve ass'y (105) to valve

casing (101).
Confirm the spring in the swing reactionless valve ass'y
(105).
Figure 45

Page 34
20. Assemble relief valve (107) with o-ring to valve casing
(101).
FG001858
Figure 46
21. Assemble brake valve (400) to casing (301) and

tightening the hex socket bolts to specified torque.
FG001856
Figure 47
22. The assembly is completed.

Page 35
Maintenance Standards
Standards for Replacement of Worn Parts

If the various parts of the motor have been worn out beyond
the following standard values, please replace them. But this
shall apply only to those cases when is no remarkable
outside damage.
Recommended
Standard value for
Item Remedy
dimension (mm) replacement
(mm)
Clearance between piston and Replace piston or cylinder
0.025 (0.036) 0.055 (0.066)
cylinder bore block.
Gap between piston and Replace piston or shoe.
0.05 0.2
caulked part of shoe (δ)
Thickness of shoe (t) 4.5 (6.5) 4.3 (6.2) Replace piston or shoe.
Assembled height of retainer Replace sperical bush and
10.8 (13.0) 10.3 (12.5)
(H-h) retainer as a pair.
Thickness of friction plate 3.5 3.1 Replace it.
H
h
Gap between piston and caulked part of shoe (δ). Assembled height of retainer (H-h)
Thickness of shoe (t)
Standard for Correcting Sliding Surfaces

If the surface roughness of the sliding surface of a part
exceeds the following standard, correct it or replace the part.
Table 4 Revise standard
Item Surface roughness Roughness requiring correction
Shoe 0.8 - Z (Ra=0.2) (LAPPING) 3 - Z (Ra=0.8)
Swash Plate 0.4 - Z (Ra=0.1) (LAPPING) 3 - Z (Ra=0.8)
Cylinder Block 1.6 - Z (Ra=0.4) (LAPPING) 12.5 - Z (Ra=3.2)
Valve Plate 0.8 - Z (Ra=0.2) (LAPPING) 6.3 - Z (Ra=1.6)
NOTE: Lap each sliding surface to a standard roughness

level or finer.
If the sliding surface of the cylinder block, valve plate,
retaining plate

Page 36
SP001110
TRAVEL MOTOR SP001110
Travel Motor
Edition 1
Travel Motor SP001110

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Travel Motor
General Repair Guidelines.................................. 7
Seal Kits and Sub-assemblies ........................... 8
Replace Seal Nut ......................................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 11
Sealing the Drive Shaft ............................................... 11
Seal of the Control Parts ............................................ 12
Seal fo the Relief Valve / Counter-balance Valve .... 14
Spare Parts List ........................................................... 16
Diassembly of the Port Plate ...................................... 18
Remove of the Positioning Piston .............................. 19
Remove Rotary Group ................................................. 21
Exchanging of the Rotary Group ................................ 22
Inspection Notes........................................................... 23
Assembly ............................................................ 26
Rotary Group Assembly............................................... 26
Rotary Group Adjustment (See Service Information) 28
Assembly of the Port Plate ......................................... 30
Tightening Torques............................................ 32
Shaft Bolts .................................................................... 32
Locking Screws VSTI................................................... 32
Seal-Lock Nuts ............................................................. 33
Cross-slotted Lens Head Screws DIN 7985 .............. 33
Test Procedure .................................................. 34
Hydraulics Schematic ................................................... 36

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Figure 1

Page 6
GENERAL REPAIR GUIDELINES
CAUTION
Observe the following notices when carrying out repair
work at hydraulic aggregates.
HB7M3002
Figure 2
1. Close all ports of the hydraulic aggregates.
HB7M3003
Figure 3
2. Replace all seals.

Use only original Hydromatik spare parts.
HB7M3004
Figure 4
3. Check all seal and sliding surfaces for wear.
CAUTION
Rework of sealing area f. ex. with abrasive paper
can damage surface.
HB7M3005
Figure 5

Page 7
4. Fill up hydraulic aggregates with hydraulic oil before
start- up.
HB7M3006
Figure 6
SEAL KITS AND SUB-

ASSEMBLIES
1. Seal Kit for Drive Shaft.
HB7M3007
Figure 7
2. External Seal Kit
HB7M3008
Figure 8

Page 8
3. Housing
HB7M3009
Figure 9
4. Complete Rotary Group
HB7M3010
Figure 10
5. Port Plate with Control Piston
HB7M3011
Figure 11
6. Counter-balance Valve
HB7M3012
Figure 12

Page 9
7. Relief Valve / Make up Check Valve
Figure 13
Replace Seal Nut

1. Replace seal nut.
First measure and record setting height.
HB7M3014
Figure 14
2. When tightening, counterhold setting screw, then check

setting height.
HB7M3015
Figure 15

Page 10
DISASSEMBLY
Sealing the Drive Shaft
HB7M3016
Figure 16
1. Protecting the drive shaft.

Remove retaining ring and shim.
HB7M3017
Figure 17
2. Screw in sheet metal screw into the holes fitted with

rubber.
Pull out seal with pliers.
HB7M3018
Figure 18

Page 11
3. Press in shaft seal and shim with bush to stop.
CAUTION
Pay attention to pressing depth
CAUTION
Figure 19
Mark for pressing depth.
Assemble retaining ring.
Seal of the Control Parts
HB7M3020
Figure 20
4. Disassembly position: Pos. 1

Remove cover pos. 1
FG007441
Figure 21

Page 12
Reference 1
Description
Number 2
1 O-ring
2 Input Flow of Oil Control
3 Throttle Pin
CAUTION
3 HB7M3022
Installation position differs according to the control Figure 22
components
Reference
Description 1
Number
5
1 Input Flow of Oil Control
2 High Pressure / Low Pressure 2 3
3 High Pressure / Low Pressure
4 Leckage Oil
5 Control Piston 4
HB7M3023
Figure 23
HB7M3024
Figure 24

Page 13
5. Disassembly position: Remove cover pos. 2.
CAUTION
Attention! Spring load. X
Dimension x : Note dimension (begin of regulation).

Pos. 2
FG007442
Figure 25
Reference
Description 1
Number
1 Check of O-ring
HB7M3026
Figure 26
Reference
Description
Number 1
2
O-ring / High Pressure - Small Control
1
Piston Side 4
2 O-ring / Control Pressure
3 O-ring / High Pressure - Check Valve 3
4 O-ring / High Pressure - Check Valve
HB7M3027
Figure 27
Seal of the Relief Valve / Counter-

balance Valve
1. Remove relief valve.
HB7M3028
Figure 28

Page 14
2. Inspect!
O-ring
Figure 29
3. Remove counter-balance valve Inspect!

O-ring
HB7M3030
Figure 30

Page 15
Spare Parts List
Counter-balance Valve
2 8
1
12
15 2
13 10
12 18
7
11
16
3
15
9
5 14
11
17 FG008821
Figure 31
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Valve 10 Plug
2 O-ring 11 O-ring
3 Shuttle Valve 12 O-ring
4 Brake Valve 13 O-ring
5 Housing 14 Plug
6 Cover 15 Plug
7 Cover 16 Screw
8 Plug 17 Socket Bolt
9 Socket Bolt 18 Socket Bolt

Page 16
Brake Release Valve (Pos.4)
1. These parts are not available separately.
Reference
Description
Number
1 Brake Piston
2 Valve Bushing
3 Throttle Pin
4 Valve Screw
5 Bolt Figure 32
6 Spring Collar
11 Pressure Spring
Shuttle Valve (Pos.3)

25
1. These parts are not available separately. 11
Reference 12
Description
Number
10 Valve Screw 10
11 Valve Bush
12 Ball
HB7M3033
Figure 33

Page 17
Diassembly of the Port Plate
1. Note dimension x.
Remove Qmin-screw.
Swivel rotary group to zero position.
CAUTION
For disassembly of the port plate, swivel always
rotary group to zero position.
Piston rings to hang out of the cylinder boring.
Figure 34

Page 18
2. Port plate
Mark position. Loosen screws.
Removal
HB7M3035
Figure 35
3. Check O-ring.
CAUTION
Stick new O-ring with some grease.
Do not swivel rotary group.
Piston rings to hang out from the cylinder boring.
HB7M3036
Figure 36
Remove of the Positioning Piston
HB7M3037
Figure 37

Page 19
1. Loosen fixing screw.
Use only socket wrench.
HB7M3038
Figure 38
2. Remove piston with piston ring
HB7M3039
Figure 39
3. Warm up fixation screw * for positioning plug

via boring (screw glued - to turn out).
CAUTION
Use new screw.
Precote coating.
Note tightening torque!
Figure 40
CAUTION
Stick control lens in sliding surface with grease.
Assembly in reversal order.
Mount port plate.
HB7M3041
CAUTION Figure 41
Rotary group vertical.

Page 20
Remove Rotary Group
HB7M3042
Figure 42
1. Screw in threaded pin into center pin.

Fix the cylinder with disc and locknut.
Size 28 : M4 x 58 mm
55 : M5 x 71 mm
80 : M6 x 82 mm
107 : M6 x 92 mm
140 : M8 x 105 mm
160 : M8 x 105 mm
200 : M8 x 109 mm
HB7M3043
Figure 43
2. Press out rotary group!
CAUTION
If the bearings are used again
do not hit on the drive shaft.
HB7M3044
Figure 44
3. Complete rotary group

Page 21
Exchanging of the Rotary Group
CAUTION
Setting of hydraulic part necessary.
HB7M3010
Figure 45
1. Rotary group
A. Mechanical part: Adjust drive shaft with bearing.
B. Hydraulic part:
CAUTION
Adjustment necessary.
FG003029
Figure 46

Page 22
2. Remove fixing screw (cylinder).
Remove cylinder.
HB7M3047
Figure 47
3. Disassemble retaining plate.
CAUTION
Screws are glued.
Use Torx-tools.
HB7M3048
Figure 48
Inspection Notes
1. Free of corrosion, erosion or fretting; no damage to
splines or keyways.
HB7M3049
Figure 49
2. Pistons
No scoring and no pittings.
HB7M3050
Figure 50

Page 23
3. Center pin
No scoring and no pittings. 1 2
HB7M3051
Figure 51
4. Retaining plate
No scoring and no evidence of wear
HB7M3052
Figure 52
5. Cylinder block / control lens

A. Bores free of scoring, no evidence of wear.
1
B. Faces smooth and even, free of cracks and
scoring. 2
1 2
HB7M3053
Figure 53
6. Control housing Sliding surface and side guides free of

scoring and no wear.
HB7M3054
Figure 54

Page 24
7. Visual check:
Bearing areas free of scoring and no evidence of wear.
HB7M3055
Figure 55

Page 25
ASSEMBLY
Rotary Group Assembly

1. Rotary group completely assembled ready for
assembly.
Figure 56
2. Place assembly sleeve.
Figure 57

Page 26
3. Warm up housing to 80° C.
HB7M3058
Figure 58
4. Insert rotary group into housing to seat position.
Figure 59

Page 27
5. Fix zero position of cylinder with Qmax-screw.
A. Disassemble cylinder fixing screw.
B. Insert O-ring.
Figure 60
Rotary Group Adjustment (See Service

Information)
1. Determine cylinder swivel range to max. angle with
screw.
Figure 61
2. * Disc
Figure 62

Page 28
3. Place centering disc.
HB7M3063
Figure 63
4. Mount measuring device.
Figure 64
5. Check dimension X.
Figure 65

Page 29
Assembly of the Port Plate
1. Assemble port plate.
CAUTION
Take care of assembly design.
Tighten fixing screws with torque.
2. Set Qmin -screw to dimension*.

3. Assemble plug.
4. Remove assembly sleeve.
Figure 66
5. Assemble control components.

Assemble cover.
HB7M3067
Figure 67
6. Assemble cover. Pos. 1
FG007441
Figure 68

Page 30
7. Assemble shaft seal, disc and safety ring.
Press-in with assembly sleeve.
CAUTION
Take care of press-in depth.
Figure 69
Figure 69
8. Assemble counter-balance valve
HB7M3030
Figure 70

Page 31
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Shaft Bolts
(Metric ISO Standard Thread)
The values for tightening torques Strength Classes

shown in the table are valid only for Thread Size 8.8 10.9 12.9
shaft bolts with metric ISO- standard Tightening Torque (lb.ft)
threads and head support surface M 3 0.8 1.2 1.4
dimensions in accordance with DIN
M 4 2.1 3.0 3.6
912, DIN 931 and DIN 933. These
M 5 4.4 6.3 7.4
values are also valid only for light
or unoiled, untreated surface as well M 6 7.4 10.3 12.5
as for use only with torque-indicating M 8 18.4 25.8 30.2
wrenches and force limiting tools. M10 36.1 50.9 61.2
M12 63.4 88.4 106.9
M14 99.5 140.0 169.5
M16 154.8 217.4 261.6
M18 213.7 298.5 357.4
M 20 302.2 427.5 508.5
M 22 405.4 574.9 685.4
M 24 523.5 737.0 884.4
M 27 773.9 1105.5 1326.6
M 30 1068.7 1474.0 1768.8
Locking Screws VSTI

(Metric ISO fine thread)
Thread Size Designation Tightening Torque (lb.ft)

M 8 x 1 VS.TI 8 x 1 -ED/SA = 4
M 10 x 1 VSTI 10 x1 -ED = 7
M 12 x 1.5 VSTI 12 x 1.5 -ED = 15
M 14 x 1.5 VSTI 14 x 1.5 -ED = 22
M 16 x 1.5 VSTI 16 x 1.5 -ED/SA = 22
M 18 x 1.5 VSTI 18 x 1.5 -ED/SA = 29
M 20 x 1.5 VSTI 20 x 1.5 -ED/SA = 37
M 22 x 1.5 VSTI 22 x 1.5 -ED = 44
M 26 x 1.5 VSTI 16 x 1.5 -ED/SA = 51
M 27 x 2 VSTI 27 x 2 -ED = 66
M 30 x 1.5 VSTI 30 x 1.5 -ED/SA = 74
M 33 x 2 VSTI 33 x 2 -ED/SA = 88
M 42 x 2 VSTI 42 x 2 -ED/SA = 147
M 48 x 2 VSTI 48 x 2 -ED = 220

Page 32
Seal-Lock Nuts
(Metric ISO-Standard Thread)

seal-lock nuts of the strength class
Tightening Torque (lb.ft)
8.8 and with metric ISO-standard
thread. M 6 7.4
M 8 16.2
M 10 29.5
M 12 50.9
M 14 81.1
M 16 125.3
Cross-slotted Lens Head Screws DIN

7985
(Metric ISO- Standard Thread)

cross-slotted lens head screws DIN
Tightening Torque (lb.ft)
7985 of the strength class 8.8 and
with metric ISO-standard thread. M 3 0.8
M 4 2.1
M 5 4.4
M 6 7.4
M 8 18.4
M10 36.1

Page 33
TEST PROCEDURE
Test procedure
Oil temperature In tank : 40 ± 5°C Oil : SAE10W Direction of roratlon :
alternating
No. Setting and testing Specification
1 Prepare Function Test Regular
• Install the motor, fill oil In case
• Connect lines
• Start the motor at unload and loaded slowly
2 Set Qmin Qmin = 30.0 ± 1.1 cm3
Speed n= 1667 min -1(QN=50L/min) : clockwise
Pressure PMA = 10 MPa
PX = 0 MPa
PX2 = 15 MPa
PSP = 3 MPa
Loosen the threaded-pin for HA regulation
3 Check Qmin Qmin = 40.0 ± 2.1 cm3
PX = 0 MPa
PX2 = 0 MPa
PSP = 3 MPa
4 Check Qmin and switching. pressure PMA (MPa)
-1
Speed n= 1250 min (QN=50L/min) : clockwise
Pressure PX = 0 MPa 30.0 +3.0
0
PX2 = 0 MPa
PSP = 3 MPa
0 (40) Q(cm3 )
52.5 2.1
5 Set Qmax Qmax = 107.0 ± 1.1 cm3

PX = 0 MPa
PX2 = 0 MPa
PSP = 3 MPa
Tighten the threaded-pin for HA regulation

Page 34
6 Check torque and drain flow T ≥ 289 N•m
Check torque T and dra In flow QT on the following conditions QT < 5.8 L/min
Speed n= 467 min-1(QN=50L/min)Qmax

Pressure PMA = 20.0 MPa
PX = 0 MPa
PX2 = 0 MPa
PSP = 3 MPa
Tighten the threaded-pin for HA regulation
7 Set begin of HA regulation
Speed n= 1250 n-1(QN=50L/min) : clockwise
Pressure PX = 0MPa PA(MPa)
PX2 = 0MPa
PSP = 3MPa 29.0 1.0
Check bealn of HA reaulatlon 12.0

Speed n= 1250 min -1(Q N=50L/min) : clockwise
0 40 107
Pressure PX = 1.0MPa Q(cm3 )
PX2 = 0MPa
PSP = 3MPa
8 Check response Qmin → Qmax : slow
Check response while switching PA(=25⇔35MPa) on the following Qmax → Qmin : slow
conditions
Pressure PX = 0MPa
PX2 = 0MPa
PSP = 3MPa
9 Set relief valves Pmax = 40.0 MPa
Check max. pressure PMA(PMB) = 36.0 ± 1.0 MPa
Set setting pressure of relief valves
on the fol Iwlng conditions
Set both A and B
Speed n= 467 min -1(QN=50L/min)Qmax
Pressure PSP = 3MPa
10 Release Function Test regular as to the outside
• All values within the tolerances drawing (Y120191505)
• Check oil leakage with both directIon of A, B

• Check the noise and vibration
• Close openings with the planned locking elements
• Release

Page 35
Hydraulics Schematic
Figure 71

Page 36
SP000991
COUNTERBALANCE VALVESP000991
Counterbalance
Valve
Edition 1
Counterbalance Valve SP000991

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Counterbalance Valve
While Operating to Run Forward.................................. 6
While Operating to Stop ................................................ 6
While Operating to Back ............................................... 7
Adjustment of Relief Valve ............................................ 8
Troubleshooting .................................................... 9
Counterbalance Valve ....................................... 10
Recommended Tools ................................................... 10
Disassembly .................................................................. 10
Order of Disassembly and Torque Values ................ 11
Reassembly................................................................... 12

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The counterbalance valve is used in such a way that it is
engaged in a running travel motor for the bell-type shovel. It
functions as a double counterbalance valve which prevents
the vehicle body from overrunning while running forward or
backward.
While Operating to Run Forward

It refers to running operation which is done by means of
applying pressure to motor either for accelerated climbing or
for running fast on a flat road like expressway. B port
working on left side of spool will overpower spring, thanks to
pressure, and spool will open completely, causing oil to flow
through individual ports (B → B’ → Motor → A’ → A).
The vehicle body will run at higher speed than speed of
pump discharge due to inertial force while it is in
deceleration or in descent. This will result in decreasing
pressure of B port, causing power pressing the right side of
spool to decline, and the spool to move toward center. This Figure 1
will generate counter pressure at A’ port, which will control
port pressure up to moderate level. At this time, spool will
be controlled at level where pump discharged will be
counterbalanced with counter pressure, and pressure of B
port will be the pressure of spring which will be
counterbalanced with the controlled level of spool.
While Operating to Stop

Stop operation involves decrease of pressure of B port,
causing spool to move to neutral position where only the
neutral orifice will work. This set orifice will cause A’ port to
generate counter pressure, allowing the vehicle body with
hydraulic brake to stop.
The relief valve regulates pressure of brake which came into
operation when the pressure produced, at stop operation,
from neutral orifice (counter pressure) reached the set
pressure of valve. It also offers such operation as cutoff of
surge pressure which is produced, at a rapid operation like
an additional manipulation, from A port. If there occurs no
cavitation at A’ (B’) port, oil is supplied from T port.
Therefore, there are anti-cavitation check for both sides.

Page 6
While Operating to Back
Backward operation also has counterbalancing function like
forward operation. The spool moves to left when motor
works either for accelerated climbing or for uniform running
on a flat road, while oil flows through individual ports (B →
B’ to Motor to A’ to A). While in deceleration and in decent,
counter pressure is produced at B’ port, contrary to the case
of forwarding, causing vehicle body to be under control.
While in operation to stop, spool moves toward neutral
position and counter pressure produced from neutral orifice
(at B’ port) produces braking pressure of the relief valve,
which forces the vehicle body to stop.

Page 7
Adjustment of Relief Valve
Turning the adjusting screw right with a hexagon wrench will
allow pressure to increase, and turning it left will allow
pressure to decrease. One turn of an adjusting nut will
make change of about 80.0 kg/cm2 (1,140 psi).
Figure 2 Function Schematic

Page 8
TROUBLESHOOTING
Motor does not operate. Malfunction of spool (It is on status Torque mounting bolts.
of deployment).
Check for damage, replace or repair.
Malfunction of check valve of Torque mounting bolts.
anticavitation (Impracticable to adjust).
Acceleration time needs to Malfunction of spool (It is on status Torque mounting bolts.
be taken for operation of of deployment).
motor.
Orifice damper for counterbalance Disassemble and clean.
is clogged.
Relief valve pressure improperly Readjust pressure.
adjusted.
Deceleration of motor not Damper for counterbalance is Disassemble and clean.
performed smoothly. clogged.
Neutral part of spool defective
Relief valve pressure improperly Readjust pressure.
adjusted.
Abnormal sound with rapid Damper for counterbalance is Torque mounting bolts.
deceleration at high speed. clogged.
Disassemble and clean.
Neutral part of spool defective.

Page 9
COUNTERBALANCE VALVE
Recommended Tools
Hexagonal Wrench 2.5, 4, 8, 14, 30 mm

Torque Wrench 0 - 15 kg•m (0 - 115 ft lb)
Loctite 242, 572
Seal Tape 150
Disassembly
NOTE: Disassemble counterbalance valve in reverse order
of assembly.

Page 10
Order of Disassembly and Torque Values
Figure 3

Page 11
Reassembly
1. Install plug (3) and spring (20) to spool (2).
Figure 4
2. Apply Loctite #242 to plug (4) and install into spool (2).
Torque to 75.5 ±7 kg•m (548 ±50 ft lb). Install plugs
on other side following steps 1 and 2.
Figure 5
3. Install small ball bearings (12) into body (1).
Figure 6
4. Install guide (7) into body (1).
Figure 7

Page 12
5. Install plug (33) into body and torque to 71.9 ±2.3
kg•m (520 ±16 ft lb).
Figure 8
6. Apply Loctite #241 to orifice (17) and install into body

(1) (on both sides). Torque to 70.16 ±0.2 kg•m (507 ±2
ft lb).
Figure 9
7. Apply Loctite #572 and wind seal tape around plug

(16), and install to body (1) (both sides). Torque to
70.25 ±0.3 kg•m (508 ±2 ft lb).
Figure 10
8. Install small ball bearings (11) and spring (21) into

body (1) (both sides).
Figure 11

Page 13
9. Install plug (5) into body (1) (both sides) and torque to
70.75 ±0.95 kg•m (511 ±7 ft lb).
Figure 12
10. Install O-ring (25) into body (1) (both sides).

NOTE: It is recommended to replace O-ring with new.
Figure 13
11. Install spool (2) into body (1).
Figure 14
12. Install spring (19) into body (1), then install cover (6).
Figure 15

Page 14
13. Tighten cover (6) (both sides) and torque to 75.6 ±7
kg•m (548 ±50 ft lb).
Figure 16
14. Install plunger (8) and spring (18), in that order, into
body (1).
Figure 17
15. Install plug (14) into body (1) (both sides) and torque
to 71.2 ±1.5 kg•m (505 ±10 ft lb).
Figure 18
16. Install plug (33) into body (1) (both sides) and torque
to 71.9 ±2.3 kg•m (520 ±16 ft lb).
Figure 19

Page 15
17. Install relief valve (9) into body (1) (both sides).
Figure 20
18. Torque to 78 ±9 kg•m (564 ±65 ft lb).
Figure 21
19. Install O-rings (22) and (23) into body (1).

NOTE: It is recommended to replace O-rings with new.
Figure 22
NOTE: Reassembled counterbalance valve is shown.
Figure 23

Page 16
SP000988
MAIN PUMP & PTO SP000988
Main Pump &

PTO
Edition 1
Main Pump & PTO SP000988

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Main Pump & PTO
Section.................................................................. 7
General Repair Guidelines.................................. 8
Seal Kits and Sub-assemblies ........................... 9
Disassembly ....................................................... 13
Sealing the Drive Shaft ............................................... 13
Gear Pump Sealing ..................................................... 15
Control Housing ............................................................ 16
Control Module LR ....................................................... 19
Control Module H ......................................................... 20
Controller ....................................................................... 21
Rotary Groups .............................................................. 23
Intermediate Wheel ...................................................... 26
Auxiliary Drive............................................................... 28
Inspection Hints ................................................. 31
Assembly ............................................................ 36
Rotary Group ................................................................ 36
Pump ............................................................................. 37
Hydraulic Component - Measurement "D" ................. 40
Control Housing ............................................................ 43
Intermediate Wheel ...................................................... 46
Gear Pump ................................................................... 47
Cover / Auxiliary Drive ................................................ 48
Assembly Guidelines for Tightening Torques.. 49
Bolts (to N 08.001) ...................................................... 49
Plugs with Internal Hexagon and Profile Seal Ring
(to N 02.009) ................................................................ 50
Seal-Lock - Sealing Nuts (to N 02.100) .................... 50

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
SECTION
Figure 1

Page 7
GENERAL REPAIR GUIDELINES
CAUTION
Observe the following notices when carrying out repairs
on hydraulic units!
HB7M3002
Figure 2
1. Close off all openings of the hydraulic unit.
HB7M3003
Figure 3
2. Replace all of the seals.

Use only original HYDROMATIK spare parts.
HB7M3004
Figure 4
3. Check all sealing and sliding surfaces for wear.
CAUTION
Re-work of the sliding surfaces by using, for
example with abrasive paper, can damage the
surface.
HB7M3005
Figure 5

Page 8
4. Fill the hydraulic unit with hydraulic oil before
commissioning.
Figure 6
SEAL KITS AND SUB-

ASSEMBLIES
1. Seal kit for drive shaft.
FG003063
Figure 7
2. Peripheral seal kit.
Figure 8

Page 9
3. Rotary group 1, ready to install.
FG003065
Figure 9
4. Rotary group 2, ready to install.
Figure 10
5. Rotary group, hydraulic component (order rotary groups

1 and 2 separately). Adjustment is necessary!
CAUTION
Direction of rotation.
Figure 11
6. Rotary group 1, mechanical section, ready to install.
Figure 12

Page 10
7. Rotary group 2, mechanical section, ready to install.
Figure 13
8. Control, pre-adjusted.
Figure 14
9. Gear pump, complete.
Figure 15
10. Intermediate Gear
Figure 16

Page 11
11. Auxiliary Drive
Figure 17

Page 12
DISASSEMBLY
Sealing the Drive Shaft
Figure 18
1. Protect drive shaft. (e.g. tape).
Figure 19

Page 13
2. Remove retaining ring and shim.
HB7M3017
Figure 20
3. Screw in sheet metal screw into the holes fitted with

rubber.
Pull out seal with pliers.
HB7M3018
Figure 21
4. Press in shaft seal ring and shim with bush to stop.
CAUTION
Take note of press-in depth!
Install mark for press-in depth of safety ring.
Figure 22

Page 14
Gear Pump Sealing
1. Remove gear pump.
Figure 23
Visual Check :
Reference
Description
Number
1 O-ring
2 Sealing Surface of the Housing
Figure 24

Page 15
Control Housing
1. Place the pump into a disassembly / assembly device
with a crane and fix it.
Figure 25

Page 16
CAUTION
Mark installation position.
2. Loosen fixing screws of port plate and remove the port

plate.
Lift the port plate away with a crane.
CAUTION
Control lenses can fall down.
Figure 26
3. Remove paper seal, clean sealing surface.
Figure 27

Page 17
Figure 28
Reference
Description
Number
1 Setting Screw Qmax
Setting Screw Hydraulic Stroke
2
Limitation
Setting Screw Power Characteristic
3
(Begin of Regulation)

Page 18
CAUTION
Before carrying out a setting or disassembly of the
regulator, measure the measurement X and note of
the setting screw.
Figure 29

Page 19
Control Module LR
1. Remove and disassemble control module LR.
Figure 30
Figure 31

Page 20
Control Module H
1. Remove and disassemble control module H.
Figure 32

Page 21
Controller
1. Remove cover.
CAUTION
Do not change the setting screw (1).
Figure 33

Page 22
2. Loosen fixing screws.
CAUTION
Fit control lens - torque support.
Figure 34
3. Remove locking screw and replace with a new locking

screw.
CAUTION
Loosen adhesive with a "gentle" flame (approx.120°C ).
Figure 35
Figure 36
4. Loosen swivel pin and then remove it.
Figure 37

Page 23
Rotary Groups
Figure 38
1. Keep the cylinder with a device (Remove it completely

with the drive shaft).
Figure 39
2. Remove cylinder (Take out the drive shaft without

cylinder).
Figure 40

Page 24
3. Remove cup springs 1 and spring cup 2.
Figure 41
4. Remove the positions (1,2 and 3).
Figure 42
5. Press out hydraulically or mechanically rotary group

with a tool device.
Figure 43

Page 25
Figure 44
CAUTION
Pos. * Drive shafts with bearing set are the
smallest assembly group.
6. The assembly group is adjusted to measurement A.

The tapered roller bearings are adjusted to the
specified through-torque.
CAUTION
Fixing screw - Retaining device

Page 26
7. Loosen of the screws is only possible if the drive shaft
is warmed up at a temperature of approx. 120°C 1/2
hour in an oil bath or heat air furnace.
Screw out the screw quickly.
Intermediate Wheel
1. * Press in bolt into the gear wheel. (Fixed pressing fit).
Can only be disassembled with a hydraulic press.
Figure 45
CAUTION
Install sleeve.
Press out bolt with a hydraulic manual press.
Figure 46

Page 27
Figure 47
Figure 48

Page 28
Auxiliary Drive
Figure 49
1. Remove fixing screws - auxiliary drive.
Figure 50
2. Press off bearing cap.
Figure 51

Page 29
3. In the event of leakage, visual check of O-ring, housing
and groove.
Figure 52
4. Fit extractor device.

Pull out output pinion.
Figure 53
Figure 54
5. Fit bearing extractor device.
Figure 55

Page 30
6. Completely mount device and pull out bearing.
Figure 56
7. Pull out pinion bearing.
Figure 57

Page 31
INSPECTION HINTS
1. Check to see that the bearing area is free of scores
and that there is no evidence of wear.
Figure 58
2. Visual Check:
To ensure that the bearing seats are free of scores.
Figure 59
3. Visual Check:
Check to see that the bearing area is free of scores
and that there is no evidence of wear.
Figure 60
4. Axial piston play. (Checked with the retaining plate

fitted)
Figure 61

Page 32
5. Drive Shafts
A. Check to ensure that the cups are free of scores
and that there are no pittings.
B. Check to see that there is no evidence of
corrosion and wear steps.
Figure 62
6. Piston
Check to ensure that they are free of scores and that
there are no pittings.
HB7M3050
Figure 63
7. Central Pin
Check to ensure that it is free of scores and that there
are no pittings.
Figure 64
8. Retaining Plate
Check to ensure that it is free of scores and that there
is no evidence of wear.
HB7M3052
Figure 65

Page 33
9. Cylinder Block / Control Lens
Check to ensure that:
A. The bores (1) are free of scores, no evidence of 1
wear. 2
1 2
B. The faces (2) are even, that there are no cracks,
no scores. 2
C. The side guides (3) show no evidence of wear,
fre of scores.
HB7M3053
Figure 66
10. Check
Control land 1, internal control drilling 2, pin cups 3.
Figure 67
11. Check
That sliding surfaces 1 are free of scores, seal 2.
Figure 68

Page 34
12. Complete Rotary Group
(1) Rotary Group
A. Mechanical component: drive shaft is adjusted
with the bearing
B. Hydraulic component: Adjustment is necessary
*.
CAUTION
Adjustment of the hydraulic component is
necessary.
Figure 69

Page 35
(2) Rotary Group: All of the components
* Adjustment
For adjustment values, torque values, see service
information
Figure 70

Page 36
ASSEMBLY
Rotary Group
1. The threads must be free of oil, grease, dust or any
other contaminants which may impair the locking of the
screws.
Figure 71
2. Fit the retaining plate with pistons and centre pin into
place.
Use screws that have a Precote coating.
* For tightening torques, see service information.
Figure 72
3. Fit the spring plate 1 and cup springs 2 into their

correct position (and orientation) using grease to hold
them into place.
Figure 73

Page 37
4. Ensure that all of the parts are assembled in correct
order and orientation.
Figure 74
5. Insert pistons into the cylinder. Using a soft surface as

a support to prevent the sliding surfaces from being
damaged. Pre-assemble both of the rotary groups in
this manor.
Figure 75
Pump
1. Warm up the housing to approx. 80 °C.
Figure 76
2. Insert the pre-assembled rotary group 2, taking into

account gear tooth markers.
Figure 77

Page 38
3. Insert rotary group 1. Align the marked gear teeth.
Figure 78
4. The gear tooth markers must coincide.
Figure 79
CAUTION
Adjustment of measurement D.
Control hydraulic part!
HB7M3002
Figure 80

Page 39
CAUTION
Drive Shafts with Bearing Set
The assembly group is adjusted to dimension (A).
The tapered roller bearings are adjusted to the
stipulated breakaway torque.
Figure 81
Assembly Guideline
1. Retaining Force
After the rotary group has been fitted into the housing,
it has to be pressed in until the end stop is reached.
Allow the housing to cool down from its assembly
temperature (approx. 80°C) to room temperature.
2. Adjustment of the Hydraulic Component of the Rotary
Group
The adjustment of dimension D is carried outusing
spring plates of differing thickness, so that the correct
clearance is achieved between the rotary group which
is fitted in the housing and the centre pinand spring
plates.
Dimension (D) = 0.4 ± 0.1 mm
After assembly of the complete unit the breakaway
torque of the rotary group has to be checked with the
torque wrench.

Page 40
Hydraulic Component - Measurement "D"
1. Measuring Device
Hydraulic component 452 269
Figure 82
Size 80 107 140 200

Measuring Device 9452269 9452269 9452269 9452269
1 Centering Device 1x 9452019 9452022 9452026 9452025
4 Intermediate Ring 2x 9452014 9452014 9452015 9452015
5 Shim 2x 9083277 9083277 9083279 9083279
6 S.H.C.S 2x 9083105 9083105 9083134 9083134
7 Intermed. Plate 2x 2775186 2775187
2. Mounting Position
Ensure that the correct mounting position is used.
The numbers on the top of the measuring device (*)
refer to the piston diameter.
Size 80 107 140 200

Mounting Position 22 25 28 28
Figure 83

Page 41
Figure 84
A. NG / size 80 - 107
Figure 85
B. Only size 140 - 200

Fit the intermediate plates onto the housing.
Figure 86
3. Zero Adjustment - measuring device

Turn using the hand wheel until the stop is reached.
- Set dial gauge to zero -
A. NG / size 80 - 107
Figure 87

Page 42
B. NG / size 140 - 200
Figure 88
4. Measuring Procedure
Turn down by 4 turns on the dial gauge.
Check: 2 mm clearance, set dial gauge to "Zero".
Clearance: Size 28 - 200 0.4 mm ± 0.1
A. NG / size 80 - 107
Figure 89
B. NG / size 140 - 200
Figure 90
5. Measuring Procedure
Turn down, using the hand wheel, until resistance is
met.
Read the measured value.
CAUTION
Don't use excessive force.
A. NG / size 80 - 107 Figure 91

Page 43
B. NG / size 140 - 200
Figure 92
Control Housing
Figure 93

Page 44
1. Fit the swivel pin into correct position and orientation.
Take the hardening time and tightening torque into
account.
* M6 = 8.5 N•m
M8 = 14 N•m
M10 = 35 N•m
M12 = 69 N•m
Figure 94
2. Push on the piston ring by hand.

Fix adjustment piston.
Take the tightening torques into account.
Figure 95
3. Fit control housing.
Figure 96

Page 45
Figure 97
4. Fit the control lens in its correct position using grease

to hold it in place.
Figure 98
5. Fit seal* and controller.
Figure 99

Page 46
Intermediate Wheel
1. Press in bearing into housing.
2. Install and align the intermediate wheel through side
drive opening.
CAUTION
Cool down the bolt with nitrogen and place it.
3. Press in bearing.
Figure 100
4. Press in the bearing into the housing.
Figure 101

Page 47
Gear Pump
1. Assemble shaft seal, disc and safety ring.
Press-in with assemble sleeve.
Figure 102
CAUTION
Take care of press-in depth!
Figure 103

Page 48
Cover / Auxiliary Drive
Figure 104

Page 49
ASSEMBLY GUIDELINES FOR
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Bolts (to N 08.001)
The values stated are valid for bolts with metric ISO threads
to DIN 13 part 13, as well as head areas to DIN 912
socked head cap screws, DIN 931 hexagon bolt or DIN 933
hexagon bolts with threads up to the head.
Tensile Strength Class

Thread 8.8 10.9 12.9
Tightening Torque MA in N•m
M8 x 1 5 G 1/8 A 10 FG003163
M10 x 1 10 G 1/4 A 30 Figure 105
M12 x 1.5 20 G 3/8 A 35
M14 x 1.5 30 G 1/2 A 60
M16 x 1.5 35 G 3/4 A 90
M18 x 1.5 40 G 1 A 140
M20 x 1.5 50 G 1 1/4 A 240
M22 x 1.5 60 G 1 1/2 A 300
M26 x 1.5 70
M27 x 2 90
M30 x 1.5 100
M33 x 2 140
M42 x 2 240

Page 50
Plugs with Internal Hexagon and Profile
Seal Ring (to N 02.009)
Thread Tightening Torque MA in N•m
M8 x 1 5
M10 x 1 10
M12 x 1.5 20
G
M14 x 1.5 30
M16 x 1.5 35
M18 x 1.5 40
M20 x 1.5 50 Seal
M22 x 1.5 60 FG007439
M26 x 1.5 70 Figure 106
M27 x 2 90
M30 x 1.5 100
M33 x 2 140
M42 x 2 240
M48 x 2 300
G 1/8 A 10
G 1/4 A 30
G 3/8 A 35
G 1/2 A 60
G 3/4 A 90
G 1 A 140
G 1 1/4 A 240
G 1 1/2 A 300
Seal-Lock - Sealing Nuts (to N 02.100)

Thread Tightening Torque MA in N•m
M6 10
M6 x 0.5 11
M8 22
M8 x 1 24
M10 40
M10 x 1 44
M12 69
M12 x 1.5 72 FG003165
M14 110 Figure 107
M14 x 2 120
M16 170
M16 x 1.5 180

Page 51
Page 52
SP000989
GEAR PUMP SP000989
Gear Pump
Edition 1
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 1
MEMO
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 2
Table of Contents
Gear Pump
Single Gear Pump............................................... 6
Disassembly .................................................................... 6
Reassembly..................................................................... 8
Double Gear Pump ........................................... 12
Disassembly .................................................................. 12
Reassembly................................................................... 14
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 3
MEMO
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 5
SINGLE GEAR PUMP
Disassembly
1. Clean exterior of pump.
FG001072
Figure 1
2. Remove clamp bolts.
FG001074
Figure 2
3. Cover sharp edges of drive shaft with adhesive tape

and coat shaft end extension with clean grease, to
avoid any damage to lip of shaft seal when removing
mounting flange.
FG001073
Figure 3
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 6
4. Remove mounting flange taking care to keep flange as
straight as possible during removal.
If mounting flange is stuck, tap around edge with
rubber mallet in order to break it away from body.
NOTE: Make sure that while removing mounting flange,
shaft and other components remain in position.
FG001075
Figure 4
5. Remove retaining ring, if replacement is necessary.
FG000834
Figure 5
6. Remove shaft seal taking care not to damage surface

of shaft hole, if replacement is necessary.
FG000835
Figure 6
7. Pull drive gear up to facilitate removal of front plate.
FG001076
Figure 7
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 7
8. Remove driving gear and driven gear, keeping gears
as straight as possible.
FG001077
Figure 8
9. Remove rear plate and end cover.
FG001078
Figure 9
Reassembly
1. Clean all components with care.
FG001078
Figure 10
2. Using a suitable driver, install shaft seal in mounting

flange.
FG000839
Figure 11
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 8
3. Install retaining ring in groove.
FG000840
Figure 12
4. Install O-ring on both sides of rear section of body.

NOTE: Coat O-rings with grease to hold O-rings in
body.
FG001079
Figure 13
5. Install rear section body on rear cover.
FG001080
Figure 14
6. Install seals in pressure plate(s) groove. Then install

backup ring in groove with seals. Coat seals with Outlet Side
grease.
NOTE: The front and rear pressure plates and seals
and backup rings are the same.
Inlet Side
FG001401
Figure 15
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 9
7. Insert pressure plate assembly into body while keeping
it straight.
NOTE: Seal side should face to rear cover, opposite
side of gears.
NOTE: Pay attention to installation direction of seal.
FG001081
Figure 16
8. Install drive gear and driven gear.
FG001082
Figure 17
9. Insert pressure plate into body in proper direction.
FG001083
Figure 18
10. Locate mounting flange in right position.
FG001084
Figure 19
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 10
11. Tighten bolts with washer in a crisscross pattern to a
torque value of 45 Nm.
FG001085
Figure 20
12. Check that pump rotates freely when drive shaft is

turned by hand. If not a pressure plate seal may be
pinched.
FG000851
Figure 21
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 11
DOUBLE GEAR PUMP
Disassembly
1. Clean exterior of pump.
FG000830
Figure 22
2. Remove clamp bolts.
FG000831
Figure 23
3. Cover sharp edges of drive shaft with adhesive tape,

and coat shaft end extension with clean grease, to
avoid any damage to lip of shaft seal when removing
mounting flange.
FG000832
Figure 24
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 12
4. Remove mounting flange taking care to keep flange as
straight as possible during removal.
If mounting flange is stuck, tap around edge with
rubber mallet in order to break it away from body.
NOTE: Make sure that while removing mounting flange,
shaft and other components remain in position.
FG000833
Figure 25
5. Remove retaining ring, if replacement is necessary.
FG000834
Figure 26
6. Remove shaft seal taking care not to damage surface

of shaft hole, if replacement is necessary.
FG000835
Figure 27
7. Pull drive gear up to facilitate removal front plate.

Remove drive gear, driven gear, rear plate, keeping
gears as straight as possible.
FG000836
Figure 28
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 13
8. Remove intermediate cover and through shaft.
FG000837
Figure 29
9. Remove all remaining components in same manner as

first section.
FG000838
Figure 30
Reassembly
1. Clean all components with care.
FG000838
Figure 31
2. Using a suitable driver, install shaft seal in mounting

flange.
FG000839
Figure 32
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 14
3. Install retaining ring in groove.
FG000840
Figure 33
4. Install O-ring on both sides of rear section of body.

NOTE: Coat O-rings with grease to hold O-rings in
body.
FG000841
Figure 34
5. Install rear section body on rear cover.
FG000842
Figure 35
6. Install seals in pressure plate(s) groove. Then install

backup ring in groove with seals. Coat seals with Outlet Side
grease.
NOTE: The front and rear pressure plates and seals
and backup rings are the same.
Inlet Side
FG001401
Figure 36
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 15
7. Insert pressure plate assembly into body while keeping
plate straight.
NOTE: Seal side should face to rear cover, opposite
side of gears.
NOTE: Pay attention to direction of seal.
FG000844
Figure 37
8. Install drive gear and driven gear.
FG000845
Figure 38
9. Insert pressure plate into body in proper direction.
FG000846
Figure 39
10. Install intermediate cover, one rear section, and through

shaft.
FG000847
Figure 40
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 16
11. Install remaining section using preceding procedure.
FG000848
Figure 41
12. Locate mounting flange in right position.
FG000849
Figure 42
13. Tighten bolts with washer in a crisscross pattern to a

torque value of 45 Nm.
FG000850
Figure 43
14. Check that pump rotates freely when drive shaft is

turned by hand. If not a pressure plate seal may be
pinched.
FG000851
Figure 44
Gear Pump SP000989

Page 17
Gear Pump SP000989
Page 18
SP000990
SERVICE BRAKE SUPPLY VALVESP000990
Service Brake
Supply Valve
Edition 1
Service Brake Supply Valve SP000990

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Service Brake Supply Valve
Diagram of Brake Supply Valve Assembly Package .. 7
Functions of Brake Supply Valve Assembly Package 8
Exploded View and Tools ........................................... 10
Cautions for Disassembly and Re-assembly ............. 11
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................. 12
How to Check Brake Pressure ................................... 13

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
Diagram of Brake Supply Valve
Assembly Package
Brake Supply Valve Assembly Package includes parts
described in the table below.
Figure 1
No. Part name Part specification Quantity Remark

1 Manifold Block 130 ∗ 127 ∗ 64 1 2-A1109-94-2
2 Logic Valve LRDA-XDN 1 C1
3 Relief Valve DE-RVA-OO-3000 1 C2
4 Check Valve FD-DCP-O-B 3 C3, C4, C5
5 Unloading Valve QPAB-LAN 1 C6
6 Plug PT 1/4" 3
7 Plug PT 1/8" 6
8 Plug PF 1/4" 3 PSA,GP,G1

Page 7
Functions of Brake Supply Valve
Assembly Package
Functions
This Brake Supply Valve Assembly Package has functions
as below:
1. Prevents overload on brake pump saving energy.
2. Performs a function as a safety device of the brake
control device.
3. Supplies brake control pressure.
Valve No. Valve Name Valve Functions Remark

C1 Logic Valve Remote controlled by set values of Unloading
(LRDA-XDN) Valve (QPAB-LAN: C6).
C2 Relief Valve Performs functions as a safety device that prevent Set pressure:
(DE-RVA-00-3000) the destructions and damages of the system 16.5 l/min. @
resulting from overload or abnormal pressure 160 ±2kgf/cm2
within the brake control system.
C3 Check Valve Prevents reverse flows of the pressure and oil
(FD-DCP-O-B) created by the brake control system.
C4, C5 Check Valve Prevents damages in the pressure and oil that are
(FD-DCP-O-B) compressed in the accumulator installed at the
ACC'A and ACC'B Ports.
C6 Unloading Valve Keeps the pump moving under no load by Cut-in set
(QPAB-LAN) bypassing discharged pressure and oil to the tank point: 16.5 l/
from the pump when the brake control system is min. @
overloaded. 103 +2kgf/cm2
Detailed Functions and Application of Brake Supply

Valve Assembly Package
1. Prevents overload on brake pump saving energy.
The pressure and oil flows discharged by the brake
pump is supplied to the brake control device through
valves. As the engine revolution (RPM) of the vehicle
goes up, the revolution of the brake pump goes up
increasing the amount of pressure and oil discharge.
This valve package prevents energy loss by reducing
loss in sources of power and fluid energy.
In case the pressure of the brake control system
exceeds the set pressure value of the Unloading Valve
(QPAB-LAN:C6), the pilot spool in the Unloading Valve
is operated to bypass oil flows on the drain line of the
Logic Valve (LRDA-XDN:C1) to the "T" line. This
releases the spool in the Logic Valve to bypass the
pressure and oil discharged by the pump to the tank,
allowing the pump to move under no load.

Page 8
If the pressure value of the brake control system goes
below a set pressure value, the pilot spool of the
Unloading Valve closes. This will make the drain line
have oil flows and the spool in the Logic valve closes.
Then, the pressure and oil flows discharged by the
pump are supplied into the brake control device.
Cut-out is when the pressure and oil flows discharged
by the pump are bypassed, and cut-in is when they
are supplied to the brake control device.
The default setting of the Unloading Valve is as below:
Standard Set Point

Oil Flow
Cut-in Cut-out Cut-in Cut-out
16.5 l/min. 103 ±2kgf/cm2 125 ±2kgf/cm2 103 + 2kgf/cm2 125 + 2kgf/cm2
2. Performs a function as a safety device of the brake

control device.
An overload within the brake control device created by
external force can cause an abnormal rise in pressure
resulting in damages or breakage on all brake control
devices. However, the Relief Valve (DE-RVA-00-3000:
C2) is installed to prevent these troubles. In case the
brake pressure exceeds a set pressure value of the
Relief Valve, the Relief Valve operates to maintain the
set pressure value. That is, the valve returns any
excess pressure over a set pressure value to the tank
to cut off an abnormal rise of pressure caused by
overloads inside the system, preventing damages and
breakage on all devices in the system.
The default setting of the Relief Valve is as below:
Oil Flow Standard Set Point

16.5 l/min. 160 ±2kgf/cm2 160 + 2kgf/cm2
3. Supplies brake control pressure.

Stepping on the brake pedal, the compressed pressure
in the accumulator is reduced below a cut-in set point
and the pilot spool in the Unloading Valve closes,
resulting in oil flows on the drain line of the Logic
Valve. This oil flow keeps the spool in the Logic Valve
closed.
The pressure and oil flows discharged by the pump are
then supplied to the accumulator and the brake control
device. In case the pressure value exceeds the cut-out
set point of the Unloading Valve, the Logic Valve and
the Unloading Valve operates to bypass the pressure
and the oil flows discharged by the pump to the tank,
allowing the pump move with no load and also
preventing pressure surges in the brake system. Check
Valves (C4, C5) maintain brake control functions of
each brake without affecting the other brake on the
other side as each brake circuit is separated.

Page 9
Exploded View and Tools
The assembly torque of each part in the Brake Supply Valve
Assembly Package is described in <Table 1>. Observe the
specified torque values using the right tool.
1. Disassembly, re-assembly of Brake Supply Valve
Assembly Package, and necessary tools.
Disassembly
Assembly
FG007444
Figure 2
Assembly Torque
No. Part Name Screw Spec Assembling Tools
(kg•cm)
1 Logic valve M20 x 1.5 450 ± 50 Torque wrench/32mm Hex. socket
2 Relief valve UNF7/8-14" 450 ± 50 Torque wrench/1" Hex. socket
3★ 3 Check Valve UNF7/8-14" 450 ± 50 Torque wrench/1" Hex. socket
4 Unloading Valve M20 x 1.5 450 ± 50 Torque wrench/32mm Hex. socket
5★ 3 PT 1/4" Plug PT 1/4-19" 500 Torque wrench/6mm Wrench socket
6★ 6 PT 1/8" Plug bolt PT 1/8-28" 280 Torque wrench/5mm Wrench socket
7★ 3 PF 1/4" Plug PF 1/4-19" 250 ± 25 Torque wrench/19mm Hex.socket

Page 10
Cautions for Disassembly and Re-assembly
1. Clean up the surrounding area to remove any foreign
substances before disassembly and reassembly.
2. Make sure to observe the assembly torques and tools
specified in table when disassembling and re-
assembling parts.
3. Follow the directions described in the above drawing
for disassembly and re-assembly.
4. Be careful not to let any contaminants go into the
package when re-assembling.
5. Make sure to clean parts before re-assembly after
disassembly.
6. Wrap the screw thread with seal tapes (teflon tapes)
3~4 times when re-assembling the PT series plugs.

Page 11
Troubleshooting Guide
Symptom Checkpoints Descriptions Remedy
Unable to supply 1. Foreign materials, 1. Disassemble the Logic Valve and Remove foreign
pressure to contaminants in the check if any foreign materials or materials and
brake Logic Valve. contaminants such as sludge is clean the
lodged in between spool and body. contaminated area
2. Foreign materials, 2. Disassemble the Logic Valve and Remove foreign
contaminants in check if any foreign materials or materials and
Relief Valve contaminants such as sludge is clean the
lodged in between poppet and body. contaminated
area.
3. Discharge pressure 3. Install a pressure gauge at the "G1" Locate cause of
and its amount Port to measure pressure value problems and
pumped by brake discharged by brake pump: correct.
pump
- under low engine RPM operations
- with Unloading Valve fully closed
- set point: 160 ±2kgf/cm2

Brake light is on 1. Cut-in of the 1 Check cut-in pressure of the Readjust the
Unloading Valve Unloading Valve (QPAB-LAN, C6). pressure value.
- Install a pressure gauge at the
"G1" Port to measure cut-in
pressure.
- Set point: 103 ±2kgf/cm2

2. Pressure switch 2. If there is no problem with the Locate cause of
above checkpoint 1 but the brake problems and
light is still on, check the connection correct.
of the pressure switch.
- set point: 60kgf/cm2 ±10%

3. Contamination in 3. Check the element screen inside Clean the filter
brake filter element brake filter if it is contaminated by and replace.
foreign materials.
4. Foreign materials, 4. Refer to the above Descriptions 1 Remove foreign
contaminants in the and 2 for Checkpoints "Unable to materials and
Logic Valve and supply pressure to brake". clean the
the Relief Valve contaminated
area.
Cut-in and cut- 1. Damages in O-ring 1. Disassemble each Check Valve (C3, Replace Check
out cycles are and backup rings C4, C5) and check up on O-ring Valve.
too fast installed in Check and backup rings if damaged
Valve
2. Leakage in Foot 2. Remove hydraulic hoses installed at Replace Foot
Brake Valve outlets (Ports BR1, BR2) of Foot Brake Valve.
Brake Valve to check leakage:
- with the brake pedal unpressed
(Neutral)
- set point: Refer to "Foot Brake
Valve Leakage control".

Page 12
How to Check Brake Pressure
Install a pressure gauge as below:
Ports Screw Specification Remark

GP PF1/4" O-Ring Boss
G1 PF1/4" O-Ring Boss Remove pressure switch.
Check pressure values as below:
Unloading Valve Operations

Ports
Cut-in Cut-out
GP Within 160kgf/cm2 approx. Within 9kgf/cm2 approx.
G1 103 ±2kgf/cm2 125 ±2kgf/cm2

Page 13
Page 14
SP000992
DOZER CONTROL VALVESP000992
Dozer Control
Valve
Edition 1
Dozer Control Valve SP000992

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Dozer Control Valve
Structure ............................................................... 6
Parts List .............................................................. 7
Performance Curve.............................................. 8
Hydraulics Symbol ............................................... 8
Disassembly & Assembly Tools ......................... 8
Disassembly ......................................................... 9
Assembly ............................................................ 12

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
STRUCTURE
Figure 1

Page 6
PARTS LIST
NO. Part Name Standard Material Q’ty Remark
1 Body 1 JA3H1001
2 Plug 2 j96h2002
III - 3 O-ring p8 n. b. r 2 po 08
4 Spring 2 j96h2003
I Spool Kit j96h2020
I - 5 Spring Seat 2 ajv12d105
I - 6 Spool 2 j96h2004
I - 7 Spring Seat 2 ajv12d103
I - 8 Spring 2 j96h2005
I - 9 Stopper 2 set ajv12d106
II Plug Kit jao6004
II - 10 Plug 2 j96h2006
II - 11 Rod Seal dyr10 n. b. r 2 rsy 10
II - 12 O-ring p14 n. b. r 2 p0 014
II - 13 Push Rod 2 j96h2007
14 Cover 1 j96h2008
15 Wrench Bolt m6 x 35l scm440 2 wbm0635
16 Guide 1 j96h2009
17 Pin 1 j96h2010
18 Pin m5 x 15l 2 j96h2011
19 Socket Bolt m5 scm440 2 hnm05
20 Nut 1 ja2c1001
21 Lever ø3 x 18l 1 sp0318
22 Spring Pin 1 ja2c1003
23 Boot 1 ja2c1002
24 Bushing 1 ja3h1002
III Name Plate jaoc1003

Page 7
PERFORMANCE CURVE
Operating Torque (kgf.cm)

28 0.3
Secondary Pressure
Secondary Pressure
(kgf/cm2)
(kgf/cm2)
16.6 3
5 1 Operating Torque
2.4 1.5
0 1 5 4 6 6.5 0.5
Push-rod Stroke (mm)
FG007450
Figure 2
HYDRAULICS SYMBOL
T P
1 2
FG007451
Figure 3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

TOOLS
NO. Tool Standard Remark
2 L Wrench 10 mm
15 L Wrench 5 mm
18L L Wrench 2.5 mm
19 Spanner 8 mm

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble boot(22) and bushing(23) from the
body(1).
Figure 4
2. Disassemble guide(16) and pin(17) from the cover(14).
FG003783
Figure 5
3. Disassemble cover(14) from the body(1).
FG003786-1
Figure 6
Figure 7

Page 9
Figure 8
4. Disassemble plug kit (II) from the body (1).
FG003787
Figure 9
5. Disassemble spool kit (I) from the body (1).
FG003788
Figure 10
6. Disassemble spring (4) from the body (1).
FG003789
Figure 11

Page 10
7. Disassemble plug (2) from the body (1).
Figure 12
Figure 13

Page 11
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble plug (2) in the body (1).
Figure 14
Figure 15
2. Assemble spring (4) in the body (1).
FG003789
Figure 16
3. Assemble spool kit (I).

Assemble spring seat (I-7), spring (I-8), spring seat (I-
5) and stopper (I-9) at spool (I-6) in the order.
FG003791
Figure 17

Page 12
4. Assemble spool kit (I) in the body (1).
FG003788
Figure 18
5. Assemble plug kit (II)

Assemble rod seal (II-11), o-ring (II-12), push rod (II-
13) and plug (II-10) in the order.
FG003792
Figure 19
6. Assemble plug kit (II) in the body (1).
FG003787
Figure 20

Page 13
7. Assemble cover(14) in the body(1) with wrench bolt.
Figure 21
Figure 22
8. Assemble wrench bolt(15) in the body(1) with torque

wrench.
FG003786-1
Figure 23
9. Assemble socket bolt(18) and nut(19) in the guide(16).
FG007458
Figure 24

Page 14
10. Assemble guide(16) and lever(20) with spring pin(21).
FG003794
Figure 25
FG003794-1
Figure 26
11. Assemble guide(16) in the cover with pin(17).
FG003783
Figure 27
12. Adjust the clearance of lever(20) with wrench and

spanner.
FG003795
Figure 28

Page 15
13. Assemble boot(22) and busshing(23) in the body(1).
Figure 29
FG003781-1
Figure 30

Page 16
SP000993
STEERING VALVE SP000993
Steering Valve
Edition 1
Steering Valve SP000993

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Steering Valve
OSPC / OSPF ................................................................ 8
TOOLS ............................................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 12
Dismantling the Shock Valves for OSPC/OSPC LS..... 16
Dismantling the Pressure Relief Valve for OSPC ..... 17
Dismantling the Pressure Relief Valve (cartridge) for
OSPC LS/OSPC LSR .................................................. 18
Cleaning ........................................................................ 19
Inspection and Replacement ....................................... 19
Lubrication ..................................................................... 19
Assembly ............................................................ 20
Assembly Pattern for Standard Bearing ..................... 22
Assembly Pattern for Double Bearing ........................ 23
Installation Instructions for O-ring/Kin-ring /Roto Glyd
...................................................................................... 23
Installation Instructions for Lip Seal ........................... 24
Assembly of the Pressure Relief Valve for OSPC ... 29
Assembly of the Shock Valves for OSPC/OSPC LS/
OSPC LSR ................................................................... 30
Hydraulic Connections.................................................. 32

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Turning the steering wheel causes hydraulic oil to be sent
from the steering gear type pump to the steering valve
which directs oil to the steering cylinders.
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Knuckle Arm 3 Steering Valve
2 Steering Cylinder

Page 6
Theory of Operation
The steering valve, which directs hydraulic oil from the pump
to the steering cylinder, is comprised of a housing, control
sleeve, control spool and drive. Turning the steering wheel
counterclockwise causes oil to flow to the steering cylinder
L. Return oil goes through passage R to passage T. Oil
supplied to the rotor turns the rotor and transmits oil to the
control sleeve through the drive or spring. Turning the wheel
clockwise sends oil through passage R, while return oil
passes from L of the cylinder to passage T. With the
steering wheel in a neutral position, oil returns to the tank
through passages P and T.
L R
T L R P
2815
Figure 2

Page 7
OSPC / OSPF
32
32
1
33
38
34
31
30 5
37 7
10
3 4
36 11
35
2
13
14
12
15
16
23
17
24
40 18
39
19
20
22
17
FG007462
Figure 3

Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Dust Seal Ring 18 O-ring
Housing + Spool + Sleeve 19 End Cover
Check valve and the seats for 20 Washer
2
relief and shock valves are 22 Special Screw
locktited.
23 Screw
3 Ball ø8.5 mm
24 Name Plate
4 Thread Bushing
30 Complete Relief Valve
5 O-ring Used with Kin-ring (Item 6)
31 Spring Wire
6 Kin-ring
32 Complete Shock Valve
7 Bearing Assembly
33 Ball ø3/16 in
10 Ring
34 Rolled Pin
11 Cross Pin
35 Ball
12 Set of Springs
36 Bushing
13 Cardan Shaft
38 Spring
14 Spacer
39 Kin Ring
15 O-ring
40 O-ring
16 Distributor Plate
17 Gearwheel Set

Page 9
TOOLS
1. Holding tool + guide-ring
Code no.: SJ 150-9000-2.
Best.nr.: SJ 150-9000-16.
Figure 4
2. Assembly tool for O-ring and kin-ring / Roto Glyd

Code no.: SJ 150-9000-11.
Best.nr.: SJ 150N4014-1.
Figure 5
3. Assembly tool for lip seal.

Code no. SJ 150-9000-17.
Figure 6
4. Assembly tool for cardan shaft.

Code no. SJ 150-9000-3.
Figure 7

Page 10
5. Assembly tool for dust seal.
Code no. SJ 150-9000-22.
Figure 8
6. Torque wrench 0-7 daNm.

13 mm socket spanner.
6, 8 and 12 mm hexagon sockets.
12 mm screwdriver.
2 mm screwdriver.
13 mm ring spanner.
6, 8 and 12 mm hexagon socket spanners.
Plastic hammer.
Figure 9
Tweezers.
The tools named under point F are not available from
Danfoss.

Page 11
DISASSEMBLY
1. Dismantle steering column from steering unit and place
the steering unit in the holding tool.
Screw out the screws in the end cover (6-off plus one
special screw).
FG003286
Figure 10
2. Remove the end cover, sideways.
FG003287
Figure 11
3. Lift the gearwheel set (with spacer if fitted) off the unit.
Take out the two o-rings.
FG003288
Figure 12
4. Remove cardan shaft.
FG003289
Figure 13

Page 12
5. Remove distributor plate.
FG003290
Figure 14
6. Screw out the threaded bush over the check valve.
FG003291
Figure 15
7. Remove O-ring.
FG003292
Figure 16
8. OSPB; OSPB LS; OSPBX LS: Shake out the check

valve ball (8 mm).
OSPC; OSPC LS; OSPC LSR: Shake out the check
valve ball and suction valve pins and balls.
CAUTION
On some pins in the OSPC there are two springs
(see page 3, pos. 28). See also spare parts list for
OSPC HN.21.UA.52. Replace this pins prior to the FG003293
reassembly! Figure 17

Page 13
9. Take care to keep the cross pin in the sleeve and
spool horizontal. The pin can be seen through the
open end of the spool. Press the spool inwards and
the sleeve, ring, bearing races and needle bearing will
be pushed out of the housing together.
FG003294
Figure 18
10. Take ring, bearing races and needle bearing from

sleeve and spool. The outer (thin) bearing race can
sometimes stick in the housing, therefore check that it
has come out.
FG003295
Figure 19
11. Press out the cross pin. Use the special screw from
the end cover.
Note next point/paragraph!
FG003296
Figure 20
12. OSPB CN and OSPC CN

A small mark has been made with a pumice stone on
both spool and sleeve close to one of the slots for the
neutral position springs (see drawing).
If the mark is not visible, remember to leave a mark of
your own on sleeve and spool before the neutral
position springs are dismantled.
For OSPF both marks should be placed opposite each
other!
FG003297
Figure 21 CN

Page 14
Figure 22 OSPF
13. Carefully press the spool out of the sleeve.
FG003299
Figure 23
14. Press the neutral position springs out of their slots in

the spool.
FG003300
Figure 24
15. Remove dust seal and O-ring/kin-ring/Roto Glyd.
FG003301
Figure 25

Page 15
Dismantling the Shock Valves for OSPC/
OSPC LS
1. Remove plugs from shock valves using a 6 mm
hexagon socket spanner.
FG003302
Figure 26
2. Remove seal washers (2-off).
FG003303
Figure 27
3. Unscrew the setting screws using a 6 mm hexagon

socket spanner.
FG003304
Figure 28
4. Shake out the two springs and two valve balls into
your hand. The valve seats are bonded into the
housing and cannot be removed.
FG003305
Figure 29

Page 16
5. The shock valves are now dismantled.
FG007473
Figure 30
Dismantling the Pressure Relief Valve

for OSPC
1. Screw out the plug using and 8 mm hexagon socket
spanner.
Remove seal washers.
FG003307
Figure 31
2. Unscrew the setting screw using an 8 mm hexagon

socket spanner.
FG003308
Figure 32
3. Shake out spring and piston. The valve seat is bonded

into the housing and cannot be removed.
FG003309
Figure 33

Page 17
4. The pressure relief valve is now dismantled.
FG003310
Figure 34
Dismantling the Pressure Relief Valve

(cartridge) for OSPC LS/OSPC LSR
1. Screw out the pressure relief valve using and 8 mm
hexagon socket spanner. Remove the seal ring. If the
valve is defective it must be replaced (see OSPC
spare parts list, HN.21.UA.52).
FG003311
Figure 35
2. The pressure relief valve is now dismantled.
FG003312
Figure 36

Page 18
3. The steering unit OSPC is now completely dismantled.
Replace this pins prior to the reassembly!
FG007476
Figure 37
4. The steering unit OSPC LS is now completely

dismantled.
Replace this pins prior to the reassembly!
FG007476
Figure 38
Cleaning
Clean all parts carefully in Shellsol K or the like.
Inspection and Replacement

Replace all seals and washers. Check all parts carefully and
make any replacements necessary.
Lubrication
Before assembly, lubricate all parts with hydraulic oil.

Page 19
ASSEMBLY
1. Place the two flat neutral position springs in the slot.
2. Place the curved springs between the flat ones and
press them into place.
FG003314
Figure 39
FG003315
Figure 40
3. Line up the spring set.
FG003316
Figure 41
4. Guide the spool into the sleeve. Make sure that spool
and sleeve for OSPB LS, OSPBX LS, OSPC LS,
OSPC LSR and OSPF are placed correctly in relation
to each other (See page -8).
FG003317
Figure 42

Page 20
5. Assemble spool and sleeve.
CAUTION
OSPB LS, OSPBX LS, OSPC LS, OSPC LSR and
OSPF
When assembling spool and sleeve only one of two
possible ways of positioning the spring slots is
correct. FG003318
There are three slots in the spool and three holes Figure 43
in the sleeve in the end of the spool/sleeve
opposite to the end with spring slots. Place the
slots and holes opposite each other so that parts
of the holes in the sleeve are visible through the
slots in the spool.
OSPB CN and OSPC CN
Assemble the spool/sleeve and make sure the
marks on spool and sleeve are opposite each other
(see drawing page 10).
FG003319
Figure 44
6. Press the springs together and push the neutral

position springs into place in the sleeve.
FG003320
Figure 45
7. Line up the springs and center them.
FG003321
Figure 46

Page 21
8. Guide the ring down over the sleeve.
CAUTION
The ring should be able to move - free of the
springs.
FG003322
Figure 47
9. Fit the cross pin into the spool/sleeve.
FG003323
Figure 48
10. Fit bearing races and needle bearing as shown on

below drawing.
FG003324
Figure 49
Assembly Pattern for Standard Bearing

Reference Number Description 1
1 Outer Bearing Race
2
2 Needle bearing
3
3 Inner Bearing Race
4 Spool 4
5 Sleeve 5
FG003325
Figure 50

Page 22
Assembly Pattern for Double Bearing
1 Washer For Axial Bearing
2 Outer Needle bearing 1
3 Outer Bearing Race 2
4 Spool 3 6
5 Sleeve
4 7
6 Inner Needle bearing
5
7 Inner Bearing Race
* The inside chamfer on the inner bearing race must face FG003326
the inner spool. Figure 51
Installation Instructions for O-ring/Kin-

ring /Roto Glyd
1. Turn the steering unit until the bore is horizontal. Guide
the outer part of the assembly tool into the bore for
the spool/sleeve.
FG003327
Figure 52
2. Grease O-ring and king-ring/roto glyd with hydraulic oil

and place them on the tool.
FG003328
Figure 53

Page 23
3. Hold the outer part of the assembly tool in the bottom
of the steering unit housing and guide the inner part of
the tool right to the bottom.
FG003330
Figure 54
4. Press and turn the O-ring/kin-ring into position in the

housing.
FG003332
Figure 55
5. Draw the inner and outer parts of the assembly tool

out of the steering unit bore, leaving the guide from the
inner part in the bore.
FG003333
Figure 56
Installation Instructions for Lip Seal

1. Lubricate the lip seal with hydraulic oil and place it on
the assembly tool.
FG003334
Figure 57

Page 24
2. Guide the assembly tool right to the bottom.
FG003335
Figure 58
3. Press and turn the lip seal into place in the housing.
FG003336
Figure 59
4. With a light turning movement, guide the spool and

sleeve into the bore.
CAUTION
Fit the spool set holding the cross pin horizontal.
FG003337
Figure 60
5. The spool set will push out the assembly tool guide.
The O-ring and kin-ring/roto Glyd are now in position.
FG003338
Figure 61

Page 25
6. Turn the steering unit until the bore is vertical again.
Put the check valve ball into the hole indicated by the
arrow.
FG003339
Figure 62
7. Screw the threaded bush lightly into the check valve

bore. The top of the bush must lie just below the
surface of the housing.
FG003340
Figure 63
8. Place a ball in the two holes indicated by the arrows.
FG003341
Figure 64
9. Place a new pin in the same two holes.
FG003342
Figure 65

Page 26
10. In some cases a spring has to be fitted (see page 4
pos. 38) on the pin before it is placed in the housing.
(See OSPC spare parts list, HN.21.UA.52).
FG003343
Figure 66
11. Grease the O-ring with mineral oil approx. viscosity 500
mm2/s at 20°C.
FG003344
Figure 67
12. Place the distributor plate so that the channel holes

match the holes in the housing.
FG003345
Figure 68
13. Guide the cardan shaft down into the bore so that the
slot is parallel with the connection flange.
FG003346
Figure 69

Page 27
14. Place the cardan shaft as shown - so that it is held in
position by the mounting fork.
FG003347
Figure 70
15. Grease the two o-rings with mineral oil approx.

viscosity 500 mm2/s at 20°C and place them in the two
grooves in the gear rim. Fit the gearwheel and rim on
the cardan shaft.
FG003348
Figure 71
CAUTION
Fit the gearwheel (rotor) and cardan shaft so that a
tooth base in the rotor is positioned in relation to
the shaft slot as shown. Turn the gear rim so that
the seven trough holes match the holes in the
housing.
FG003349
Figure 72
16. Fit the spacer, if any.
FG003350
Figure 73

Page 28
17. Place the end cover in position.
FG003351
Figure 74
18. Fit the special screw with washer and place it in the
hole shown.
FG003352
Figure 75
19. Fit the six screws with washers and insert them. Cross-
tighten all the screws and the rolled pin with a torque
of 3.0 +/-0.6 daNm. The OSPB, OSPB LS and OSPBX
LS can now be function tested.
FG003353
Figure 76
Assembly of the Pressure Relief Valve

for OSPC
1. Fit the piston.
FG003354
Figure 77

Page 29
2. Fit the spring.
FG003355
Figure 78
3. Screw in the setting screw with an 8 mm hexagon

socket spanner.
Make the pressure setting on a panel or the vehicle.
FG003356
Figure 79
4. Screw plug with dust seal into the housing using an 8

mm hexagon socket spanner.
Tightening torque: 5 +/-1 daNm.
FG003357
Figure 80
Assembly of the Shock Valves for

OSPC/OSPC LS/OSPC LSR
1. Put a ball in the two holes indicated by the arrows.
FG003358
Figure 81

Page 30
2. Place springs and valve cones over the two balls.
CAUTION
The blue spring applies to setting range 90-180 bar.
The untreated spring applies to setting range 170-
260 bar. (See OSPC spare parts list HN.21.UA.52).
FG003359
Figure 82
3. Screw in the two setting screws using a 6 mm

hexagon socket spanner. Make the pressure setting on
a panel or the vehicle. (See OSPC spare parts list
HN.21.UA.52).
FG003360
Figure 83
4. Screw plug with seal ring into the two shock valves
and tighten them with a torque of 3 +1 daNm using a
6 mm hexagon socket spanner.
Steering unit type OSPB, OSPB LS, OSPBX LS,
OSPC, OSPC LS or OSPC LSR is now assembled.
FG003360-1
Figure 84
5. Place the dust seal ring in the housing. With the

OSPC, OSPC LS and OSPC LSR the dust seal ring
must be placed only after the pressure relief valve and
shock valves have been fitted.
FG003475
Figure 85

Page 31
6. Fit the dust seal ring in the housing using special tool
SJ 150-9000-22 and a plastic hammer.
FG003476
Figure 86
7. Press the plastic plugs into the connection ports. Do

not use a hammer!
FG003477
Figure 87
Hydraulic Connections
L Left Port
R Right Port
T L P R
T Tank
P Pump
FG003478
Figure 88

Page 32
Max. Tightening Torque
Max. Tightening Torque daNm (lbf in)
Screwed With With With
Connection With
Cutting Copper Aluminium
O-Ring
Edge Washer Washer
G 1/4 4(350) 2(180) 3(270)
G 3/8 6(530) 2(180) 5(440)
G 1/2 10(900) 3(270) 8(700)
7/16-20
2(180)
UNF
3/4-16 UNF 6(530)
M12 x 1.5 4(350) 2(180) 3(270) 2(180)
M18 x 1.5 7(620) 2(180) 5(440) 5(440)
M22 x 1.5 10(900) 3(270) 8(700) 7(620)

Page 33
Page 34
SP000964
ACCELERATOR PEDAL VALVE (HYDRAULIC)
SP000964
Accelerator
Pedal Valve
(Hydraulic)
Edition 1
Accelerator Pedal Valve (Hydraulic) SP000964

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Accelerator Pedal Valve (Hydraulic)
STructure .............................................................. 6
Parts List .............................................................. 6
Performance Curve.............................................. 7
Hydraulics Symbol ............................................... 7
Disassembly & Assembly Tools ......................... 7
Disassembly ......................................................... 8
Assembly .............................................................. 9

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
STRUCTURE
ll-13
ll-10
ll-9
ll-12
ll-11 l-6
l-5
l-7 2
l-4
l-3 1
FG007504
Figure 1
PARTS LIST
No. Part Name Standard Material Q’ty Remark
1 Body 1 AJV12D101
2 Plug 2 WPT18
l Spool Kit JA3G3010
l-3 Spool 1 AJV12D102
l-4 Spring Seat 1 AJV12D103
l-5 Spring 1 JA3G3001A
l-6 Spring Seat 1 JA3G3006
l-7 Stopper 1 set AJV12D106
8 Spring 1 JA3G3007
ll Plug Kit JA3G3011
ll-9 Plug 1 AJV12D108
ll-10 Seal DYR10 N.B.R 1 RSY10
ll-11 O-ring P14 N.B.R 1 PO 014
ll-12 Push Rod 1 JA3G3002
ll-13 Dust Seal DRP10 N.B.R 1 DSP10

Page 6
PERFORMANCE CURVE
40
Secondary Pressure (kgf/cm2)
Operating Torque (kgf-cm)

31.1
e
28 1.5
ur
ess
Pr
22
ry
da
ue
n
co
rq
Se
To
12 1
ing
at
er
Op
1.6
0 1.2 0.5 3.76 0.5 6.8
5 0.5 13 1
Push Rod Stroke (mm)

Pedal Angle ( ) FG009225
Figure 2
HYDRAULICS SYMBOL
- T -
- A -
- P -
FG007508
Figure 3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

TOOLS
NO. Tool Standard Remark
2 L Wrench 5 mm
ll-9 Spanner 21mm

Page 7
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble plug kit (ll) from the body (1).
FG007509
Figure 4
FG007510
Figure 5
2. Disassemble spool kit (l) from the body (1).
FG007511
Figure 6
3. Disassemble spring (8) from the body (1).
FG007512
Figure 7

Page 8
ASSEMBLY
1. Assemble plug (2) in the body (1).
FG007513
Figure 8
2. Assemble spring (8) in the body (1).
FG007512
Figure 9
3. Assemble spool kit (l).

Assemble spring seat (l-4), spring (l-5), spring seat (l-6)
and stopper (l-7) at spool (l-3) in the order.
Figure 10
4. Assemble spool kit (l) in the body (1).
FG007511
Figure 11

Page 9
5. Assemble plug kit (ll)
Assemble seal (ll-10), dust seal (ll-13), O-ring (ll-11),
push rod (ll-12) in plug (ll-9) in the order.
Figure 12
6. Assemble plug kit (ll) in the body (1).
FG007510
Figure 13
FG007509
Figure 14

Page 10
SP000996
ONE SPOOL VALVESP000996
One Spool
Valve
Edition 1
One Spool Valve SP000996

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
One Spool Valve
Outside Drawing .................................................. 7
In the Neutral Condition ................................................ 8
Spool Operation.............................................................. 8
Replacement of Spool Ass'y (Pilot Type) .................. 10
Replacement of Main Relief Valve ............................. 12
Replacement of Overload Relief Valve ...................... 13
Replacement of Sub-Block Ass'y ................................ 14

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
OUTSIDE DRAWING
Figure 1
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Inlet Block 4 Main Relief Valve
2 Work Block 5 Overload Relief Valve
3 T Block
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Figure 2

Page 7
In the Neutral Condition

The hydraulic oil, supplied to the P port under the neutral
condition, is to be flowed out to the tank passage through
the "One Spool Valve".
Figure 3
Spool Operation
1. When Pilot Pressure "Pa" is impressed
When pilot pressure is impressed at the "Pa" port, the
pressured oil flowed from the P port is to be
discharged to the A port through the load check poppet
and the spool, as the hydraulic oil passage for bypass
is blocked.
Figure 4
2. When Pilot Pressure "Pb" is impressed

When pilot pressure is impressed at the "Pb" port, the
pressured oil flowed from the P port is to be
discharged to the B port through the load check poppet
and the spool, as the hydraulic oil passage for bypass
is blocked.
Figure 5

Page 8
DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY
General Cautions
It is the principle that disassembly and assembly of this
valve should carried out by the manufacturer. In case
disassembly and assembly is inevitably required elsewhere,
the following cautions must be observed.
1. This valve is precisely processed and the gaps among
each part are extremely tiny. This, disassembly and
assembly should be performed very carefully so that
any foreign material such as dust or sand can not
intrude into the valve.
2. For disassembly, a technician should start disassembly
after fully understanding the structure of the valve with
structural drawings and reference drawings.
3. When the valve needs to be removed from a machine,
be sure to put caps on each port and to wash the
exterior of the assembly after checking the caps on
each port again before assembling.
4. In case the disassembled parts need to be placed
unassembled for a while, they must be treated with
rust prevent oil and sealed to prevent rusting.
5. Do not hold a pilot cap, a relief valve and a overload
relief valve when this valve needs to be moved.
6. Even in case disassembly and assembly is not
peformed smoothly, do not hit or treat any part of the
product roughly.
accurate assembly.
8. For O-rings and back up-rings, it is the principle to use
the new ones. And be sure not to damage one during
assembly. (Apply a small portion of grease on the parts
for smooth assembly.)
9. Fasten bolts, overload relief valves and main relief
valves with the specified standard torque.
10. As various tests (relief characteristics test, leakage test,
operational test, etc.) are essential after disassembly
and assembly, do not disassemble this valve if those
tests are not available.
11. Be careful not to damage the O-ring contacting parts of
this valve for preventing oil leakage.
12. Be cautious about safety during operation as this valve
assembly is heavy.

Page 9
Replacement of Spool Ass'y (Pilot Type)
CAUTION
For replacement of a spool, it must be replaced with a
sub-assembly of spool.
CAUTION
During assembly operation of a spool sub-assembly, be
careful so that a foreign material can not intrude into
the sub-assembly.
1. Removing Pilot Cap

Unfasten the two bolts for the pilot cap with a L-
wrench (5mm) and remove the cap along with the
washer.
(You can remove either of them.)
Figure 6
Figure 7
2. Removing Spool
After fixing the main body and removing the return
spring and the spring seat first, pull the spool in the
horizontal direction (parallel to the spool hole) to
remove it from the main body.
Too much impressed force for disassembly may
damage the spool. When the spool is stuck, therefore,
push it back smoothly and try to pull the spool while
rotating it.
While removing the spool, check which end has the
mark. Figure 8

Page 10
3. Assembling Spool
Insert the spool into the fixed main body. (Overloaded
force may damage the main body or the spool. When
the spool is stuck, pull it back and press it smoothly
while rotating it.)
Check the direction of the mark, identified during the
disassembly operation.
Assemble the spring seat and the spring.
Figure 9
Figure 10
4. Assembling Pilot Cap (on Return Spring Side)

Cover the pilot cap on the return spring of the spool,
previously assembled to the main body, and fasten it
with two bolts at the specified standard torque using a
torque wrench (5mm). Check if there is the O-ring on
the contacting surface.
Standard Torque: 1.1 kgf•m
Figure 11

Page 11
Replacement of Main Relief Valve
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the seat of the removed main
relief valve.
CAUTION
As the main relief valve is a very important part, related
to performance and safety, and hard to be set for the
pressure again, be sure to replace it with an assembly if
needed, not disassembling it.
CAUTION
During assembly of a main relief valve, be careful so
that a foreign material cannot intrude into the main
frame.
1. Removing Main Relief Valve

Fix the main body and remove the main relief valve by
unfastening the hexagon bolt with a spanner (30mm).
The spanner should hold the bolt as deeply as
possible.
Figure 12
Figure 13

Page 12
2. Assembling Main Relief Valve
Fasten the main relief valve to the main body at the
specified standard torque using a torque wrench
(30mm). Check if there is the O-ring on the contacting
surface.
Standard Torque: 6 kgf•m
Figure 14
Replacement of Overload Relief Valve
CAUTION
As the removed overload relief valves may have
different setting values for each position, identify them
for the original position with tags for accurate assembly.
CAUTION
As the overload relief valve is a precision part, be
cautious about damage or intrusion of foreign materials.
CAUTION
As the overload relief valve is a very important part,
related to performance and safety, and hard to be set
for the pressure again, be sure to replace it with an
assembly if needed, not disassembling it.
CAUTION
During disassembly of a overload relief valve, be careful
not to damage the return cap by the spanner.

Page 13
1. Removing Overload Relief Valve
Fix the main body and remove the overload relief valve
by unfastening the hexagon bolt with a spanner
(22mm). The spanner should hold the bolt as deeply
as possible.
Figure 15
Figure 16
2. Assembling Overload Relief Valve

Fasten the overload relief valve to the main frame at
the specified standard torque using a torque wrench
(22mm). Check if there is the O-ring on the contacting
surface.
Standard Torque: 4 kgf•m
Figure 17
Replacement of Sub-Block Ass'y
CAUTION
During assembly of the sub-block assembly, be careful
so that a foreign material cannot intrude into the main
body.

Page 14
1. Installation of Surface Plate
Install a surface plate on a workbench for replacement
of the sub block assembly.
Figure 18
2. Removing Sub-Block Ass'y

Place the main frame on the surface plate, installed on
the workbench.
Remove the assembly by unfastening the four nuts,
fixing it, with a spanner or a hexagon wrench (13mm).
Figure 19
3. Replacing Block Ass'y

Replace the faulty assembly with a new one and
assemble the new one in order.
Figure 20
4. Assembling Nuts
Arrange the main frame and fasten the four nuts at the
specified standard torque with a torque wrench (13mm).
Before completely fastening the nuts, check if each
sub-lock is properly arranged based on the surface
plate.
Standard Torque: 2.05 kgf•m
Figure 21

Page 15
Page 16
SP000069
REMOTE CONTROL VALVE (WORK LEVER /
JOYSTICK) SP000069
Remote Control
Valve (Work
Lever / Joystick)
Edition 1
Remote Control Valve (Work Lever / Joystick) SP000069

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Remote Control Valve (Work Lever /

Joystick)
Parts List......................................................................... 8
Specifications ................................................................ 10
Torques ......................................................................... 10
Tools and Materials........................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 11
Cleaning and Inspection (Wear Limits and
Tolerances)......................................................... 15
Reassembly ........................................................ 15

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
DX225LC 5001 and Up
DX300LC 5001 and Up
DX340LC 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Theory of Operation
Structure
The remote control valve contains four push rods, spring
holders, spools and return springs, which are in the valve
casing. The valve works as a pressure reduction valve.
The housing has six ports, which include input port P, tank
port T, and four secondary pressure ports.
The electric horn button is installed in the valve handle.
Gear pump pressure is used for operating control spools.
Function
1. Neutral Position
When the lever is in neutral mode, the spool is pushed
upward by return spring. The force of balancing spring,
which determines the secondary discharge pressure, is
not transmitted to the spool. The input port is closed
and the pressure of the output port is the same as the
pressure of the tank port T.
2. Control Switch
Pressing of the push rod starts to press the balance
spring, whose force is transferred to the spool to
connect the P and T ports, transferring the pilot
pressure. Output pressure acts on the bottom of the
spool and press the spool upwards until it is balanced
with the force of the balance spring.
In short, the second pressure (output pressure)
changes in proportion to the pressing force of the
balance spring.

Page 7
Parts List
28
24
18
25A
16 23
17
36
12 18
22 16
32 11 17
25 15 35
8 20 12
14
11
13 10
34 8
5 7
21
30
6
4 33
5
19
27 9
4
26 1
9
3 4
2 1
29
37 : 24 ~ 28
3
Figure 1 FG003938

Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Case 21 Joint Assembly
2 Plug 22 Swash Plate
3 Bushing 23 Nut
4 Spool 24 Nut
5 Shim Handle Assembly (L)
25
6 Spring Handle Assembly (R)
7 Spring Seat 25A Cap
8 Stopper 26 Handle Bar
9 Spring 27 Spring Pin
10 Stopper 28 Bellows
11 Spring 29 Bushing
12 Push Rod 30 Connector Assembly
13 Spring 32 Switch Assembly
14 Spring Seat 33 Spool Kit 1, 3
15 Stopper 34 Spool Kit 2, 4
16 Plug 35 Plug Kit 1, 3
17 O-ring 36 Plug Kit 2, 4
18 Rod Seal Handle Kit (Left)
37
Handle Kit (Right)
19 Plate
20 Boot

Page 9
Specifications
Performance
(19.6)
PRESSURE (kgf/cm2)
PRESSURE (kgf/cm )
Operating Torque
TORQUE (kgf.cm)
TORQUE (kgf.cm)
2
(20)
Operating Torque
15.9 3 15.4 3
5.5 2 5.5 2
Secondary Pressure
Secondary Pressure
(6.2) (5)
FG003944
Figure 2
Torques
No. Tool Standard Remark
500 kg•cm
3 Plug PF 3/8
(36 ft lb)
1,660 kg•cm
19 Swash Plate 27 mm
(120 ft lb)
1,660 kg•cm
20 Hex Nut 22 mm
(120 ft lb)
1,660 kg•cm
22 Nut 22 mm
(120 ft lb)
TOOLS AND MATERIALS

No. Tool Standard Remark
3 L Wrench 8 mm
19 Spanner 27 mm
20 Spanner 22 mm
22 Spanner 22 mm

Page 10
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove lead wire from bushing (29).
FG000804
Figure 3
2. Remove lever assembly from case (1).
FG000805
Figure 4
3. Remove hex nut (23) and swash plate (22) from case.
FG000806
Figure 5
4. Remove joint assembly (21) from case.
FG000807
Figure 6

Page 11
5. Remove plate (19) from case (1).
FG000808
Figure 7
6. Remove plug kit assembly, stopper (10), and spring

(11) from case (1).
FG000809
Figure 8
FG000810
Figure 9
FG000811
Figure 10

Page 12
7. Remove four spool kit assemblies from case (1).
FG000812
Figure 11
FG000813
Figure 12
8. The bushing (3) and plug cannot be removed from

case (1).
FG000814
Figure 13
FG000815
Figure 14

Page 13
FG000816
Figure 15
FG000817
Figure 16

Page 14
(WEAR LIMITS AND
TOLERANCES)
For general cleaning and inspection procedures, refer to
"General Maintenance Procedures" section.
REASSEMBLY
1. Install four plugs (2) into case (1).
FG000815
Figure 17
FG000817
Figure 18
2. Install bushing (3) into case (1) using jig.
FG000814
Figure 19

Page 15
FG000816
Figure 20
FG000818
Figure 21
3. Take care when assembling spool kit assemblies (1

and 3, 2 and 4). They should be assembled in same
way).
The assembly order is; spool (4), shim (5), spring (6),
spring seat (7), and stopper (8).
FG000819
Figure 22
FG000812
Figure 23

Page 16
4. Install spring (9) into case (1).
FG000820
Figure 24
5. Install spool kit assembly into case (1). (The same way
is used for four parts.)
FG000821
Figure 25
6. Assemble plug kit insert rod seal (18), O-ring (17), and
push rod (2) into plug (16) in proper order.
FG000822
Figure 26
FG000810
Figure 27

Page 17
7. Assemble four springs (11) and stoppers (10) and
insert assembled set in case (1) to form a plug kit
assembly.
NOTE: Pay attention to measurement specifications of
stoppers (1 and 3, 2 and 4).
FG000809
Figure 28
FG000811
Figure 29
FG000823
Figure 30
8. Install plate (19) into case (1).
FG000808
Figure 31

Page 18
9. Install joint assembly (21) into case (1).
FG000807
Figure 32
10. Install wash plate (22) and hex nut (23) into case (1).
FG000806
Figure 33
11. Insert bar and tighten it with a spanner to check

balance of joint assembly.
FG000824
Figure 34
12. Install boot (20) and bushing (29) into case (1).
FG000825
Figure 35

Page 19
13. Install lever assembly into case (1).
FG000805
Figure 36
14. Put lead wire in bushing (29), tie it, and arrange boot.
FG000826
Figure 37
FG000827
Figure 38
15. Install lead wire terminal into connector terminal

pressing them together.
FG001097
Figure 39

Page 20
16. Assemble connector assembly (30), and connect it to
lead wire terminal, and properly route wiring.
FG000828
Figure 40
FG000829
Figure 41
START-UP PROCEDURES
1. Start engine and set throttle at "LOW IDLE."
2. Set safety lever on "UNLOCK" position.
HAOB290L
Figure 42
3. Slowly cycle boom, arm, bucket cylinders and swing

motor about five times without a load to vent air from
pilot lines. Do this for five minutes.
ARO0470L
Figure 43

Page 21
Page 22
SP000192
BREAKER EPPR VALVE (OPT)SP000192
1Breaker EPPR
Valve (Opt)
Edition 1
Breaker EPPR Valve (Opt) SP000192

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Breaker EPPR Valve (Opt)
Structure ............................................................... 6
Numbers and Names of Parts ...................................... 6
Functions and Operation..................................... 7
Cautions for Operation ........................................ 7
Maintenance Instructions ..................................... 8
Maintenance .................................................................... 8
Disassembly .................................................................... 9
Assembly ....................................................................... 10

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
DX225LC 5001 and Up
DX225NLC 5001 and Up
DX255LC 5001 and Up
DX300LC 5001 and Up
DX340LC 5001 and Up
DX420LC 5001 and Up
DX480LC 5001 and Up
DX520LC 5001 and Up

Page 5
STRUCTURE
Numbers and Names of Parts
Figure 44
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Solenoid 5 Pin
2 Valve Casing 6 Spring
3 Sleeve 7 O-ring
4 Spool 8 O-ring

Page 6
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION
The proportional reducing valve shall be adjusted that its
reduced pressure is proportional to the current of the
solenoid.
The proportional solenoid shall be changed with pressure
proportional to the electrical input signal. Flow increases
corresponding to the force of the solenoid. As the solenoid
(1) receives pressure, the spool (4) opens and oil flows from
P to A. Pressure of the port A influences the top surface of
the pin (5). When it reaches the valve set of the solenoid,
the spool starts to move and oil flow from P to A
decreases.
CAUTIONS FOR OPERATION

1. Wiring of the solenoid
• The solenoid has no polarity.
2. Input electricity
• Do not supply electric current more than 0.7A to
the solenoid coil.
3. Adjustment screw
• It was adjusted to the standard.
• The pressure of the port A increases when turning
the adjustment screw clockwise.
4. Symptoms and Solutions of Problems
Symptoms Causes Solutions

Poor wiring Fix wiring
Pressure does not Solenoid damaged Replace the solenoid
increase nor change Piston or spool sticked Fix, or clean and grind
Amplifier damaged Repair or replace the amplifier
Poor opening space Readjust
Unnatural pressure Too wide
change Too narrow
Piston or spool sticked Fix, or clean and grind
Poor opening space Readjust
Unnatural pressure Too wide
Too narrow
Slow reaction Low pressure supplied Readjust

Page 7
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Maintenance
Bolt Tightening Torque

Table 1 shows torques used to tighten bolts of the motor.
Make sure that assembly work should be done according to
Table 1.
Used Torques
Bolt Sizes Names
(kgf.cm)
M 35 Hex bolt 450 ± 50
M 10 Hex bolt 200 ± 20
NPTF 1/16 Plug 90
Tools Used for Disassembly and Assembly

Table 2 shows tools necessary for disassembly and
assembly.
As bolts and plugs to be used depend on types, they should
be checked accordingly in advance.
For Sizes Used Torques Used Tools

Solenoid M 35 450 ± 50 Spanner
Sleeve M 10 200 ± 20 Hex bar spanner
NPTF plug 1/16 90 Hex bar spanner

Page 8
Disassembly
1. Determine a place for disassembly.
• It should be clean.
• Lay a rubber board or a cloth on the table and
take care not to damage parts.
2. Remove dust and rust of the proportional pressure
reducing valve with cleansing oil.
3. Disassemble the solenoid
• Take care not to damage O-rings of the solenoid.
FG003690
Figure 45
4. Disassemble the spool, the spring, and the pin.
FG003691
Figure 46
5. Disassemble the sleeve.

• Take care not to damage O-rings of the sleeve.
FG003692
Figure 47

Page 9
Assembly
Assembly shall be done in the reverse order of disassembly
described above, taking into consideration the following
points.
• Parts damaged during disassembly should be
repaired without fail and spare parts should be
prepared in advance.
• Every part should be cleaned enough with
cleaning oil and dried with compressed air before
starting assembly.
• Sliding parts and bearings should be applied clean
active oil before their assembly.
• Basically, parts of the O-ring and the oil seal
should be replaced.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten or engage bolts
and plugs in accordance with reference torques as
described in Maintenance Guide.
1. Assemble the sleeve.
FG003693
Figure 48
• Take care not to damage O-rings of the sleeve.
FG003694
Figure 49

Page 10
2. Assemble the spool, the spring, and the pin.
FG003695
Figure 50
• The spring and the pin should not be fell off.
FG003696
Figure 51
3. Assemble the solenoid correctly.
PART No.: 426-00266

SERIAL No.:
FG003697
Figure 52
• Take care not to damage O-rings of the solenoid.
FG003698
Figure 53

Page 11
Page 12
SP001006
SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL VALVESP001006
Service Brake
Pedal Valve
Edition 1
Service Brake Pedal Valve SP001006

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Service Brake Pedal Valve
Functions of Brake Pedal ................................... 7
Internal Structure and Operation Principles....... 8
Internal Structure ............................................................ 8
Operation Principles ..................................................... 10
Disassembly ....................................................... 11
Reassembly ........................................................ 11
Reassembly of the Lower Part ................................... 11
Reassembly of the Upper Part ................................... 13
Assembly of Pedal Plate ............................................. 16

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
FUNCTIONS OF BRAKE PEDAL
Figure 1
This wheel type valve is designed for heavy-duty brake

pedal valve of driving excavator used at construction sites. It
is hydraulic operated (see the following for operation
principles) and contains an operation brake function to fix
pedal with ratch while the machine stops.

Page 7
INTERNAL STRUCTURE AND
OPERATION PRINCIPLES
Internal Structure
Figure 2

Page 8
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Lower part 19 Ratch
2 Upper Part 20 Rock Pin 1 (Pedal
3 Spool 21 Rock Pin 2 (Ratch)
4 Upper Spring 22 Torsion Spring (Wrench)
5 Lower Spring 1 23 Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw
6 Spring Guide 24 C-type Retaining Ring
7 Retaining Ring 25 E-ring
8 O-ring 26 Hexagon Bolt
9 Plug 27 Hexagon Nut
10 O-ring 28 Hexagon Bolt
11 Holder 29 Spring Washer
12 Rubber Cover 30 Name Plate
13 Main Spring 31 Rivet
14 Spring Retainer 32 Port Plug
15 Drive Bearing 33 Pedal Plate
16 Double Torsion Spring 34 Oil Seal
17 Pedal Assembly 35 Plain Washer
18 Rubber Pedal 36 C-type Retaining Ring

Page 9
Operation Principles
Brake valve is a reducing valve. Pressure to main pressure
(P port) flows in the valve and reduced set pressure flows
to the axle brake via the brake port (BR port) to stop the
machine.
1. In Neutral Position
A. P port spool (3) blocks main pressure to P1 port.
B. T and BR ports are connected, which is the tank
pressure.
Figure 3
2. During Operation
A. Operation of pedal causes action of main spring
(13) and spool (3). The load of spring (13)
generates pressure B port seating pressure.
B. P and BR ports are connected and pressure is
generated, which moves to orifice to act pilot
pressure to the floor of spool (3).
C. If pilot pressure is higher than pressure set to
spring (13), spool (3) moves up and pressure
decreases.
D. If pilot pressure is lower than pressure set to
spring (13), spool (3) moves down to close T port
and pressure increases.
E. Operation angle of pedal changes load of spring Figure 4
(13) and thus the second pressure of BR port.
Refer to the Curve 80
70
P1, P2 ports: Supply pressure
60
T1, T2 ports: Tank port 50
BR1, BR2 ports: Brake supply port 40
30
BL1, BL2 ports: Brake pressure sensor location
20
10
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24
Operation Angles FG007749
Figure 5

Page 10
DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly shall be made in the reverse order of
reassembly.
REASSEMBLY
Reassembly of the Lower Part
4 3 2 1 5 6 7
FG003651
Figure 6
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Lower Part 5 O-ring
2 Spool 6 Spring Guide
3 Lower Spring 7 Upper Spring
4 Plug
1. Insert spool (2) and lower spring (3) in lower part (1).
CAUTION
Take care to prevent dust or foreign substances
entering into valves after washing.
FG003652
Figure 7

Page 11
2. Install plug (4) on lower part (1).
Tools : 19 mm spanner (Tightening torque: 1400 ~
1650 kgf•m)
FG003653
Figure 8
3. Install O-ring (5).
FG003654
Figure 9
4. Install spring guide (6) and upper spring (7).
FG003655
Figure 10

Page 12
Reassembly of the Upper Part
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
FG003656
Figure 11
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Upper Part 6 Spool
2 Oil Seat 7 Spring Retainer
3 Plain Washer 8 Main Spring
4 Retaining Ring 9 Holder
5 Drive Bearing 10 Rubber Cover
1. Install oil seal (2), plain washer (3), retaining ring (4),
and drive bearing on lower part (1).
Tools: Drive bearing jig and snap ring plier.
CAUTION
Use a jig to press and push bearing.
Never remove the dry bearing.
FG003657
Figure 12

Page 13
2. Insert spool into the lower part.
CAUTION
Take care to prevent dust or foreign substances
entering into valves after washing.
FG003658
Figure 13
3. Assemble the upper and lower parts.
CAUTION
Do not forget to install O-ring.
FG003659
Figure 14
4. Connection of the upper and lower parts

6 mm torque wrench (Tightening torque: 250 ~ 300
kgf•m)
FG003560
Figure 15

Page 14
5. Assemble spring retainer (7) and main spring (8).
FG003662
Figure 16
6. Install holder (9).
FG003663
Figure 17
7. Install rubber cover (10).
FG003664
Figure 18

Page 15
Assembly of Pedal Plate
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10
FG003665
Figure 19
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Rubber Pedal 7 Ratch Lock Pin
2 Lock Plate 8 Retaining Ring
3 Pedal 9 Pedal Lock Pin
4 Retaining Ring 10 Hexagon Bolt
5 Ratch 11 Pedal Plate
6 Ratch Spring 12 Double Torsion Spring

Page 16
1. Install pedal plate.
Tools: 6 mm torque wrench (Tightening torque: 250 ~
300 kgf•m)
FG003666
Figure 20
2. Use a ø12 round rod to place pedal elements (2, 3)

and double torsion spring (11) on pedal plate (12) and
use a hammer to push the round rod into lock pin (9).
Tools: ø12 round rod and plastic hammer
FG003667
Figure 21
3. Install the lock pin retaining ring at the end of lock pin
(9).
Tools: Shaft snap ring flyer
CAUTION
When removing lock pin, remove the retaining ring
first.
FG003668
Figure 22

Page 17
4. Install ratch spring (6) on ratch (5).
CAUTION
Apply grease to the inside of ratch spring.
FG003669
Figure 23
5. Use ratch lock pin (7) to install the ratch assembly in

pedal plate (11).
CAUTION
When removing lock pin, remove the retaining ring
first. (Damage to pedal plate)
FG003670
Figure 24
6. Install retaining ring.

Tool: Driver
FG003671
Figure 25

Page 18
FG003672
Figure 26
7. Apply grease to the area of lock plate (2) which ratch

contacts.
FG003673
Figure 27
8. Use a driver to install rubber pedal (1) on the pedal

assembly.
FG003674
Figure 28

Page 19
FG003675
Figure 29
FG003676
Figure 30
9. Install pedal angle adjustment bolt (10).

Tool: 13 mm spanner (tightening torque: 200 kgf•m)
FG003677
Figure 31

Page 20
FG003678
Figure 32

Page 21
Page 22
SP000997
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLYSP000997
Solenoid Valve
Assembly
Edition 1
Solenoid Valve Assembly SP000997

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Solenoid Valve Assembly
2-Solenoid Valve.................................................. 7
Diagram of 2-Solenoid Valve Assembly Package ....... 7
Exploded View and Tools ............................................. 8
Cautions for Disassembly and Re-assembly ............... 9
6-Solenoid Valve................................................ 11
Diagram of 6-Solenoid Valve Assembly Package ..... 11
Functions of 6-Solenoid Valve Assembly Package ... 12
4-Solenoid Valve................................................ 18
Functions of 4 Solenoid Valve Assembly Package .. 19
3-Solenoid .......................................................... 25
Functions of 3 Solenoid Valve Assembly Package .. 26
Cautions for Disassembly and Re-Assembly ............. 29

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
2-SOLENOID VALVE
Diagram of 2-Solenoid Valve Assembly

Package
2- Solenoid valve package includes parts described in the
table below.
Figure 1
No. Part Name Part Specification Quantity Remark

1 Block Body 60*71*106 1 1-A2006-03-0
2 Solenoid Valve TF-S3A-00-VDL24VDC 2

Page 7
The assembly torque of each part in the solenoid valve
package is described in the table below.
Observe the specified torque values using the right tool.
Assembly, Re-assembly of Solenoid Valve Package, and

Necessary Tools
Figure 2
Assembly
Torque (kg•cm)
2 Solenoid Valve UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
2-1 Coil Lock Nut UNF1/2-20" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/ 19mm hex. socket

Page 8
Cautions for Disassembly and Re-
assembly
substances before disassembly and re-assembly.
specified in table of page8 when disassembling and re-
assembling parts.
4. Disassembly and re-assembly of solenoid valve
A. Disassemble the valve by turning 2-1 coil lock nut
in the disassembly direction.
CAUTION
Do not damage the tube and retainer of
Solenoid Valve when disassembling the coil
lock nut.
In case the tube and retainer gets damaged
(dented, deformed), solenoid valve will not
work.
B. After disassembling coil lock nut, take out 3 coil

using your hand.
C. Then, disassemble 3 Solenoid valve by turning it
D. Identify problems and re-assembling solenoid
valve and coil.
E. Avoid using excessive torque in re-assembling
solenoid valve and coil.
CAUTION
Excessive use of torque will result in defects
on solenoid valve.

disassembly.

Page 9
Solenoid Valve Diagram
Coil Nut
Coil
Cap Housing
Tube &
Retainer
Case
FG007535
Figure 3

1. Foreign materials, 1. Disassemble valve and check if any foreign Remove
contaminants in materials or contaminants such as sludge foreign
valve lodged in between case and spool. materials and
clean the
contaminated
area.
2. Damages in tube & 2. Disassemble valve and check if the tube & Replace valve.
retainer retainer area is deformed (dented, contracted).
Solenoid
3. Breaking of wire, A. Disassemble valve and check resistance of Replace coil.
valve will
short circuiting, coil.
not
thermal reactions in Condition: 26.7Ω @ 20°C
function
coil Breaking of wire: The resistance of coil is ∞
properly
(infinite).
Short circuiting: The resistance is low or
excessive.
B. Disassemble valve and check if the molded
area of coil is melted by thermal reactions.
4. Connection to 4. Check if the terminals of the cap housing Replace faulty
terminal in (with a lead coil) and the housing (facing housing and
connector housing) are connected properly. terminal.

Page 10
6-SOLENOID VALVE

Package
6-Solenoid valve assembly package includes parts described
in the table below.
K1
00
28
19
TS
5
C3
C5
HO
C4
S
SW
PS
R
1
PS
P 2
4 BM
3
FG000005
Figure 4

1 Manifold Block 80*110*200 1 1-A1088-03-1
2 Solenoid Valve TF-S3A-00-VDL24VDC 6 C1,C2,C3,C5,C6,C7
3 Pilot Shit Valve FD-PSS1-0005 1 C4
4 Plug PT1/8 11

Page 11
Functions of 6-Solenoid Valve Assembly
Package
Functions
This solenoid valve package has functions as below:
1. Supplies pressure to braker.
2. Boosts main pressure.
3. Controls the operation mode, - swing priority
4. Drives forward and backward.
5. Controls cruise driving.
Application by Function of Each Solenoid Valve
Valve No. Valve Function Application Remark

C1 Operation of braker Used to supply pilot pressure to the braker valve
assembly and the main control valve that supplies
pressure to the braker.
C2 Main pressure boost Used to increase set pressure of the main relief Travel mode
valve to boost excavation power temporarily.
C3 Control of operation "C3" solenoid valve and "C4" pilot shift valve form Swing priority
mode an associated circuit.
When solenoid valve operates, pilot shift valve
operates to improve turning performance by making
priority valve operate.
C5 & C6 Driving forward or Used to drive vehicles forward or backward by
backward operating the travel valve of the main control valve.
C7 Cruise control Used to reduce driver fatigue in long-haul
operations.
Detailed Functions and Application of Each Solenoid

Valve
1. Operation of Braker
The C2 solenoid valve starts to operate when the
braker of the joy stick is switched on and supplies pilot
pressure to option valve of the main control valve. The
spool in option valve, converted by the pilot pressure,
supplies the pressure and oil flows discharged by the
pump into the braker to enable the vehicle to perform
an excavation operation.
2. Main Pressure Boost
This is a function that increases the pressure of the
main relief valve to boost excavation power temporarily.
When the pressure boost switch on the lever is turned
on by the signals of the e-EPOS controller, this
solenoid valve for pressure boost is turned "ON" for
operation increasing the set pressure of the main relief
valve from 330kgf/cm2 approx. to 350kgf/cm2 approx.,
to boost excavation power. In addition, this solenoid

Page 12
valve can be operated by selecting a mode on the
switch (operation/ parking/ driving). The default
pressure in the relief valve is 350kgf/cm2 in the driving
mode.
3. Operation Mode Control
The Operation mode offers selections of Excavation
mode, Drilling mode, and Stop mode. Once the engine
is started, the Operation mode is automatically set to
excavation mode and C3 is turned "OFF". This
excavation mode is used for normal excavation, loading
and quick stop (leveling). If Drilling mode is selected on
the panel, the priority valve that controls the control
valves is turned "ON" and activates to tighten the low
path coming into boom and arm resulting in improving
the performance of the swing valve.
This Drilling mode is used to drill the sides of bucket
or load with a big swing angle.
4. Control of Driving Forward or Backward
The incoming pressure and oil flows from the pilot
pump is supplied via C7 to the solenoid valve (C5 &
C6) that controls driving directions- forward and
backward driving. The position of the lever - Forward
driving, Backward driving, Gear shift - directs this
pressure and oil flows to activate C5 & C6 and then
the travel valve of the main control valve.
This incoming pressure and oil flows from the main
pump make the travel motor rotate in the right or
reverse direction changing driving directions of the
vehicle.
When the vehicle runs forward, forward driving solenoid
valve (C6) operates, while backward solenoid valve
(C5) operates when the car runs backward.
5. Cruise Control
This cruise control function is used to reduce driver
fatigue in long-haul operations. Pushing the cruise
switch will run the vehicle with the lever on "F" without
pushing the accelerator pedal. The driving speed can
be controlled with the engine control dial.
Also, the vehicle can be set to run at a constant speed
by adjusting the engine control dial.
When the vehicle runs uphill or downhill, its speed may
change. However, this is not a malfunction but this
happens due to changes in load. Pushing the brake
pedal will automatically stop cruise driving at a traffic
signal or roadblock. Cruise driving can also be released
by moving the lever to "N". If the engine noise is too
loud, adjust the engine control dial to low speed.
With Automatic Low Speed switched "ON", the engine
slows down to the set speed in 4 minutes or so after
the cruise driving function is released (after the pedal
is pressed).
If the cruise driving function operates again, the engine
speed goes up to the original speed right away.

Page 13
The assembly torque of each part in the solenoid valve
package is described in the table below.
Disassembly, Re-assembly of Solenoid Valve Package,

and Necessary Tools
2-1
Disassembly
Aassembly 3
2-2
2-3
K1
00
28
19
TS
C3
C5
HO
C4
S
SW
PS PS
R P
1 BM
2
5
4
FG007536
Figure 5
Assembly
Torque (kg•cm)
2-1 Coil Lock Nut UNF1/2-20" 60 ± 2 Torque wrench/19mm hex. socket
2-3 Solenoid Valve UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
3 Pilot Shift Valve UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
4 PT 1/4" Plug Bolt PT 1/4-19" 500 Torque wrench/6mm wrench socket

Page 14
assembly
specified in table of page16 when disassembling and
re-assembling parts.
CAUTION
lock nut.
work.

using your hand.
valve and coil.
CAUTION
on solenoid valve.

disassembly.

Page 15
Coil Nut
Coil
Cap Housing
Tube &
Retainer
Case
FG007535
Figure 6
Parts

1. Foreign 1. Disassemble valve and check if any foreign Remove foreign
materials, materials or contaminants such as sludge lodged materials and
contaminants in between case and spool. clean the
in valve contaminated
area.
2. Damages in 2. Disassemble valve and check if the tube & Replace valve.
tube & retainer area is deformed (dented, contracted).
Solenoid retainer
valve will 3. Breaking of A. Disassemble valve and check resistance of coil. Replace coil.
not wire, short Condition: 26.7Ω @ 20°C
function circuiting, Breaking of wire: The resistance of coil is ∞
properly thermal (infinite).
reactions in Short circuiting: The resistance is low or
coil excessive.
4. Connection to 4. Check if the terminals of the cap housing (with Replace faulty
terminal in a lead coil) and the housing (facing housing) are housing and
connector connected properly. terminal.

Page 16
No pilot 1. Pilot pressure 1. Remove the adaptor and hydraulic hoses at the Refer to the
pressure PL port and install a pressure gauge to check above checkpoints
discharge pressure value at the pilot pump with and descriptions
C2 operated. for "Solenoid
valve"
2. Pilot relief 2. Check operation of the relief valve installed on Remove foreign
valve the pilot line. materials and
replace relief
A. Check if pressure is bypassed by foreign
valve.
materials.
3. Pilot pump 3. Check pilot pump operation. Replace pilot
pump
4. Pilot filter 4. Check if the mesh screen of pilot filter is Clean affected
contaminated by foreign materials. parts and replace
filter.
Actuator 1. Pilot system 1. Check pilot system according to the above Locate cause of
will not checkpoints and descriptions for "No" pilot problems in pilot
function pressure. system and
properly correct.
2. Solenoid 2. Install a pressure gauge at each valve outlet Refer to the
valve (Ports HO, PL, BM2, PBR, PAR, TS) and above checkpoints
operate solenoid valve to check discharge and descriptions
pressure value. for
" Solenoid valve"
3. Main control 3. Check if the main control valve for each device Follow
valve is working properly. descriptions to
correct.
4. Devices 4. Check if the device is working properly. Follow
descriptions to
correct.
How to Check Pilot Pressure
Where to Install Pressure Gauges Screw Specification Remark

HO,PL,PBR,PAR,TS PF1/4"" O-ring boss Solenoid valve-"ON"
BM2 PF3/8"" O-ring boss Solenoid valve-"ON"

Page 17
4-SOLENOID VALVE

Package
in the table below.
Figure 7

1 Manifold Block 80*149*178 1 1-A2083-03-1
2 Solenoid Valve TF-S3A-00-VDL24VDC 6 C1,C2,C3,C4
3 Check Valve FD-CDP-O-A 2 C5,C6
4 Plug PT1/8 11

Page 18
Functions of 4 Solenoid Valve Assembly
Package
Functions
1. Operates devices. (Selects the outrigger for operation/
options.)
2. Performs a ram lock function.
3. Controls driving speed.
4. Cuts off pilot pressure.

C1 Valve operates devices. Solenoid selector valve (C1) that operates the
- Valve selects the outrigger increases the stability of excavation for
outrigger the vehicle.
C2 Performs a ram lock Ram lock absorbs vibration from the front axle Ram lock
function. depending on road conditions when the vehicle is
moving while it keeps the front axle stable to
increase operation convenience when the vehicle
is working.
C3 Controls driving speed. Converts to low-speed driving (below 5km/h).
C4 Cuts off pilot pressure. Supplies the pressure and oil flows discharged by
the pilot pump to the solenoid valve that supplies
pilot pressure and the remote control valve, to
drive each device.
Detailed Function and Application Descriptions by

Solenoid Valve
1. Selects devices for operation.
The solenoid selector valve (C1) selects sub-devices
such as dozer and outrigger. Dozer blade operates
when C1 is turned ""OFF"" while outrigger operates
when C1 is turned "OFF". This means that if C1 is
operated, pilot pressure is sent to pilot directional valve
changing the opening area of the spool. Then, C1
sends the pressure and oil to the outrigger stopping
the pressure and oil from flowing into dozer blade. If
C1 doesn't operate, the pilot pressure cannot be sent
to the pilot directional valve. In this case, the pilot
directional valve is initialized and block the pressure
and oil flows from the outrigger, supplying them to the
dozer blade. This pilot directional valve spool
determines the selection of devices- a dozer or an
outrigger.
Ram lock is a function to absorb vibration from the
front axle depending on road conditions when the

Page 19
vehicle is moving while it keeps the front axle stable to
increase operation convenience when the vehicle is
working.
A. How the ram lock function "ON" works
When C2 goes "OFF", it blocks the flow path
between both ram cylinders enabling the oil flow
in the cylinders to remain steady, and this
activates ram lock.
B. How ram lock "OFF" works
If C2 is turned "ON", it connects the flow path
between both ram cylinders allowing load on them
and the strokes of the cylinders are adjusted
based on their loads.
C4 transmits the pressure and oil supplied by the pilot
pump to the solenoid valve that supplies pilot pressure,
the braker valve package, and remote control valves
(dozer, arm/swing, boom/bucket). With the cut-off lever
pulled down on the left-hand side of the driver's seat,
the limit switch emits electric signals enabling C4 to
supply pressure into the system.

Page 20
The assembly torque of each part in the Solenoid Valve
Package is described in the table below.

and Necessary Tools
2-1
Disassembly
2-2
Aassembly
2-3
4
FG007550
Figure 8
Assembly
Torque (kg•cm)
2-1 Coil Lock Nut UNF1/2-20" 60 ± 2 Torque wrench/ 19mm hex. socket
3 Check Valve UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
4 PT 1/8" Plug PT 1/8-28" 280 Torque wrench/5mm wrench socket
Bolt

Page 21
assembly
CAUTION
lock nut.
work.

using your hand.
valve and coil.
CAUTION
on solenoid valve.

disassembly.

Page 22
Coil Nut
Coil
Cap Housing
Tube &
Retainer
Case
FG007535
Figure 9

Page 23
Parts

area.
Solenoid retainer
coil excessive.
valve"
replace relief
valve.
materials.
pump
filter.

Page 24
properly correct.
pressure value. for
" Solenoid valve"
correct.
descriptions to
correct.

SD, CH, IC, PS PF1/4" O-ring boss Solenoid valve-"ON"

Page 25
3-SOLENOID

Package
in the table below.
4 C1
C3
10K
28 0
SD GT 20
S
A
3
CH C6
P
IC
5
PS
6
FG000008
Figure 10

1 Manifold Block 80*149*178 1 1-A2130-03-1
2 Solenoid Valve TF-S3A-00-VDL24VDC 6 C2, C3, C4
3 Check Valve FD-CDP-O-A 2 C5, C6
4 Dummy Plug - 1 C1
5 Plug PF1/4-19" 1 SD
6 Plug PT1/8" 11

Page 26
Functions of 3 Solenoid Valve Assembly
Package
Functions
1. Selects devices for operation (dozer blade/ STD).
3. Controls driving speed.

C1 Selects devices. Dummy plug (C1) shut off the circuit against
- Dozer blade selection system. Only dozer blade is available for
selection.
C2 Performs a ram lock Used to absorb vibration from the front axle Ram lock
function. depending on road conditions when the vehicle is
moving while it keeps the front axle stable to
increase operation convenience when the vehicle
is working.
C3 Controls driving speed. Converts to low-speed driving (below 5km/h).
C4 Cuts off pilot pressure. Supplies the pressure and oil flows discharged by
the pilot pump to the solenoid valve that supplies
pilot pressure and the remote control valve, to
drive each device.
Detailed Function and Application Descriptions by

Solenoid Valve
1. Selects devices for operation.
This Dummy plug(C1) selects sub-devices such as a
dozer blade and forms a closed circuit for selection
system. So, pilot directional valve will not operate and
the opening position of spool will remain the same at
all times as pilot pressure will not be transmitted to
pilot directional valve. However, the pressure and oil
that are going into the devices (dozer blade &
outrigger) will be transmitted to dozer blade with the
directional valve in its normal opening position (no
operation).
2. Performs ram lock functions.
Ram lock is a function to absorb vibration from the
front axle depending on road conditions when the
vehicle is moving while it keeps the front axle stable to
increase operation convenience when the vehicle is
working.
A. How the ram lock function "ON" works

Page 27
When C2 goes "OFF", it blocks the flow path
between both ram cylinders enabling the oil flow
in the cylinders to remain steady. And this
activates ram lock.
B. How ram lock "OFF" works
If C2 is turned "ON", it connects the flow path
between both ram cylinders allowing load on them
and the strokes of the cylinders are adjusted
based on their loads.
C4 transmits the pressure and oil supplied from the
pilot pump to solenoid valve that supplies pilot
pressure, the braker valve package, and remote control
valve (dozer, arm/swing, boom/bucket). Pull down the
cut-off lever on the left-hand side of the driver's seat to
give electric signals of the limit switch enabling the
valve to supply pilot pressure into the system.

Page 28
The assembly torque of each part in the Solenoid Valve
Package is described in the table below.

and Necessary Tools
2-1
Disassembly
2-2
Assembly
4
2-3
C1
C3
10K
28 0
20
GT
S
C6
3
CH P
IC
PS A
5
6
FG007551
Figure 11
Assembly
Torque (kg•cm)
2-1 Coil Lock Nut UNF1/2-20" 60 ± 2 Torque wrench/19mm hex. socket
3 Check Valve UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
4 Dummy Plug UNF7/8-14" 200 ± 25 Torque wrench/1" hex. socket
5 PF 1/4" Plug PF 1/4-19" 250 ± 25 Torque wrench/19mm hex. socket

Page 29
Assembly
CAUTION
lock nut.
work.

using your hand.
valve and coil.
CAUTION
on solenoid valve.

disassembly.

Page 30
Coil Nut
Coil
Cap Housing
Tube &
Retainer
Case
FG007535
Figure 12

Page 31
Parts

area.
Solenoid retainer
coil excessive.
valve"
replace relief
valve.
materials.
pump
filter.
properly correct.
pressure value. for
" Solenoid valve"
correct.
descriptions to
correct.

Page 32

CH, IC, PS PF1/4" O-ring boss Solenoid valve-"ON"

Page 33
Page 34
SP001107
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICSP001107
1Hydraulic
Schematic
Edition 1
Hydraulic Schematic SP001107

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Hydraulic Schematic
DX210W (4-INDI)................................................. 7
DX210W (ONE-PIECE BOOM)........................... 8
DX210W (TWO-PIECE BOOM) .......................... 9

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
DX210W (4-INDI)
LH HIGH OPT. PEDAL(RO) OPT. PEDAL(TWOWAY) DOZER ARM/SWING BOOM/BUCKET
LH HIGH
2 A3
2 1 2 2
4.6 BAR 6 BAR
1.5 BAR
1 3
W
1 3
1 1 2 4 4
RH HIGH
RH HIGH 1 P T 2 1 P 3 2 T 4 1 P 3 2 T 4
1 T P 2 1 T P 2
XAd XBd
(DN) (UP)
A1 B1
R3
S1 26 BAR
R1 TRANSMISSION
A2 B2 SOCKLESS PRESSURE
VALVE WARNING
W
P
T
to ONE SPOOL VALVE M2

C1 SWING ARM BOOM BUCKET
A2 G-TS P
P2
P1 B2 B1 1 2 3 4 5 6
M 0.35 L INCHING TRAVEL
HO (Front)
C2 PZ 15 BAR IC C3
A2 S1 A1 ROTATING PUMP
PL T GP P1
7 13 8 14 9 15 10 16 11 17 12 18 X1
XBs XAs XBk ENGINE Vgmax Vgmin
PB
SWS XBa2 XAa2 XAk XAk2 DL06 C6
(L) (R)
C3 XBa1 XAa1 XBb1 XAb1 C4
(DU) (CR) (UP) (DN) (CR) (DU) C1
PILOT SUPPLY 2x0.7 L
BM2 PS CUT-OFF C5
C4 M3 30BAR
XBb2 C3
PBP C6
PSP CH C2 P B(HIGH) PSA
103 BAR
X3
C5 XBt 125 BAR
Vgmax Vgmin K(LOW)
PBR C4 ACC A
C6 XAt C1
X1
Fl C2 160 BAR
C5 ACC B
PAR
T T
BRAKE
C7 T BLOCK P BLOCK SUPPLY
(Rear) PSD W
M VALVE
P1
A1
TS
M1
R2 S G1 AC AB
65 BAR
Front Rear LOW
T
Axle Axle PRESSURE
WARNING
19 BAR
W
P A
AUTO IDLE
MODULATION VALVE
Solenoid Valve 0.5BAR

Opt. Pedal Operating LH HIGH
Hammer Select Operating XAo
RH HIGH
A B XBo SWING MOTOR SH
A B to ARTICULATED BOOM
A2 A1
W
T T 19 BAR BR1 P1
PL 1.5 BAR
R TRAVEL MODE P2 Py Pg Px P3 P4 P1 Pz Rs 4.6 BAR T1
w W
PG
W
DB TANK CRUISE BL1
2.5 BAR A2 A1 RELEASE
MRV
C BR2 P2
P P B2 S1 B1
330bar 2.0 BAR 4.6 BAR T2
270 270
350bar PA PB W
from JOYSTICK(R) SWITCH XBt BL2
W
from SELECT SWITCH CRUISE
Bt to ONE SPOOL VALVE
TRAVEL 65굇4 BAR RELEASE BRAKE VALVE
Hammer Select 시 작동 AUTO RAM 80 BAR
XAt OPERATE
Shear Select 시 작동
At A (LH) B (RH)
XBo XAd
Rear
Bo ROD 360
Bd Axle
L OPTION DOZER/STAB.
C1 XAo
CF
BUCKET XBd
A B Ao HEAD Front
360 Ad
Axle P
EF
R.H C
Ck2
XBk 邈0.9
PROPORTIONAL VALVE XAs
P A 360 CENTER LS
X Bk1 ROD BUCKET SWING Bs 3 3
1 1
1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1
Fr
XAk
邈0.9 8 8 2 2 8 8 4 4 8 8 2 4 4 JOINT
XBs
T 4 5 13 14 10 11 8 9 3 15 7 6 1 12 2
XAb1 Ak1 360 HEAD As
X1 SOCKLESS
L
(Front) VALVE STEERING VALVE
XBb1 BOOM2 Xop
L.H 360 LS
A 220kg/cm 2
HEAD BOOM1 op
Pi XBb2
Dr1 Ab1 360 ROD
T B(HIGH) K(LOW) 175 +10
BAR
0
ARM2 ARM1
CHOCK
BP P
X
XBa1 320cc/rev
XBa2
360 X(IC)
ROD Ba1
XAa1 G
XAa2 Aa1 U T
1 M
B G EXT
LH HIGH RH HIGH HEAD 360 GP GP
J B (REV) Pi BL
Valve; GP GP
One Spool M
ARM Dr4
BOOM BC qmax
S
STEER
pa
HOLDING CYLINDER
B A
qmin
Y BR
C2 C2
A(FWD)
E E Fr Dr3 Fl XAk2 Par Ck1 Pal CHOCK
M A
ROTATING PUMP T M
P 2 3 +20
225 0BAR
M 2
TRAVEL MOTOR
X
R T L
2 Right Turn
80kg/cm 2
Pi2 Pi1 (TU)
Pi1 Pi1
FRONT AXLE Left Turn
OIL TANK T T
BRAKE
(RETURN ROOM) T V2 V2
pb
100kg/cm 2
LOCK VALVE
to Shuttle Block
REAR AXLE
'8' port
BRAKE
QUICK CLAMP VALVE V2 T Pil E
LH HIGH
C2
RH HIGH A B P
P3
T
LOCK VALVE
ARM
from JOYSTICK(L) SWITCH

FG008728
Figure 1

7
DX210W (ONE-PIECE BOOM)

LH HIGH
2 A3
2 1 2 2
4.6 BAR 6 BAR
1.5 BAR
1 3
W
1 3
1 1 2 4 4
RH HIGH
RH HIGH 1 P T 2 1 P 3 2 T 4 1 P 3 2 T 4
1 T P 2 1 T P 2
XAd XBd
(DN) (UP)
A1 B1
R3
S1 26 BAR
R1 TRANSMISSIO
N
VALVE WARNING
W
P
T
to ONE SPOOL
VALVE M2
A2 G-TS P
P2
P1 B2 B1 1 2 3 4 5 6
M 0.35 L INCHING RTAVEL
HO (Front)
C2 PZ 15 BAR IC C3
A2 S1 A1 ROTATING PUM
P
PL T GP P1
7 13 8 14 9 15 10 16 11 17 12 18 X1
ENGINE Vgmax Vgmin Fr
XBs XAs XBk PB C6 M
SWS XBa2 XAa2 XAk XAk2 DL06
(L) (R)
PS CUT-OFF C5
BM2 30BAR
C4 XBb2 M3
C6 C3
PBP C2 PSA
PSP CH P B(HIGH) 103 BAR
X3
C5 XBt 125 BAR
Vgmax Vgmin K(LOW)
PBR C4 ACC A
C6 C1
XAt Fl 160 BAR
X1 C2 ACC B
C5
PAR
T T
BRAKE
(Rear) PSD W
M VALVE
P1
A1
TS
M1
R2 S G1 AC AB
65 BAR
Front Rear LOW
T
Axle Axle PRESSURE
WARNING
19 BAR
W
P A
AUTO IDLE
MODULATIONVALVE

HammerSelect Operating XAo
RH HIGH
A B
A2 A1
W
T T 19 BAR BR1 P1
PL 1.5 BAR
w W
PG
W
DB TANK CRUISE BL1
MRV
C BR2 P2
P P B2 S1 B1
270 270
350bar PA PB W
from JOYSTICK(R) SWI
TCH XBt BL2
W
from SELECT SWI
TCH CRUISE
Bt to ONE SPOOL
VALVE
TRAVEL 65±4 BAR RELEASE BRAKEVALVE
HammerSelect ½Ã ÀÛµ¿ AUTO RAM 80 BAR
XAt OPERATE
Shear Select ½Ã ÀÛµ¿
At A (LH) B (RH)
XBo XAd
Rear
Bo ROD 360
Bd Axle
L OPTION DOZER/S
TAB.
BUCKET C1 XAo XBd
A B Ao HEAD Front
Ad
CF
360
R.H Ck2 Axle
C
P
EF
XBk Ø0.9
PROPORTIONALVALVE XAs
P A 360 CENTER
1 1
1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1
Fr
XAk
Ø0.9 8 8 2 2 8 8 4 4 8 8 2 4 4 JOINT
XBs LS
T 4 5 13 14 10 11 8 9 3 15 6 1 12 2
X1 SOCKLESS
L
(Front) VALVE
XBb1 BOOM2 STEERING
VALVE
Xop
L.H A 220kg/cm 2 360
HEAD BOOM1 op LS
Pi XBb2 GP
Dr1 Ab1 360 ROD

T B(HIGH) K(LOW)
ARM2 ARM1
CHOCK +10
BP 175 BAR
0
X
XBa1 P
XBa2
360 X (IC)
ROD Ba1
G 315cc/rev
XAa1
LH HIGH RH HIGH
XAa2 HEAD Aa1 U T
1 M
B G EXT
360 GP
J B (REV) Pi BL
Valve; GP
One Spool M
ARM Dr4
BOOM BC DOZER qmax
S
STEER
pa
HOLDING CYLINDER
B A
qmin
Y BR
C2 C2
A(FWD)
M A
ROTATING PUM
P T M
P 2 3
M 2
TRAVEL MOTOR +20
225 BAR
0
Pi2 GP X 2
R T L
80kg/cm 2
Pi1 (TU)
Right Turn
Pi1 Pi1
REARAXLE FRONTAXLE
OILTANK T T Left Turn
BRAKE BRAKE
(RETURNROOM) T V2 V2
pb
100kg/cm 2
LOCKVALVE
to Shuttle Block
'8' port
QUICK C
LAMPVALVE V2 T Pil E
LH HIGH
C2
RH HIGH A B P
P3
T
LOCKVALVE
ARM
from JOYSTICK(L) SWI

TCH
Figure 2 FG008729

8
DX210W (TWO-PIECE BOOM)

LH HIGH
2 A3
2 1 2 2
4.6 BAR 6 BAR
1.5 BAR
1 3
W
1 3
1 1 2 4 4
RH HIGH
RH HIGH 1 P T 2 1 P 3 2 T 4 1 P 3 2 T 4
1 T P 2 1 T P 2
XAd XBd
(DN) (UP)
A1 B1
R3
S1 26 BAR
R1 TRANSMISSIO
N
VALVE WARNING
W
P
T
to ONE SPOOL
VALVE M2
A2 G-TS P
P2
P1 B2 B1 1 2 3 4 5 6
M 0.35 L INCHING RTAVEL
HO (Front)
C2 PZ 15 BAR IC C3
A2 S1 A1 ROTATING PUM
P
PL T GP P1
7 13 8 14 9 15 10 16 11 17 12 18 X1
ENGINE Vgmax Vgmin Fr
XBs XAs XBk PB C6 M
SWS XBa2 XAa2 XAk XAk2 DL06
(L) (R)
PS CUT-OFF C5
BM2 30BAR
C4 XBb2 M3
C6 C3
PBP C2 PSA
PSP CH P B(HIGH) 103 BAR
X3
C5 XBt 125 BAR
Vgmax Vgmin K(LOW)
PBR C4 ACC A
C6 C1
XAt Fl 160 BAR
X1 C2 ACC B
C5
PAR
T T
BRAKE
(Rear) PSD W
M VALVE
P1
A1
TS
M1
R2 S G1 AC AB
65 BAR
Front Rear LOW
T
Axle Axle PRESSURE
WARNING
19 BAR
W
P A
AUTO IDLE
MODULATIONVALVE

HammerSelect Operating XAo
RH HIGH
A B
A2 A1
W
T T 19 BAR BR1 P1
PL 1.5 BAR
w W
PG
W
DB TANK CRUISE BL1
MRV
C BR2 P2
P P B2 S1 B1
270 270
350bar PA PB W
from JOYSTICK(R) SWI
TCH XBt BL2
W
from SELECT SWI
TCH CRUISE
Bt to ONE SPOOL
VALVE
TRAVEL 65±4 BAR RELEASE BRAKEVALVE
HammerSelect ½Ã ÀÛµ¿ AUTO RAM 80 BAR
XAt OPERATE
Shear Select ½Ã ÀÛµ¿
At A (LH) B (RH)
XBo XAd
Rear
Bo ROD 360
Bd Axle
L OPTION DOZER/S
TAB.
BUCKET C1 XAo XBd
A B Ao HEAD Front
Ad
CF
360
R.H Ck2 Axle
C
P
EF
XBk Ø0.9
PROPORTIONALVALVE XAs
P A 360 CENTER
1 1
1 1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1
Fr
XAk
Ø0.9 8 8 2 2 8 8 4 4 8 8 2 4 4 JOINT
XBs LS
T 4 5 13 14 10 11 8 9 3 15 6 1 12 2
X1 SOCKLESS
L
(Front) VALVE
XBb1 BOOM2 STEERING
VALVE
Xop
L.H A 220kg/cm 2 360
HEAD BOOM1 op LS
Pi XBb2 GP
Dr1 Ab1 360 ROD

T B(HIGH) K(LOW)
ARM2 ARM1
CHOCK +10
BP 175 BAR
0
X
XBa1 P
XBa2
360 X (IC)
ROD Ba1
G 315cc/rev
XAa1
LH HIGH RH HIGH
XAa2 HEAD Aa1 U T
1 M
B G EXT
360 GP
J B (REV) Pi BL
Valve; GP
One Spool M
ARM Dr4
BOOM BC DOZER qmax
S
STEER
pa
HOLDING CYLINDER
B A
qmin
Y BR
C2 C2
A(FWD)
M A
ROTATING PUM
P T M
P 2 3
M 2
TRAVEL MOTOR +20
225 BAR
0
Pi2 GP X 2
R T L
80kg/cm 2
Pi1 (TU)
Right Turn
Pi1 Pi1
REARAXLE FRONTAXLE
OILTANK T T Left Turn
BRAKE BRAKE
(RETURNROOM) T V2 V2
pb
100kg/cm 2
LOCKVALVE
to Shuttle Block
'8' port
QUICK C
LAMPVALVE V2 T Pil E
LH HIGH
C2
RH HIGH A B P
P3
T
LOCKVALVE
ARM
from JOYSTICK(L) SWI

TCH
Figure 3 FG008729

9
10
1Electrical System
SP002209
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (NON-ROPS)SP002209
Electrical
System
(NON-ROPS)
Edition 1
Electrical System (NON-ROPS) SP002209

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Electrical System
(NON-ROPS)
Introduction ........................................................... 7
Electrical Supply System .................................... 8
Engine Starting Circuit ...................................... 10
Start Operation ............................................................. 10
After Start ..................................................................... 12
Engine Preheating System ............................... 14
Engine Stop ....................................................... 16
Charging System ............................................... 18
Monitoring System ............................................. 19
Instrument Panel .......................................................... 20
Monitoring System Schematic ..................................... 22
Operation ............................................................ 24
Instruments.................................................................... 24
Warning and Indicator Lights ........................... 26
Indication of Warning Lights........................................ 26
Indication of Multifunction Gauge and Letter
Information Area ........................................................... 27
Initial Operation.................................................. 29
Mode Selector Switch ....................................... 30
Graphic Information Area Display .................... 31
Overview ....................................................................... 31
Main Menus for the Graphic Display Area ................ 32
Menu Selector Buttons ................................................ 32
Main Menu ......................................................... 33
Language ...................................................................... 33
Set Clock ...................................................................... 34
Filter/Oil Info ................................................................. 34

Page 3
Adjust Display ............................................................... 35
Set Password ............................................................... 36
Special Menu ..................................................... 37
Entering/Accessing and Exiting/Escaping Menus ....... 37
Special Menu Selections ............................................. 38
Electronic Hydraulic Control System
(e-EPOS) ............................................................ 54
Control System Schematic .......................................... 54
Power Mode Control ......................................... 56
Operation....................................................................... 58
Power Mode Control - Circuit Diagram ........... 61
Engine Control System ..................................... 62
Engine Control Dial ........................................... 63
Acceleration pedal ............................................. 64
Engine Control Circuit Diagram........................ 65
Automatic Deceleration Control (Auto Idle
Control) ............................................................... 66
Engine Overheat Protection System ................ 68
Power Boost Mode............................................ 70
Operation....................................................................... 70
Power Boost Control - Circuit Diagram ..................... 72
Cruise control..................................................... 73
Operation....................................................................... 73
Cruise Control Circuit................................................... 75
Automatic Travel Speed Control ...................... 76
Automatic Travel Speed Control - Circuit Diagram... 78
Self-diagnostic Function .................................... 79
e-EPOS Controller ........................................................ 79
Wiper System .................................................... 81
Wiper Circuit ................................................................. 81
Wiper operation ............................................................ 82
Lighting System ................................................. 84

Page 4
Lighting System Circuit Diagram................................. 84
Type .............................................................................. 85
Operation....................................................................... 85
Overload Warning Device ................................. 86
Overload Warning Device Circuit Diagram ................ 86
Audio Controller ................................................. 87
Audio Controller Circuit Diagram ................................ 87
ram lock device ................................................. 88
Ram Lock Control Circuit ............................................ 88
Operation....................................................................... 89
Air Conditioner System ..................................... 90
Outline ........................................................................... 90
Internal and External Filters ........................................ 91
Air-Conditioning System Layout .................................. 93
Air Conditioner/Heater Circuit Diagram....................... 94
Air Conditioner/Heater Unit.......................................... 95
Relay - Blower ............................................................. 99
Relay - A/C .................................................................. 99
Duct Sensor.................................................................. 99
Water Temp Sensor................................................... 100
Internal Air Temp Sensor .......................................... 100
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 100
Sun Sensor ................................................................. 101
Control Panel .............................................................. 101
Compressor ................................................................. 108
Receiver Dryer............................................................ 108

Page 5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 6
INTRODUCTION
The electrical system for this equipment is DC 24 volts. The
rated voltage for all electric components is 24 volts with the
exception of the stereo and the air-conditioning control
actuator. The system contains two 12 volt batteries
connected in series and a three phase AC generator with a
rectifier. The electric wiring used in the system is easily
identifiable by the insulator color. The color symbols used in
the electrical system are listed in the following chart.
Electric Wire Color
Symbol Color
W White
G Green
Or Orange
B Black
L Blue
Lg Light green
R Red
Gr Gray
P Pink
Y Yellow
Br Brown
V Violet
NOTE: RW: Red wire with White stripe

R - Base Color, W - Stripe Color
NOTE: 0.85G: Nominal sectional area of wire core less
insulator = 0.85 mm2

Page 7
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
The electric power circuit supplies electric current to each
electric component. It consists of a battery, battery relay,
starter switch, circuit breaker, fusible link and fuse box.
The negative terminal of the battery is grounded to the
vehicle body.
Even when the starter switch (5) is in the "OFF" position,
electric current is supplied to the following components
through battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse box (6).
1. Terminal "1" of DC-DC converter (for memory backup
of stereo)
2. Terminal "B" of starter switch
3. Hour meter
4. Engine controller
5. Fuel feeder pump switch
6. Terminal "6" of wiper motor
7. Terminal "13" of wiper controller
8. Terminal "CN6-11" of instrument panel
9. Terminal "CN9-6" of air conditioner panel
10. Pilot buzzer
11. Light switch
When the starter switch (5) is in the "ON or START"
positions, the current flows from the battery (1) → fusible
link (3) → fuse box (6) → "B" terminal of starter switch (5)
→ "BR" terminal of starter switch (5) → "BR" terminal of
battery relay (2) which activates the coil of the battery relay
and the electric supply system is energized.
When the battery relay's contacts are connected, all electric
devices can be operated.
While the engine is not running, the electric power for all
electric devices are supplied by the battery. Once the engine
is started the power is supplied from the alternator (7).

Page 8
MEMO
ACC C
B 5
R2
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
12V 100AH 12V 100AH
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION R(I) P(R) B(B+)
0.5 uF 1
PST TML B BR R1 R2 C ACC B+
OFF I(L)
PREHEAT
ON
REG.
TRIO DIODE 7
FIELD
START F+
F-
E
GRD
FG004584
Figure 1 ELECTRIC POWER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 5 Starter Switch
2 Battery Relay 6 Fuse Box
3 Fusible Link 7 Alternator
4 Circuit Breaker 8 Diode

Page 9
ENGINE STARTING CIRCUIT
Start Operation
When the starter switch is turned to the "START" position,
the "S" and "E" terminals of the starter controller (7) are
connected. At this time the contacts in the starter relay (8)
are closed by the current flow from the battery (1) → fusible
→ "C" terminal of starter switch (5) → "30" terminal of
starter relay (12) - "87a" terminal → "C" terminal of starter
relay (8) - "D" terminal → "S" terminal of starter controller
(7) - "E" terminal → ground.
When the contact point "B" and "PP" of starter relay (8) are
connected, the pinion gear of the starter (9) is pushed
forward and makes contact with the ring gear of the flywheel
and the internal contacts of the starter are connected. The
current flows from the battery (1) → "A" terminal of the
battery relay (2) → "B" terminal of the battery relay (2,
Figure 3) → "30" terminal of the starter (9). The starter
motor is rotated and the engine is started.
If the instrument panel has the password function activated,
input number should match the set number, otherwise the
start circuit closes and the engine does not start.
NOTE: If the security system is "LOCKED," a four-digit
password will be required to start the engine. If the
system is "UNLOCKED," no password will be
required and this display screen will not appear.
ENTER
In the event the security system is locked, current PASSWORD
flows from battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse box
(6) → "B" terminal of starter switch (5) → "ACC"
terminal of starter switch (5) → "86" terminal of starter
relay (12) → "85" terminal of starter relay (12) →
"CN1-15" terminal of e-EPOS (13) → ground. This
current flow causes the coil in starter relay (12) to be FG013717
activated, opening contacts at "87a" terminal. This Figure 2
prevents starter relay (8) from functioning.

Page 10
7 8 9
N S D PP C
P C B B
B E
11
A
87a
30
87
85 86 ACC
C
B 5
R2 BR
12 R1
3
CN1-15
6
4
B A
CN2-1
BR
E
13 11
R(I) P(R) B(B+)
2
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION 0.5 uF
B+
PST TML B BR R1 R2 C ACC

I(L)
OFF - + - +
REG.
TRIO DIODE
10
PREHEAT
ON F+ FIELD
1
F-
START E
GRD
FG004587
Figure 3 STARTER CIRCUIT (1) - WHILE STARTING
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 8 Starter Relay
2 Battery Relay 9 Starter
5 Starter Switch 12 Starter Relay 2
6 Fuse Box 13 e-EPOS Controller
7 Starter Controller

Page 11
After Start
Once the engine has been started, the belt driven alternator
(10) generates a current.
The output generated by the alternator (10) is a square
wave pulse voltage through the "R" terminal and the
frequency of the pulse voltage is proportional to the rotation
of the alternator.
The starter controller (7) monitors the frequency of the
output current. Once the frequency is equivalent to 500 rpm,
it is sensed and the connection between "S" and "E"
terminals and the connection between "B" and "PP"
terminals are opened. As a result the rotation of the starter
(9) is stopped. Once the engine is running, the starter (9)
will not operate even if the starter switch (5) is moved to
the start position, preventing possible damage to the starter.

Page 12
Operation of the Start Circuit (2) - Immediately After Start
7 8 9
N S D PP C
P C B B
B E
11
A
87a
30
87
85 86 ACC
C
B 5
R2 BR
12 R1
3
CN1-15
6
4
B A
CN2-1
BR
13 E
R(I) P(R) B(B+)
11
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION 0.5 uF 2
B+

I(L)
OFF
REG.
PREHEAT TRIO DIODE
10 - + - +
ON F+ FIELD
START
F-
E 1
GRD
FG004588
Figure 4 OPERATION OF START CIRCUIT (2) - IMMEDIATELY AFTER START
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 13
ENGINE PREHEATING SYSTEM
An air heater (8) is installed in the intake manifold of the
engine. When the starter switch (5) is turned "ON," the
current flows from the battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse
box (6) → "B" terminal of starter switch (5) → "BR" terminal
of starter switch (5) → "1-39" terminal of engine controller
(12), causing current to flow though "1-16" terminal of
engine controller (12) → "C and D" terminals of preheat
relay (7) → "1-04" terminals of engine controller (12) →
ground.
This current flow causes the coil in preheat relay (7) to be
activated, closing contacts.
When the contacts of the preheat relay (7) are closed, the
heating coils of the air heating device (8) are heated by
current flowing from the battery (1) → battery relay (2) →
preheat relay (7) → air heater (8) → ground.
The duration of the heating cycle depends on the
temperature of engine coolant. The preheat indicator light in
the instrument panel (9) will turn "ON" during preheating
cycle.
The preheat relay (7) is controlled by the engine controller
(12) and operates only at temperatures of 10°C (50°F) and
below.
The longer the preheating period, the lower the temperature
of coolant is.

Page 14
3
6
9 4
CN6-1,2 2
ACC C B A
PREHEAT CN7-4,5,6
L5 B 5
R2 BR
R1 BR E
10
CN4-4,5,6
CN2-1
CN5-2
- + - +
11 C B 1
-
200A
1-56
7 STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION
1-33,34,35 8 TML
1-39 PST B BR R1 R2 C ACC
1-16 D OFF
H +
1-04 ON
START
12
FG007757
Figure 5 Engine Preheat Circuit
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Preheat Relay
2 Battery Relay 8 Air Heater
3 Fusible Link 9 Preheat Indicator Light
5 Starter Switch 11 e-EPOS Controller
6 Fuse Box 12 Engine Controller

Page 15
ENGINE STOP
When starter switch (5) is turned "ON" the engine controller
(8) is activated. The engine controller monitors and controls
the engine including the injector solenoid (9). It controls the
fuel deliver rate and the injection timing for each cylinder.
NOTE: There is an individual injector solenoid (9) for each of
the six cylinders. Only one solenoid is shown in
Figure 7.
When starter switch (5) is turned "OFF," the engine
controller stops suppling power to the injector solenoid (9).
This stops fuel from being injected into the engine cylinder,
thus stopping the engine.
In the event that the engine can be shut down using the
starter switch (5), an emergency stop switch (10) is provided O I
to shut down engine. To activate the emergency stop switch,
move it to the "I" (EMERGENCY STOP) position.
The emergency stop switch (10) is in its "O" (OFF) position
during normal operation. The switch must be moved and
held in the "I" (EMERGENCY STOP) position until the
engine stops. When released it will automatically move back
to the "O" (OFF) position.
FG001344
Figure 6 ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP
SWITCH

Page 16
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION
OFF
ON
START
8
6
0.5G
3
ACC C
10 B 5
R2
1-19 2 3 BR
4 2
R1 B A
1-45
1-39 BR
E
7
9
- + - +
1
FG001473
Figure 7 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Fuse Box
2 Battery Relay 7 Diode
3 Fusible Link 8 Engine Controller
4 Circuit Breaker 9 Injector Solenoid
5 Starter Switch 10 Emergency Stop Switch

Page 17
CHARGING SYSTEM
When the starter switch (5) is turned to the "ON" position,
an initial excited current flows to the field coil of the
alternator (7) through the battery relay (2) and circuit
breaker (4). When the engine is started from this condition
the alternator (7) starts charging. The current flows from the
"B(B+)" terminal of alternator (7) → circuit breaker (4) →
battery relay (2) → battery (1).
The alternator also supplies electric current to other
electrical components. When the alternator (7) starts to
operate, a current flows from the "I (R)" terminal of
alternator → diode (8) → battery relay (2) coil securing a
path for the charging current to the battery (1). Thus
preventing the possibility of a high voltage build up and
possible damage to the electric system.
ACC C
B
R2
5
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
I R B+ 12V 150AH 12V 150AH
0.5 uF
1
B+
I(L)

OFF
REG.
TRIO DIODE 7
F+ FIELD
ON F-
E
START
GRD
FG007765
Figure 8 CHARGING CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 18
MONITORING SYSTEM
1
5 7
2
CHECK
4
3 9
8
E F 17
10
C H C H
6 11
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0 16
12
18
15 14
13
20 19
21
FG016922
Figure 9
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 12 Air Cleaner Indicator
2 Battery 13 Engine Control Unit
3 Light Switch 14 Parking Brake Sensor
4 Return Filter Switch 15 Brake Oil Pressure Switch
5 Pilot Filter Switch 16 Pilot Relay
6 e-EPOS Controller 17 Parking Brake Switch
7 Alternator 18 Steering Console
8 Warning Buzzer 19 Right Side Combination Switch
9 Pump Discharge Pressure Sensor 20 Left Side Combination Switch
10 Oil Temperature Sensor 21 Ram Lock Switch
11 Fuel Sensor
The monitoring system displays the various data and

warning signals onto the instrument panel by processing the
information gathered from the e-EPOS controller. It displays
information selected by the operator.

Page 19
Instrument Panel
7 8 9 10 11 12 5
6 1
1 CHECK
E
< CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL NO.>
F 4
16
C H C H 18
AMP 040 28P
14 20
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
22
13 (CN7) (CN6)
1 2 3 4 5
23
6 7 8 9 0
15
17 19 21 FG013521
Figure 10

Page 20
Gauges Warning Lights Mode Selector Switches
1. Fuel Gauge 8. Engine Oil Pressure Warning 16. Auto Idle Selector Button
2. Engine Coolant Temperature 9. Engine Coolant 17. Flow Control Button
Gauge Temperature Warning
18. Up Arrow Button
3. Hydraulic Oil Temperature 10. Engine Check Warning
19. Down Arrow Button
Gauge
11. Preheat Indicator
20. Display Selector Button
4. Multifunction Gauge and
12. Work Light Indicator Light
Letter Information Area 21. Selector Button
13. Warning Light
5. Digital Clock 22. Home Selector Button
14. Power Mode Selector Button
6. Hour Meter 23. Camera Selector Button
15. Economy Mode Selector Button
7. Charge Warning
When the engine starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON)

position, all gauge bands, switch/button indicator lights and
warning lights will turn "ON" and the alarm buzzer will sound
about two seconds.
During this functional check, a LOGO will appear on the
multi function gauge in the graphic information area.

Page 21
Monitoring System Schematic
1
21
2
19
18
4
16
20
17
5
6 10
11
12
31 13
14
7
22
8
15
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
FG007781
Figure 11

Page 22
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 16 e-EPOS Controller
2 Pilot Buzzer 17 Battery
3 Light Switch 18 Battery Relay
4 Starter Switch 19 Circuit Breaker
5 Front Pump Pressure Sensor 20 Fusible Link
6 Rear Pump Pressure Sensor 21 Fuse Box
7 Fuel Sensor 22 Check Connector
8 Hydraulic Oil Temp. Sensor 23 Blink Unit
9 Parking Brake Sensor 24 Steering Console
10 Pedal Breaker Pressure Sensor 25, 26 Turn Signal Switch
11 Air Cleaner Indicator 27 High Beam
12 Pilot Filter Switch 28 Ram Lock Switch
13 Return Filter Switch 29 Travel Switch
14 Brake Oil Pressure Switch 30 Parking Switch
15 Alternator 31 Engine Controller

Page 23
OPERATION
Instruments
Sensor Specification
Function Display Input
Input Specification
Terminal
Blue
Coolant ECU-CAN
Temperature 61 C 102 C Communication
41 C 107 C
C H
White Red
FG013527
Blue
1/10 LCD (Red Zone)

CN3-7
Fuel Level Blinking → over 5K ohms
CN3-8
1/10 FULL → under 525 ohms
E F
Red Full
FG014894
Blue
40°C (104°F) → 1,397 ohms
50°C (122°F) → 1,139 ohms
Hydraulic Oil CN3-9 60°C (140°F) → 881 ohms

Temperature 50 C 94 C CN3-10 94°C (201°F) → 190 ohms
40 C 96 C
C H 96°C (205°F) → 177 ohms
White Red (When reading increase)
FG013529
208 43 l/min → 605 mA

207
181 208 65 l/min → 538 mA
193
(Output
129 156 82 l/min → 487 mA
Terminal)
Flow
82
102 129 l/min → 413 mA
Adjusting CN1-19
65 (Default Set)
CN1-20
43 207 l/min → 341 mA
(None)
FG017002 208 l/min → 290 mA

Page 24
Input Specification
Terminal
N = 146 f / 60
ECU-CAN N = Engine speed (rpm)
Tachometer E/G SPEED 1750 RP Communication
f = Frequency of engine
speed sensor (Hz)
FG013531
Voltmeter BATTERY 28.0 VOLT CN2-14 0 - 32 VDC
FG000050
Main pump
CN3-1
discharge
pressure
FRONT PUMP 320 BA
CN3-2
(front pump)
V = 0.00816 x P + 1.0
FG000051
V: Sensor output voltage (V)
P: Displayed pressure (Bar)
Main pump
discharge CN3-3
pressure
REAR PUMP 313 BAR
CN3-4
(rear pump)
FG000052

Page 25
WARNING AND INDICATOR
LIGHTS
Indication of Warning Lights

Input
Description Symbol Operation Remarks
Terminal
It lights in case of
no charge [voltage
Normally, it lights
of "R(I)" terminal is
when starting engine
Charge CN2 - 14 below 12 ±1V] or
and is out after
overcharge [voltage
engine starts.
of "R(I)" terminal is
HAOA610L above 33(V)].
After starting engine,

It lights when
ECU-CAN if engine oil pressure
Engine Oil engine oil pressure
Communic is insufficient after 8
Pressure is below the
ation seconds, a warning
reference.
buzzer will sound.
HAOA620L
ECU-CAN It lights in case of

Engine CHECK Communic failure in engine
Check
ation system.
FG000045
It lights when
ECU-CAN engine coolant
Coolant
Communic temperature sensor
Temperature
ation resistant is below
about 128 ohms.
HAOD350L
Preheating period
depends on coolant
It lights during temperature.
preheating ("CN5-2"
terminal voltage is No preheating at
Preheating CN5-2 below 2V) and turns above 10°C
"OFF" after 10 sec preheating at
completion of 5°C
HAOA639L preheating.
20 sec preheating at
below 0°C

Page 26
Input
Terminal
- Lights up when
the parking brake
switch is placed in
Parking CN5-1 the park position.
Brake
Indicator
Light
P CN3-11
CN3-12
- Lights up when
parking brake
pressure decrease
BCS0790L
below 26.0 kg/cm2
(377 psi)
Indication of Multifunction Gauge and

Letter Information Area
Input
Terminal
CN3-9 When hydraulic oil

Hydraulic Oil
temperature is
Temperature CN3-10 above about 96°C.
FG000056
Fuel CN3-7 When fuel is almost

Exhausted CN3-8 exhausted.
FG000057
When air cleaner is

Air Cleaner CN2-17
clogged.
FG000053
When return filter

pressure is above
Return Filter CN5-3
about 1.50 kg/cm²
(21 psi)
FG000054

Page 27
When pilot filter
pressure is above
Pilot Filter CN2-18
about 1 kg/cm² (14
psi)
FG000055
Warning buzzer also It flickers in case of

starts when boom 2.71V and above
CN3-5 pressure sensor and lights
Overload
output voltage is continuously in case
Warning CN3-6 about 2.7V while of 2.8V and above
overload warning (and warning buzzer
FG000253 switch is "ON." also starts).
It lights when boost

Boost CN2-2
is selected.
FG000554
It lights when
Breaker CN2-10
breaker is selected.
FG001470
It lights when shear

Shear CN2-9
is selected.
FG001471
Lights up when
Quick Clamp CN2-11 quick clamp was
release.
FG002195

Page 28
Lights up when
Travel CN2-3
travel was selected.
FG004605
Working It lights when work

CN2-6
Light light turns "ON".
HB4O2003
This symbol appears

when the water
separator is full.
Water CN3-19
Separator This symbol appears
CN3-20
when water separator
sensor output voltage
FG010520
is about 1.5V below.
INITIAL OPERATION
Item Input (Terminal) Output (Operation and initial setting mode)
Initial When "CN6-1,2" is applied • LCD, all of LED and warning lights are turned
Operation battery voltage (starter switch "ON" and turned "OFF" after about 2 seconds.
shifts from "OFF" to "ON"
• Warning buzzer is activated and turned "OFF"
after about 2 seconds.
• Power mode: Standard mode.
• Auto Idle: High Output (Activation).
• Display: Indicating coolant temperature, Fuel
level, Hydraulic oil temperature, Engine speed.
• Clock: Current time display.
NOTE: Refer to method for setting clock in operation manual

for setting time.

Page 29
MODE SELECTOR SWITCH
Power Mode / Trenching Mode Switch
e-EPOS Output
Output Check
(Operation Electromagnetic
Operation Mode Proportional Pressure Swing Priority 7-Segment
mode
display) Reducing Valve (E.P.P.R Solenoid Valve Display
Valve) Current (mA)
No-load: 150 ± 20mA
Power Mode ON Load: Variable output - 9 x
(Max. current: 400 ± 20mA)
Power
Standard Mode OFF Load: Variable output - 7 x
Mode
Economy Mode Load: Variable output - 5 x
NOTE: When the engine speed is below 1,000 rpm, the

output current of E.P.P.R valve is fixed to be
600 ± 60mA.
Auto Idle Switch
Operation Mode Output Check (Operation mode display LED)

Activation ON
Auto Idle
Cancellation OFF

Page 30
GRAPHIC INFORMATION AREA
DISPLAY
Overview
Many kinds of condition of machine are displayed on the
letter information display department. The information display
department is divided into two menus. One is main menu for
user and the other is special menu for specialist. These
menus can be moved from normal display mode by the
combination of selector buttons.
E F
C H C H 1
5
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
2 3 FG013562
Figure 12
Selector Buttons Graphic Display Area

1. Up Arrow Button 5. Home Button
2. Down Arrow Button 6. Letter Information Display Department
3. Enter Button
4. Escape Button

Page 31
Main Menus for the Graphic Display Area
1. Main menu: Language setting, Time setting, Filter/Oil
information, Brightness adjustment, Password
2. Special menu: Information of machine status, failure
information, Information of machine operation.
Menu Selector Buttons

1. Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12): Move the cursor
to up, left and previous screen.
2. Down Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12): Move the
cursor to down, right and next screen.
3. Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12): Move the menu to
selected mode. When setting the menu, this button is
used to function as the selector button.
4. Escape Button (ESC, 4 on Figure 12): Move a screen
to previous menu or main menu.
5. Home Button (HOME, 5 on Figure 12): Move a screen
to default menu.

Page 32
MAIN MENU
When the "ESC" button is pressed for more than 3 seconds,
the main menu screen is displayed. MAIN MENU
Main menu offers sub-menus (language setting, time setting, L 1. Language
or filter/oil information, brightness adjustment, password) to l
2. Set Clock
l
the operator.
3. Filter / Oil Info
Refer to the "Operation and Maintenance Manual" for details.
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
: UP : DOWN : SELECT
FG013563
Figure 13
Language
MAIN MENU
Put the cursor on Language in the main menu and put the
Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) and the language select
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
view appears.
The default language is Korean, but it will memorize and
use the newly set language. 4. Adjust Display
Use the Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12) or Down
5. Set Password
Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12) to move cursor to a : UP : DOWN : SELECT
language to be selected on the Language Select display and FG013563
press the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) and the Figure 14
selected language is indicated in the right bottom of the
screen.
At this point pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12)

or the Escape Button (ESC, 4 on Figure 12) more than 1 L Languag
second brings the main menu with changed language and
then pressing the ESC button again shows the default view. 1. Korean
Without pressing a button more than 20 seconds, the default 2. English
view appears.
: UP : DOWN : SET
FG013564
Figure 15

Page 33
Set Clock
MAIN MENU
It is used to adjust time of the digital clock.
L 1. Language
Pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) in the Main l
2. Set Clock
l
Menu after putting cursor on Set Clock brings Set Clock
display.
4. Adjust Display
Without pressing a button more than 20 seconds, the default
view appears. 5. Set Password
Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed information : UP : DOWN : SELECT
on Time Setting. FG013565
Figure 16
SET CLOCK
02:30:30
2003 11/04
FG013566
Figure 17
Filter/Oil Info
MAIN MENU
This mode displays total operating hours of filters and oils.
L 1. Language
After changing the filter and oil, reset the operating hour and l
2. Set Clock
l
then the operating hours until the next service interval can
be easily checked. 3. Filter / Oil Info
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013567
Figure 18
Filter/Oil Information
R
1. Fuel Filter
Hrs : 0045Hrs 42m
FG013568
Figure 19

Page 34
Menu Display Order and Icon Explanation
1. Fuel Filter 2. Air Cleaner 3. Engine Oil Filter 4. Return Filter
5. Pilot Filter 6. Engine Oil 7. Pilot Filter 8. Coolant Water

FG004977
Figure 20
Adjust Display
MAIN MENU
Pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) in the main
menu after putting cursor on Adjust Display brings Adjust
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
Display.
Screen brightness, contrast, back light can be adjusted using
the Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12) or the Down 4. Adjust Display
Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12). 5. Set Password
FG013569
Figure 21
1. Adjust Display
2. Adjust Display (Camera)
FG013835
Figure 22

Page 35
Day Mode
Adjust Display
The default brightness is set to 50%.
The default contrast is set to 50%. Brightness llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
The default back light is set to 90%. Contrast lllllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
Night Mode
BackLight llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
The default contrast is set to 30%. : UP : DOWN : SELECT
The default back light is set to 10%. FG013570
Figure 23
Set Password
MAIN MENU
This menu is used to apply (lock), release, or change
password. L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed information
on Password Setting. 3. Filter / Oil Info
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013571
Figure 24

Page 36
SPECIAL MENU
In this menu, many types of operating conditions and
functions can be accessed and displayed, including the
e-EPOS controller. This menu is mainly used for machine
testing and failure diagnostics.
The special menu offers three sub-menus:
1. Machine status.
2. Failure information.
3. Information on machine operation.
Entering/Accessing and Exiting/Escaping

Menus
Entering/Accessing Menus
4
When normal mode screen is displayed, if the enter button
( , 3) and escape button (ESC, 4) are pressed
simultaneously for more than 3 seconds, normal mode
screen (Figure 26) will be changed to special menu screen
(Figure 27).
3 FG013581
Figure 25
Normal Mode Screen

NOTE: Normal mode screen can display many kinds of
display mode by selecting, for example, engine
speed (RPM), battery voltage (VOLT), front pump
pressure (BAR), rear pump pressure (BAR) and so
on by selecting.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 26

Page 37
Special Menu Screen
NOTE: Displayed language on the special menu screen SPECIAL MENU
consists of Korean and English.
1. Machine Information
If any language except for Korean is selected during
language selection mode of main menu, only English 2. Failure Information
will be displayed on special menu screen.
3. Operating Hours
FG013592
Figure 27
Exiting/Escaping Menus
1. If escape button (ESC, 4 on Figure 25) is pressed for
more than 1 second, the special menu screen will be
returned to the normal mode screen.
2. If this special menu is "ON" without any activity, for
more than 20 seconds, it will turn to the normal mode
screen.
3. After the turning starter switch to the "OFF" position,
turn it back to the "ON" position, and the normal mode
screen displayed once again.
Special Menu Selections

Submenu Selection Method
Various sub-menus can be selected by pressing "Up ( ,

SPECIAL MENU
Figure 25)" and "Down( , Figure 25)" button. 1. Machine Information
Move the cursor to desired menu and a selected menu will
be inverse displayed. 2. Failure Information
When the selected menu is inverse displayed, press the
"Enter ( , 3 on Figure 25)" button for menu selection. 3. Operating Hours
FG013592
Figure 28
Information of Machine Status

1. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is located on MACHINE INFORMATION
"Machine Info" of special menu screen, press "Enter
( , 3 on Figure 25)" button and the "Machine Info"
1. Analog Input State
will be displayed.
2. Digital input State
2. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC, 4 on Figure
25) is pressed for more than 1 second, display will be
turned to previous screen.
3. Digital Output State
FG013593
Figure 29

Page 38
Analog Inputs Description
Analog Input Items Display Remark

1. Pump P/V mA Current in pump proportional valve.
2. Cooling Fan P/V mA N.A.
Current in flow control proportional
3. Flow Control P/V mA
valve.
4. Dial mV Indicating dial voltage.
5. Accel. Pedal mV Indicating accel. pedal voltage.
6. E/G Control Motor mV N.A.
7. Boom Pressure BAR Boom cylinder head pressure.
8. Pilot Gear Pump Press BAR Pilot gear pump pressure.
9. Boost Pressure BAR Pump pressure for boost.
Temperature of air incoming to
10. Intake Manifold Temperature °C
intake manifold.
11. E/G Oil Pressure BAR Engine oil pressure.
12. Fuel Temperature °C Fuel temperature.
13. E/G Oil Temperature °C Engine oil temperature.
14. Load At Cur. Spd % Current load ratio of equipment.
Submenu Selections
1. Power Shift P/V : 0598mA 6. E/G Control Motor : 2095mV

2. Cooling Fan Ctrl P/V : N.A 7. Boom Pressure : 205BAR
3. Flow Control P/V : 0000mA 8. Pilot Gear Pump Press: 33BAR
4. E/G Control Dial : 2095mV 9. Boost Pressure : 000BAR
5. Accel. Pedal : 2095mV 10. Intake Manifold Temp.: 000 C
: UP : DOWN : UP : DOWN
11. E/G Oil Pressure : 000BAR

12. Fuel Temp. : 000 C
13. E/G Oil Temp. : 000 C
14. Pecent Load At Cur. Spd: 00%
: UP : DOWN
FG016953
Figure 30

Page 39
Digital Inputs Descriptions
Digital Inputs Items Mark Remark

Lights up when output at alternator
1. Alternator
"R(I)" terminal is above 12 ± 1V.
2. Travel Select SW N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
Lights up when the travel speed
3. High Speed Sel. SW (M) selector switch is set to the "II"
position.
4. High Speed Sel. SW (A) selector switch is set to the "II"
position.
Lights up when the pressure
5. Pressure SW (Py)
switch (Py) is "ON".
6. Pressure SW (Px)
switch (Px) is "ON".
7. E/G Oil Press. SW N.A. (only for mechanical engine)
Lights up when the air cleaner
8. Air Cleaner Clogged
indicator contact is "ON".
Lights up when the return filter
9. Return Filter Clogged
pressure switch is "ON".
Lights up when the pilot filter
10. Pilot Filter Clogged
Lights up when the overload
11. OWD Warning SW
warning selector switch is "ON".
12. Brake Oil Press. SW ON / OFF N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
Lights up when pedal pressure
13. Pedal Press. SW
switch is "ON".
Lights up when the selector switch
14. One Way Sel. SW
is turned to breaker.
Lights up when the Selector
15. Two-way Sel. SW
Switch is turned to "SHEAR".
Lights up when the boost button
16. Power Max. SW is "ON" with the Select switch
turned to "BOOST".
17. Breaker SW is "ON" with the selector switch
turned to "BREAKER".
18. Preheat Select N.A.
Lights up when the Quick Coupler
19. Quick Coupler
switch is "ON".
20. F and R Lever N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
Lights up during preheating (CN5-
21. Preheat Select
2) terminal voltage is below 2V.
22. Reverse Fan SW N.A.
23. Pilot Cutoff SW N.A.
24. Water in fuel Light up when WIF sensor is "ON".

Page 40
Menu Select
1. Alternator : 7. E/G Oil Press.SW : N.A

2. Travel Select SW : N.A 8. Air Cleaner Clogged :
3. High Speed Sel. (M) : 9. Return Filter Clogged :
4. High Speed Sel. (A) : 10. Pilot Filter Clogged :
5. Pressure SW (Py) : 11. OWD Warning SW :
6. Pressure SW (Px) : 12. Breake Oil Press SW : N.A
19. Quick Coupler : 13. Pedal Press. SW :

20. F & R Lever : N.A 14. One Way Sel. :
21. Preheat Select : 15. Two Way Sel. :
22. Reverse Fan SW : N.A 16. Booster SW :
23. Pilot Cutoff SW : N.A 17. Breaker SW :
24. Water in fuel : 18. Preheat Select :
FG013611
Figure 31

Page 41
Digital Outputs Descriptions
Digital Outputs Items Mark Remark

Lights up when the relief press up
1. Relief Press. Up S/V
solenoid valve is "ON".
Lights up when the Pilot relay is
2. Pilot Relay S/V
ON / OFF "ON".
3. Reverse Fan S/V N.A.
4. Starter Relay When the starter relay is "ON".
5. After Heat Relay N.A.
Menu Select
DIGITAL INPUT STATE
1. Relift Press UP S/V :
2. Pilot Relay :
3. Reverse Fan S/V :
4. Starter Relay :
5. After Heat Relay :
: UP : DOWN
FG017006
Figure 32
Failure Information
1. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor is located in SPECIAL MENU
"Failure Info" of special menu screen press enter
button ( , 3 on Figure 25) and "Failure Info" screen
is displayed.
2. Failure Information
25) is pressed for more than 1 second, this information
screen will be returned to previous screen.
3. Operating Hours
FG013613
Figure 33
* Real-time Failure:
Current status of failure is displayed. FAILURE INFORMATION
* Failure Log:
Memorized record of past failure is displayed. 1. Realtime Fail
* Delete Fail Log: 2. Failure Log
This mode is used to delete all of the
memorized record of past failure.
3. Delete Fail Log
FG013614
Figure 34

Page 42
A. Current failure information
Current status of failure is displayed (Failure code, REALTIME FAILURE
failure contents). 1/2 CODE : V204 - 05
When a number of failures are produced, failure 2/2 CODE : E011 - 04
information can be checked using "UP" ( , 1 on
Figure 25) or "DOWN" ( , 2 on Figure 25) Relief Pressure Up S/V
button.
Open
* 1/2: A serial number of current failure/ total
quantity of failure. : UP : DOWN
FG013615
* Vxxx-xx: Vxxx is a unique code and xx is a FMI Figure 35
(Failure Mode Identifier) number.
- V: Machine related failure code
- E: Engine related failure code
Refer to the failure information code for unique
codes and FMI numbers.
This example shows one of two failures.
B. Past failure information
Memorized record of past failure is displayed FAILURE LOG
(Failure code, failure contents). 1/2 CODE : V204 - 05
Time : 00254 Hr 29m Count :28
Figure 25) or "DOWN" ( , 2 on Figure 25)
Relief Pressure Up S/V
button.
Open
NOTE: " Number: xxx ": "xxx" means that the
: UP : DOWN
totally counted number of the same failure.
FG013616
" Period:xxxxxHrxxm ": It indicates the Figure 36
period for which machine has operated
until a failure takes place. (For more than
two occurrences of the same failure, until
the first occurrence time.)
C. Failure record deletion
This mode is used to delete the memorized DELETE FAIL LOG
record of past failure. If this mode is selected, all
records will be deleted.
All Fail Log
When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button is
pressed, the memorized record will be deleted. will be DELETED.
At this time, deletion signal will be displayed and
the screen will move to previous menu after
deletion. : Yes ESC: No
This screen will be displayed during 3 seconds. FG013617
Figure 37
NOTE: Failure record deletion can be performed
only approved person. If you want to
delete past failure record, contact
distributor.

Page 43
Input your password with one of No. 1 - 8
switches. DELETE FAIL LOG
When "NO" (ESC, 4 on Figure 25) button is
pressed, the screen will recover to previous menu
without deletion.
ENTER PASSWD
: YES ESC : NO
FG013618
Figure 38
Delete Completed screen will appear 3 seconds

and the screen will move to Failure Info screen. DELETE FAIL LOG
It has been shown 3 seconds upon deleting Fail
Log.
DELETED !!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013619
Figure 39
The screen shown on the left will appear 3

seconds in case of wrong password input and DELETE FAIL LOG
then Enter Password screen appears again.
It has been shown 3 seconds in case of PASSWORD ERR!!!
password failure.
X
: YES ESC : NO
FG013620
Figure 40

Page 44
Failure Information Code at Machine Side
Measuring Correct Value

Code Failure Component Remarks
Points Active Passive
Gauge Panel Communication CN7-4 It is a
V201 - R = 60 ± 5 Ω composite
Error CN7-5
resistance of
CAN line. This
value has to
CN4-4 be measured
V202 Ecu Communication Error - R = 60 ± 5 Ω
CN4-5 by connected
condition of
CAN line.
Pump
CN1-10 proportional
R = 18 ± 2 Ω
V210 Pump P/V -
(25°C (77°F))
pressure
CN1-21 reducing
valve.
V211 Cooling Fan P/V - - N.A.
Flow control
CN1-19 proportional
R = 14 ± 2 Ω
V212 Flow Control P/V -
(25°C (77°F))
pressure
CN1-20 reducing
valve.
Breaker/boost/
shear selector
switch has to
be selected
CN1-1 as a boost
V = V_volt (Note R = 26.2 ± 2 Ω
V213 Relief Pressure Up S/V
4.) (25°C (77°F))
function and
CN1-11 the boost
switch on the
right-hand
joystick is
"ON" status.
Voltage is
CN1-1 R = 330 ± 10 only measured
V214 Pilot Relay S/V V = V_volt Ω when the pilot
CN1-12 (25°C (77°F)) relay is turned
"ON".
Work mode
CN1-1 has to be
R = 26.2 ± 2 Ω
V215 Swing Priority S/V V = V_volt
(25°C (77°F))
selected as a
CN1-13 trenching
mode.
V216 Reverse Fan Speed S/V - - N.A.
It has to be
CN1-1 measured in
V217 Starter Relay V = V_volt -
engine start
CN1-15
up state.
1-16
V218 After Heat Relay - - N.A.
1-04
CN3-1
V220 Front Pump Press. Sensor V = 1V - It has to be
CN3-2 measured in
CN3-3 engine stop
V221 Rear Pump Press. Sensor V = 1V - state.
CN3-4

Page 45
R = 2.45 ± 0.25
kΩ
CN3-9
V222 Hyd. Oil Temperature Sensor - (25°C (77°F))
CN3-10
R = 320 ± 32 Ω
(80°C (176°F))
V223 Water Temperature Sensor - - N.A.
V224 Engine Speed Sensor - - N.A.
CN3-7 Empty: 5 ± 0.25 kΩ
V225 Fuel Level Sensor -
CN3-8 Full: 320 ± 32 Ω
It has to be
CN2-14 measured in
V226 Alternator Potential V = 2 ± 1V -
engine stop
CN1-8
state.
CN3-16 R = 1.0 ± 0.3 kΩ
V227 Dial -
CN3-7 R = 4.0 ± 1.5 kΩ
V = 0.66 ± 0.1V
CN3-13 (at min position)
V228 Accel. Pedal -
CN3-14 V = 3.85 ± 0.1V
(at max position)
It has to be
CN3-11 measured in
V229 Parking Brake Press. Sensor V = 0.5V -
engine stop
CN3-12
state.
V230 E/g Control Motor Sensor - - - N.A.
Voltage is only
measured
V231 Accel. Pedal SW CN5-8 V = 4 ± 1V - when the
accel. pedal sw
is turned "ON".
NOTE: 1. Active value: Starter switch has to be turned "ON"

Measuring points between component and wire
harness have to be connected.
2. Passive value: Starter switch has to be turned
"OFF"
harness have to be disconnected.
3. Measuring points are engine controller's points and
passive value is each component's value.
4. V_batt: Source power of equipment.

Page 46
Failure Information Code at Engine Side
Measuring Current Valve

2-36 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E011 Coolant Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-18
2-34 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E012 Fuel Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-17
2-29 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E013 Boost Air Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-21
V = It has to be
2-28 1,071 ±58mV measured in
E014 Boost Air Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
2-10 and absolute running state.
pressure 1bar)
2-35 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E017 E/G Oil Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-19
V = It has to be
E018 E/G Oil Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
pressure 3bar)
1-13 V = V_volt (Note
E021 Battery Voltage
4.)
-
1-15
V = It has to be
E022 Fuel Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
pressure 300bar)
2-7 R=2.60 ± 3.15
Fuel Pressure Monitoring
E032 - Ω
MPROP 2-5 (20°C (68°F))
It is a
composite
resistance of
1-53 and CAN line.
1-52 R=60 ± 5 Ω
E037 CAN-B Line - This value
1-35 and (20°C (68°F)) has to be
1-34 measured by
connected
condition of
CAN line.
E038 Engine Overspeed - -
E039 Main Relay (SCG) - -
Abnormal
E041 Redundant Shutoff Path - -
engine stop.
2-25 R=860 ± 6 Ω
E042 E/G Speed (Crankshaft) -
(20°C (68°F))
2-24
2-23
E043 E/G Speed (Camshaft) - -
2-30

Page 47
Synchronizing
error between
crank shaft
E044 Engine Speed Sensor - -
speed sensor
and cam shaft
speed sensor.
Data storing
E045 EEPROM - - error when
engine stop.
E046 Recovery - -
When the
pressure
sensor of
common rail
E047 Monitoring of PRV - -
or
high-pressure
pump has a
defect.
1-13
E048 Power Supply V = V_volt -
1-15
E049 Main Relay SCB - -
E051 Main Relay ECU - -
3-13 R=0.31 ± 0.42 Ω
E058 Solenoid Power Stage 1 -
(20°C (68°F))
3-09
3-03
E059 Solenoid Power Stage 2 - -
3-06
3-04
3-12
3-05
3-14
3-11
3-16
3-10
3-15
Preheat Light (E/G: Lowside 1-29
E066 Power Stage 2)
- -
1-30
Voltage is only
measured
Preheat Relay (E/G: 1-16 R=40 ± 5 Ω when afterheat
E068 Highside Power Stage 1)
V = V_volt
(25°C (77°F)) function is
1-04
operating
status.
Fuel metering
Fuel HI pressure pump
unit error of
E065 (E/G: Current controlled - - -
high-pressure
Highside power stage 1)
pump.

Page 48
It is a
composite
resistance of
CAN line.
R=60 ± 5 Ω This value
E091 CAN-A Line - -
(20°C (68°F)) has to be
measured by
connected
condition of
CAN line.
Injector error
Speed signal
error of
E077 Monitoring of misfire cylinder 1 - - - cam shaft speed
sensor or
crank shaft
speed sensor.
E098 Monitoring of misfire cylinder 2 - - -
Monitoring of misfire multiple
E104 cylinder
- - -
E105 Monitoring of overrun - - -

E106 Engine speed redundant - - -

"OFF"

Page 49
FMIs (Failure Mode Identifier)
FMI 0 Above normal range (DATA VALID but ABOVE NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE)
FMI 1 Below normal range (DATA VALID but BELOW NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE)
FMI 2 Incorrect signal (DATA ERRATIC, INTERMITTENT OR INCORRECT)
FMI 3 Voltage above normal (VOLTAGE ABOVE NORMAL OR SHORTED TO HIGH SOURCE)
FMI 4 Voltage below normal (VOLTAGE BELOW NORMAL OR SHORTED TO LOW SOURCE)
FMI 5 Current below normal (CURRENT BELOW NORMAL OR OPEN CIRCUIT)
FMI 6 Current above normal (CURRENT ABOVE NORMAL OR GROUNDED CIRCUIT)
FMI 8 Abnormal signal (ABNORMAL FREQUENCY OR PULSE WIDTH OR PERIOD)
FMI 11 Failure mode not identifiable (ROOT CAUSE NOT KNOWN - Malfunction)
FMI 31 NOT AVAILABLE OR CONDITION EXISTS
Information of Machine Operation

Accumulated operation hour of each mode and status is
displayed.
1. Operating Hour Information
A. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor is located in SPECIAL MENU
"Operating Hrs" of special menu screen (Figure
41) press enter button ( , 3 on Figure 25) and
"Operating Hrs" screen will be displayed (Figure
42). 2. Failure Information
3. Operating Hours
FG013621
Figure 41
B. Information screen of machine operation (Figure 42).

OPERATING HOURS
Operating Hours
Reset Hours
FG013622
Figure 42

Page 50
C. Operating Hours Screen
D. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC, 4 on OPERATING HOURS
Figure 25) is pressed for more than 1 second, 1. Power : 00042 Hr
this information screen will be returned to previous 2. Economy : 00120 Hr
screen. 3. Auto Idle : 00159 Hr
4. Travel Speed
I Speed : 00005 Hr
II Speed : 00001 Hr
: UP : DOWN
FG013623
Figure 43
Information contents of operation hour
Item Information Contents Detection Method

Power Mode Operation hours used power Power mode switch (Instrument panel)
mode are displayed. - "ON" status and Alternator signal
(CN2-14) is "HI"
Economy Mode Operation hours used economy Economy mode switch (Instrument
mode are displayed. panel) - "ON" status and Alternator
signal (CN2-14) is "HI"
Auto Idle Operation hours used auto idle Auto idle switch (Instrument panel) -
status are displayed. "ON" status and Alternator signal
(CN2-14) is "HI"
Travel Speed: Operation hours used low speed 1st: High speed s/v "OFF" status
and high speed are displayed.
-1st 2nd: High speed s/v and travel pressure
- 2nd switch "Py" (control valve) - "ON" status.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Temperature of hydraulic oil is The resistance delivered from
Distribution (°C (°F)) classified 6 steps. And operation temperature sensor of hydraulic oil is
hours of each step are displayed classified 6 steps. And operation hours
of each step are displayed. (Alternator
Under 30°C (87°F)
output HI status)
31 - 50°C (88 - 123°F)
51 - 75°C (124 - 168°F)
76 - 85°C (169 - 186°F)
86 - 95°C (187 - 203°F)
Over 96°C (204°F)
Coolant Temperature Temperature of coolant is The resistance delivered from coolant
Distribution (°C (°F)) classified 6 steps. And operation sensor is classified 6 steps. And
hours of each step are displayed. operation hours of each step are
displayed. (Alternator output HI status)
Under 40°C (105°F)
41 - 60°C (106 - 141°F)
61 - 85°C (142 - 186°F)
86 - 95°C (187 - 204°F)
96 - 105°C (205 - 222°F)
Over 106°C (223°F)

Page 51
Menu Selection of Operation Hour Information
1. Power Mode 2. Economy Mode 3. Auto Idle 4. Travel Speed 1st, 2nd
6. Coolant Temperature Distribution 5. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Distribution

FG013856
Figure 44
Example of Machine Operation Info Screen
OPERATING HOURS OPERATING HOURS

1. Power : 00042 Hr 5. Hyd.Oil Temp. [ C ]
2. Economy : 00042 Hr 30 : 00140 Hr
3. Auto Idle : 00159 Hr 31-50 : 00054 Hr
4. Travel Speed 51-75 : 00087 Hr
I Speed : 00005 Hr 86-95 : 00001 Hr
II Speed : 00001 Hr 96 : 00000 Hr
OPERATING HOURS
6. Coolant Temp. [ C ]
40 : 00140 Hr
41-60 : 00054 Hr
61-85 : 00087 Hr
96-105 : 00001 Hr
105 : 00000 Hr
: UP : DOWN
FG013624
Figure 45
2. Operation hour reset

A. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is located in OPERATING HOURS
"Reset Hrs" of information screen of operating
hours press enter button ( , 3 on Figure 25)
Operating Hours
and "Machine Operation Info" screen will be
displayed.
Reset Hours
FG013625
Figure 46

Page 52
B. Reset screen of operation hour
C. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC, 4 on OPERATING HOURS
Figure 25) is pressed for more than 1 second,
this information screen will be returned to previous
screen. All Opearting hours
NOTE: When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button is will be DELETED.
pressed, operation hours will reset.
At this time, resetting signal will be displayed
and the screen will move to previous menu after : Yes ESC: No
resetting. FG013626
NOTE: When "NO" (ESC, 4) button is pressed, the Figure 47
screen will recover to previous menu without
resetting.
Machine Operation Info Screen

1. If you press the YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button,
OPERATING HOURS
password entrance screen appears.
ENTER PASSWD
: YES ESC : NO
FG013627
Figure 48
2. When right password is input, machine operation

periods will be deleted and Reset Completed screen OPERATING HOURS
will appear 3 seconds.
DELETED !!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013628
Figure 49
3. If you press the "NO" (ESC, 4) button, the previous

screen appears without resetting operation periods. OPERATING HOURS
X PASSWORD ERR!!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013629
Figure 50

Page 53
ELECTRONIC HYDRAULIC
CONTROL SYSTEM (e-EPOS)
Control System Schematic
16
6 6
7 7
11 12 14
8
8
13
15
E/G
4 4 5
3
9 10 Work Mode
Auto Idle
Machine Info
E/G Speed
Order C H
E F
C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
24 23
1
17 21 19 18 22 20
FG016925
Figure 51

Page 54
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 13 Solenoid Valve (High Speed)
2 e-EPOS Controller 14 Solenoid Valve (Breaker)
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 15 Travel Motor
4 Main Pump 16 Main Relief Valve
5 Aux Pump 17 Engine Control Dial
6 Control Valve Breaker/Boost/Shear Select
18
7 Pressure Switch Switch
8 Pump Pressure Sensor 19 Work/Travel Select Switch
Electromagnetic Proportional 20 Boost Switch (Right Work Lever)
9
Pressure Reducing Valve 21 Sensors
Electromagnetic Proportional 22 Aux Mode Switch
10 Pressure Reducing Valve 23 Aux Mode Resistance
(Mode Control)
24 Acceleration Pedal
11 Solenoid Valve (Boost)
12 Solenoid Valve (Swing Priority)

Page 55
POWER MODE CONTROL
6 6
E/G
4 4
3
10
24
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
19 23 22
17
FG016926
Figure 52
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 10 Electric Proportional Reducing
2 e-EPOS Controller V/V (Mode Control)
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 17 Engine Control Dial
4 Main Pump 19 Work/Travel Select Switch
5 Aux Pump 22 Aux Mode S/W
6 Control Valve 23 Aux Mode Resistance

Page 56
The power mode switch permits the selection of the
appropriate engine power depending on the working
condition. One of the two, Power Mode or Standard Mode,
setting can be selected. When the engine starter switch is
turned "ON," the power mode is automatically defaulted to
standard mode. The desired mode can be selected by
pressing the selector button on the instrument panel. When
the power mode is selected, the indicator light will turn "ON"
to display the selected mode.
The quantity of oil discharged by the pump and the engine
speed are determined by the mode selected by the operator.
The pump output in each mode is determined by the mode
selection and is listed in the following table
Mode Standard Mode Power Mode

Output (%) Approximately 85% 100%

Page 57
Operation
1. Power Mode
This mode should be selected for high speed work. In
this mode the engine output is most efficiently utilized
due to the discharged oil volume being controlled
based on the equivalent horsepower curve at various
loaded pressures. The e-EPOS controller compares the
target engine speed with the actual engine speed and
controls the signal to the E.P.P.R. (Electromagnetic
Proportional Pressure Reducing) valve which in turn
varies the pump output quantity.
If the load increases, the engine speed will fall below
the rated speed. When this occurs, the controller FG013632
senses this decrease and immediately reduces the Figure 53
pump discharge volume to maintain the engine speed
at the rated level.
On the other hand, if the load is decreased the
controller increases the discharge volume of the pump
to maintain the engine speed at the rated level.
By repeating these control operations, the engine
speed is maintained at the rated speed so that
maximum power can be generated.
In Power Mode, the e-EPOS controller receives engine
speed signals from the engine control dial and the
engine controller (ECU) and converts it to an operating
signal current and is then transferred to the pump's
E.P.P.R valve. At this time the E.P.P.R. valve converts
the electric signal to the corresponding control pressure
and sends it to the two pumps, adjusting the pump
discharge volume to the desired level.
A C
B D
FG000580
Figure 54
Reference Reference
Number Number
A Engine Horsepower (hp) C Pump Discharge Volume (lpm)
B Engine Speed (rpm) D Pump Discharge Pressure (kg/cm2)

Page 58
2. Standard Mode
Standard Mode is used for general work. When this
mode is selected it will reduce noise and fuel
consumption in comparison with Power Mode. The
epos controller compares the target engine speed with
the actual engine speed and controls the signal to the
E.P.P.R. valve which in turn varies the pump output
quantity and it is the same method with power volume.
A C
B D
FG000581
Figure 55
Reference Reference
Number Number
3. Economy Mode
Economy mode is used for light loading work. When
this mode is selected, it will reduce noise and fuel
consumption in comparison with standard mode.
Engine torque curve is changed by ECU.
The e-EPOS controller compares the target engine
speed with the actual engine speed and controls the
signal to the E.P.P.R. valve which in turn varies the
pump output quantity and it is the same method with
power volume.
FG013671
Figure 56

Page 59
A C
B D FG013633
Figure 57
Reference Reference
Number Number
4. Operation in case of failure in the control system

(Aux mode operation)
Though it is impossible to control current of the
E.P.P.R (Electromagnetic Proportional Pressure
Reducing) Valve controlling the discharge volume of
pump due to fault in control system, the machine can
be operated in the aux mode.
Upon turning "ON" the aux mode switch, the E.P.P.R
Valve controlling the discharge volume of pump comes
into contact with the aux mode resistor to let current of
a certain value flow. At this time, the discharge volume
of pump follow the control by the pump regulator,
nearly at quantity roughly similar to that in the standard
mode.

Page 60
POWER MODE CONTROL -
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1
27
27 27 27 2 27 26
19 28
23 25
29
3 22
10
24
17
FG007791
Figure 58
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 22 Aux Mode S/W
2 e-EPOS Controller 23 Aux Mode Resistance
3 Engine Controller 24 Acceleration Pedal
E.P.P.R. Valve 25 Battery
10 (Electromagnetic Proportional 26 Battery Relay
Pressure Reducing) Valve
27 Fuse
17 Engine Control Dial
28 Fusible Link
19 Work/Travel Selector Switch
29 Start S/W

Page 61
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
24
(Drive Signal)
2 (Command Signal)
17
FG007793
Figure 59
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller 17 Engine Control Dial
When the engine control dial is moved the output voltage

changes according to the dial position.
The e-EPOS controller converts this output voltage of dial to
digital signal and sends it to the engine controller by CAN
line. According to the dial command, the quantity of fuel
injection is adjusted.

Page 62
ENGINE CONTROL DIAL
1st STEP 7th STEP 13th STEP
CCW ( 10 ) ( 10 ) CW
MECHANICAL MECHANICAL
STOP STOP
(V)
5
4.0V
4
3 2.5V
2
2 1.0V
1
0 SETUP
1ST 2nd 7th 12th 13th
CCW CW
STOP STOP
VIEW ( POTENTIOMETER BOTTOM)

1 2 3
FG000866
Figure 60
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Knob 2 Potentiometer (Variable Resistor)
The engine control dial has a built in potentiometer. When

the control knob is moved the output voltage (through "2
and 3" terminals) will vary from the 5 V supplied from the
e-EPOS controller as shown in the graph.

Page 63
ACCELERATION PEDAL
ACCELERATOR ASS'Y
A 0.5R 3
POSITION B 0.5B 2
SENSOR
C 0.5W 1
IDLE E 0.5G 4
VALIDATION
F 0.5L 5
D 0.850r 6
STROKE 17.5
FOOT PEDAL
DETAIL "A"
4 3
5 2
"A"
6 1
PEDAL SENSOR IDLE VALIDATION SW.

Switch Closed
Switch Open
WHITE BLACK RED BLUE ORANGE GREEN 100%
OV C B A F D E
C.W. +VE C.W. 77 2%
V span
IDLE ON IDLE OFF 64% 4%
Output
Voltage
PIN
DESCRIPTION COLOR (% Vref)
B LOCATION
C A THROTTLE POSITION + V SUPPLY RED
A 13 2%
B THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL BLACK
E
C THROTTLE POSITION RETURN WHITE 0%
0 Datum
F
45.8%
-5.2 C.T
58.3%
48.3% W.O.T
Degrees
D COMMON
-2.7
ORANGE
-11.0
-15.2
D Travel
E OFF IDLE POSITION (NO) GREEN
Angle Tolerance 2%
PEDAL SENSOR F ON IDLE POSITION (NC) BLUE Driver Travel
Sensor Rotation
FG007794
Figure 61
The acceleration pedal has a built in potentiometer. When

the acceleration pedal is pressed output voltage (through "2
and 1" terminals) will vary from the 5V supplied from the e-
EPOS controller as shown in the graph.

Page 64
ENGINE CONTROL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM
1
15A
CN6-1
CN6-2
26
4 26 15A
CN6-9 25
CN6-10
CN1-1
CN7-4 CN4-4 CN1-2
CN7-5 CN4-5 CAN
CN7-6 CN4-6
CN1-8 24
CN1-9 28
3
1-35
1-34
1-33
1-53
1-52
VEHICLE
29
1-51
CONN Py
CN2-15
(CONN.1) 1-03
1-09 17
Px +(5V) CN3-15 1
1-14 CN2-16 CW LOW
SIG CN3-16 2
1-15
GND CN3-17 3
HIGH
1-01 30
1-07
26 15A
1-12
1-13
BR B 10A
1-39
26
27
AMP 070 16P AMP 040 12P AMP 040 20P AMP 070 18P AMP MIC 21P
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
VEHICLE CONN. (ECU CONNECTOR) AMP 040 28P
18 35 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 17
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
36 53
7 11 54 71
(CN7) (CN6)
1 6 72 89
ECU CON.1 (89-PIN)

FG009234
Figure 62
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrumental Panel 26 Battery Relay
3 Engine Controller 27 Fuse
4 e-EPOS Controller 28 Start S/W
17 Engine Control Dial 29 Fusible Link
24 Acceleration Pedal 30 Pressure S/W (Py)
25 Battery 31 Pressure S/W (Px)

Page 65
AUTOMATIC DECELERATION
CONTROL (AUTO IDLE
CONTROL)
E/G
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
5 5
FG016931
Figure 63
Reference Reference
Number Number
Instrument Panel 3 Engine Controller
1
(Auto Idle Switch) 4 Engine Control Dial
2 e-EPOS Controller 5 Pressure Switch

Page 66
If the machine is idling without the controls being operated
or is waiting for a dump truck the engine speed is
automatically lowered. Once the controls are operated and
work is being started the machine will be restored to the
previous settings. As a result, noise and fuel consumption
will be reduced. This function can be selected or cancelled
through the Auto Idle Selector Switch on the instrument
panel.
The initial setting at start-up is with this switch in the select
position. Approximately 4 seconds after this function is
selected, if all work levers are in the neutral position, the
e-EPOS controller compares the automatic reduction signal
with the signal set by engine control dial. The lower of the
two signals is selected, the e-EPOS controller sends a
signal to the engine controller to control the engine speed.
The neutral status of the machine is detected by the two
pressure switches in the control valve. When the work levers
are in the neutral position, the switch is in the "OFF"
position.

Page 67
ENGINE OVERHEAT
PROTECTION SYSTEM
6 6
E/G
4 4 5
3
31
7
(Pump control signal)
2
1
(E/G overheating signal)
E F
C H C H
(E/G overheating signal) 1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
FG013635
Figure 64
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 6 Control Valve
2 e-EPOS Controller E.P.P.R. Valve
3 Engine Controller 7 (Electromagnetic Proportional
Pressure Reducing Valve)
4 Main Pump
31 Warning Buzzer
5 Aux Pump

Page 68
When the engine coolant temperature increases to over
107°C (225°F), the engine controller detects it from the
sensor mounted in the coolant line and will send a signal to
the e-EPOS controller. The e-EPOS controller sends a
overheat signal to the instrument panel turning "ON" the
warning light and buzzer simultaneously.
Also, the e-EPOS controller returns an overheat signal to
the engine controller and changes power mode to standard
mode. The engine speed is then set to a low speed by the
engine controller.
When coolant temperature falls below 95°C (203°F), normal
operation will resume.

Page 69
POWER BOOST MODE
Operation
16
6 6
11
E/G
4 4 5
3
2
1
E F
C H C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
UP
WER
PO
20
18
FG013636
Figure 65
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 11 Solenoid Valve (Boost)
2 e-EPOS Controller 16 Main Relief Valve
3 Engine Controller Breaker/Boost/Shear Selector
18
4 Main Pump Switch
5 Aux Pump Power Boost Switch (Top of
20
Right Work Lever)
6 Control Valve

Page 70
The Power Boost function is used to temporarily increase
the main relief pressure to enhance excavation ability. When
the breaker/boost/shear selector switch is set to "BOOST"
and the power boost button on the center of the right-hand
work lever (joystick) is pressed during work, the e-EPOS
controller will activate the power boost solenoid valve and
increase the relief valve pressure from 330 - 350 kg/cm2
(4,700 - 5,000 psi). The excavation ability is increased by
approximately 6%.
When the power boost function is in activated, a power
boost symbol appears on the information display department
of instrument panel.

Page 71
Power Boost Control - Circuit Diagram
1
15A
CN6-1
CN6-2
26
2 26 15A 26 20A
CN6-9 25
CN6-10
CN1-1 18
CN7-4 CN4-4 CN1-2
CN7-5 CN4-5 CAN
CN7-6 CN4-6 PST SHEAR PRESS BREAKER
UP
TML 1 0 2
9
24
11 10
3
(C4) 14
CN1-11
13
11
6
CN2-2 (POWER MAX)
16
15
CN1-8 12
CN1-9
6 3
(Center)
(POWER MAX / BREAKER)
20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
AMP 040 28P
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN7) (CN6)
FG000586
Figure 66
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel Power Boost Switch (Top of
20
2 e-EPOS Controller Right Work Lever)
11 Solenoid Valve (Pressure Up) 24 Battery
Breaker/Boost/Shear Selector 25 Battery Relay
18
Switch 26 Fuse

Page 72
CRUISE CONTROL
Operation
40
6
3
35 36
4 5
15 32 37
38
I II
N
39
24 17
FG009233
Figure 67
Reference Reference
Number Number
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 32 Pressure Switch (Py)
4 Main Pump 35 Cruise Solenoid Valve
5 Aux Pump 36 Forward Solenoid Valve
6 Control Valve 37 Pilot Relay
15 e-EPOS Controller 38 Cruise Switch
17 Engine Control Dial 39 Brake Pedal
24 Acceleration Pedal 40 Travel Motor
Cruise control is used for the purpose of reducing operator’s

fatigue during long travel distances.

Page 73
1. Run Method
F = Forward Travel
Forward/reverse lever is placed at forward position (F),
although accelerator pedal is not stepped on, the unit
can travel. At this time, faster or slower travel speed F
can be obtained by adjusting the engine speed control F

Cruise
N N = Neutral
I II
dial. When engine speed control dial is adjusted to R
Switch
desired speed, the unit will travel at a constant speed. R
If there is a change in the load, a change of travel

speed can occur. When the forward/reverse lever is
Forward/reverse Lever R = Reverse Travel
placed in reverse position, this function will be not
operated. BCS0811L
Figure 68
2. Cancel
When the brake is applied the cruise control will be
canceled.
Bring the forward/reverse lever back to neutral (N), will
also cancel the cruise control.
If the engine is running at an excessive rpm when the
cruise control is canceled, reduce the engine rpm
setting.
NOTE: If the auto idle is "ON" when the cruise control is HAOA690L
canceled, the engine will return to idle in Figure 69
approximately four seconds. When the cruise
control is turned back "ON" the engine will
return to the rpm setting control by the engine
speed control dial.
3. Cruise Operation
Division Run Cancel

Condition 1. Forward/reverse lever is placed 1. When the brake is applied.
in FORWARD.
2. Forward/reverse lever is placed
2. Accelerator pedal is stepped ON. in NEUTRAL or REVERSE.
3. Cruise switch turns "ON".
Forward Relay Operation Cancel
Forward Solenoid Valve Operation Cancel
Cruise Relay (1) Operation Cancel
Cruise Relay (2) Cancel Operation
Cruise Solenoid Valve Operation Cancel
Speed Control Engine Speed Control Dial Accelerator Pedal

Page 74
Cruise Control Circuit
4 3 2
5
11
6 8
12 13
10 9
7
BCS0700L
Figure 70
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Cruise Relay (1)
2 Battery Relay 8 Forward/Reverse Lever Switch
3 Fuse 9 Brake Light Switch
4 Pilot Relay 10 Pressure Switch
5 Forward Run Relay 11 Forward Run Solenoid Valve
6 Cruise Relay (2) 12 Cruise Solenoid Valve
If the cruise switch is turned on during the forward run, the

"15/1 (+)" and "49" terminals of the travel speed control
switch are connected. At this time the current flows from the
battery (1) → battery relay (2) → fuse box (3) → "15/1" (+)
and "49" terminals of the travel speed control switch (8) →
"86" and "85" terminals of cruise relay 1 (7) → pressure
switch (10) → ground. The other side, the current flows from
the fuse box (3) → "30" and "87a" terminals of pilot relay
(4) → "30" and "87" terminals of forward run relay (5) →
"30" and "87" of cruise relay 1 (7) → cruise solenoid valve
(12) and the machine runs as a cruise state. Also the cruise
relay 1 (7) is activated by the current flows from the "87a"
and "30" terminals of cruise relay 2 (6) → diode (13) and it
makes self - activated circuit.
If the forward/reverse lever (8) is place in neutral or reverse
position during the cruise, the forward run relay will be
deactivated and cruise function will be cancelled.
Also if the brake pedal is pressed, the brake light switch (9)
will be turned "ON". At this time, the cruise relay (6) will be
activated and the cruise relay 1 (7) will be deactivated. So
cruise function will be cancelled.

Page 75
AUTOMATIC TRAVEL SPEED
CONTROL
6 6
13
E/G 8
15
4 4 5
3
17 2 19
FG000799
Figure 71
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller 8 Pump Pressure Sensor
3 Engine Controller 13 Solenoid Valve (High speed)
4 Main Pump 15 Travel Motor
6 Control Valve Selector Switch For Automatic
19
7 Pressure Switch (Py Port) Travel

Page 76
If the automatic travel speed control switch is set to the
"OFF" position, the travel motor will run in the I-speed (low
speed) range. If the selector switch is set to the "I" position,
the travel motor will run in the II-speed (high speed) range.
If the selector switch is set to the "II" position, the e-EPOS
controller will monitor the main pump discharge pressure
and automatically select the "ON" - "OFF" status of the II -
speed travel solenoid valve based on the travel load. The
travel speed is changed between the I-speed and the
II-speed mode.
The travel load is monitored by the two pressure sensors in
the discharge lines of the front (upper) and rear (lower)
pumps. When the travel load is high (pressure over 300 kg/
cm2 (4,300 psi) the solenoid valve is turned "OFF" and
I-speed (low) is selected. In the case when the travel load is
low (pressure under 160 kg/cm2 (2,280 psi), the solenoid
valve will be turned "ON" and the II-speed will be selected.
But, if the engine speed control switch dial is set below
approximately 1400 rpm, the travel speed will be set to
I-speed mode.

Page 77
Automatic Travel Speed Control - Circuit
Diagram
15A
26
2 26 15A 26 15A
25
8 CN1-1
+ CN1-2
SIG CN3-1
CN3-2
- 13
(C3) 24
+ CN1-12
SIG CN3-3
CN3-4
- 19
9 3
0
2
CN2-4 I
II
0
I 5
CN2-5 6 II
7 8
17
CN1-8 +(5V) CN3-15 1
CW LOW
CN1-9 SIG CN3-16 2
GND CN3-17 3
HIGH
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
AMP 040 28P
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN7) (CN6)
FG000587
Figure 72
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller Selector Switch For Automatic
19
8 Pressure Sensor (Front Pump) Travel
9 Pressure Sensor (Rear Pump) 24 Battery
13 Solenoid Valve (High speed) 25 Battery Relay
17 Engine Control Dial 26 Fuse

Page 78
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
e-EPOS Controller
The system operation status and malfunction codes can be
checked through the display on top of the e-EPOS controller
box the rear cover behind the operator's seat.
1 2
4 3
FG000588
Figure 73
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Upper Digit Power Monitor (Stays "ON"
2 Lower Digit 4 While Power Is In Normal
Range)
Engine Speed Monitor LED
3 (Flash Interval Increases With
Engine Speed.)
1. Power Monitor
This LED is turned "OFF" when the input voltage to
the e-EPOS controller is below 18.5 ±1 V or above
32.5 ±1 V. Stays "ON" while in normal range.
2. Engine Speed Monitor
This LED light flashes according to the engine speed.
The flashing interval is proportional to the engine
speed.

Page 79
3. Normal Operation Display Readout
Display Readout
Mode Selection Operation Status
Upper Digit Lower Digit
Normal Operation
Power Mode
Power Mode
HAOH340L HAOH370L
Normal Operation
Power Mode Standard Mode
Standard Mode
HAOH350L HAOH370L
Normal Operation
Economy Mode
Economy Mode
FG013637 HAOH370L
4. Communication Monitor
What are shown in the 7-SEGMENT LED are same as
those in the Error Codes.
Error Code Indication Code Fault Location

Communication error in instrument
V201 01
panel.
Communication error in engine
V202 02
controller.

Page 80
WIPER SYSTEM
Wiper Circuit
5 6 7
- 2 3 5 ON 16-10
+
M
8 J1 15-9 16-9
4 4
10 J2 15-10 16-12
5 6 ON
OFF
1 7 J1
J2
11 16-11
12 - + 8
P
6
1 CN15 CN16
9 13
9 2
AMP MIC 13P
CN12
15A 10A 10A
AMP MIC 13P

1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 9 8 7 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 9 8 7 6 5
(CN12) (CN13) (CN15) (CN16)

FG004677
Figure 74
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Wiper Controller
2 Battery Relay 7 Combination Switch
3 Fusible Link (Wiper & Washer)
4 Fuse Box 8 Window Washer
5 Wiper Motor 9 Wiper Cutoff Switch

Page 81
Wiper operation
Continuous operation
- Operation of wiper motor
Pressing the successive operation switch on the wiper switch
panel (7) changes the voltage of the "5" terminal of the wiper
controller (6) from HIGH (about 5.5 ± 0.5V) to LOW (0+0.5V) and
also current flows via the "3" terminal of the wiper controller (6) →
the "2" and "4" terminals of the wiper motor (5) → the "4" terminal
of the wiper controller (6) to run the wiper motor (5) continuously.
- Stop of wiper motor
Pressing again the successive operation switch on the wiper
switch panel (7) changes the voltage of the "5" terminal of
the wiper controller (6) from LOW (0+0.5V) to HIGH (about
5.5 ±0.5V). As the "5" and "6" terminals of the wiper motor
are connected still that power is supplied to the "6" terminal
of the wiper controller (6),
However, the controller (6) runs the wiper motor
continuously and then rotates the motor reversely by " letting
current flow via the "4" terminal of the wiper controller (6) →
the "2" and "4" terminals of the wiper motor (5) → the "3"
terminal of he wiper controller (6) when the "1" and "6"
terminals of he wiper motor (5) are connected and thus
power voltage is supplied to the "7" terminal of the wiper
controller (6).
The Wiper motor (5) stops reverse revolution when the
contact of a cam switch connected to the "6" terminal of the
wiper motor (5) moves to an insulation area of the cam plate
to disconnect the "5" and "6" terminals of the wiper motor (5).
When the wiper motor (5) stops, arm and blade connected
to it move to the stop positions of the right pole in the
cabin.
Intermittent operation
- Intermittent 1st (3-second)
Pressing once the Intermittent switch in the switch panel (7)
changes voltage of the "8" terminal in the wiper controller
(6) from HIGH (about 5.5 ±0.5V) to LOW (0+0.5V) and
current flows through the "3" terminal in the wiper controller
(6) → the "2" and "4" terminals in the wiper motor (5) →
the "4" terminal in the wiper controller (6) to start the cycle
that wiper stops 3 seconds after every operation.
- Intermittent 2nd (6-second)
Pressing twice the Intermittent switch in the switch panel (7)
(6) → the "2" and "4" terminals in the wiper motor (5) → the

Page 82
"4" terminal in the wiper controller (6) to start the cycle that
wiper stops 6 seconds after every operation.
- Stopping the intermittent action
Pressing three times the Intermittent switch in the switch
panel (7) while the wiper is operating stops the action of the
wiper motor.
NOTE: The wiper system does not work when the wiper
cutoff switch (9) is "ON."

Page 83
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Lighting System Circuit Diagram
5
10
3 11
6
13
1
4 14
4 8 9
19 15 15 19
*
* 21 21
20 20
12
16 17 18 17 16
FG007795
Figure 75

Page 84
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 12 Console
3 Fusible Link 14 Reverse Relay
4 Fuse 15 Head Light
5 Light Switch 16 Rear Combination Light
6 Combination Switch 17 Back Up Light
7 Flasher Unit 18 Registration Plate Light
8 Reverse Switch 19 Front Turn Signal Light
9 Stop Light Pressure SW 20 Side Turn Signal Light
10 Head Light Relay 21 Arm Position Light
11 Hazard Switch
NOTE: * indicates optional items.
Type
Lighting system consists of headlamp, work lights, cabin light
(optional), and S/W devices and relays to control them.
Operation
Connected
Activated Relay/
Switch Position Terminal of Lit Light
Operated Switch
Switch
Illumination Light of Switch/
Position Light of Head Light/
1st "2-3" Terminals - Position LIght of Rear
Light Switch (5) Combination Light
Position Light of Arm
"2-3" Terminals - "
2nd
"5-6" Terminals Head Light Relay (10) Low Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
"56-56b" Operated Light
Low Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
Terminals Switch (2nd)
"56-56a" Operated Light
High Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
"30-56a"
- High Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
Combination Terminals
Switch (6) Front Turn Signal Light (L.H.)
"49a-L" Terminals - Side Turn Signal Light (L.H.)
Rear Combination Light (L.H.)
Front Turn Signal Light (R.H.)
"49a-R" Terminals - Side Turn Signal Light (R.H.)
Rear Combination Light (R.H.)
Transmission
Switch (Reverse ON (+) - R Terminals Reverse Relay Back up Light (2 Ea.)
Position) (8)
Stop Light Stop Light of Rear Combination
ON ON -
Switch (9) Light (2 Ea.)

Page 85
OVERLOAD WARNING DEVICE
Overload Warning Device Circuit Diagram
4 1
5
ARS1260L
Figure 76
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 4 e-EPOS Controller
2 Battery Relay 5 OWD Selector Switch
3 Fuse Box 6 Pressure Sensor

Page 86
AUDIO CONTROLLER
Audio Controller Circuit Diagram
ANTENNA
7 8 10
MODULE
2 15
3 Vcc(+5V) 9
11 3 16 (LH) (RH)
15A 1 MICOM
4 13
+ - + -
5 Vcc(+5V)
7
3 14
10A 1 DC/DC 17
CONVERTER 1 2 5 2
6 10
10A 87a 3
30 11
87 4
86 85
4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
(Audio Control Panel) (STEREO)
FG000591
Figure 77
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Audio Control Panel
2 Battery Relay 8 Stereo
3 Fuse Box 9 Speaker
4 Fusible Link 10 Antenna Module
5 Converter 11 Light Switch
6 Stereo Relay
Operations Via Audio Control Panel
Connected Terminal of
Switch Measured values Operations
switch
PWR 4.36 ±0.2V Stereo ON, OFF
1.24 ±0.2V Volume up
"3-4"
0+0.2V Volume down
SCAN 2.49 ±0.2V Frequency selection

Page 87
RAM LOCK DEVICE
Ram Lock Control Circuit
4
12
9
9 3
9 8
13
9
11 7 5 3
9
10
9
9 6
14
FG007796
Figure 78
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 8 Ram Lock Relay
3 Fuse 10 Ram Lock Pressure Switch
4 Parking Brake Switch 11 Ram Lock Solenoid Valve
5 Pilot Relay 12 Console
6 Combination Switch (F/R) 13 Ram Lock Switch
7 Work/Travel Switch 14 e-EPOS Controller

Page 88
Operation
Input Output
Ram Lock
Parking Work/ Ram Lock Combination Ram Lock Console Remark
Pressure
Brake Travel Switch Switch (F/R) Solenoid (Ram Lock
Switch
Switch (4) Switch (7) (13) (6) Valve (11) Light) (12)
(10)
"2-3"
Lock
Terminals - ON
(OFF)
(Parking)
"2-1"
Lock
Terminals - - ON
"2-1" (OFF)
(Lock)
Terminals
(Travel) "2-3"
Release
Terminals - - OFF
(ON)
(Release)
"2-1"
Lock
Terminals - ON
OFF (OFF)
(Lock)
(below
"2-3" 47Bar) Release
Terminals - OFF
(ON)
(Release)
"2-3"
- Lock
Terminals OFF ON
(OFF)
(Work)
"2-1"
ON Lock
Terminals ON ON
(above (OFF)
(Lock)
47Bar)
"2-3"
Release
Terminals ON OFF
(ON)
(Release)
NOTE: "-" is don’t-care condition.

Page 89
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Outline
A
C
C
B
FG016929
Figure 79
Solid-type heater and air conditioner are installed in the

cover behind the driver's seat.
Temperature of the driver's room is adjusted automatically to
the temperature set by operator.
(Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed whole
automatic control.
Vent mode selects the direction of discharged air.

Page 90
Outlets by vent modes
Modes
Outlets A A+B B B+C C
Internal and External Filters

Internal and external air purification filters are installed for
the driver's room.
Filters should be cleaned every 500 hours.
If machine operates in an excessively contaminated
environment, filters should be cleaned more frequently and if
necessary, replaced with new ones.
How to check Indoor air filter

1. Press both levers on the left and right side at the top
of the filter installed at the rear of the driver's seat.
FG000422
Figure 80
How to check outdoor air filter

1. Open the front door at the left side of machine and
loosen four marked bolts to remove the cover (1,
Figure 81).
1
TOP
Donaldson.
FG000440
Figure 81

Page 91
2. Turn marked knobs (1, Figure 82) at the rear side of
the cabin to open the cover.
FG000441
Figure 82
3. Remove the filter attached to the cover and clean the

contaminated filter using compressed air.
4. Close the cover, replace the knobs, and secure the
cover to the support with butterfly bolts.
FG000342
Figure 83

Page 92
Air-Conditioning System Layout
10
11
2
5
6
5
7
4
1
8
9 FG003919
Figure 84
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Air Conditioner/heater Unit 7 Liquid Hose (1)
2 Condenser 8 Liquid Hose (2)
3 Compressor 9 Ambient Temperature Sensor
4 Receiver Dryer 10 Sun Sensor
5 Discharge Hose 11 Control Panel
6 Suction Hose

Page 93
Air Conditioner/Heater Circuit Diagram
0.5RW
FUSIBLE LINK
LAMP SWITCH
20A STARTER SWITCH

BATTERY RELAY
A/C CONTROL PANEL AIRCON UNIT BATT.

1.25LR CN11-2 42C 24V
LED 1~12 130C CN9-6
0.85LR CN10-8 42D
54E CN9-11 0.5WR
CN10-18 46B
ILL 42B CN9-5 1.25LR
0.85BW
0.85LR
RECEIVER DRIER
BLOWER A/C
42E 46A
RELAY RELAY
COMPRESSOR
168B CN8-10 0.5LG CN10-16 168A
A/C THERMO (LOW) 105B CN9-8 0.5LB CN10-5 105A CN11-4 0.85LW 47C
106B CN8-11 CN10-6 106A 47A 47B

0.5LY
FET
DIODE 4
1.25B CN11-1 99 - +
M
107B CN8-12 0.5LW CN10-1 107A 0.85B 0.85B
BLOWER
108A CN9-13 0.5GrG CN10-2 108B FRE (P1)

INTAKE
109A CN9-12 0.5GrY CN10-20 109B REC (P2) ACTUATOR
M
110A CN9-15 0.5OrR CN10-12 110B DEF (P1)

111A CN9-14 0.5OrW CN10-13 111B VENT (P2)
M
MODE
43A CN9-16 0.5YB CN10-11 43B Vref MODE
ACTUATOR
44A CN9-17 0.5YW CN10-10 44B MODE F/BACK
99 CN9-10 1.25B
112A CN9-1 0.5LgW

g CN10-19 112B WARM (P1)
113A CN9-18 0.5LgB
g CN10-3 113B COOL (P2)
M
114A CN9-3 0.5YR CN10-7 114B Vref MIX Temp. Control
115A CN9-4 0.5YW CN10-9 115B MIX F/BACK ACTUATOR
167C CN9-2 1.25BL CN10-4 167A GND
116A CN8-2 0.5OrB CN10-15 116B

DUCT
SENSOR
45A CN8-1 0.5LgR

g CN10-14 45B
WATER
SENSOR
2
48A CN8-5 0.5LY CN10-17 48B 1 INCAR
SENSOR
SUN LOAD SENSOR
0.5Lg 2 - + 1 CN10 AMP 20P CN11 KET 4P

142A CN8-3
142B 0.5YR
114C 0.85BL 167B 2
49A CN8-4 0.85YG 0.85YG 49B 1 AMBIENT TEMP
SENSOR
CN8 CN9
AMP 18P + 12P
AMP 040-III 20P

KET 4P AMP 070 18P AMP 070 12P
2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
4 3 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
(CN11) (CN10) (CN9) (CN8)

FG000781
Figure 85

Page 94
Air Conditioner/Heater Unit
Air Flow Diagram
External Air Inlet
Vent Rear Cold Box

Outlet Internal Air Inlet
Outlet
Vent
Front
Outlet
Foot
DEF
Outlet
Outlet
External Air
VENT
COOL
DOOR
-INTAKE
DOOR
DEF -MIX
Internal Air
WARM
Evaporator Fan
Heater
FOOT Core
FG001359
Figure 86

Page 95
Door Open by Vent Modes
Mode
Door
Vent Bi-level Foot Def/foot Def
Vent 100 60 0 0 0
Foot 0 40 100 80 60
Def 0 0 0 20 40
Main Components
Actuator
- Temp A/C
Control Relay Blower
Relay
Duct
Sensor
Air Flow
Control
Module
Actuator Blower
-Wind Direction Motor
Control
Water Temp
Sensor
Actuator
- Internal/external
Evaporator Air Exchanger
Internal
Internal Air Sensor
Air Filter FG001360
Figure 87

Page 96
Actuator - Wind direction control: change of discharged air
flow according to selected wind direction mode - Change of
wind direction: Direction changes in the order of VENT→ BI-
LEVEL → FOOT → FOOT/DEF → VENT.
Actuator - Temp control: Change of discharged air
temperature by controlling the position of temp control door.
N P2
c
b
e
P2 P1
b c e
FG001361
Figure 88
Actuator - Wind direction control
Output
Wind Direction Mode Voltage
Terminal
Vent 0.5 ±0.2V
Bi-level 1.3 ±0.2V
c(+): CN10-10
Foot 2.45 ±0.2V
b(-): CN10-4
Foot/def 3.5 ±0.2V
Def 4.5 ±0.2V
Actuator - Temp control
Output
Set Temp Voltage
Terminal
Max cooling c(+): CN10-9 Below 0.4V
Max heating b(-): CN10-4 Above 4.5V

Page 97
Actuator - Internal/external air exchange
N P2
P1
CN10-20 CN10-2
P2 P1
c e
FG001055
Figure 89
Output
Sel mode Output
Terminal
Internal Air Moving of exchange
P1(+), P2(-) door by selecting
external air
External Moving of exchange
Air P1(-), P2(+) door by selecting internal
air
Air Flow Control Module

Air flow is controlled through the control of voltage between
GATE and SOURCE.
DRAIN
(CN10-1)
SOURCE GATE
(CN11-1) (CN10-6)
FG001056
Figure 90
Air flow Output Terminal Output

1st 10 ± 0.5V
2nd 12.5 ± 0.5V
3rd 15 ± 0.5V
4th CN11-2 CN10-1 17.5 ± 0.5V
5th 20.0 ± 0.5V
6th 22.0 ± 0.5V
7th More than 25V

Page 98
Applied voltage: Standard voltage is 27.5V.
Basically, air flow is set manually.
Relay - Blower
Power is supplied to the blower motor when the system is
87 85(-)
turned on.
87
Specifications 86 85
Rated voltage 24V
30
Rated current 20A
30 86(+)
FG001057
Figure 91
Relay - A/C
Power is supplied to the magnetic clutch of the compressor.
Specifications
L S1 (+)
Rated voltage 24V
Rated current 10A
B S2
(-)
FG001058
Figure 92
Duct Sensor
It is inserted in the core of the evaporator to prevent
freezing of the evaporator.
The sensor consist of negative characteristic thermistor that
resistant value increases and decreases when the
temperature rises and falls, respectively.
Temp (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

0 11.36 ± 0.1
2 10.39 ± 0.2
2.5 10.17 ± 0.2 Figure 93
3 9.95 ± 0.2
3.5 9.73 ± 0.2
4 9.52 ± 0.2
5 9.12 ± 0.2
10 7.36 ± 0.15
25 4.02 ± 0.08
30 3.33 ± 0.07

Page 99
Water Temp Sensor
It senses the temperature of coolant water in the heater
core.

-10 55.8 ± 1.7
0 32.9 ± 0.9
15 15.76 ± 0.5
25 10.0 ± 0.3
35 6.5 ± 0.2
Figure 94
Internal Air Temp Sensor

Built in the internal air filter, it senses the internal
temperature.

-15 218.2 ± 7.5
0 97.83 ± 0.9
15 47.12 ± 0.7
25 30.0 ± 0.36
35 19.60 ± 0.3
Figure 95
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Built at the bottom of the cockpit, it senses the temperature
of external air.

-10 163 ± 4.9
0 96.9 ± 2.9
10 59.4 ± 1.8
20 37.4 ± 1.1
25 30 ± 0.9
30 24.2 ± 0.7 FG001064
Figure 96

Page 100
Sun Sensor
Built beside the socket of spare power, it senses the
quantity of the sun radiation to optimize discharge
temperature and air flow as set by driver.
83.7
OUTPUT VOLTAGE(mV)
76.2
67.7
58.8
46.6
36.0
21.4
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0

LUX(x10,000)
FG001062
Figure 97
Control Panel
Appearance and Terminal Arrangement
A/C OUTSIDE
AUTO A/C
AUTO MAX
TEMP
OFF
SEL MODE
AMP 070 18P AMP 070 12P

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
(CN9) (CN8) FG001063

Figure 98
Refer to "Air Conditioner and Heater" of operation manual.

Page 101
Terminal Terms
CN Term No. Terms CN Term No. Terms

1 Temperature control 1 Water temperature
(warm) sensor
2 Sensor ground 2 Duct sensor
3 Temperature control 3 Sun sensor
Power (5V)
4 Mix feedback 4 Ambient air
temperature sensor
5 Power (KEY "ON") 5 Internal air temperature
CN8 sensor
6 Back-up 6 -
7 - 7 -
8 A/C output (LOW) 8 -
9 - 9 -
10 Ground 10 D.P.S CHECK
CN9 11 Illumination 11 Air flow module (gate)
12 Intake/Recirculate 12 Blower motor (feedback)
(Recirculate)
13 Intake/Recirculate
(Intake)
14 Wind direction control
(VENT)
(DEF.)
Power (5V)
(feedback)
18 Temperature control
(cool)
Control Logic
Categories Inputs System Operation

AUTO Set temperature 1. Automatically adjust room temperature as set and then
next items.
Internal air temperature
sensor Temperature, Wind direction, Recirculate/Intake, Air flow,
Compressor
Ambient air temperature
sensor 2. Auto mode is released when manually setting any switch
except, Temperature Control switch in Auto mode.
Water temperature sensor
3. Upon the releasing of Auto mode, all of functions
Sun sensor
except selected switch are controlled automatically.

Page 102
Sensor Set temperature 1. In case of sensor failure, following defaults are applied:
compensation
Internal air temperature Internal air temperature sensor: 25°C, Ambient air
sensor temperature sensor: 25°C, Duct sensor: -2°C
Ambient air temperature Temperature control actuator:
sensor
- Set Temperature 17 - 24.5°C: Max cooling, Set
Water temperature sensor Temperature 25 - 32°C: Max heating
Wind direction mode actuator
- VENT: VENT fix, modes other than VENT: Fixed to DEF
* Sun sensor is not compensated.
Max cooling/ Auto Setting 1. Set Temperature 32°C: Max heating
heating
2. Set Temperature 17°C: Max cooling
control
Max Cooling (17 C) Max Heating (32 C)
Temp Control
FULL COOL FULL HOT
Actuator
Air Flow MAX HI AUTO HI
Compressor Forced ON OFF
Intake/Recircle Recircle Intake
Wind Direction Mode VENT FOOT
* Max cooling/heating control is possible only in Auto mode.

Starting Auto mode 1. Prevention of discharge of hot air before discharge
Control of temperature drops enough in hot summer weather
Duct sensor
Cooling
2. Start conditions (AND condition)
(1) A/C on (AUTO or manual)
(2) Temperature sensed by the duct sensor is above
30°C
(3) Air flow: Auto mode
3. One time control in the cycle of engine OFF → engine run
4. Initial cooling control is executed when the Auto switch
is "ON" in the manual status (A/C "OFF" and manual
control of air flow) in 5 seconds after engine run.
5. Initial cooling control should be before max cooling.
6. Release condition (OR condition)
(1) A/C "OFF"
(2) Air flow: Manual control
(3) Release is possible with the "OFF" switch but not
allowed within 12 seconds (after Start "ON") while the
system is off using the "OFF" switch and during the
time of initial cooling control.

Page 103
1. Start condition (AND condition)
(1) When wind direction mode is one of the following
modes in the Auto or manual control mode
- BI-LEVEL, FOOT or FOOT/DEF
(2) The Water temperature sensor is stable and the
water temperature < 73°C
(4) Set temperature > Internal air temperature + 3°C
* Air flow falls gradually up to 12 seconds when
operation released.
Water temperature 2. One time control in the cycle of engine OFF → engine
sensor run
Starting Internal air temperature 3. Initial heating control should be before max heating.
control of sensor 4. Air flow is controlled only when the wind direction is in
heating (1) the manual mode and BI-LEVEL, FOOT, or FOOT/DEF
Auto mode
is set.
Set Temperature
5. Control through the water temperature sensor for start.
6. Starting control of heating (2) starts in case of fault of
the water temperature sensor during controlling.
7. Operation release (OR condition)
(1) Only air flow is released if it is selected manually.
(2) When handling the wind direction mode switch, only
wind direction is released but the air flow control is
performed only for the remaining period of the starting
control of heater.
(3) When Max Cooling (17°C) is selected.
(4) Water temperature sensor > 73°C.

Page 104
Starting Water temperature 1. Entry condition (AND condition)
control of sensor
(1) Auto Mode
heating (2)
(2) Ambient air temperature < 5°C and difference
sensor
between ambient and internal air temperature ≤ 5°C
(3) Failure of water temperature sensor
sensor
2. Only one time of engine OFF → engine run
Auto mode
3. Starting control of heating is before max heating.
(1) Air flow: Manual selection
control of heater.
(3) Difference between internal and ambient air
temperature>15°C
5. Exceptional case
Starting control of heating is performed only once
during the remaining period if the entry condition is
satisfied within the starting control period that is the
accumulation of initial start times.
(Inclusive of Auto mode "ON" case within the period of
starting control of heater.)
* Air flow should be reduced slowly for up to 12
seconds in case of exceptional entry case.
Duct sensor 1. Function: Magnetic clutch of compressor is turned "ON/
OFF" depending on temperature of the duct sensor to
prevent the freezing of the evaporator with A/C being
"ON."
2. Control pattern.
Compressor 2.0 0.5 C 3.5 0.5 C

control
External temperature 1. Function: Prevention of compressor in winter.
sensor
2. Control pattern.
*Only for Auto mode.

Page 105
Self Diagnosis
How to start self diagnosis
FG001367
Figure 99

Page 106
Error codes
Code Description
E0 Normal
E1 Internal Air Temp Sensor Short
E2 Internal Air Temp Sensor Open
E3 Ambient Air Temp Sensor Short
E4 Ambient Air Temp Sensor Open
E5 Duct Sensor Short
E6 Duct Sensor Open
E7 Sun Sensor Short
E8 Sun Sensor Open
E9 Water Temp Sensor Short
E10 Water Temp Sensor Open
E11 D.P.S OPEN
Position Error of Wind Direction
E12
Actuator.
Position Error of Temp Control
E13
Actuator.
NOTE: Position error means that it fails to move to

designated place in 40 seconds.
Sun sensor displays E8 in case of no sunlight. E1 E1 E2 E2 E3
2 and more fails: Codes concerned blinks twice at a

time.
0.5 0.5
FG001067
Figure 100
Ambient Temp Display

Selection of both the SEL and MODE switch for more than
3 seconds indicates the ambient temp in the set temp
display department.
- Range of temp display: -40 - +60°C
NOTE: Display of ambient temp may be released in the
same way for its entry way.
It returns automatically to default mode 5 seconds
after entering the ambient air temp display mode.

Page 107
Compressor
Categories Specifications Relief Valve
155.3 cc/rev
Output
(9.48 in3)
120 cc (ND-OIL8)
Oil Level
(7.32 in3 (ND-OIL8))
Refrigerant R134a
Rated Voltage 24V
Open: 35 - 42.2 kg/cm2G
(500 - 600 psi) FG001365
Relief Valve
Figure 101
Close: 28.1 kg/cm2G
(400 psi)
Compressor sucks in refrigerant which evaporates completely

in the evaporator and discharges it to the condenser.
Refrigerant undergoes repeated status change in the order
of liquid, gas, and liquid in the freezing cycle, and the
compressor makes evaporated refrigerant a high
temperatures and high-pressured gas to freeze it in the
condenser.
Receiver Dryer
The receiver dryer reserves refrigerant enough to ensure High/Low Pressure Switch
smooth freezing cycle responding immediately to the change
of level in the freezing cycle.
As liquid refrigerant from the condenser may contain
refrigerant gas with bubbles whose presence in the
expansion valve decreases the freezing power excessively, it
separates liquid and gas and sends liquid only to the
expansion valve.
Water in refrigerant shall be eliminated with dryer and
through filter.
FG001366
Figure 102
Volume of refrigerant by model

kgf/cm2G
Model Volume of refrigerant (g)
DX300LC 800±20
DX340LC 800±20 kgf/cm2G
kgf/cm2G
DX420LC 800±20
DX480LC 800±20
FG003921
DX520LC 800±20
Figure 103
DX210W 800±20

Page 108
SP002210
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (ROPS)SP002210
Electrical
System
(ROPS)
Edition 1
Electrical System (ROPS) SP002210

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Electrical System (ROPS)
Introduction ........................................................... 7
Electrical Supply System .................................... 8
Engine Starting Circuit ...................................... 10
Start Operation ............................................................. 10
After Start ..................................................................... 12
Engine Preheating System ............................... 14
Engine Stop ....................................................... 16
Charging System ............................................... 18
Monitoring System ............................................. 19
Instrument Panel .......................................................... 20
Monitoring System Schematic ..................................... 22
Operation ............................................................ 24
Instruments.................................................................... 24
Warning and Indicator Lights ........................... 26
Indication of Warning Lights........................................ 26
Indication of Multifunction Gauge and Letter
Information Area ........................................................... 27
Initial Operation.................................................. 29
Mode Selector Switch ....................................... 30
Graphic Information Area Display .................... 31
Overview ....................................................................... 31
Main Menus for the Graphic Display Area ................ 32
Menu Selector Buttons ................................................ 32
Main Menu ......................................................... 33
Language ...................................................................... 33
Set Clock ...................................................................... 34
Filter/Oil Info ................................................................. 34
Adjust Display ............................................................... 35

Page 3
Set Password ............................................................... 36
Special Menu ..................................................... 37
Entering/Accessing and Exiting/Escaping Menus ....... 37
Special Menu Selections ............................................. 38
Electronic Hydraulic Control System (e-EPOS)
............................................................................ 54
Control System Schematic .......................................... 54
Power Mode Control ......................................... 56
Operation....................................................................... 58
Power Mode Control - Circuit Diagram ........... 61
Engine Control System ..................................... 62
Engine Control Dial ........................................... 63
Acceleration pedal ............................................. 64
Engine Control Circuit Diagram........................ 65
Automatic Deceleration Control (Auto Idle
Control) ............................................................... 66
Engine Overheat Protection System ................ 68
Power Boost Mode............................................ 70
Operation....................................................................... 70
Power Boost Control - Circuit Diagram ..................... 72
cruise control ..................................................... 73
Operation....................................................................... 73
Cruise Control Circuit................................................... 75
Automatic Travel Speed Control ...................... 76
Automatic Travel Speed Control - Circuit Diagram... 78
Self-diagnostic Function .................................... 79
e-EPOS Controller ........................................................ 79
Wiper System .................................................... 81
Wiper Circuit ................................................................. 81
Wiper operation ............................................................ 82
Lighting System ................................................. 84
Lighting System Circuit Diagram................................. 84

Page 4
Type .............................................................................. 85
Operation....................................................................... 85
Overload Warning Device ................................. 86
Overload Warning Device Circuit Diagram ................ 86
Audio Controller ................................................. 87
Audio Controller Circuit Diagram ................................ 87
ram lock device ................................................. 88
Ram Lock Control Circuit ............................................ 88
Operation....................................................................... 89
Air Conditioner System ..................................... 90
Outline ........................................................................... 90
Internal and External Filters ........................................ 91
Air-Conditioning System Layout .................................. 93
Air Conditioner/Heater Circuit Diagram....................... 94
Air Conditioner/Heater Unit.......................................... 95
Relay - Blower ............................................................. 99
Relay - A/C .................................................................. 99
Duct Sensor.................................................................. 99
Water Temp Sensor................................................... 100
Internal Air Temp Sensor .......................................... 100
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 100
Sun Sensor ................................................................. 101
Control Panel .............................................................. 101
Compressor ................................................................. 108
Receiver Dryer............................................................ 108

Page 5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5839 and Up

Page 6
INTRODUCTION
The electrical system for this equipment is DC 24 volts. The
rated voltage for all electric components is 24 volts with the
exception of the stereo and the air-conditioning control
actuator. The system contains two 12 volt batteries
connected in series and a three phase AC generator with a
rectifier. The electric wiring used in the system is easily
identifiable by the insulator color. The color symbols used in
the electrical system are listed in the following chart.
Electric Wire Color
Symbol Color
W White
G Green
Or Orange
B Black
L Blue
Lg Light green
R Red
Gr Gray
P Pink
Y Yellow
Br Brown
V Violet
NOTE: RW: Red wire with White stripe

R - Base Color, W - Stripe Color
NOTE: 0.85G: Nominal sectional area of wire core less
insulator = 0.85 mm2

Page 7
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
The electric power circuit supplies electric current to each
electric component. It consists of a battery, battery relay,
starter switch, circuit breaker, fusible link and fuse box.
The negative terminal of the battery is grounded to the
vehicle body.
Even when the starter switch (5) is in the "OFF" position,
electric current is supplied to the following components
through battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse box (6).
1. Terminal "1" of DC-DC converter (for memory backup
of stereo)
2. Terminal "B" of starter switch
3. Hour meter
4. Engine controller
5. Fuel feeder pump switch
6. Terminal "6" of wiper motor
7. Terminal "13" of wiper controller
8. Terminal "CN6-11" of instrument panel
9. Terminal "CN9-6" of air conditioner panel
10. Pilot buzzer
11. Light switch
When the starter switch (5) is in the "ON or START"
positions, the current flows from the battery (1) → fusible
→ "BR" terminal of starter switch (5) → "BR" terminal of
battery relay (2) which activates the coil of the battery relay
and the electric supply system is energized.
When the battery relay's contacts are connected, all electric
devices can be operated.
While the engine is not running, the electric power for all
electric devices are supplied by the battery. Once the engine
is started the power is supplied from the alternator (7).

Page 8
MEMO
ACC C
B 5
R2
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
12V 100AH 12V 100AH
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION R(I) P(R) B(B+)
0.5 uF 1
PST TML B BR R1 R2 C ACC B+
OFF I(L)
PREHEAT
ON
REG.
TRIO DIODE 7
FIELD
START F+
F-
E
GRD
FG004584
Figure 1 ELECTRIC POWER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 9
ENGINE STARTING CIRCUIT
Start Operation
When the starter switch is turned to the "START" position,
the "S" and "E" terminals of the starter controller (7) are
connected. At this time the contacts in the starter relay (8)
are closed by the current flow from the battery (1) → fusible
→ "C" terminal of starter switch (5) → "30" terminal of
starter relay (12) - "87a" terminal → "C" terminal of starter
relay (8) - "D" terminal → "S" terminal of starter controller
(7) - "E" terminal → ground.
When the contact point "B" and "PP" of starter relay (8) are
connected, the pinion gear of the starter (9) is pushed
forward and makes contact with the ring gear of the flywheel
and the internal contacts of the starter are connected. The
current flows from the battery (1) → "A" terminal of the
battery relay (2) → "B" terminal of the battery relay (2,
Figure 3) → "30" terminal of the starter (9). The starter
motor is rotated and the engine is started.
If the instrument panel has the password function activated,
input number should match the set number, otherwise the
start circuit closes and the engine does not start.
NOTE: If the security system is "LOCKED," a four-digit
password will be required to start the engine. If the
system is "UNLOCKED," no password will be
required and this display screen will not appear.
ENTER
In the event the security system is locked, current PASSWORD
flows from battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse box
(6) → "B" terminal of starter switch (5) → "ACC"
terminal of starter switch (5) → "86" terminal of starter
relay (12) → "85" terminal of starter relay (12) →
"CN1-15" terminal of e-EPOS (13) → ground. This
current flow causes the coil in starter relay (12) to be FG013717
activated, opening contacts at "87a" terminal. This Figure 2
prevents starter relay (8) from functioning.

Page 10
7 8 9
N S D PP C
P C B B
B E
11
A
87a
30
87
85 86 ACC
C
B 5
R2 BR
12 R1
3
CN1-15
6
4
B A
CN2-1
BR
E
13 11
R(I) P(R) B(B+)
2
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION 0.5 uF
B+

I(L)
OFF - + - +
REG.
TRIO DIODE
10
PREHEAT
ON F+ FIELD
1
F-
START E
GRD
FG004587
Figure 3 STARTER CIRCUIT (1) - WHILE STARTING
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 11
After Start
Once the engine has been started, the belt driven alternator
(10) generates a current.
The output generated by the alternator (10) is a square
wave pulse voltage through the "R" terminal and the
frequency of the pulse voltage is proportional to the rotation
of the alternator.
The starter controller (7) monitors the frequency of the
output current. Once the frequency is equivalent to 500 rpm,
it is sensed and the connection between "S" and "E"
terminals and the connection between "B" and "PP"
terminals are opened. As a result the rotation of the starter
(9) is stopped. Once the engine is running, the starter (9)
will not operate even if the starter switch (5) is moved to
the start position, preventing possible damage to the starter.

Page 12
Operation of the Start Circuit (2) - Immediately After Start
7 8 9
N S D PP C
P C B B
B E
11
A
87a
30
87
85 86 ACC
C
B 5
R2 BR
12 R1
3
CN1-15
6
4
B A
CN2-1
BR
13 E
R(I) P(R) B(B+)
11
STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION 0.5 uF 2
B+

I(L)
OFF
REG.
PREHEAT TRIO DIODE
10 - + - +
ON F+ FIELD
START
F-
E 1
GRD
FG004588
Figure 4 OPERATION OF START CIRCUIT (2) - IMMEDIATELY AFTER START
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 13
ENGINE PREHEATING SYSTEM
An air heater (8) is installed in the intake manifold of the
engine. When the starter switch (5) is turned "ON," the
current flows from the battery (1) → fusible link (3) → fuse
box (6) → "B" terminal of starter switch (5) → "BR" terminal
of starter switch (5) → "1-39" terminal of engine controller
(12), causing current to flow though "1-16" terminal of
engine controller (12) → "C and D" terminals of preheat
relay (7) → "1-04" terminals of engine controller (12) →
ground.
This current flow causes the coil in preheat relay (7) to be
activated, closing contacts.
When the contacts of the preheat relay (7) are closed, the
heating coils of the air heating device (8) are heated by
current flowing from the battery (1) → battery relay (2) →
preheat relay (7) → air heater (8) → ground.
The duration of the heating cycle depends on the
temperature of engine coolant. The preheat indicator light in
the instrument panel (9) will turn "ON" during preheating
cycle.
The preheat relay (7) is controlled by the engine controller
(12) and operates only at temperatures of 10°C (50°F) and
below.
The longer the preheating period, the lower the temperature
of coolant is.

Page 14
3
6
9 4
CN6-1,2 2
ACC C B A
PREHEAT CN7-4,5,6
L5 B 5
R2 BR
R1 BR E
10
CN4-4,5,6
CN2-1
CN5-2
- + - +
11 C B 1
-
200A
1-56
7 STARTER SWITCH CONNECTION
1-33,34,35 8 TML
1-39 PST B BR R1 R2 C ACC
1-16 D OFF
H +
1-04 ON
START
12
FG007757
Figure 5 ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Preheat Relay
2 Battery Relay 8 Air Heater
3 Fusible Link 9 Preheat Indicator Light
5 Starter Switch 11 e-EPOS Controller
6 Fuse Box 12 Engine Controller

Page 15
ENGINE STOP
When starter switch (5) is turned "ON" the engine controller
(8) is activated. The engine controller monitors and controls
the engine including the injector solenoid (9). It controls the
fuel deliver rate and the injection timing for each cylinder.
NOTE: There is an individual injector solenoid (9) for each of
the six cylinders. Only one solenoid is shown in
Figure 6.
When starter switch (5) is turned "OFF," the engine
controller stops suppling power to the injector solenoid (9).
This stops fuel from being injected into the engine cylinder,
thus stopping the engine.
In the event that the engine can be shut down using the
starter switch (5), an emergency stop switch (10) is provided O I
to shut down engine. To activate the emergency stop switch,
move it to the "I" (EMERGENCY STOP) position.
The emergency stop switch (10) is in its "O" (OFF) position
during normal operation. The switch must be moved and
held in the "I" (EMERGENCY STOP) position until the
engine stops. When released it will automatically move back
to the "O" (OFF) position.
FG016039
Figure 6 Engine Emergency Stop Switch

Page 16
OFF
ON
START
8
6
0.5G
3
ACC C
10 B 5
R2
1-19 2 3 BR
4 2
R1 B A
1-45
1-39 BR
E
7
9
- + - +
1
FG001473
Figure 7 ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Fuse Box
3 Fusible Link 8 Engine Controller
4 Circuit Breaker 9 Injector Solenoid
5 Starter Switch 10 Emergency Stop Switch

Page 17
CHARGING SYSTEM
When the starter switch (5) is turned to the "ON" position,
an initial excited current flows to the field coil of the
alternator (7) through the battery relay (2) and circuit
breaker (4). When the engine is started from this condition
the alternator (7) starts charging. The current flows from the
"B(B+)" terminal of alternator (7) → circuit breaker (4) →
battery relay (2) → battery (1).
The alternator also supplies electric current to other
electrical components. When the alternator (7) starts to
operate, a current flows from the "I (R)" terminal of
alternator → diode (8) → battery relay (2) coil securing a
path for the charging current to the battery (1). Thus
preventing the possibility of a high voltage build up and
possible damage to the electric system.
ACC C
B
R2
5
BR
0.5G
R1
6
3
8
4 2
B A
BR
E
- + - +
I R B+ 12V 150AH 12V 150AH
0.5 uF
1
B+
I(L)

OFF
REG.
TRIO DIODE 7
F+ FIELD
ON F-
E
START
GRD
FG007765
Figure 8 CHARGING CIRCUIT
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 18
MONITORING SYSTEM
1
5 7
2
CHECK
4
3 9
8
E F 17
10
C H C H
6 11
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0 16
12
18
15 14
13
20 19
21
FG016928
Figure 9
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 12 Air Cleaner Indicator
2 Battery 13 Engine Control Unit
3 Light Switch 14 Parking Brake Sensor
4 Return Filter Switch 15 Brake Oil Pressure Switch
5 Pilot Filter Switch 16 Pilot Relay
6 e-EPOS Controller 17 Parking Brake Switch
7 Alternator 18 Steering Console
8 Warning Buzzer 19 Right Side Combination Switch
9 Pump Discharge Pressure Sensor 20 Left Side Combination Switch
10 Oil Temperature Sensor 21 Ram Lock Switch
11 Fuel Sensor
The monitoring system displays the various data and

warning signals onto the instrument panel by processing the
information gathered from the e-EPOS controller. It displays
information selected by the operator.

Page 19
Instrument Panel
7 8 9 10 11 12 5
6 1
1 CHECK
E
< CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL NO.>
F 4
16
C H C H 18
AMP 040 28P
14 20
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
22
13 (CN7) (CN6)
1 2 3 4 5
23
6 7 8 9 0
15
17 19 21 FG013521
Figure 10

Page 20
Gauges Warning Lights Mode Selector Switches
1. Fuel Gauge 8. Engine Oil Pressure Warning 16. Auto Idle Selector Button
2. Engine Coolant Temperature 9. Engine Coolant 17. Flow Control Button
Gauge Temperature Warning
18. Up Arrow Button
3. Hydraulic Oil Temperature 10. Engine Check Warning
19. Down Arrow Button
Gauge
11. Preheat Indicator
20. Display Selector Button
4. Multifunction Gauge and
12. Work Light Indicator Light
Letter Information Area 21. Selector Button
13. Warning Light
5. Digital Clock 22. Home Selector Button
14. Power Mode Selector Button
6. Hour Meter 23. Camera Selector Button
15. Economy Mode Selector Button
7. Charge Warning
When the engine starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON)

position, all gauge bands, switch/button indicator lights and
warning lights will turn "ON" and the alarm buzzer will sound
about two seconds.
During this functional check, a LOGO will appear on the
multi function gauge in the graphic information area.

Page 21
Monitoring System Schematic
1
21
2
19
18
4
16
20
17
5
6 10
11
12
31 13
14
7
22
8
15
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
FG007781
Figure 11

Page 22
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 16 e-EPOS Controller
2 Pilot Buzzer 17 Battery
3 Light Switch 18 Battery Relay
4 Starter Switch 19 Circuit Breaker
5 Front Pump Pressure Sensor 20 Fusible Link
6 Rear Pump Pressure Sensor 21 Fuse Box
7 Fuel Sensor 22 Check Connector
8 Hydraulic Oil Temp. Sensor 23 Blink Unit
9 Parking Brake Sensor 24 Steering Console
10 Pedal Breaker Pressure Sensor 25, 26 Turn Signal Switch
11 Air Cleaner Indicator 27 High Beam
12 Pilot Filter Switch 28 Ram Lock Switch
13 Return Filter Switch 29 Travel Switch
14 Brake Oil Pressure Switch 30 Parking Switch
15 Alternator 31 Engine Controller

Page 23
OPERATION
Instruments
Input Specification
Terminal
Blue
Coolant ECU-CAN
Temperature 61 C 102 C Communication
41 C 107 C
C H
White Red
FG013527
Blue
1/10 LCD (Red Zone)

CN3-7
Fuel Level Blinking → over 5K ohms
CN3-8
1/10 FULL → under 525 ohms
E F
Red Full
FG014894
Blue
40°C (104°F) → 1,397 ohms
50°C (122°F) → 1,139 ohms
Hydraulic Oil CN3-9 60°C (140°F) → 881 ohms

Temperature 50 C 94 C CN3-10 94°C (201°F) → 190 ohms
40 C 96 C
C H 96°C (205°F) → 177 ohms
White Red (When reading increase)
FG013529
208 43 l/min → 605 mA

207
181 208 65 l/min → 538 mA
193
(Output
129 156 82 l/min → 487 mA
Terminal)
Flow
82
102 129 l/min → 413 mA
Adjusting CN1-19
65 (Default Set)
CN1-20
43 207 l/min → 341 mA
(None)
FG017002 208 l/min → 290 mA

Page 24
Input Specification
Terminal
N = 146 f / 60
ECU-CAN N = Engine speed (rpm)
Tachometer E/G SPEED 1750 RP Communication
f = Frequency of engine
speed sensor (Hz)
FG013531
Voltmeter BATTERY 28.0 VOLT CN2-14 0 - 32 VDC
FG000050
Main pump
CN3-1
discharge
pressure
FRONT PUMP 320 BA
CN3-2
(front pump)
V = 0.00816 x P + 1.0
FG000051
V: Sensor output voltage (V)
P: Displayed pressure (Bar)
Main pump
discharge CN3-3
pressure
REAR PUMP 313 BAR
CN3-4
(rear pump)
FG000052

Page 25
WARNING AND INDICATOR
LIGHTS
Indication of Warning Lights

Input
Terminal
This symbol in case
of no charge
[voltage of "R(I)" Normally, it lights
terminal is below when starting engine
Charge CN2 - 14
12 ±1V] or and is out after
overcharge [voltage engine starts.
HAOA610L of "R(I)" terminal is
above 33(V)].
After starting engine,

This symbol when
ECU-CAN if engine oil pressure
Engine Oil engine oil pressure
Communic is insufficient after 8
Pressure is below the
ation seconds, a warning
reference.
buzzer will sound.
HAOA620L
ECU-CAN This symbol in case

Engine CHECK Communic of failure in engine
Check
ation system.
FG000045
This symbol when

ECU-CAN engine coolant
Coolant
Communic temperature sensor
Temperature
ation resistant is below
about 128 ohms.
HAOD350L
Preheating period
depends on coolant
This symbol during temperature.
preheating ("CN5-2"
terminal voltage is No preheating at
Preheating CN5-2 below 2V) and turns above 10°C
"OFF" after 10 sec preheating at
completion of 5°C
HAOA639L preheating.
20 sec preheating at
below 0°C

Page 26
Input
Terminal
- Symbol up when
the parking brake
switch is placed in
Parking CN5-1 the park position.
Brake
Indicator
Light
P CN3-11
CN3-12
- Symbol up when
parking brake
pressure decrease
BCS0790L
below 26.0 kg/cm2
(377 psi)
Indication of Multifunction Gauge and

Letter Information Area
Input
Terminal
CN3-9 When hydraulic oil

Hydraulic Oil
temperature is
Temperature CN3-10 above about 96°C.
FG000056
Fuel CN3-7 When fuel is almost

Exhausted CN3-8 exhausted.
FG000057
When air cleaner is

Air Cleaner CN2-17
clogged.
FG000053
When return filter

pressure is above
Return Filter CN5-3
about 1.50 kg/cm²
(21 psi)
FG000054

Page 27
When pilot filter
pressure is above
Pilot Filter CN2-18
about 1 kg/cm² (14
psi)
FG000055
Warning buzzer also It flickers in case of

starts when boom 2.71V and above
CN3-5 pressure sensor and lights
Overload
output voltage is continuously in case
Warning CN3-6 about 2.7V while of 2.8V and above
overload warning (and warning buzzer
FG000253 switch is "ON." also starts).
This symbol when

Boost CN2-2
boost is selected.
FG000554
This symbol when

Breaker CN2-10
breaker is selected.
FG001470
This symbol when

Shear CN2-9
shear is selected.
FG001471
Symbol up when
Quick Clamp CN2-11 quick clamp was
release.
FG002195

Page 28
Symbol up when
Travel CN2-3
travel was selected.
FG004605
This symbol when

Working
CN2-6 work light turns
Light
"ON".
HB4O2003
This symbol appears

when the water
separator is full.
Water CN3-19
Separator This symbol appears
CN3-20
when water separator
sensor output voltage
FG010520
is about 1.5V below.
INITIAL OPERATION
Item Input (Terminal) Output (Operation and initial setting mode)
Initial When "CN6-1,2" is applied • LCD, all of LED and warning lights are turned
Operation battery voltage (starter switch "ON" and turned "OFF" after about 2 seconds.
shifts from "OFF" to "ON"
• Warning buzzer is activated and turned "OFF"
after about 2 seconds.
• Power mode: Standard mode.
• Auto Idle: High Output (Activation).
• Display: Indicating coolant temperature, Fuel
level, Hydraulic oil temperature, Engine speed.
• Clock: Current time display.
NOTE: Refer to method for setting clock in operation manual

for setting time.

Page 29
MODE SELECTOR SWITCH
Power Mode / Trenching Mode Switch
e-EPOS Output
Output Check
(Operation Electromagnetic
Operation Mode Proportional Pressure Swing Priority 7-Segment
mode
display) Reducing Valve (E.P.P.R Solenoid Valve Display
Valve) Current (mA)
Power Mode ON Load: Variable output - 9 x
Power
Standard Mode OFF Load: Variable output - 7 x
Mode
Economy Mode Load: Variable output - 5 x
NOTE: When the engine speed is below 1,000 rpm, the

output current of E.P.P.R valve is fixed to be
600 ± 60mA.
Auto Idle Switch
Operation Mode Output Check (Operation mode display LED)

Activation ON
Auto Idle
Cancellation OFF

Page 30
GRAPHIC INFORMATION AREA
DISPLAY
Overview
Many kinds of condition of machine are displayed on the
letter information display department. The information display
department is divided into two menus. One is main menu for
user and the other is special menu for specialist. These
menus can be moved from normal display mode by the
combination of selector buttons.
E F
C H C H 1
5
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
2 3 FG013562
Figure 12
Selector Buttons Graphic Display Area

1. Up Arrow Button 5. Home Button
2. Down Arrow Button 6. Letter Information Display Department
3. Enter Button
4. Escape Button

Page 31
Main Menus for the Graphic Display Area
1. Main menu: Language setting, Time setting, Filter/Oil
information, Brightness adjustment, Password
2. Special menu: Information of machine status, failure
information, Information of machine operation.
Menu Selector Buttons

1. Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12): Move the cursor
to up, left and previous screen.
2. Down Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12): Move the
cursor to down, right and next screen.
3. Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12): Move the menu to
selected mode. When setting the menu, this button is
used to function as the selector button.
4. Escape Button (ESC, 4 on Figure 12): Move a screen
to previous menu or main menu.
5. Home Button (HOME, 5 on Figure 12): Move a screen
to default menu.

Page 32
MAIN MENU
When the "ESC" button is pressed for more than 3 seconds,
the main menu screen is displayed. MAIN MENU
Main menu offers sub-menus (language setting, time setting, L 1. Language
or filter/oil information, brightness adjustment, password) to l
2. Set Clock
l
the operator.
Refer to the "Operation and Maintenance Manual" for details.
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013563
Figure 13
Language
MAIN MENU
Put the cursor on Language in the main menu and put the
Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) and the language select
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
view appears.
The default language is Korean, but it will memorize and
use the newly set language. 4. Adjust Display
Use the Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12) or Down
5. Set Password
Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12) to move cursor to a : UP : DOWN : SELECT
language to be selected on the Language Select display and FG013563
press the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) and the Figure 14
selected language is indicated in the right bottom of the
screen.
At this point pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12)

or the Escape Button (ESC, 4 on Figure 12) more than 1 L Languag
second brings the main menu with changed language and
then pressing the ESC button again shows the default view. 1. Korean
Without pressing a button more than 20 seconds, the default 2. English
view appears.
: UP : DOWN : SET
FG013564
Figure 15

Page 33
Set Clock
MAIN MENU
It is used to adjust time of the digital clock.
L 1. Language
Pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) in the Main l
2. Set Clock
l
Menu after putting cursor on Set Clock brings Set Clock
display.
4. Adjust Display
Without pressing a button more than 20 seconds, the default
view appears. 5. Set Password
Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed information : UP : DOWN : SELECT
on Time Setting. FG013565
Figure 16
SET CLOCK
02:30:30
2003 11/04
FG013566
Figure 17
Filter/Oil Info
MAIN MENU
This mode displays total operating hours of filters and oils.
L 1. Language
After changing the filter and oil, reset the operating hour and l
2. Set Clock
l
then the operating hours until the next service interval can
be easily checked. 3. Filter / Oil Info
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013567
Figure 18
Filter/Oil Information
R
1. Fuel Filter
Hrs : 0045Hrs 42m
FG013568
Figure 19

Page 34
Menu Display Order and Icon Explanation
1. Fuel Filter 2. Air Cleaner 3. Engine Oil Filter 4. Return Filter
5. Pilot Filter 6. Engine Oil 7. Pilot Filter 8. Coolant Water

FG004977
Figure 20
Adjust Display
MAIN MENU
Pressing the Enter Button ( , 3 on Figure 12) in the main
menu after putting cursor on Adjust Display brings Adjust
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
Display.
Screen brightness, contrast, back light can be adjusted using
the Up Arrow Button ( , 1 on Figure 12) or the Down 4. Adjust Display
Arrow Button ( , 2 on Figure 12). 5. Set Password
FG013569
Figure 21
1. Adjust Display
2. Adjust Display (Camera)
FG013835
Figure 22

Page 35
Day Mode
Adjust Display
The default contrast is set to 50%. Brightness llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
The default back light is set to 90%. Contrast lllllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
Night Mode
BackLight llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
The default contrast is set to 30%. : UP : DOWN : SELECT
The default back light is set to 10%. FG013570
Figure 23
Set Password
MAIN MENU
This menu is used to apply (lock), release, or change
password. L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed information
on Password Setting. 3. Filter / Oil Info
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013571
Figure 24

Page 36
SPECIAL MENU
In this menu, many types of operating conditions and
functions can be accessed and displayed, including the
e-EPOS controller. This menu is mainly used for machine
testing and failure diagnostics.
The special menu offers three sub-menus:
1. Machine status.
2. Failure information.
3. Information on machine operation.
Entering/Accessing and Exiting/Escaping

Menus
Entering/Accessing Menus
4
When normal mode screen is displayed, if the enter button
( , 3) and escape button (ESC, 4) are pressed
simultaneously for more than 3 seconds, normal mode
screen (Figure 26) will be changed to special menu screen
(Figure 27).
3 FG013581
Figure 25
Normal Mode Screen

NOTE: Normal mode screen can display many kinds of
display mode by selecting, for example, engine
speed (RPM), battery voltage (VOLT), front pump
pressure (BAR), rear pump pressure (BAR) and so
on by selecting.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 26

Page 37
Special Menu Screen
NOTE: Displayed language on the special menu screen SPECIAL MENU
consists of Korean and English.
If any language except for Korean is selected during
language selection mode of main menu, only English
will be displayed on special menu screen.
3. Operating Hours
FG013592
Figure 27
Exiting/Escaping Menus
1. If escape button (ESC, 4 on Figure 25) is pressed for
more than 1 second, the special menu screen will be
returned to the normal mode screen.
2. If this special menu is "ON" without any activity, for
more than 20 seconds, it will turn to the normal mode
screen.
3. After the turning starter switch to the "OFF" position,
turn it back to the "ON" position, and the normal mode
screen displayed once again.
Special Menu Selections

Submenu Selection Method
Various sub-menus can be selected by pressing "Up ( ,

SPECIAL MENU
Figure 25)" and "Down( , Figure 25)" button.
Move the cursor to desired menu and a selected menu will
be inverse displayed. 2. Failure Information
When the selected menu is inverse displayed, press the
"Enter ( , 3 on Figure 25)" button for menu selection. 3. Operating Hours
FG013592
Figure 28
Information of Machine Status

1. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is located on MACHINE INFORMATION
"Machine Info" of special menu screen, press "Enter
( , 3 on Figure 25)" button and the "Machine Info" 1. Analog Input State
will be displayed.
2. Digital input State
25) is pressed for more than 1 second, display will be
turned to previous screen.
3. Digital Output State
FG013593
Figure 29

Page 38
Analog Inputs Description
Analog Input Items Display Remark

Current in pump proportional
1. Pump P/V mA
valve.
2. Cooling Fan P/V mA N.A.
Current in flow control proportional
3. Flow Control P/V mA
valve.
4. Dial mV Indicating dial voltage.
5. Accel. Pedal mV Indicating accel. pedal voltage.
6. E/G Control Motor mV N.A.
7. Boom Pressure BAR Boom cylinder head pressure.
8. Pilot Gear Pump Press BAR Pilot gear pump pressure.
9. Boost Pressure BAR Pump pressure for boost.
Temperature of air incoming to
10. Intake Manifold Temperature °C
intake manifold.
11. E/G Oil Pressure BAR Engine oil pressure.
12. Fuel Temperature °C Fuel temperature.
13. E/G Oil Temperature °C Engine oil temperature.
14. Load At Cur. Spd % Current load ratio of equipment.
Submenu Selections
1. Power Shift P/V : 0598mA 6. E/G Control Motor : 2095mV

2. Cooling Fan Ctrl P/V : N.A 7. Boom Pressure : 205BAR
3. Flow Control P/V : 0000mA 8. Pilot Gear Pump Press: 33BAR
4. E/G Control Dial : 2095mV 9. Boost Pressure : 000BAR
5. Accel. Pedal : 2095mV 10. Intake Manifold Temp.: 000 C
11. E/G Oil Pressure : 000BAR

12. Fuel Temp. : 000 C
13. E/G Oil Temp. : 000 C
14. Pecent Load At Cur. Spd: 00%
: UP : DOWN
Figure 30 FG016953

Page 39
Digital Inputs Descriptions
Digital Inputs Items Mark Remark

Lights up when output at alternator
1. Alternator
"R(I)" terminal is above 12 ± 1V.
2. Travel Select SW N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
3. High Speed Sel. SW (M) selector switch is set to the "II"
position.
4. High Speed Sel. SW (A) selector switch is set to the "II"
position.
5. Pressure SW (Py)
switch (Py) is "ON".
6. Pressure SW (Px)
switch (Px) is "ON".
7. E/G Oil Press. SW N.A. (only for mechanical engine)
Lights up when the air cleaner
8. Air Cleaner Clogged
indicator contact is "ON".
Lights up when the return filter
9. Return Filter Clogged
Lights up when the pilot filter
10. Pilot Filter Clogged
Lights up when the overload
11. OWD Warning SW
warning selector switch is "ON".
12. Brake Oil Press. SW ON / OFF N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
Lights up when pedal pressure
13. Pedal Press. SW
switch is "ON".
Lights up when the selector switch
14. One Way Sel. SW
is turned to breaker.
Lights up when the Selector
15. Two-way Sel. SW
Switch is turned to "SHEAR".
16. Power Max. SW is "ON" with the Select switch
turned to "BOOST".
17. Breaker SW is "ON" with the selector switch
turned to "BREAKER".
18. Preheat Select N.A.
Lights up when the Quick Coupler
19. Quick Coupler
switch is "ON".
20. F and R Lever N.A. (only for wheel type equipment)
Lights up during preheating (CN5-
21. Preheat Select
2) terminal voltage is below 2V.
22. Reverse Fan SW N.A.
23. Pilot Cutoff SW N.A.
24. Water in fuel Light up when WIF sensor is "ON".

Page 40
Menu Select
1. Alternator : 7. E/G Oil Press.SW : N.A

2. Travel Select SW : N.A 8. Air Cleaner Clogged :
3. High Speed Sel. (M) : 9. Return Filter Clogged :
4. High Speed Sel. (A) : 10. Pilot Filter Clogged :
5. Pressure SW (Py) : 11. OWD Warning SW :
6. Pressure SW (Px) : 12. Breake Oil Press SW : N.A
19. Quick Coupler : 13. Pedal Press. SW :

20. F & R Lever : N.A 14. One Way Sel. :
21. Preheat Select : 15. Two Way Sel. :
22. Reverse Fan SW : N.A 16. Booster SW :
23. Pilot Cutoff SW : N.A 17. Breaker SW :
24. Water in fuel : 18. Preheat Select :
FG013611
Figure 31

Page 41
Digital Outputs Descriptions
Digital Outputs Items Mark Remark

Lights up when the relief press up
1. Relief Press. Up S/V
solenoid valve is "ON".
Lights up when the Pilot relay is
2. Pilot Relay S/V
ON / OFF "ON".
3. Reverse Fan S/V N.A.
4. Starter Relay When the starter relay is "ON".
5. After Heat Relay N.A.
Menu Select
DIGITAL INPUT STATE
1. Relift Press UP S/V :
2. Pilot Relay :
3. Reverse Fan S/V :
4. Starter Relay :
5. After Heat Relay :
: UP : DOWN
FG017006
Figure 32
Failure Information
1. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor is located in SPECIAL MENU
"Failure Info" of special menu screen press enter
button ( , 3 on Figure 25) and "Failure Info" screen
is displayed.
25) is pressed for more than 1 second, this information
screen will be returned to previous screen.
3. Operating Hours
FG013613
Figure 33
* Real-time Failure:
Current status of failure is displayed. SPECIAL MENU
* Failure Log:
Memorized record of past failure is displayed. 1. Machine Information
* Delete Fail Log: 2. Failure Information
This mode is used to delete all of the
memorized record of past failure.
3. Operating Hours
FG013613
Figure 34

Page 42
A. Current failure information
Current status of failure is displayed (Failure code, REALTIME FAILURE
failure contents). 1/2 CODE : V204 - 05
Figure 25) or "DOWN" ( , 2 on Figure 25) Relief Pressure Up S/V
button.
Open
* 1/2: A serial number of current failure/ total
quantity of failure. : UP : DOWN
FG013615
* Vxxx-xx: Vxxx is a unique code and xx is a FMI Figure 35
(Failure Mode Identifier) number.
- V: Machine related failure code
- E: Engine related failure code
Refer to the failure information code for unique
codes and FMI numbers.
This example shows one of two failures.
B. Past failure information
Memorized record of past failure is displayed FAILURE LOG
(Failure code, failure contents). 1/2 CODE : V204 - 05
Time : 00254 Hr 29m Count :28
Figure 25) or "DOWN" ( , 2 on Figure 25)
Relief Pressure Up S/V
button.
Open
NOTE: " Number: xxx ": "xxx" means that the
: UP : DOWN
totally counted number of the same failure.
FG013616
" Period:xxxxxHrxxm ": It indicates the Figure 36
period for which machine has operated
until a failure takes place. (For more than
two occurrences of the same failure, until
the first occurrence time.)
C. Failure record deletion
This mode is used to delete the memorized DELETE FAIL LOG
record of past failure. If this mode is selected, all
records will be deleted.
All Fail Log
When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button is
pressed, the memorized record will be deleted. will be DELETED.
At this time, deletion signal will be displayed and
the screen will move to previous menu after
deletion. : Yes ESC: No
This screen will be displayed during 3 seconds. FG013617
Figure 37
NOTE: Failure record deletion can be performed
only approved person. If you want to
delete past failure record, contact
distributor.

Page 43
Input your password with one of No. 1 - 8
switches. DELETE FAIL LOG
When "NO" (ESC, 4 on Figure 25) button is
pressed, the screen will recover to previous menu
without deletion.
ENTER PASSWD
: YES ESC : NO
FG013618
Figure 38
Delete Completed screen will appear 3 seconds

and the screen will move to Failure Info screen. DELETE FAIL LOG
It has been shown 3 seconds upon deleting Fail
Log.
DELETED !!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013619
Figure 39
The screen shown on the left will appear 3

seconds in case of wrong password input and DELETE FAIL LOG
then Enter Password screen appears again.
It has been shown 3 seconds in case of PASSWORD ERR!!!
password failure.
X
: YES ESC : NO
FG013620
Figure 40

Page 44
Failure Information Code at Machine Side

Gauge Panel CN7-4 It is a composite
V201 - R = 60 ± 5 Ω resistance of CAN
Communication Error CN7-5
line. This value has
Ecu CN4-4 to be measured by
V202 Communication - R = 60 ± 5 Ω connected condition
Error CN4-5 of CAN line.
CN1-10 Pump proportional
R = 18 ± 2 Ω
V210 Pump P/V -
(25°C (77°F))
pressure reducing
CN1-21 valve.
V211 Cooling Fan P/V - - N.A.
Flow control
CN1-19 R = 14 ± 2 Ω proportional
V212 Flow Control P/V -
(25°C (77°F)) pressure reducing
CN1-20
valve.
Breaker/boost/shear
selector switch has
to be selected as a
Relief Pressure Up CN1-1 V = V_volt (Note R = 26.2 ± 2 Ω boost function and
V213 S/V 4.) (25°C (77°F)) the boost switch on
CN1-11
the right-hand
joystick is "ON"
status.
Voltage is only
CN1-1 R = 330 ± 10 Ω measured when the
V214 Pilot Relay S/V V = V_volt
(25°C (77°F)) pilot relay is turned
CN1-12
"ON".
CN1-1 Work mode has to
R = 26.2 ± 2 Ω
V215 Swing Priority S/V V = V_volt
(25°C (77°F))
be selected as a
CN1-13 trenching mode.
Reverse Fan Speed
V216 S/V
- - N.A.
CN1-1 It has to be
V217 Starter Relay V = V_volt - measured in engine
CN1-15 start up state.
1-16
V218 After Heat Relay - - N.A.
1-04
Front Pump Press. CN3-1
V220 Sensor
V = 1V - It has to be
CN3-2
measured in engine
Rear Pump Press. CN3-3 stop state.
V221 Sensor
V = 1V -
CN3-4
R = 2.45 ± 0.25
kΩ (25°C
Hyd. Oil CN3-9
V222 - (77°F))
Temperature Sensor CN3-10
R = 320 ± 32 Ω
(80°C (176°F))
Water Temperature
V223 Sensor
- - N.A.
Engine Speed
V224 Sensor
- - N.A.

Page 45
Empty: 5 ± 0.25
CN3-7
V225 Fuel Level Sensor - kΩ
CN3-8
Full: 320 ± 32 Ω
CN2-14 It has to be
V226 Alternator Potential V = 2 ± 1V - measured in engine
CN1-8 stop state.
R = 1.0 ± 0.3 kΩ
CN3-16
V227 Dial - R = 4.0 ± 1.5
CN3-7
kΩ
V = 0.66 ± 0.1V
CN3-13 (at min position)
V228 Accel. Pedal -
CN3-14 V = 3.85 ± 0.1V
(at max position)
CN3-11 It has to be
Parking Brake
V229 Press. Sensor
V = 0.5V - measured in engine
CN3-12 stop state.
E/g Control Motor
V230 Sensor
- - - N.A.
Voltage is only
measured when the
V231 Accel. Pedal SW CN5-8 V = 4 ± 1V -
accel. pedal sw is
turned "ON".

"OFF"

Page 46
Failure Information Code at Engine Side

2-36 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E011 Coolant Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-18
2-34 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E012 Fuel Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-17
2-29 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E013 Boost Air Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-21
V = It has to be
E014 Boost Air Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
pressure 1bar)
2-35 R=186 ± 5 Ω
E017 E/G Oil Temperature Sensor -
(100°C (212°F))
2-19
V = It has to be
E018 E/G Oil Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
pressure 3bar)
1-13 V = V_volt (Note
E021 Battery Voltage
4.)
-
1-15
V = It has to be
E022 Fuel Pressure Sensor (at 23°C (73°F) - engine
pressure 300bar)
2-7 R=2.60 ± 3.15
Fuel Pressure Monitoring
E032 - Ω
MPROP 2-5 (20°C (68°F))
It is a
composite
resistance of
1-53 and CAN line.
1-52 R=60 ± 5 Ω
E037 CAN-B Line - This value
1-35 and (20°C (68°F)) has to be
1-34 measured by
connected
condition of
CAN line.
E038 Engine Overspeed - -
E039 Main Relay (SCG) - -
Abnormal
E041 Redundant Shutoff Path - -
engine stop.
2-25 R=860 ± 6 Ω
E042 E/G Speed (Crankshaft) -
(20°C (68°F))
2-24
2-23
E043 E/G Speed (Camshaft) - -
2-30

Page 47
Synchronizing
error between
crank shaft
E044 Engine Speed Sensor - -
speed sensor
and cam shaft
speed sensor.
Data storing
E045 EEPROM - - error when
engine stop.
E046 Recovery - -
When the
pressure
sensor of
common rail
E047 Monitoring of PRV - -
or
high-pressure
pump has a
defect.
1-13
E048 Power Supply V = V_volt -
1-15
E049 Main Relay SCB - -
E051 Main Relay ECU - -
3-13 R=0.31 ± 0.42
E058 Solenoid Power Stage 1 - Ω
3-09 (20°C (68°F))
3-03
3-06
3-04
3-12
3-05
3-14
3-11
3-16
3-10
3-15
Preheat Light (E/G: Lowside 1-29
E066 Power Stage 2)
- -
1-30
Voltage is
only measured
1-16 when
Preheat Relay (E/G: R=40 ± 5 Ω
E068 Highside Power Stage 1)
V = V_volt
(25°C (77°F))
afterheat
1-04 function is
operating
status.
Fuel metering
Fuel HI pressure pump
unit error of
E065 (E/G: Current controlled - - -
high-pressure
Highside power stage 1)
pump.

Page 48
It is a
composite
resistance of
CAN line.
R=60 ± 5 Ω This value
E091 CAN-A Line - -
(20°C (68°F)) has to be
measured by
connected
condition of
CAN line.
Injector error
Speed signal
error of cam
E077 Monitoring of misfire cylinder 1 - - - shaft speed
sensor or
crank shaft
speed sensor.
Monitoring of misfire multiple
E104 cylinder
- - -
E105 Monitoring of overrun - - -

E106 Engine speed redundant - - -

"OFF"

Page 49
FMIs (Failure Mode Identifier)
FMI 0 Above normal range (DATA VALID but ABOVE NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE)
FMI 1 Below normal range (DATA VALID but BELOW NORMAL OPERATIONAL RANGE)
FMI 2 Incorrect signal (DATA ERRATIC, INTERMITTENT OR INCORRECT)
FMI 3 Voltage above normal (VOLTAGE ABOVE NORMAL OR SHORTED TO HIGH SOURCE)
FMI 4 Voltage below normal (VOLTAGE BELOW NORMAL OR SHORTED TO LOW SOURCE)
FMI 5 Current below normal (CURRENT BELOW NORMAL OR OPEN CIRCUIT)
FMI 6 Current above normal (CURRENT ABOVE NORMAL OR GROUNDED CIRCUIT)
FMI 8 Abnormal signal (ABNORMAL FREQUENCY OR PULSE WIDTH OR PERIOD)
FMI 11 Failure mode not identifiable (ROOT CAUSE NOT KNOWN - Malfunction)
FMI 31 NOT AVAILABLE OR CONDITION EXISTS
Information of Machine Operation

Accumulated operation hour of each mode and status is
displayed.
1. Operating Hour Information
A. Entering Sub-menus: When a cursor is located in SPECIAL MENU
"Operating Hrs" of special menu screen (Figure
41) press enter button ( , 3 on Figure 25) and
"Operating Hrs" screen will be displayed (Figure
42). 2. Failure Information
3. Operating Hours
FG013621
Figure 41
B. Information screen of machine operation (Figure 42).

OPERATING HOURS
Operating Hours
Reset Hours
FG013622
Figure 42

Page 50
C. Operating Hours Screen
D. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC, 4 on OPERATING HOURS
Figure 25) is pressed for more than 1 second, 1. Power : 00042 Hr
this information screen will be returned to previous 2. Economy : 00120 Hr
screen. 3. Auto Idle : 00159 Hr
4. Travel Speed
I Speed : 00005 Hr
II Speed : 00001 Hr
: UP : DOWN
FG013623
Figure 43
Information contents of operation hour
Item Information Contents Detection Method

Power Mode Operation hours used power Power mode switch (Instrument panel)
mode are displayed. - "ON" status and Alternator signal
(CN2-14) is "HI"
Economy Mode Operation hours used economy Economy mode switch (Instrument
mode are displayed. panel) - "ON" status and Alternator
signal (CN2-14) is "HI"
Auto Idle Operation hours used auto idle Auto idle switch (Instrument panel) -
status are displayed. "ON" status and Alternator signal
(CN2-14) is "HI"
Travel Speed: Operation hours used low speed 1st: High speed s/v "OFF" status
and high speed are displayed.
-1st 2nd: High speed s/v and travel pressure
- 2nd switch "Py" (control valve) - "ON" status.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Temperature of hydraulic oil is The resistance delivered from
Distribution (°C (°F)) classified 6 steps. And operation temperature sensor of hydraulic oil is
hours of each step are displayed classified 6 steps. And operation hours
of each step are displayed. (Alternator
Under 30°C (87°F)
output HI status)
31 - 50°C (88 - 123°F)
51 - 75°C (124 - 168°F)
76 - 85°C (169 - 186°F)
86 - 95°C (187 - 203°F)
Over 96°C (204°F)
Coolant Temperature Temperature of coolant is The resistance delivered from coolant
Distribution (°C (°F)) classified 6 steps. And operation sensor is classified 6 steps. And
hours of each step are displayed. operation hours of each step are
displayed. (Alternator output HI status)
Under 40°C (105°F)
41 - 60°C (106 - 141°F)
61 - 85°C (142 - 186°F)
86 - 95°C (187 - 204°F)
96 - 105°C (205 - 222°F)
Over 106°C (223°F)

Page 51
Menu Selection of Operation Hour Information
1. Power Mode 2. Economy Mode 3. Auto Idle 4. Travel Speed 1st, 2nd
6. Coolant Temperature Distribution 5. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Distribution

FG013856
Figure 44
Example of Machine Operation Info Screen
OPERATING HOURS OPERATING HOURS

1. Power : 00042 Hr 5. Hyd.Oil Temp. [ C ]
2. Economy : 00042 Hr 30 : 00140 Hr
3. Auto Idle : 00159 Hr 31-50 : 00054 Hr
4. Travel Speed 51-75 : 00087 Hr
I Speed : 00005 Hr 86-95 : 00001 Hr
II Speed : 00001 Hr 96 : 00000 Hr
OPERATING HOURS
6. Coolant Temp. [ C ]
40 : 00140 Hr
41-60 : 00054 Hr
61-85 : 00087 Hr
96-105 : 00001 Hr
105 : 00000 Hr
: UP : DOWN
FG013624
Figure 45
2. Operation hour reset

A. Entering Sub-menus: When cursor is located in OPERATING HOURS
"Reset Hrs" of information screen of operating
hours press enter button ( , 3 on Figure 25)
Operating Hours
and "Machine Operation Info" screen will be
displayed.
Reset Hours
FG013625
Figure 46

Page 52
B. Reset screen of operation hour
C. Exiting Sub-menus: If escape button (ESC, 4 on OPERATING HOURS
Figure 25) is pressed for more than 1 second,
this information screen will be returned to previous
screen. All Opearting hours
NOTE: When "YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button is will be DELETED.
pressed, operation hours will reset.
At this time, resetting signal will be displayed
and the screen will move to previous menu after : Yes ESC: No
resetting. FG013626
NOTE: When "NO" (ESC, 4) button is pressed, the Figure 47
screen will recover to previous menu without
resetting.
Machine Operation Info Screen

1. If you press the YES" ( , 3 on Figure 25) button,
OPERATING HOURS
password entrance screen appears.
ENTER PASSWD
: YES ESC : NO
FG013627
Figure 48
2. When right password is input, machine operation

periods will be deleted and Reset Completed screen OPERATING HOURS
will appear 3 seconds.
DELETED !!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013628
Figure 49
3. If you press the "NO" (ESC, 4) button, the previous

screen appears without resetting operation periods. OPERATING HOURS
X PASSWORD ERR!!!
: YES ESC : NO
FG013629
Figure 50

Page 53
ELECTRONIC HYDRAULIC
CONTROL SYSTEM (e-EPOS)
Control System Schematic
16
6 6
7 7
11 12 14
8
8
13
15
E/G
4 4 5
3
9 10 Work Mode
Auto Idle
Machine Info
E/G Speed
Order C H
E F
C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
24 23
1
17 21 19 18 22 20
FG016930
Figure 51

Page 54
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 13 Solenoid Valve (High Speed)
2 e-EPOS Controller 14 Solenoid Valve (Breaker)
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 15 Travel Motor
4 Main Pump 16 Main Relief Valve
6 Control Valve Breaker/Boost/Shear Select
18
7 Pressure Switch Switch
8 Pump Pressure Sensor 19 Work/Travel Select Switch
Electromagnetic Proportional 20 Boost Switch (Right Work Lever)
9
Pressure Reducing Valve 21 Sensors
Electromagnetic Proportional 22 Aux Mode Switch
10 Pressure Reducing Valve 23 Aux Mode Resistance
(Mode Control)
11 Solenoid Valve (Boost)
12 Solenoid Valve (Swing Priority)

Page 55
POWER MODE CONTROL
6 6
E/G
4 4
3
10
24
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
19 23 22
17
FG016926
Figure 52
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 10 Electric Proportional Reducing
2 e-EPOS Controller V/V (Mode Control)
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 17 Engine Control Dial
4 Main Pump 19 Work/Travel Select Switch
5 Aux Pump 22 Aux Mode S/W
6 Control Valve 23 Aux Mode Resistance

Page 56
The power mode switch permits the selection of the
appropriate engine power depending on the working
condition. One of the two, Power Mode or Standard Mode,
setting can be selected. When the engine starter switch is
turned "ON," the power mode is automatically defaulted to
standard mode. The desired mode can be selected by
pressing the selector button on the instrument panel. When
the power mode is selected, the indicator light will turn "ON"
to display the selected mode.
The quantity of oil discharged by the pump and the engine
speed are determined by the mode selected by the operator.
The pump output in each mode is determined by the mode
selection and is listed in the following table
Mode Standard Mode Power Mode

Output (%) Approximately 85% 100%

Page 57
Operation
1. Power Mode
This mode should be selected for high speed work. In
this mode the engine output is most efficiently utilized
due to the discharged oil volume being controlled
based on the equivalent horsepower curve at various
loaded pressures. The e-EPOS controller compares the
target engine speed with the actual engine speed and
controls the signal to the E.P.P.R. (Electromagnetic
Proportional Pressure Reducing) valve which in turn
varies the pump output quantity.
If the load increases, the engine speed will fall below
the rated speed. When this occurs, the controller FG013632
senses this decrease and immediately reduces the Figure 53
pump discharge volume to maintain the engine speed
at the rated level.
On the other hand, if the load is decreased the
controller increases the discharge volume of the pump
to maintain the engine speed at the rated level.
By repeating these control operations, the engine
speed is maintained at the rated speed so that
maximum power can be generated.
In Power Mode, the e-EPOS controller receives engine
speed signals from the engine control dial and the
engine controller (ECU) and converts it to an operating
signal current and is then transferred to the pump's
E.P.P.R valve. At this time the E.P.P.R. valve converts
the electric signal to the corresponding control pressure
and sends it to the two pumps, adjusting the pump
discharge volume to the desired level.
A C
B D
FG000580
Figure 54
Reference Reference
Number Number

Page 58
2. Standard Mode
Standard Mode is used for general work. When this
mode is selected it will reduce noise and fuel
consumption in comparison with Power Mode. The
epos controller compares the target engine speed with
the actual engine speed and controls the signal to the
E.P.P.R. valve which in turn varies the pump output
quantity and it is the same method with power volume.
A C
B D
FG000581
Figure 55
Reference Reference
Number Number
3. Economy Mode
Economy mode is used for light loading work. When
this mode is selected, it will reduce noise and fuel
consumption in comparison with standard mode.
Engine torque curve is changed by ECU.
The e-EPOS controller compares the target engine
speed with the actual engine speed and controls the
signal to the E.P.P.R. valve which in turn varies the
pump output quantity and it is the same method with
power volume.
FG013671
Figure 56

Page 59
A C
B D FG013633
Figure 57
Reference Reference
Number Number
4. Operation in case of failure in the control system

(Aux mode operation)
Though it is impossible to control current of the
E.P.P.R (Electromagnetic Proportional Pressure
Reducing) Valve controlling the discharge volume of
pump due to fault in control system, the machine can
be operated in the aux mode.
Upon turning "ON" the aux mode switch, the E.P.P.R
Valve controlling the discharge volume of pump comes
into contact with the aux mode resistor to let current of
a certain value flow. At this time, the discharge volume
of pump follow the control by the pump regulator,
nearly at quantity roughly similar to that in the standard
mode.

Page 60
POWER MODE CONTROL -
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1
27
27 27 27 2 27 26
19 28
23 25
29
3 22
10
24
17
FG007791
Figure 58
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 22 Aux Mode Switch
2 e-EPOS Controller 23 Aux Mode Resistance
E.P.P.R. Valve 25 Battery
10 (Electromagnetic Proportional 26 Battery Relay
Pressure Reducing) Valve
27 Fuse
17 Engine Control Dial
28 Fusible Link
19 Work/Travel Selector Switch
29 Start Switch

Page 61
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
24
(Drive Signal)
2 (Command Signal)
17
FG007793
Figure 59
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller 17 Engine Control Dial
When the engine control dial is moved the output voltage

changes according to the dial position.
The e-EPOS controller converts this output voltage of dial to
digital signal and sends it to the engine controller by CAN
line. According to the dial command, the quantity of fuel
injection is adjusted.

Page 62
ENGINE CONTROL DIAL
1st STEP 7th STEP 13th STEP
CCW ( 10 ) ( 10 ) CW
MECHANICAL MECHANICAL
STOP STOP
(V)
5
4.0V
4
3 2.5V
2
2 1.0V
1
0 SETUP
1ST 2nd 7th 12th 13th
CCW CW
STOP STOP
VIEW ( POTENTIOMETER BOTTOM)

1 2 3
FG000866
Figure 60
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Knob 2 Potentiometer (Variable Resistor)
The engine control dial has a built in potentiometer. When

the control knob is moved the output voltage (through "2
and 3" terminals) will vary from the 5 V supplied from the
e-EPOS controller as shown in the graph.

Page 63
ACCELERATION PEDAL
ACCELERATOR ASS'Y
A 0.5R 3
POSITION B 0.5B 2
SENSOR
C 0.5W 1
IDLE E 0.5G 4
VALIDATION
F 0.5L 5
D 0.850r 6
STROKE 17.5
FOOT PEDAL
DETAIL "A"
4 3
5 2
"A"
6 1
PEDAL SENSOR IDLE VALIDATION SW.

Switch Closed
Switch Open
WHITE BLACK RED BLUE ORANGE GREEN 100%
OV C B A F D E
C.W. +VE C.W. 77 2%
V span
IDLE ON IDLE OFF 64% 4%
Output
Voltage
PIN
DESCRIPTION COLOR (% Vref)
B LOCATION
C A THROTTLE POSITION + V SUPPLY RED
A 13 2%
B THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL BLACK
E
C THROTTLE POSITION RETURN WHITE 0%
0 Datum
F
45.8%
-5.2 C.T
58.3%
48.3% W.O.T
Degrees
D COMMON
-2.7
ORANGE
-11.0
-15.2
D Travel
E OFF IDLE POSITION (NO) GREEN
Angle Tolerance 2%
PEDAL SENSOR F ON IDLE POSITION (NC) BLUE Driver Travel
Sensor Rotation
FG007794
Figure 61
The acceleration pedal has a built in potentiometer. When

the acceleration pedal is pressed output voltage (through "2
and 1" terminals) will vary from the 5V supplied from the e-
EPOS controller as shown in the graph.

Page 64
ENGINE CONTROL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM
1
15A
CN6-1
CN6-2
26
4 26 15A
CN6-9 25
CN6-10
CN1-1
CN7-4 CN4-4 CN1-2
CN7-5 CN4-5 CAN
CN7-6 CN4-6
CN1-8 24
CN1-9 28
3
1-35
1-34
1-33
1-53
1-52
VEHICLE
29
1-51
CONN Py
CN2-15
(CONN.1) 1-03
1-09 17
Px +(5V) CN3-15 1
1-14 CN2-16 CW LOW
SIG CN3-16 2
1-15
GND CN3-17 3
HIGH
1-01 30
1-07
26 15A
1-12
1-13
BR B 10A
1-39
26
27
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
VEHICLE CONN. (ECU CONNECTOR) AMP 040 28P
18 35 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 17
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
36 53
7 11 54 71
(CN7) (CN6)
1 6 72 89
ECU CON.1 (89-PIN)

FG009234
Figure 62
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrumental Panel 26 Battery Relay
3 Engine Controller 27 Fuse
4 e-EPOS Controller 28 Start S/W
17 Engine Control Dial 29 Fusible Link
24 Acceleration Pedal 30 Pressure S/W (Py)
25 Battery 31 Pressure S/W (Px)

Page 65
AUTOMATIC DECELERATION
CONTROL (AUTO IDLE
CONTROL)
E/G
4
3
1
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
5 5
FG013634
Figure 63
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel (Auto Idle Switch) 4 Engine Control Dial
2 e-EPOS Controller 5 Pressure Switch
3 Engine Controller

Page 66
If the machine is idling without the controls being operated
or is waiting for a dump truck the engine speed is
automatically lowered. Once the controls are operated and
work is being started the machine will be restored to the
previous settings. As a result, noise and fuel consumption
will be reduced. This function can be selected or cancelled
through the Auto Idle Selector Switch on the instrument
panel.
The initial setting at start-up is with this switch in the select
position. Approximately 4 seconds after this function is
selected, if all work levers are in the neutral position, the
e-EPOS controller compares the automatic reduction signal
with the signal set by engine control dial. The lower of the
two signals is selected, the e-EPOS controller sends a
signal to the engine controller to control the engine speed.
The neutral status of the machine is detected by the two
pressure switches in the control valve. When the work levers
are in the neutral position, the switch is in the "OFF"
position.

Page 67
ENGINE OVERHEAT
PROTECTION SYSTEM
6 6
E/G
4 4 5
3
31
7
(Pump control signal)
2
1
(E/G overheating signal)
E F
C H C H
(E/G overheating signal) 1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
FG013635
Figure 64
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 6 Control Valve
2 e-EPOS Controller E.P.P.R. Valve
3 Engine Controller 7 (Electromagnetic Proportional
Pressure Reducing Valve)
4 Main Pump
31 Warning Buzzer
5 Aux Pump

Page 68
When the engine coolant temperature increases to over
107°C (225°F), the engine controller detects it from the
sensor mounted in the coolant line and will send a signal to
the e-EPOS controller. The e-EPOS controller sends a
overheat signal to the instrument panel turning "ON" the
warning light and buzzer simultaneously.
Also, the e-EPOS controller returns an overheat signal to
the engine controller and changes power mode to standard
mode. The engine speed is then set to a low speed by the
engine controller.
When coolant temperature falls below 95°C (203°F), normal
operation will resume.

Page 69
POWER BOOST MODE
Operation
16
6 6
11
E/G
4 4 5
3
E F
C H C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
20
18
FG016932
Figure 65
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel 11 Solenoid Valve (Boost)
2 e-EPOS Controller 16 Main Relief Valve
3 Engine Controller Breaker/Boost/Shear Selector
18
4 Main Pump Switch
5 Aux Pump Power Boost Switch (Top of
20
Right Work Lever)
6 Control Valve

Page 70
The Power Boost function is used to temporarily increase
the main relief pressure to enhance excavation ability. When
the breaker/boost/shear selector switch is set to "BOOST"
and the power boost button on the center of the right-hand
work lever (joystick) is pressed during work, the e-EPOS
controller will activate the power boost solenoid valve and
increase the relief valve pressure from 330 - 350 kg/cm2
(4,700 - 5,000 psi). The excavation ability is increased by
approximately 6%.
When the power boost function is in activated, a power
boost symbol appears on the information display department
of instrument panel.

Page 71
Power Boost Control - Circuit Diagram
1
15A
CN6-1
CN6-2
26
2 26 15A 26 20A
CN6-9 25
CN6-10
CN1-1 18
CN7-4 CN4-4 CN1-2
CN7-5 CN4-5 CAN
CN7-6 CN4-6 PST SHEAR PRESS BREAKER
UP
TML 1 0 2
9
24
11 10
3
(C4) 14
CN1-11
13
11
6
CN2-2 (POWER MAX)
16
15
CN1-8 12
CN1-9
6 3
(Center)
(POWER MAX / BREAKER)
20
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
AMP 040 28P
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN7) (CN6)
FG000586
Figure 66
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Instrument Panel Power Boost Switch (Top of
20
2 e-EPOS Controller Right Work Lever)
11 Solenoid Valve (Pressure Up) 24 Battery
Breaker/Boost/Shear Selector 25 Battery Relay
18
Switch 26 Fuse

Page 72
CRUISE CONTROL
Operation
40
6
3
35 36
4 5
15 32 37
38
I II
N
39
24 17
FG009233
Figure 67
Reference Reference
Number Number
3 Engine Controller (ECU) 32 Pressure Switch (Py)
4 Main Pump 35 Cruise Solenoid Valve
5 Aux Pump 36 Forward Solenoid Valve
6 Control Valve 37 Pilot Relay
15 e-EPOS Controller 38 Cruise Switch
17 Engine Control Dial 39 Brake Pedal
24 Acceleration Pedal 40 Travel Motor
Cruise control is used for the purpose of reducing operator’s

fatigue during long travel distances.

Page 73
1. Run Method
F = Forward Travel
Forward/reverse lever is placed at forward position (F),
although accelerator pedal is not stepped on, the unit
can travel. At this time, faster or slower travel speed F
can be obtained by adjusting the engine speed control F

Cruise
N N = Neutral
I II
dial. When engine speed control dial is adjusted to R
Switch
desired speed, the unit will travel at a constant speed. R
If there is a change in the load, a change of travel

speed can occur. When the forward/reverse lever is
Forward/reverse Lever R = Reverse Travel
placed in reverse position, this function will be not
operated. BCS0811L
Figure 68
2. Cancel
When the brake is applied the cruise control will be
canceled.
Bring the forward/reverse lever back to neutral (N), will
also cancel the cruise control.
If the engine is running at an excessive rpm when the
cruise control is canceled, reduce the engine rpm
setting.
NOTE: If the auto idle is "ON" when the cruise control is HAOA690L
canceled, the engine will return to idle in Figure 69
approximately four seconds. When the cruise
control is turned back "ON" the engine will
return to the rpm setting control by the engine
speed control dial.
3. Cruise Operation
Division Run Cancel

Condition 1. Forward/reverse lever is placed 1. When the brake is applied.
in FORWARD.
2. Forward/reverse lever is placed
2. Accelerator pedal is stepped ON. in NEUTRAL or REVERSE.
3. Cruise switch turns "ON".
Forward Relay Operation Cancel
Forward Solenoid Valve Operation Cancel
Cruise Relay (1) Operation Cancel
Cruise Relay (2) Cancel Operation
Cruise Solenoid Valve Operation Cancel
Speed Control Engine Speed Control Dial Accelerator Pedal

Page 74
Cruise Control Circuit
4 3 2
5
11
6 8
12 13
10 9
7
BCS0700L
Figure 70
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Cruise Relay (1)
2 Battery Relay 8 Forward/Reverse Lever Switch
3 Fuse 9 Brake Light Switch
4 Pilot Relay 10 Pressure Switch
5 Forward Run Relay 11 Forward Run Solenoid Valve
6 Cruise Relay (2) 12 Cruise Solenoid Valve
If the cruise switch is turned on during the forward run, the

"15/1 (+)" and "49" terminals of the travel speed control
switch are connected. At this time the current flows from the
battery (1) → battery relay (2) → fuse box (3) → "15/1" (+)
and "49" terminals of the travel speed control switch (8) →
"86" and "85" terminals of cruise relay 1 (7) → pressure
switch (10) → ground. The other side, the current flows from
the fuse box (3) → "30" and "87a" terminals of pilot relay
(4) → "30" and "87" terminals of forward run relay (5) →
"30" and "87" of cruise relay 1 (7) → cruise solenoid valve
(12) and the machine runs as a cruise state. Also the cruise
relay 1 (7) is activated by the current flows from the "87a"
and "30" terminals of cruise relay 2 (6) → diode (13) and it
makes self - activated circuit.
If the forward/reverse lever (8) is place in neutral or reverse
position during the cruise, the forward run relay will be
deactivated and cruise function will be cancelled.
Also if the brake pedal is pressed, the brake light switch (9)
will be turned "ON". At this time, the cruise relay (6) will be
activated and the cruise relay 1 (7) will be deactivated. So
cruise function will be cancelled.

Page 75
AUTOMATIC TRAVEL SPEED
CONTROL
6 6
13
E/G 8
15
4 4 5
3
17 2 19
FG016914
Figure 71
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller 8 Pump Pressure Sensor
3 Engine Controller 13 Solenoid Valve (High speed)
4 Main Pump 15 Travel Motor
6 Control Valve Selector Switch For Automatic
19
7 Pressure Switch (Py Port) Travel

Page 76
If the automatic travel speed control switch is set to the
"OFF" position, the travel motor will run in the I-speed (low
speed) range. If the selector switch is set to the "I" position,
the travel motor will run in the II-speed (high speed) range.
If the selector switch is set to the "II" position, the e-EPOS
controller will monitor the main pump discharge pressure
and automatically select the "ON" - "OFF" status of the II -
speed travel solenoid valve based on the travel load. The
travel speed is changed between the I-speed and the
II-speed mode.
The travel load is monitored by the two pressure sensors in
the discharge lines of the front (upper) and rear (lower)
pumps. When the travel load is high (pressure over 300 kg/
cm2 (4,300 psi) the solenoid valve is turned "OFF" and
I-speed (low) is selected. In the case when the travel load is
low (pressure under 160 kg/cm2 (2,280 psi), the solenoid
valve will be turned "ON" and the II-speed will be selected.
But, if the engine speed control switch dial is set below
approximately 1400 rpm, the travel speed will be set to
I-speed mode.

Page 77
Automatic Travel Speed Control - Circuit
Diagram
15A
26
2 26 15A 26 15A
25
8 CN1-1
+ CN1-2
SIG CN3-1
CN3-2
- 13
(C3) 24
+ CN1-12
SIG CN3-3
CN3-4
- 19
9 3
0
2
CN2-4 I
II
0
I 5
CN2-5 6 II
7 8
17
CN1-8 +(5V) CN3-15 1
CW LOW
CN1-9 SIG CN3-16 2
GND CN3-17 3
HIGH
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN2) (CN1)
(CN5) (CN4) (CN3)
AMP 040 28P
6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(CN7) (CN6)
FG000587
Figure 72
Reference Reference
Number Number
2 e-EPOS Controller Selector Switch For Automatic
19
8 Pressure Sensor (Front Pump) Travel
9 Pressure Sensor (Rear Pump) 24 Battery
13 Solenoid Valve (High speed) 25 Battery Relay
17 Engine Control Dial 26 Fuse

Page 78
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
e-EPOS Controller
The system operation status and malfunction codes can be
checked through the display on top of the e-EPOS controller
box the rear cover behind the operator's seat.
1 2
4 3
FG000588
Figure 73
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Upper Digit Power Monitor (Stays "ON"
2 Lower Digit 4 While Power Is In Normal
Range)
Engine Speed Monitor LED
3 (Flash Interval Increases With
Engine Speed.)
1. Power Monitor
This LED is turned "OFF" when the input voltage to
the e-EPOS controller is below 18.5 ±1 V or above
32.5 ±1 V. Stays "ON" while in normal range.
2. Engine Speed Monitor
This LED light flashes according to the engine speed.
The flashing interval is proportional to the engine
speed.

Page 79
3. Normal Operation Display Readout
Display Readout
Mode Selection Operation Status
Upper Digit Lower Digit
Normal Operation
Power Mode
Power Mode
HAOH340L HAOH370L
Normal Operation
Power Mode Standard Mode
Standard Mode
HAOH350L HAOH370L
Normal Operation
Economy Mode
Economy Mode
FG013637 HAOH370L
4. Communication Monitor
What are shown in the 7-SEGMENT LED are same as
those in the Error Codes.
Error Code Indication Code Fault Location

Communication error in instrument
V201 01
panel.
Communication error in engine
V202 02
controller.

Page 80
WIPER SYSTEM
Wiper Circuit
5 6 7
- 2 3 5 ON 16-10
+
M
8 J1 15-9 16-9
4 4
10 J2 15-10 16-12
5 6 ON
OFF
1 7 J1
J2
11 16-11
12 - + 8
P
6
1 CN15 CN16
9 13
9 2
AMP MIC 13P
CN12
15A 10A 10A
AMP MIC 13P

1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
10 9 8 7 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 9 8 7 6 5
(CN12) (CN13) (CN15) (CN16)

FG004677
Figure 74
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 6 Wiper Controller
2 Battery Relay Combination Switch
7
3 Fusible Link (Wiper & Washer)
4 Fuse Box 8 Window Washer
5 Wiper Motor 9 Wiper Cutoff Switch

Page 81
Wiper operation
Continuous operation
- Operation of wiper motor
Pressing the successive operation switch on the wiper
the wiper controller (6) from HIGH (about 5.5 ± 0.5V) to
LOW (0+0.5V) and also current flows via the "3" terminal of
the wiper controller (6) → the "2" and "4" terminals of the
wiper motor (5) → the "4" terminal of the wiper controller (6)
to run the wiper motor (5) continuously.
- Stop of wiper motor
Pressing again the successive operation switch on the wiper
the wiper controller (6) from LOW (0+0.5V) to HIGH (about
5.5 ±0.5V). As the "5" and "6" terminals of the wiper motor
are connected still that power is supplied to the "6" terminal
of the wiper controller (6),
However, the controller (6) runs the wiper motor
continuously and then rotates the motor reversely by " letting
current flow via the "4" terminal of the wiper controller (6) →
the "2" and "4" terminals of the wiper motor (5) → the "3"
terminal of he wiper controller (6) when the "1" and "6"
terminals of he wiper motor (5) are connected and thus
power voltage is supplied to the "7" terminal of the wiper
controller (6).
The Wiper motor (5) stops reverse revolution when the
contact of a cam switch connected to the "6" terminal of the
wiper motor (5) moves to an insulation area of the cam
plate to disconnect the "5" and "6" terminals of the wiper
motor (5).
When the wiper motor (5) stops, arm and blade connected
to it move to the stop positions of the right pole in the
cabin.
Intermittent operation
- Intermittent 1st (3-second)
Pressing once the Intermittent switch in the switch panel (7)
(6) → the "2" and "4" terminals in the wiper motor (5) →
the "4" terminal in the wiper controller (6) to start the cycle
that wiper stops 3 seconds after every operation.
- Intermittent 2nd (6-second)
Pressing twice the Intermittent switch in the switch panel (7)

Page 82
(6) → the "2" and "4" terminals in the wiper motor (5) → the
"4" terminal in the wiper controller (6) to start the cycle that
wiper stops 6 seconds after every operation.
- Stopping the intermittent action
Pressing three times the Intermittent switch in the switch
panel (7) while the wiper is operating stops the action of the
wiper motor.
NOTE: The wiper system does not work when the wiper
cutoff switch (9) is "ON."

Page 83
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Lighting System Circuit Diagram
5
10
3 11
6
13
1
4 14
4 8 9
19 15 15 19
*
* 21 21
20 20
12
16 17 18 17 16
FG007795
Figure 75

Page 84
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 12 Console
3 Fusible Link 14 Reverse Relay
4 Fuse 15 Head Light
5 Light Switch 16 Rear Combination Light
6 Combination Switch 17 Back Up Light
7 Flasher Unit 18 Registration Plate Light
8 Reverse Switch 19 Front Turn Signal Light
9 Stop Light Pressure SW 20 Side Turn Signal Light
10 Head Light Relay 21 Arm Position Light
11 Hazard Switch
NOTE: * indicates optional items.
Type
Lighting system consists of headlamp, work lights, cabin light
(optional), and S/W devices and relays to control them.
Operation
Connected
Activated Relay/
Switch Position Terminal of Lit Light
Operated Switch
Switch
Illumination Light of Switch/
Position Light of Head Light/
1st "2-3" Terminals - Position LIght of Rear
Combination Light
Light Switch (5) Position Light of Arm
"2-3" Terminals - "
2nd Head Light Relay
"5-6" Terminals Low Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
(10)
"56-56b" Operated Light
Low Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
"56-56a" Operated Light
High Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
"30-56a"
- High Beam of Head Light (2 Ea.)
Combination Terminals
Switch (6) Front Turn Signal Light (L.H.)
"49a-L" Terminals - Side Turn Signal Light (L.H.)
Rear Combination Light (L.H.)
Front Turn Signal Light (R.H.)
"49a-R" Terminals - Side Turn Signal Light (R.H.)
Rear Combination Light (R.H.)
Transmission
Switch (Reverse ON (+) - R Terminals Reverse Relay Back up Light (2 Ea.)
Position) (8)
Stop Light Stop Light of Rear Combination
ON ON -
Switch (9) Light (2 Ea.)

Page 85
OVERLOAD WARNING DEVICE
Overload Warning Device Circuit Diagram
4 1
5
ARS1260L
Figure 76
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 4 e-EPOS Controller
2 Battery Relay 5 OWD Selector Switch
3 Fuse Box 6 Pressure Sensor

Page 86
AUDIO CONTROLLER
Audio Controller Circuit Diagram
ANTENNA
7 8 10
MODULE
2 15
3 Vcc(+5V) 9
11 3 16 (LH) (RH)
15A 1 MICOM
4 13
+ - + -
5 Vcc(+5V)
7
3 14
10A 1 DC/DC 17
CONVERTER 1 2 5 2
6 10
10A 87a 3
30 11
87 4
86 85
4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
(Audio Control Panel) (STEREO)
FG000591
Figure 77
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 7 Audio Control Panel
2 Battery Relay 8 Stereo
3 Fuse Box 9 Speaker
4 Fusible Link 10 Antenna Module
5 Converter 11 Light Switch
6 Stereo Relay
Operations Via Audio Control Panel
Connected Terminal of
Switch Measured values Operations
switch
PWR 4.36 ±0.2V Stereo ON, OFF
1.24 ±0.2V Volume up
"3-4"
0+0.2V Volume down
SCAN 2.49 ±0.2V Frequency selection

Page 87
RAM LOCK DEVICE
Ram Lock Control Circuit
4
12
9
9 3
9 8
13
9
11 7 5 3
9
10
9
9 6
14
FG007796
Figure 78
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Battery 8 Ram Lock Relay
3 Fuse 10 Ram Lock Pressure Switch
4 Parking Brake Switch 11 Ram Lock Solenoid Valve
5 Pilot Relay 12 Console
6 Combination Switch (F/R) 13 Ram Lock Switch
7 Work/Travel Switch 14 e-EPOS Controller

Page 88
Operation
Input Output
Ram Lock
Parking Work/ Ram Lock Combination Ram Lock Console Remark
Pressure
Brake Travel Switch Switch (F/R) Solenoid (Ram Lock
Switch
Switch (4) Switch (7) (13) (6) Valve (11) Light) (12)
(10)
"2-3"
Lock
Terminals - ON
(OFF)
(Parking)
"2-1"
Lock
Terminals - - ON
"2-1" (OFF)
(Lock)
Terminals
(Travel) "2-3"
Release
Terminals - - OFF
(ON)
(Release)
"2-1"
Lock
Terminals - ON
OFF (OFF)
(Lock)
(below
"2-3" 47Bar) Release
Terminals - OFF
(ON)
(Release)
"2-3"
- Lock
Terminals OFF ON
(OFF)
(Work)
"2-1"
ON Lock
Terminals ON ON
(above (OFF)
(Lock)
47Bar)
"2-3"
Release
Terminals ON OFF
(ON)
(Release)
NOTE: "-" is don’t-care condition.

Page 89
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Outline
FG016933
Figure 79
Solid-type heater and air conditioner are installed in the

cover behind the driver's seat.
Temperature of the driver's room is adjusted automatically to
the temperature set by operator.
(Please refer to the Operation Manual for detailed whole
automatic control.
Vent mode selects the direction of discharged air.

Page 90
Outlets by vent modes
Modes
Outlets A A+B B B+C C
Internal and External Filters

Internal and external air purification filters are installed for
the driver's room.
Filters should be cleaned every 500 hours.
If machine operates in an excessively contaminated
environment, filters should be cleaned more frequently and if
necessary, replaced with new ones.
How to check Indoor air filter

1. Press both levers on the left and right side at the top
of the filter installed at the rear of the driver's seat.
FG016045
Figure 80
How to check outdoor air filter

1. Open the front door at the left side of machine and
loosen four marked bolts to remove the cover (1,
Figure 81).
FG016043
Figure 81

Page 91
2. Turn marked knobs (1, Figure 82) at the rear side of
the cabin to open the cover.
3. Remove the filter attached to the cover and clean the
contaminated filter using compressed air.
4. Close the cover, replace the knobs, and secure the
cover to the support with butterfly bolts.
FG016044
Figure 82

Page 92
Air-Conditioning System Layout
10
11
2
5
6
5
7
4
1
6
8
9 FG016941
Figure 83
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Air Conditioner/heater Unit 7 Liquid Hose (1)
2 Condenser 8 Liquid Hose (2)
3 Compressor 9 Ambient Temperature Sensor
4 Receiver Dryer 10 Sun Sensor
5 Discharge Hose 11 Control Panel
6 Suction Hose

Page 93
Air Conditioner/Heater Circuit Diagram
0.5RW
FUSIBLE LINK
LAMP SWITCH
20A STARTER SWITCH

BATTERY RELAY
A/C CONTROL PANEL AIRCON UNIT BATT.

1.25LR CN11-2 42C 24V
LED 1~12 130C CN9-6
0.85LR CN10-8 42D
54E CN9-11 0.5WR
CN10-18 46B
ILL 42B CN9-5 1.25LR
0.85BW
0.85LR
RECEIVER DRIER
BLOWER A/C
42E 46A
RELAY RELAY
COMPRESSOR
168B CN8-10 0.5LG CN10-16 168A
A/C THERMO (LOW) 105B CN9-8 0.5LB CN10-5 105A CN11-4 0.85LW 47C
106B CN8-11 CN10-6 106A 47A 47B

0.5LY
FET
DIODE 4
1.25B CN11-1 99 - +
M
107B CN8-12 0.5LW CN10-1 107A 0.85B 0.85B
BLOWER
108A CN9-13 0.5GrG CN10-2 108B FRE (P1)

INTAKE
109A CN9-12 0.5GrY CN10-20 109B REC (P2) ACTUATOR
M
110A CN9-15 0.5OrR CN10-12 110B DEF (P1)

111A CN9-14 0.5OrW CN10-13 111B VENT (P2)
M
MODE
43A CN9-16 0.5YB CN10-11 43B Vref MODE
ACTUATOR
44A CN9-17 0.5YW CN10-10 44B MODE F/BACK
99 CN9-10 1.25B
112A CN9-1 0.5LgW

g CN10-19 112B WARM (P1)
113A CN9-18 0.5LgB
g CN10-3 113B COOL (P2)
M
114A CN9-3 0.5YR CN10-7 114B Vref MIX Temp. Control
115A CN9-4 0.5YW CN10-9 115B MIX F/BACK ACTUATOR
167C CN9-2 1.25BL CN10-4 167A GND
116A CN8-2 0.5OrB CN10-15 116B

DUCT
SENSOR
45A CN8-1 0.5LgR

g CN10-14 45B
WATER
SENSOR
2
48A CN8-5 0.5LY CN10-17 48B 1 INCAR
SENSOR
SUN LOAD SENSOR
0.5Lg 2 - + 1 CN10 AMP 20P CN11 KET 4P

142A CN8-3
142B 0.5YR
114C 0.85BL 167B 2
49A CN8-4 0.85YG 0.85YG 49B 1 AMBIENT TEMP
SENSOR
CN8 CN9
AMP 18P + 12P
AMP 040-III 20P

KET 4P AMP 070 18P AMP 070 12P
2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
4 3 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
(CN11) (CN10) (CN9) (CN8)

FG000781
Figure 84

Page 94
Air Conditioner/Heater Unit
Air Flow Diagram
External Air Inlet
Internal Air Inlet
External Air
VENT
COOL
DOOR
-INTAKE
DOOR
DEF -MIX
Internal Air
WARM
Evaporator Fan
Heater
FOOT Core
FG016942
Figure 85

Page 95
Door Open by Vent Modes
Mode
Door
Vent Bi-level Foot Def/foot Def
Vent 100 60 0 0 0
Foot 0 40 100 80 60
Def 0 0 0 20 40
Main Components
Internal
Air Sensor
Blower
Motor
Actuator
- Internal/external
Air Exchanger
Internal
Air Filter
FG016943
Figure 86

Page 96
Actuator - Wind direction control: change of discharged air
flow according to selected wind direction mode - Change of
wind direction: Direction changes in the order of VENT→ BI-
LEVEL → FOOT → FOOT/DEF → VENT.
Actuator - Temp control: Change of discharged air
temperature by controlling the position of temp control door.
N P2
c
b
e
P2 P1
b c e
FG001361
Figure 87
Actuator - Wind direction control
Output
Wind Direction Mode Voltage
Terminal
Vent 0.5 ±0.2V
Bi-level 1.3 ±0.2V
c(+): CN10-10
Foot 2.45 ±0.2V
b(-): CN10-4
Foot/def 3.5 ±0.2V
Def 4.5 ±0.2V
Actuator - Temp control
Output
Set Temp Voltage
Terminal
Max cooling c(+): CN10-9 Below 0.4V
Max heating b(-): CN10-4 Above 4.5V

Page 97
Actuator - Internal/external air exchange
N P2
P1
CN10-20 CN10-2
P2 P1
c e
FG001055
Figure 88
Output
Sel mode Output
Terminal
Moving of exchange door
Internal Air P1(+), P2(-)
by selecting external air
Moving of exchange door
External Air P1(-), P2(+)
by selecting internal air
Air Flow Control Module

Air flow is controlled through the control of voltage between
GATE and SOURCE.
DRAIN
(CN10-1)
SOURCE GATE
(CN11-1) (CN10-6)
FG001056
Figure 89
Air flow Output Terminal Output

1st 10 ± 0.5V
2nd 12.5 ± 0.5V
3rd 15 ± 0.5V
4th CN11-2 CN10-1 17.5 ± 0.5V
5th 20.0 ± 0.5V
6th 22.0 ± 0.5V
7th More than 25V
Applied voltage: Standard voltage is 27.5V.

Basically, air flow is set manually.

Page 98
Relay - Blower
Power is supplied to the blower motor when the system is
87 85(-)
turned on.
87
Specifications 86 85
Rated voltage 24V
30
Rated current 20A
30 86(+)
FG001057
Figure 90
Relay - A/C
Power is supplied to the magnetic clutch of the compressor.
Specifications
L S1 (+)
Rated voltage 24V
Rated current 10A
B S2
(-)
FG001058
Figure 91
Duct Sensor
It is inserted in the core of the evaporator to prevent
freezing of the evaporator.
The sensor consist of negative characteristic thermistor that
resistant value increases and decreases when the
temperature rises and falls, respectively.

0 11.36 ± 0.1
2 10.39 ± 0.2
2.5 10.17 ± 0.2 Figure 92
3 9.95 ± 0.2
3.5 9.73 ± 0.2
4 9.52 ± 0.2
5 9.12 ± 0.2
10 7.36 ± 0.15
25 4.02 ± 0.08
30 3.33 ± 0.07

Page 99
Water Temp Sensor
It senses the temperature of coolant water in the heater
core.

-10 55.8 ± 1.7
0 32.9 ± 0.9
15 15.76 ± 0.5
25 10.0 ± 0.3
35 6.5 ± 0.2
Figure 93
Internal Air Temp Sensor

Built in the internal air filter, it senses the internal
temperature.

-15 218.2 ± 7.5
0 97.83 ± 0.9
15 47.12 ± 0.7
25 30.0 ± 0.36
35 19.60 ± 0.3
Figure 94
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

Built at the bottom of the cockpit, it senses the temperature
of external air.

-10 163 ± 4.9
0 96.9 ± 2.9
10 59.4 ± 1.8
20 37.4 ± 1.1
25 30 ± 0.9
30 24.2 ± 0.7 FG001064
Figure 95

Page 100
Sun Sensor
Built beside the socket of spare power, it senses the
quantity of the sun radiation to optimize discharge
temperature and air flow as set by driver.
83.7
OUTPUT VOLTAGE(mV)
76.2
67.7
58.8
46.6
36.0
21.4
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0

LUX(x10,000)
FG001062
Figure 96
Control Panel
Appearance and Terminal Arrangement
A/C OUTSIDE
AUTO A/C
AUTO MAX
TEMP
OFF
SEL MODE
AMP 070 18P AMP 070 12P

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
(CN9) (CN8) FG001063

Figure 97
Refer to "Air Conditioner and Heater" of operation manual.

Page 101
Terminal Terms
CN Term No. Terms CN Term No. Terms

1 Temperature control 1 Water temperature
(warm) sensor
2 Sensor ground 2 Duct sensor
3 Temperature control 3 Sun sensor
Power (5V)
4 Mix feedback 4 Ambient air
temperature sensor
5 Power (KEY "ON") 5 Internal air temperature
CN8 sensor
6 Back-up 6 -
7 - 7 -
8 A/C output (LOW) 8 -
9 - 9 -
10 Ground 10 D.P.S CHECK
CN9 11 Illumination 11 Air flow module (gate)
12 Intake/Recirculate 12 Blower motor (feedback)
(Recirculate)
13 Intake/Recirculate
(Intake)
(VENT)
(DEF.)
Power (5V)
(feedback)
18 Temperature control
(cool)
Control Logic

AUTO Set temperature 1. Automatically adjust room temperature as set and then
next items.
sensor Temperature, Wind direction, Recirculate/Intake, Air flow,
Compressor
sensor 2. Auto mode is released when manually setting any switch
except, Temperature Control switch in Auto mode.
Water temperature sensor
3. Upon the releasing of Auto mode, all of functions
Sun sensor
except selected switch are controlled automatically.

Page 102
Sensor Set temperature 1. In case of sensor failure, following defaults are applied:
compensation
Internal air temperature Internal air temperature sensor: 25°C, Ambient air
sensor temperature sensor: 25°C, Duct sensor: -2°C
Ambient air temperature Temperature control actuator:
sensor
- Set Temperature 17 - 24.5°C: Max cooling, Set
Water temperature sensor Temperature 25 - 32°C: Max heating
Wind direction mode actuator
- VENT: VENT fix, modes other than VENT: Fixed to DEF
* Sun sensor is not compensated.
Max cooling/ Auto Setting 1. Set Temperature 32°C: Max heating
heating
2. Set Temperature 17°C: Max cooling
control
Max Cooling (17 C) Max Heating (32 C)
Temp Control
FULL COOL FULL HOT
Actuator
Air Flow MAX HI AUTO HI
Compressor Forced ON OFF
Intake/Recircle Recircle Intake
Wind Direction Mode VENT FOOT
* Max cooling/heating control is possible only in Auto mode.

Starting Auto mode 1. Prevention of discharge of hot air before discharge
Control of temperature drops enough in hot summer weather
Duct sensor
Cooling
2. Start conditions (AND condition)
(1) A/C on (AUTO or manual)
(2) Temperature sensed by the duct sensor is above
30°C
3. One time control in the cycle of engine OFF → engine
run
4. Initial cooling control is executed when the Auto switch
is "ON" in the manual status (A/C "OFF" and manual
control of air flow) in 5 seconds after engine run.
5. Initial cooling control should be before max cooling.
6. Release condition (OR condition)
(1) A/C "OFF"
(2) Air flow: Manual control
(3) Release is possible with the "OFF" switch but not
allowed within 12 seconds (after Start "ON") while the
system is off using the "OFF" switch and during the
time of initial cooling control.

Page 103
1. Start condition (AND condition)
(1) When wind direction mode is one of the following
modes in the Auto or manual control mode
- BI-LEVEL, FOOT or FOOT/DEF
(2) The Water temperature sensor is stable and the
water temperature < 73°C
(4) Set temperature > Internal air temperature + 3°C
* Air flow falls gradually up to 12 seconds when
operation released.
Water temperature 2. One time control in the cycle of engine OFF → engine
sensor run
Starting Internal air temperature 3. Initial heating control should be before max heating.
control of sensor 4. Air flow is controlled only when the wind direction is in
heating (1) the manual mode and BI-LEVEL, FOOT, or FOOT/DEF
Auto mode
is set.
Set Temperature
5. Control through the water temperature sensor for start.
6. Starting control of heating (2) starts in case of fault of
the water temperature sensor during controlling.
(1) Only air flow is released if it is selected manually.
control of heater.
(4) Water temperature sensor > 73°C.

Page 104
Starting Water temperature 1. Entry condition (AND condition)
control of sensor
(1) Auto Mode
heating (2)
(2) Ambient air temperature < 5°C and difference
sensor
between ambient and internal air temperature ≤ 5°C
(3) Failure of water temperature sensor
sensor
2. Only one time of engine OFF → engine run
Auto mode
3. Starting control of heating is before max heating.
(1) Air flow: Manual selection
control of heater.
(3) Difference between internal and ambient air
temperature>15°C
5. Exceptional case
Starting control of heating is performed only once
during the remaining period if the entry condition is
satisfied within the starting control period that is the
accumulation of initial start times.
(Inclusive of Auto mode "ON" case within the period of
starting control of heater.)
* Air flow should be reduced slowly for up to 12
seconds in case of exceptional entry case.
Duct sensor 1. Function: Magnetic clutch of compressor is turned "ON/
OFF" depending on temperature of the duct sensor to
prevent the freezing of the evaporator with A/C being
"ON."
2. Control pattern.
Compressor 2.0 0.5 C 3.5 0.5 C

control
External temperature 1. Function: Prevention of compressor in winter.
sensor
2. Control pattern.
*Only for Auto mode.

Page 105
Self Diagnosis
How to start self diagnosis
FG001367
Figure 98

Page 106
Error codes
Code Description
E0 Normal
E1 Internal Air Temp Sensor Short
E2 Internal Air Temp Sensor Open
E3 Ambient Air Temp Sensor Short
E4 Ambient Air Temp Sensor Open
E5 Duct Sensor Short
E6 Duct Sensor Open
E7 Sun Sensor Short
E8 Sun Sensor Open
E9 Water Temp Sensor Short
E10 Water Temp Sensor Open
E11 D.P.S OPEN
Position Error of Wind Direction
E12
Actuator.
Position Error of Temp Control
E13
Actuator.
NOTE: Position error means that it fails to move to

designated place in 40 seconds.
Sun sensor displays E8 in case of no sunlight. E1 E1 E2 E2 E3
2 and more fails: Codes concerned blinks twice at a

time.
0.5 0.5
FG001067
Figure 99
Ambient Temp Display

Selection of both the SEL and MODE switch for more than
3 seconds indicates the ambient temp in the set temp
display department.
- Range of temp display: -40 - +60°C
NOTE: Display of ambient temp may be released in the
same way for its entry way.
It returns automatically to default mode 5 seconds
after entering the ambient air temp display mode.

Page 107
Compressor
Categories Specifications Relief Valve
155.3 cc/rev
Output
(9.48 in3)
120 cc (ND-OIL8)
Oil Level
(7.32 in3 (ND-OIL8))
Refrigerant R134a
Rated Voltage 24V
Open: 35 - 42.2 kg/cm2G
(500 - 600 psi) FG001365
Relief Valve
Figure 100
Close: 28.1 kg/cm2G
(400 psi)
Compressor sucks in refrigerant which evaporates completely

in the evaporator and discharges it to the condenser.
Refrigerant undergoes repeated status change in the order
of liquid, gas, and liquid in the freezing cycle, and the
compressor makes evaporated refrigerant a high
temperatures and high-pressured gas to freeze it in the
condenser.
Receiver Dryer
The receiver dryer reserves refrigerant enough to ensure High/Low Pressure Switch
smooth freezing cycle responding immediately to the change
of level in the freezing cycle.
As liquid refrigerant from the condenser may contain
refrigerant gas with bubbles whose presence in the
expansion valve decreases the freezing power excessively, it
separates liquid and gas and sends liquid only to the
expansion valve.
Water in refrigerant shall be eliminated with dryer and
through filter.
FG001366
Figure 101
Volume of refrigerant by model

kgf/cm2G
Model Volume of refrigerant (g)
DX300LC 800±20
DX340LC 800±20 kgf/cm2G
kgf/cm2G
DX420LC 800±20
DX480LC 800±20
FG003921
DX520LC 800±20
Figure 102
DX210W 800±20

Page 108
SP002201
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DX140W/160W/
170W/190W/210W SP002201
1Electrical
Schematic
DX140W/160W/
170W/190W/
210W
Edition 1
Electrical Schematic DX140W/160W/170W/190W/210W SP002201

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Electrical Schematic
DX140W/160W/170W/190W/210W....................... 7

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX170W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
Page 6
DX140W/160W/170W/210W
FG016940
Figure 1

7
8
1Attachments
SP001255
BOOM AND ARM SP001255
Boom and Arm
Edition 1
Boom and Arm SP001255

Page 1
MEMO

Page 2
Table of Contents
Boom and Arm
Front Attachment Pin Specifications .................. 6
Front Attachment - Removal and Installation.... 8
Arm Removal Procedure ............................................... 8
Boom Removal Procedure........................................... 10
Installation .......................................................... 11
Arm Installation Procedure .......................................... 11
Boom Installation Procedure........................................ 11

Page 3
MEMO

Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX210W 5001 and Up

Page 5
FRONT ATTACHMENT PIN
SPECIFICATIONS
The table below has a complete listing of dimensional
specifications for all mounting pins used on the front attachment.
NOTE: Some mounting pins must be drilled and tapped for
lubrication fittings and piping, or may have other
required specifications. Consult DOOSAN After Sales
Service for information on wear tolerances and
replacement limits for mounting pins.
One-Piece Boom
A C E D F
B K H J G
FG009222
Figure 1

A 90 mm (3.54 in) 811 mm (31.93 in)
B 80 mm (3.15 in) 221 mm (8.7 in)
C 80 mm (3.15 in) 792 mm (31.18 in)
D 90 mm (3.54 in) 548 mm (21.57 in)
E 80 mm (3.15 in) 241 mm (9.49 in)
F 80 mm (3.15 in) 274 mm (10.79 in)
G 75 mm (2.95 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
H 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)
I 80 mm (3.15 in) 236 mm (9.29 in)
J 80 mm (3.15 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
K 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)

Page 6
Two-Piece Boom
A D C E G F H
B M J L I
FG009246
Figure 2

A 90 mm (3.54 in) 811 mm (31.93 in)
B 80 mm (3.15 in) 221 mm (8.70 in)
C 100 mm (3.94 in) 791 mm (31.14 in)
D 90 mm (3.54 in) 306 mm (12.05 in)
E 90 mm (3.54 in) 306 mm (12.05 in)
F 90 mm (3.54 in) 548 mm (21.57 in)
G 80 mm (3.15 in) 246 mm (9.69 in)
H 80 mm (3.15 in) 274 mm (10.79 in)
I 71 mm (2.80 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
J 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)
K 80 mm (3.15 in) 227 mm (8.94 in)
L 80 mm (3.15 in) 460 mm (18.11 in)
M 80 mm (3.15 in) 519 mm (20.43 in)

Page 7
FRONT ATTACHMENT -
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DANGER
DOOSAN warns any user, that the removal of the
misuse.
Never remove the counterweight or front attachment
unless the upper structure is in-line with the lower
structure.
IMPORTANT
FG007095
Always break down the front attachment by removing Figure 3
outermost sections first - the bucket before the arm, the
arm before the boom. Reinstallation of the attachment
should begin with the boom and end with the bucket.
Refer to the appropriate Bucket section for its removal and

installation procedure before going onto the initial step of the
front attachment removal or installation procedure.
Arm Removal Procedure
WARNING
This procedure is only intended for routine removal or
replacement of the attachment, while working under
normal, safe operating conditions. In the event of a
major structural collapse of some part of the
attachment, an accident or complete loss of attachment
hydraulic function, DO NOT proceed with attachment
disassembly unless you are completely sure of what
you are doing. Please call your local DOOSAN
distributor or DOOSAN After Sales Service for
assistance. DO NOT allow personnel to stand
underneath a weakened or only partially supported
attachment section. Keep clear of hydraulic lines that
may have fluid escaping at high-pressure - it can cause
severe or even fatal injuries.

Page 8
Complete the bucket end removal procedure by pulling out
the two bucket linkage pins and the bucket cylinder
mounting pin, on the arm. Use an assist crane or hoist to
lift the cylinder and relieve weight on mounting pins.
Park the excavator away from obstructions and all traffic on
clear, flat, level ground. Extend the arm cylinder and crowd
the arm into the boom. Partially retract the boom cylinder so
that the boom is stretched out in front of the excavator, as
low to the ground as possible, with the arm crowded under
the boom.
The tip of the arm point should be lowered to secure
blocking that will safely support the weight of the arm. Place
the blocking directly in front of the excavator and make sure
that it will not be unbalanced with an initial weight load that
is all to one end, under the arm point.
Shut off the engine and release hydraulic system pressure -
move any of the control levers with the engine off to release
pressure built up in the accumulator. Manually vent residual
hydraulic pressure in the tank by moving the lever near the
cap, on top of the reservoir.
WARNING
Secure the swing lock and tag and lock out controls in
the operator's cabin to keep anyone from moving or
inadvertently starting the engine. Restrict access to the
work site while sections of the attachment are in the air,
or while they are being supported by the assist crane.
The safe lifting capacity of the assist crane or hoist that
is used must exceed the weight of the heaviest section
of the attachment, the boom (approximately 1,130 kg
[2,491 lb], not including the weight of accessories or
fixtures).
Before beginning the disassembly of attachment mounting

pins, disconnect the arm cylinder hydraulic hose couplings
and put a clean plug in the end of each one. Use any and
all reasonable precautions necessary to avoid introducing dirt
or other contaminants into the hydraulic system. Wipe down
coupling points before disconnecting hydraulic lines and use
evaporative type solvent spray cleaner. Tag and mark hoses
for reassembly, if necessary.
Place a sling under the arm cylinder (the cylinder used to
extend and retract the attachment arm, pinned to the top of
the boom). Lift the sling so that the weight load on the rod
end of the arm cylinder (pinned to the ears on the inner end
of the arm) is released. Prepare blocking under the arm that
will securely support the weight of the arm and arm cylinder.

Page 9
CAUTION
To make sure that the polished surfaces of cylinder rod
ends will not suffer accidental damage during
disassembly or removal procedures, wrap exposed rod
surfaces (especially those of boom cylinders) with a
protective covering material. Immediately following
disassembly and removal, cylinder rods should always
be fully retracted. This eases handling problems and
also avoids possible damage.
Remove retainers on the end of the mounting pin for the

arm cylinder rod end. Use the assist crane to relieve the
weight load and withdraw the pin. Lower the arm down to
the blocking support for any continued disassembly
procedures.
Boom Removal Procedure

NOTE: Boom removal may be simplified if the shell of the
operator's cabin is taken off the turntable deck first.
Refer to the Operator's Cabin Removal procedure
before continuing, if both components are to be
removed from the excavator.
After the bucket, arm and arm cylinder have been removed,
lower the end of the boom to a stable, secure blocking
support.
Attach the assist crane sling to the body of either boom
cylinder, break the mounting pin connection to the boom by
tapping through the pin from the same side of the boom
and repeat for the opposite cylinder.
Release hydraulic pressure and disconnect line couplings as
previously outlined in the Arm Removal Procedure, observing
the same precautions.
Disconnect wiring for work light assemblies and any other
accessory lines or connections. Locate the sling of the assist
crane near the center of gravity, optimum lift point for the
boom, and use the crane to take pressure off the boom foot
pin. Drive out the pin after disassembling retainers and
carefully lift away the boom.
WARNING
Traveling the excavator, swinging the turntable or
movement over bumps or sloping, uneven surfaces
could all produce loss of control and possible accidents
or injuries, if the turntable deck has been unbalanced by
removal of weight from one end only.
To maintain stability, the counterweight should be removed

whenever the front attachment is taken off the machine.

Page 10
INSTALLATION
Arm Installation Procedure

Reattach the base of the arm cylinder to the mounting point
on top of the boom.
WARNING
Before assembling the front attachment, make sure that
the individual boom, arm and bucket sections are all
compatible and can be used safely for work intended.
Refer to the General Safety Pages, Lift Ratings, Working
Range Diagrams and Weights of Materials sections in
the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Consult your
dealer or DOOSAN After Sales Service for more
information if you have any questions or require more
information.
Begin with the arm securely supported on blocking in front

of the excavator. Pregrease the mounting pin for the rod
end of the arm cylinder and push it through the ears on the
end of the arm. Attach a sling around that mounting pin and
lift the arm with an assist crane until it is in position for the
boom-arm pin connection to be made.
Relieve hydraulic pressure from all points of the system
before any hydraulic lines are opened, then carefully
assemble hydraulic connections to the arm cylinder.
Remove the sling from around the rod end arm cylinder pin,
withdraw the pin and lift the body of the arm cylinder to re-
pin the mounting connection.
Boom Installation Procedure

Before reassembling the attachment, make sure to inspect
all bushings and pivot points of each section. To avoid
damaging the seats, bushings should never be hammered or
chiseled out of their seats.
Installation is otherwise a reversal of the removal procedures.
START-UP PROCEDURES
Once the boom has been serviced, it should be lubricated
as outlined in the initial start-up procedures of the operation
manual. Refer to the appropriate operation and maintenance
manual for unit.

Page 11
Page 12
SP001001
BUCKET SP001001
1Bucket
Edition 1
Bucket SP001001
Page 1
MEMO
Bucket SP001001
Page 2
Table of Contents
Bucket
Bucket Tooth Inspection and Replacement....... 6
Bucket O-ring Replacement ................................ 7
Bucket Attachment, Removal and Reversal ...... 9
Detaching the Bucket..................................................... 9
Attaching the Bucket ...................................................... 9
Reversing the Bucket................................................... 10
Bucket SP001001
Page 3
MEMO
Bucket SP001001
Page 4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
working order.
handling load.
responsibility.
APPLICABLE MODELS

DX140W 5001 and Up
DX160W 5001 and Up
DX190W 5001 and Up
DX210W 5001 and Up
Bucket SP001001
Page 5
BUCKET TOOTH INSPECTION
AND REPLACEMENT
There are several different types of attachment methods for
replaceable bucket teeth. Some of the most common types
are shown in the following drawings.
Bucket teeth are usually replaced in sets but it may
sometimes be necessary to replace individual teeth.
Look for the following indications of wear or damage:
• Lock pins protrude unevenly on one side.
• Lock pins have been worn down so far that they
no longer make full contact through the length of
the pin hole.
• Lock washers or pins show obvious damage or
weakness.
• Wear points on the working surfaces of tooth
points - pits, cracks, chips or craters - are larger
than 8 mm to 10 mm (1/3" to 1/2") across.
HAOC680L
Figure 1
1. On a routine basis, inspect the bucket teeth to make

sure that tooth wear or breakage has not developed.
Do not allow the replaceable bucket teeth to wear
down to the point that the bucket adapter is exposed.
See Figure 1.
2. To replace a tooth (1, Figure 2), use a hammer and
punch to drive the locking pin (2) and lock washer (3) 4
out of the tooth adapter (4). 3
3. Once the worn tooth has been removed, use a putty 1
knife to scrape the adapter as clean as possible. 2 FG004542
4. Slide the new tooth into position and insert the lock Figure 2
washer.
5. Insert the locking pin into the tooth and with a
hammer, drive the pin in until the lock washer seats in
the locking groove.
Bucket SP001001
Page 6
BUCKET O-RING
REPLACEMENT
WARNING
Due to possibility of flying metal objects, always wear
safety helmet, protective gloves and eye protection
when changing pins.
1. Inspect the bucket O-rings on a routine basis. If worn

or damaged, replacement is necessary.
FG007780
Figure 3
2. Roll the old O-ring (1, Figure 4) onto the boss (2)
around the bucket pin (3). Remove the bucket pin and 1 4
2
move the arm or bucket link (4) out of the way.
HAOC710L
Figure 4
3. Remove the old O-ring and temporarily install the new

1 4
O-ring (1, Figure 5) onto the bucket boss (2). Make
2
sure that the O-ring groove on both the bucket link (4)
and boss have been cleaned.
4. Realign the arm or link with the bucket pin hole and
insert the bucket pin (3, Figure 4).
HAOC701L
Figure 5
Bucket SP001001
Page 7
5. Roll the new O-ring (1, Figure 6) into the O-ring
groove. 1
HAOC720L
Figure 6
Bucket SP001001
Page 8
BUCKET ATTACHMENT,
REMOVAL AND REVERSAL
Detaching the Bucket

Park the excavator away from obstructions on clear, flat,
level ground. Lower the bucket carefully to preassembled
blocking on the ground. Brace the bucket so that there is no
load weight on the pin connecting the bucket and arm.
Disassemble the fasteners on the end of the bucket pin and
pull out the pin.
If the pin sticks and resists normal withdrawal, there may be
a load on it. Raise and lower the arm slightly until an
unstressed pin position is located.
CAUTION
Use care pulling out the pin to avoid damaging the dust
seals on either end of the arm.
When the pin has been withdrawn, move the operating

joystick slightly to take weight off the remaining link pin.
Disassemble the link pin end retainers and pull out the pin.
Lift the arm away from the bucket so that the bucket can be
carried away or another end attachment can be put on the
excavator.
Attaching the Bucket

Carefully inspect all parts before reassembling the bucket
linkage. Look for cracks or any other evidence of physical
damage and replace any seal or O-ring that is not in like-
new condition. Prelube linkage pins before reassembly.
Use an old cylinder rod, a long breaker bar or a similar,
relatively thin diameter support bar for making the first
(temporary) pin connection, between the bucket and arm. If
the support bar is straight, the arm can be raised and the
bucket will hang level, allowing direct insertion of the bucket FG004543
ear-attachment linkage pin. Figure 7
Bucket SP001001
Page 9
When the link pin has been installed, withdraw the
temporary support rod from the bucket pin holes, lower and
raise the arm and boom and install the bucket pin.
WARNING
When making linkage alignments, never insert fingers
into pin holes. The attachment or bucket could shift
position and cause a severe injury. Match holes by
visually lining them up. Use the sharp-tipped, soft point FG004543
of a pencil or a similar tool to check for high spots or Figure 8
irregularities.
Reversing the Bucket

Follow instructions for "Detaching the Bucket" and remove
both the bucket and link pins. Rotate the bucket 180° to
change bucket configuration. This procedure is greatly
simplified if some type of rotating or swiveling support can
be used, on the ground underneath the bucket. Follow
instructions for "Bucket Attachment" to replace pins.
WARNING
Bucket curl and dump levers must be used in opposite
directions, after the bucket has been reversed.
Bucket SP001001
Page 10

En SM DX210W K1017314a 1005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

En SM DX210W K1017314a 1005

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En SM DX210W K1017314a 1005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Doosan Infracore

K1017314AE-1 Shop Manual Copyright 2010 Doosan

Trim Out The Label Along

Pub. No. K1017314AE-1

Lower Structure and Chassis

Engine and Drive Train

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

MODEL SERIAL NUMBER RANGE

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Please respect the importance of taking responsibility for

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page -10

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Lifting Capacity Rating Configuration

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

To lift safely while in Digging Mode, the following items must

Always engage the "Digging Mode" control on the Instrument

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Clothing and Personal Protective Items

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Vibration Level Information

Recommendations for Limiting Vibrations

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Mounting and Dismounting

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Precautions When Handling Fluids at

To prevent hot coolant from spurting out, shut down engine,

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Injury from Work Equipment

Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Protection from Falling or Flying Objects

Never attempt to alter or modify any protective structure

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Emergency Exit (ROPS)

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Work Site Precautions

Minimum levels of insurance coverage, work permits or

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Checks Before Starting Engine

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Before Operating Machine

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

When Swinging or Changing Direction

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Never turn the starting switch to the "O" (OFF) position

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Wheel Excavator Safety SP002195

Do not carry out deep digging under the front of the